P. 1
24330220 Maneuvering and Control of Marine Vehicles

# 24330220 Maneuvering and Control of Marine Vehicles

|Views: 20|Likes:

See more
See less

11/04/2011

pdf

text

original

## Sections

• 1 MATH FACTS
• 1.1 Vectors
• 1.1.1 Deﬁnition
• 1.1.2 Vector Magnitude
• 1.1.3 Vector Dot Product
• 1.1.4 Vector Cross Product
• 1.2 Matrices
• 1.2.1 Deﬁnition
• 1.2.2 Multiplying a Vector by a Matrix
• 1.2.3 Multiplying a Matrix by a Matrix
• 1.2.4 Common Matrices
• 1.2.5 Transpose
• 1.2.6 Determinant
• 1.2.7 Inverse
• 1.2.8 Trace
• 1.2.9 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors
• 1.2.10 Modal Decomposition
• 1.2.11 Singular Value
• 1.3 Laplace Transform
• 1.3.1 Deﬁnition
• 1.3.2 Convergence
• 1.3.3 Convolution Theorem
• 1.3.4 Solution of Diﬀerential Equations by Laplace Transform
• 2 KINEMATICS OF MOVING FRAMES
• 2.1 Rotation of Reference Frames
• 2.2 Diﬀerential Rotations
• 2.3 Rate of Change of Euler Angles
• 3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS
• 3.1 Momentum of a Particle
• 3.2 Linear Momentum in a Moving Frame
• 3.3 Example: Mass on a String
• 3.3.1 Moving Frame Aﬃxed to Mass
• 3.3.2 Rotating Frame Attached to Pivot Point
• 3.3.3 Stationary Frame
• 3.4 Angular Momentum
• 3.5 Example: Spinning Book
• 3.5.1 x-axis
• 3.5.2 y-axis
• 3.5.3 z-axis
• 3.6 Parallel Axis Theorem
• 3.7 Basis for Simulation
• 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION
• 4.1 Taylor Series and Hydrodynamic Coeﬃcients
• 4.2 Surface Vessel Linear Model
• 4.3 Stability of the Sway/Yaw System
• 4.4 Basic Rudder Action in the Sway/Yaw Model
• 4.4.1 Adding Yaw Damping through Feedback
• 4.4.2 Heading Control in the Sway/Yaw Model
• 4.5 Response of the Vessel to Step Rudder Input
• 4.5.1 Phase 1: Accelerations Dominate
• 4.5.2 Phase 3: Steady State
• 4.6 Summary of the Linear Maneuvering Model
• 4.7 Stability in the Vertical Plane
• 5 SIMILITUDE
• 5.1 Use of Nondimensional Groups
• 5.2 Common Groups in Marine Engineering
• 5.3 Similitude in Maneuvering
• 5.4 Roll Equation Similitude
• 6 CAPTIVE MEASUREMENTS
• 6.1 Towtank
• 6.2 Rotating Arm Device
• 6.3 Planar-Motion Mechanism
• 7 STANDARD MANEUVERING TESTS
• 7.1 Dieudonn´e Spiral
• 7.2 Zig-Zag Maneuver
• 7.3 Circle Maneuver
• 7.3.1 Drift Angle
• 7.3.2 Speed Loss
• 7.3.3 Heel Angle
• 7.3.4 Heeling in Submarines with Sails
• 8 STREAMLINED BODIES
• 8.1 Nominal Drag Force
• 8.2 Munk Moment
• 8.3 Separation Moment
• 8.4 Net Eﬀects: Aerodynamic Center
• 8.5 Role of Fins in Moving the Aerodynamic Center
• 8.6 Aggregate Eﬀects of Body and Fins
• 9 SLENDER-BODY THEORY
• 9.1 Introduction
• 9.2 Kinematics Following the Fluid
• 9.3 Derivative Following the Fluid
• 9.4 Diﬀerential Force on the Body
• 9.5 Total Force on a Vessel
• 9.6 Total Moment on a Vessel
• 9.7 Relation to Wing Lift
• 9.8 Convention: Hydrodynamic Mass Matrix A
• 10 PRACTICAL LIFT CALCULATIONS
• 10.1 Characteristics of Lift-Producing Mechanisms
• 10.2 Jorgensen’s Formulas
• 10.3 Hoerner’s Data: Notation
• 10.4 Slender-Body Theory vs. Experiment
• 10.5 Slender-Body Approximation for Fin Lift
• 11 FINS AND LIFTING SURFACES
• 11.1 Origin of Lift
• 11.2 Three-Dimensional Eﬀects: Finite Length
• 11.3 Ring Fins
• 12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION
• 12.1 Introduction
• 12.2 Steady Propulsion of Vessels
• 12.2.1 Basic Characteristics
• 12.2.2 Solution for Steady Conditions
• 12.2.3 Engine/Motor Models
• 12.3.1 One-State Model: Yoerger et al
• 12.3.2 Two-State Model: Healey et al
• 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES
• 13.1 Statics
• 13.1.1 Force Balance
• 13.1.2 Critical Angle
• 13.2 Linearized Dynamics
• 13.2.1 Derivation
• 13.2.2 Damped Axial Motion
• 13.3 Cable Strumming
• 13.4 Vehicle Design
• 14 TRANSFER FUNCTIONS & STABILITY
• 14.1 Partial Fractions
• 14.2 Partial Fractions: Unique Poles
• 14.3 Example: Partial Fractions with Unique Real Poles
• 14.4 Partial Fractions: Complex-Conjugate Poles
• 14.5 Example: Partial Fractions with Complex Poles
• 14.6 Stability in Linear Systems
• 14.7 Stability ⇐⇒ Poles in LHP
• 14.8 General Stability
• 15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
• 15.1 Introduction
• 15.1.1 Plants, Inputs, and Outputs
• 15.1.2 The Need for Modeling
• 15.1.3 Nonlinear Control
• 15.2 Representing Linear Systems
• 15.2.1 Standard State-Space Form
• 15.2.2 Converting a State-Space Model into a Transfer Function
• 15.2.3 Converting a Transfer Function into a State-Space Model
• 15.3 PID Controllers
• 15.4 Example: PID Control
• 15.4.1 Proportional Only
• 15.4.2 Proportional-Derivative Only
• 15.4.3 Proportional-Integral-Derivative
• 15.5 Heuristic Tuning
• 15.6 Block Diagrams of Systems
• 15.6.1 Fundamental Feedback Loop
• 15.6.2 Block Diagrams: General Case
• 15.6.3 Primary Transfer Functions
• 16 MODAL ANALYSIS
• 16.1 Introduction
• 16.2 Matrix Exponential
• 16.2.1 Deﬁnition
• 16.2.2 Modal Canonical Form
• 16.2.3 Modal Decomposition of Response
• 16.3 Forced Response and Controllability
• 16.4 Plant Output and Observability
• 17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING
• 17.1 Introduction
• 17.2 Roots of Stability – Nyquist Criterion
• 17.2.1 Mapping Theorem
• 17.2.2 Nyquist Criterion
• 17.2.3 Robustness on the Nyquist Plot
• 17.3 Design for Nominal Performance
• 17.4 Design for Robustness
• 17.5 Robust Performance
• 17.6 Implications of Bode’s Integral
• 17.7 The Recipe for Loopshaping
• 18.1 Introduction
• 18.2 Full-State Feedback
• 18.3 Dynamic Programming
• 18.4 Dynamic Programming and Full-State Feedback
• 18.5 Properties and Use of the LQR
• 19 KALMAN FILTER
• 19.1 Introduction
• 19.2 Problem Statement
• 19.3 Step 1: An Equation for ˙ Σ
• 19.4 Step 2: H as a Function of Σ
• 19.5 Properties of the Solution
• 19.6 Combination of LQR and KF
• 19.7 Proofs of the Intermediate Results
• 19.7.4 Proof of the Separation Principle
• 20 LOOP TRANSFER RECOVERY
• 20.1 Introduction
• 20.2 A Special Property of the LQR Solution
• 20.3 The Loop Transfer Recovery Result
• 20.4 Usage of the Loop Transfer Recovery
• 20.5 Three Lemmas
• 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
• 21.1 Introduction
• 21.2 Visual Output from a Simple Input
• 21.3 Transfer Function Estimation – Sinusoidal Input
• 21.4 Transfer Function Estimation – Broadband Input
• 21.4.1 Fourier Transform of Sampled Data
• 21.4.2 Estimating the Transfer Function
• 21.5 Time-Domain Simulation
• 22.2 Global Positioning System (GPS)
• 23 REFERENCES
• 24 PROBLEMS

# MANEUVERING AND CONTROL

OF MARINE VEHICLES
Michael S. Triantafyllou
Franz S. Hover
Department of Ocean Engineering
Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Cambridge, Massachusetts USA
These notes were developed in the instruction of the MIT graduate subject
13.49: Maneuvering and Control of Surface and Underwater Vehicles. We plan
Maneuvering and Control of Marine Vehicles
Latest Revision: January 11, 2002
c (Michael S. Triantafyllou and Franz S. Hover
Contents
1 MATH FACTS 1
1.1 Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.1 Deﬁnition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.2 Vector Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.3 Vector Dot Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.4 Vector Cross Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.1 Deﬁnition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.2 Multiplying a Vector by a Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.3 Multiplying a Matrix by a Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.4 Common Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.5 Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2.6 Determinant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2.7 Inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.8 Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.9 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.10 Modal Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2.11 Singular Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3 Laplace Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3.1 Deﬁnition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3.2 Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3.3 Convolution Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3.4 Solution of Diﬀerential Equations by Laplace Transform 13
2 KINEMATICS OF MOVING FRAMES 14
2.1 Rotation of Reference Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2 Diﬀerential Rotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3 Rate of Change of Euler Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.4 Dead Reckoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS 20
3.1 Momentum of a Particle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.2 Linear Momentum in a Moving Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.3 Example: Mass on a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.3.1 Moving Frame Aﬃxed to Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3.2 Rotating Frame Attached to Pivot Point . . . . . . . . 23
i
3.3.3 Stationary Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.4 Angular Momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.5 Example: Spinning Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.5.1 x-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.5.2 y-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.5.3 z-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.6 Parallel Axis Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.7 Basis for Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION 30
4.1 Taylor Series and Hydrodynamic Coeﬃcients . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.2 Surface Vessel Linear Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.3 Stability of the Sway/Yaw System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.4 Basic Rudder Action in the Sway/Yaw Model . . . . . . . . . 34
4.4.1 Adding Yaw Damping through Feedback . . . . . . . . 36
4.4.2 Heading Control in the Sway/Yaw Model . . . . . . . . 36
4.5 Response of the Vessel to Step Rudder Input . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.5.1 Phase 1: Accelerations Dominate . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.5.2 Phase 3: Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.6 Summary of the Linear Maneuvering Model . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.7 Stability in the Vertical Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5 SIMILITUDE 40
5.1 Use of Nondimensional Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.2 Common Groups in Marine Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.3 Similitude in Maneuvering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.4 Roll Equation Similitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6 CAPTIVE MEASUREMENTS 48
6.1 Towtank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.2 Rotating Arm Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.3 Planar-Motion Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7 STANDARD MANEUVERING TESTS 52
7.1 Dieudonn´e Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.2 Zig-Zag Maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.3 Circle Maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.3.1 Drift Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ii
7.3.2 Speed Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.3.3 Heel Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.3.4 Heeling in Submarines with Sails . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
8 STREAMLINED BODIES 56
8.1 Nominal Drag Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8.2 Munk Moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8.3 Separation Moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.4 Net Eﬀects: Aerodynamic Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.5 Role of Fins in Moving the Aerodynamic Center . . . . . . . . 58
8.6 Aggregate Eﬀects of Body and Fins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
8.7 Coeﬃcients Z
w
, M
w
, Z
q
, and M
q
for a Slender Body . . . . . . 60
9 SLENDER-BODY THEORY 62
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
9.2 Kinematics Following the Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
9.3 Derivative Following the Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
9.4 Diﬀerential Force on the Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.5 Total Force on a Vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.6 Total Moment on a Vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
9.7 Relation to Wing Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
9.8 Convention: Hydrodynamic Mass Matrix A . . . . . . . . . . 67
10 PRACTICAL LIFT CALCULATIONS 68
10.1 Characteristics of Lift-Producing Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . 68
10.2 Jorgensen’s Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
10.3 Hoerner’s Data: Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
10.4 Slender-Body Theory vs. Experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10.5 Slender-Body Approximation for Fin Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
11 FINS AND LIFTING SURFACES 74
11.1 Origin of Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
11.2 Three-Dimensional Eﬀects: Finite Length . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
11.3 Ring Fins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION 77
12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
12.2 Steady Propulsion of Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
12.2.1 Basic Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
iii
12.2.2 Solution for Steady Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
12.2.3 Engine/Motor Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
12.3 Unsteady Propulsion Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
12.3.1 One-State Model: Yoerger et al. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
12.3.2 Two-State Model: Healey et al. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
13 TOWING OF VEHICLES 85
13.1 Statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
13.1.1 Force Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
13.1.2 Critical Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
13.2 Linearized Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
13.2.1 Derivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
13.2.2 Damped Axial Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
13.3 Cable Strumming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
13.4 Vehicle Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
14 TRANSFER FUNCTIONS & STABILITY 96
14.1 Partial Fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
14.2 Partial Fractions: Unique Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
14.3 Example: Partial Fractions with Unique Real Poles . . . . . . 97
14.4 Partial Fractions: Complex-Conjugate Poles . . . . . . . . . . 98
14.5 Example: Partial Fractions with Complex Poles . . . . . . . . 98
14.6 Stability in Linear Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
14.7 Stability ⇐⇒ Poles in LHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
14.8 General Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS 100
15.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
15.1.1 Plants, Inputs, and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
15.1.2 The Need for Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
15.1.3 Nonlinear Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
15.2 Representing Linear Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
15.2.1 Standard State-Space Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
15.2.2 Converting a State-Space Model into a Transfer Function 102
15.2.3 Converting a Transfer Function into a State-Space Model 102
15.3 PID Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
15.4 Example: PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
15.4.1 Proportional Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
iv
15.4.2 Proportional-Derivative Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
15.4.3 Proportional-Integral-Derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
15.5 Heuristic Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
15.6 Block Diagrams of Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
15.6.1 Fundamental Feedback Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
15.6.2 Block Diagrams: General Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
15.6.3 Primary Transfer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
16 MODAL ANALYSIS 109
16.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
16.2 Matrix Exponential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
16.2.1 Deﬁnition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
16.2.2 Modal Canonical Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
16.2.3 Modal Decomposition of Response . . . . . . . . . . . 110
16.3 Forced Response and Controllability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
16.4 Plant Output and Observability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING 113
17.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
17.2 Roots of Stability – Nyquist Criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
17.2.1 Mapping Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
17.2.2 Nyquist Criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
17.2.3 Robustness on the Nyquist Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
17.3 Design for Nominal Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
17.4 Design for Robustness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
17.5 Robust Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
17.6 Implications of Bode’s Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
17.7 The Recipe for Loopshaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
18.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
18.2 Full-State Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
18.3 Dynamic Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
18.4 Dynamic Programming and Full-State Feedback . . . . . . . . 123
18.5 Properties and Use of the LQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
v
19 KALMAN FILTER 128
19.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
19.2 Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
19.3 Step 1: An Equation for
˙
Σ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
19.4 Step 2: H as a Function of Σ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
19.5 Properties of the Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
19.6 Combination of LQR and KF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
19.7 Proofs of the Intermediate Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
19.7.1 Proof that E(e
T
We) = trace(ΣW) . . . . . . . . . . . 134
19.7.2 Proof that

∂H
trace(−ΛHCΣ) = −Λ
T
ΣC
T
. . . . . . . 135
19.7.3 Proof that

∂H
trace(−ΛΣC
T
H
T
) = −ΛΣC
T
. . . . . . 135
19.7.4 Proof of the Separation Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
20 LOOP TRANSFER RECOVERY 137
20.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
20.2 A Special Property of the LQR Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
20.3 The Loop Transfer Recovery Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
20.4 Usage of the Loop Transfer Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
20.5 Three Lemmas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 143
21.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
21.2 Visual Output from a Simple Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
21.3 Transfer Function Estimation – Sinusoidal Input . . . . . . . . 145
21.4 Transfer Function Estimation – Broadband Input . . . . . . . 146
21.4.1 Fourier Transform of Sampled Data . . . . . . . . . . . 147
21.4.2 Estimating the Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
21.5 Time-Domain Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
22.1 Acoustic Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
22.2 Global Positioning System (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
23 REFERENCES 159
24 PROBLEMS 163
vi
1
1 MATH FACTS
1.1 Vectors
1.1.1 Deﬁnition
We use the overhead arrow to denote a column vector, i.e., a number with a
direction. For example, in three-space, we write
a =

2
1
7

.
The elements of a vector have a graphical interpretation, which is particularly
easy to see in two or three dimensions.
2
x
y
1
7
z
a
a +

b = c

2
1
7

+

3
3
2

=

5
4
9

.
2 1 MATH FACTS
2. Scalar multiplication is pointwise.
−2

2
1
7

=

−4
−2
−14

.
1.1.2 Vector Magnitude
The total length of a vector of dimension m, its Euclidean norm, is given by
[[x[[ =

m
¸
i=1
x
2
i
;
this scalar is commonly used to normalize a vector to length one.
1.1.3 Vector Dot Product
The dot product of two vectors is the sum of the products of the elements:
x y = x
T
y =
m
¸
i=1
x
i
y
i
.
The dot product also satisﬁes
x y = [[x[[[[y[[ cos θ,
where θ is the angle between the vectors.
1.1.4 Vector Cross Product
The cross product of two three-dimensional vectors is another vector, xy = z,
whose
1. direction is normal to the plane formed by the two vectors,
2. direction is given by the right-hand rule, rotating from x to y,
1.2 Matrices 3
3. magnitude is the area of the parallelogram formed by the two vectors –
the cross product of two parallel vectors is zero – and
4. (signed) magnitude is equal to [[x[[[[y[[ sin θ, where θ is the angle between
the two vectors, measured from x to y.
The schoolbook formula is
x y =

x
2
y
3
−x
3
y
2
x
3
y
1
−x
1
y
3
x
1
y
2
−x
2
y
1

.
1.2 Matrices
1.2.1 Deﬁnition
A matrix, or array, is equivalent to a set of row vectors, arranged side by side,
say
A = [a

b] =

2 3
1 3
7 2
¸
¸
¸ .
This matrix has three rows (m = 3) and two columns (n = 2); a vector is
a special case of a matrix with one column. Matrices, like vectors, permit
pointwise addition and scalar multiplication. We usually use an upper-case
symbol to denote a matrix.
1.2.2 Multiplying a Vector by a Matrix
If A
ij
denotes the element of matrix A in the i’th row and the j’th column,
then the multiplication c = Av is constructed as:
c
i
= A
i1
v
1
+ A
i2
v
2
+ + A
in
v
n
=
n
¸
j=1
A
ij
v
j
,
where n is the number of columns in A. c will have as many columns as
A has rows (m). Note that this multiplication is well-deﬁned only if v has
4 1 MATH FACTS
as many rows as A has columns; they have consistent inner dimension n.
The product vA would be well-posed only if A had one row, and the proper
number of columns. There is another important interpretation of this vector
multiplication: Let the subscript : indicate all rows, so that each A
:j
is the
j’th column vector. Then
c = Av = A
:1
v
1
+ A
:2
v
2
+ + A
:n
v
n
.
We are multiplying column vectors of A by the scalar elements of v.
1.2.3 Multiplying a Matrix by a Matrix
The multiplication C = AB is equivalent to a side-by-side arrangement of
column vectors C
:j
= AB
:j
, so that
C = AB = [AB
:1
AB
:2
AB
:k
],
where k is the number of columns in matrix B. The same inner dimension
condition applies as noted above: the number of columns in A must equal the
number of rows in B. Matrix multiplication is:
1. Associative. (AB)C = A(BC).
2. Distributive. A(B + C) = AB + AC, (B + C)A = BA + CA.
3. NOT Commutative. AB = BA, except in special cases.
1.2.4 Common Matrices
Identity . The identity matrix is usually denoted I, and comprises a square
matrix with ones on the diagonal, and zeros elsewhere, e.g.,
I
3×3
=

1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
¸
¸
¸ .
The identity always satisﬁes AI
n×n
= I
m×m
A = A.
1.2 Matrices 5
Diagonal Matrices . A diagonal matrix is square, and has all zeros oﬀ the
diagonal. For instance, the following is a diagonal matrix:
A =

4 0 0
0 −2 0
0 0 3
¸
¸
¸ .
The product of a diagonal matrix with another diagonal matrix is diagonal,
and in this case the operation is commutative.
1.2.5 Transpose
The transpose of a vector or matrix, indicated by a T superscript results
from simply swapping the row-column indices of each entry; it is equivalent to
“ﬂipping” the vector or matrix around the diagonal line. For example,
a =

1
2
3

−→a
T
= ¦1 2 3¦
A =

1 2
4 5
8 9
¸
¸
¸ −→A
T
=
¸
1 4 8
2 5 9
¸
.
A very useful property of the transpose is
(AB)
T
= B
T
A
T
.
1.2.6 Determinant
The determinant of a square matrix A is a scalar equal to the volume of the
parallelepiped enclosed by the constituent vectors. The two-dimensional case
is particularly easy to remember, and illustrates the principle of volume:
det(A) = A
11
A
22
−A
21
A
12
det
¸
1 −1
1 1
¸
= 1 + 1 = 2.
6 1 MATH FACTS
1 -1
A
:2
A
:1
Area = det(A) = 2
y
x
In higher dimensions, the determinant is more complicated to compute. The
general formula allows one to pick a row k, perhaps the one containing the
most zeros, and apply
det(A) =
j=n
¸
j=1
A
kj
(−1)
k+j

kj
,
where ∆
kj
is the determinant of the sub-matrix formed by neglecting the k’th
row and the j’th column. The formula is symmetric, in the sense that one
could also target the k’th column:
det(A) =
j=n
¸
j=1
A
jk
(−1)
k+j

jk
.
If the determinant of a matrix is zero, then the matrix is said to be singular –
there is no volume, and this results from the fact that the constituent vectors
do not span the matrix dimension. For instance, in two dimensions, a singular
matrix has the vectors colinear; in three dimensions, a singular matrix has
all its vectors lying in a (two-dimensional) plane. Note also that det(A) =
det(A
T
). If det(A) = 0, then the matrix is said to be nonsingular.
1.2.7 Inverse
The inverse of a square matrix A, denoted A
−1
, satisﬁes AA
−1
= A
−1
A = I.
Its computation requires the determinant above, and the following deﬁnition
of the n n adjoint matrix:

(−1)
1+1

11
(−1)
1+n

1n

(−1)
n+1

n1
(−1)
n+n

nn
.
¸
¸
¸
T
.
1.2 Matrices 7
Once this computation is made, the inverse follows from
A
−1
=
det(A)
.
If A is singular, i.e., det(A) = 0, then the inverse does not exist. The inverse
ﬁnds common application in solving systems of linear equations such as
Ax =

b −→x = A
−1

b.
1.2.8 Trace
The trace of a matrix is simply the sum of the diagonals:
tr(A) =
n
¸
i=1
A
ii
.
1.2.9 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors
A typical eigenvalue problem is stated as
Ax = λx,
where A is an n n matrix, x is a column vector with n elements, and λ is
a scalar. We ask for what nonzero vectors x (right eigenvectors), and scalars
λ (eigenvalues) will the equation be satisﬁed. Since the above is equivalent to
(A−λI)x =

0, it is clear that det(A−λI) = 0. This observation leads to the
solutions for λ; here is an example for the two-dimensional case:
A =
¸
4 −5
2 −3
¸
−→
A −λI =
¸
4 −λ −5
2 −3 −λ
¸
−→
det(A −λI) = (4 −λ)(−3 −λ) + 10
= λ
2
−λ −2
= (λ + 1)(λ −2).
8 1 MATH FACTS
Thus, A has two eigenvalues, λ
1
= −1 and λ
2
= 2. Each is associated with a
right eigenvector x. In this example,
(A −λ
1
I)x
1
=

0 −→
¸
5 −5
2 −2
¸
x
1
=

0 −→
x
1
=

2/2,

2/2
¸
T
.
(A −λ
2
I)x
2
=

0 −→
¸
2 −5
2 −5
¸
x
2
=

0 −→
x
2
=

5

29/29, 2

29/29
¸
T
.
Eigenvectors have arbitrary magnitude and sign; they are often normalized to
have unity magnitude, and positive ﬁrst element (as above). A set of n eigen-
vectors is always linearly independent. The condition that rank(A − λ
i
I) =
rank(A)−1 indicates that there is only one eigenvector for the eigenvalue λ
i
. If
the left-hand side is less than this, then there are multiple unique eigenvectors
that go with λ
i
.
The above discussion relates only the right eigenvectors, generated from the
equation Ax = λx. Left eigenvectors, also useful for many problems, pertain
to the transpose of A: A
T
y = λy. A and A
T
share the same eigenvalues λ,
since they share the same determinant. Example:
(A
T
−λ
1
I)y
1
=

0 −→
¸
5 2
−5 −2
¸
y
1
=

0 −→
y
1
=

2

29/29, −5

29/29
¸
T
.
(A
T
−λ
2
I)y
2
=

0 −→
¸
2 2
−5 −5
¸
y
2
=

0 −→
y
2
=

2/2, −

2/2
¸
T
.
1.2 Matrices 9
1.2.10 Modal Decomposition
The right and left eigenvectors of a particular eigenvalue have unity dot prod-
uct, that is x
T
i
y
i
= 1, with the normalization noted above. The dot product
of a left eigenvector with the right eigenvector of a diﬀerent eigenvalue is zero.
Thus, if
X = [x
1
x
n
] , and
Y = [y
1
y
n
] ,
then we have
Y
T
X = I, or
Y
T
= X
−1
.
Next, construct a diagonal matrix of eigenvalues:
Λ =

λ
1
0

0 λ
n
¸
¸
¸ ;
it follows that
AV = V Λ −→
A = V ΛW
T
=
n
¸
i=1
λ
i
v
i
w
T
i
.
Hence A can be written as a sum of modal components.
1
1.2.11 Singular Value
Let G(s) be an mn, possibly complex matrix. The singular value decompo-
sition (SVD) computes three matrices satisfying
1
By carrying out successive multiplications, it can be shown that A
k
has its eigenvalues
at λ
k
i
, and keeps the same eigenvectors as A.
10 1 MATH FACTS
G = UΣV

,
where U is mm, Σ is mn, and V is n n. The star notation indicates a
complex-conjugate transpose. The matrix Σ is diagonal, with the form
Σ =

σ
1
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 σ
p
0
0 0 0 0
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
,
where p = min(m, n). Each nonzero entry on the diagonal is a real, positive
singular value, ordered such that σ
1
> σ
2
> σ
p
. The notation is common
that σ
1
= σ, the maximum singular value, and σ
p
= σ, the minimum singular
value. The auxiliary matrices U and V are unitary, i.e., they satisfy X

=
X
−1
. Like eigenvalues, the singular values of G are related to projections. σ
i
represents the Euclidean size of the matrix G along the i’th singular vector:
σ = max
||x||=1
[[Gx[[
σ = min
||x||=1
[[Gx[[.
Other properties of the singular value include:
• σ(AB) ≤ σ(A)σ(B).
• σ(A) =

λ
max
(A

A).
• σ(A) =

λ
min
(A

A).
• σ(A) = 1/σ(A
−1
).
• σ(A) = 1/σ(A
−1
).
1.3 Laplace Transform 11
1.3 Laplace Transform
1.3.1 Deﬁnition
The Laplace transform converts time-domain signals into a frequency-domain
equivalent. The signal y(t) has transform Y (s) deﬁned as follows:
Y (s) = L(y(t)) =

0
y(τ)e
−sτ
dτ,
where s is an unspeciﬁed complex number; Y (s) is considered to be complex as
a result. Note that the Laplace transform is linear, and so it is is distributive:
L(x(t) + y(t)) = L(x(t)) + L(y(t)) will hold throughout. The following table
gives a list of some useful transform pairs and other properties, for reference.
The last two properties are of special importance: for control system design,
the diﬀerentiation of a signal is equivalent to multiplication of its Laplace
transform by s; integration of a signal is equivalent to division by s. The other
terms that arise will cancel if y(0) = 0, or if y(0) is ﬁnite, so they are usually
ignored.
1.3.2 Convergence
We note ﬁrst that the value of s aﬀects the convergence of the integral. For
instance, if y(t) = e
t
, then the integral converges only for Re(s) > 1, since
the integrand is e
1−s
in this case. Convergence issues are not a problem for
evaluation of the Laplace transform, however, because of analytic continuation.
This result from complex analysis holds that if two complex functions are
equal on some arc (or line) in the complex plane, then they are equivalent
everywhere. This fact allows us to always pick a value of s for which the
integral above converges, and then by extension infer the existence of the
general transform.
1.3.3 Convolution Theorem
One of the main points of the Laplace transform is the ease of dealing with
dynamic systems. As with the Fourier transform, the convolution of two sig-
nals in the time domain corresponds with the multiplication of signals in the
frequency domain. Consider a system whose impulse response is g(t), being
12 1 MATH FACTS
y(t) ←→ Y (s)
(Impulse) δ(t) ←→ 1
(Unit Step) 1(t) ←→
1
s
(Unit Ramp) t ←→
1
s
2
e
−αt
←→
1
s + α
sin ωt ←→
ω
s
2
+ ω
2
cos ωt ←→
s
s
2
+ ω
2
e
−αt
sin ωt ←→
ω
(s + α)
2
+ ω
2
e
−αt
cos ωt ←→
s + α
(s + α)
2
+ ω
2
1
b −a
(e
−at
−e
−bt
) ←→
1
(s + a)(s + b)
1
ab
¸
1 +
1
a −b
(be
−at
−ae
−bt
)

←→
1
s(s + a)(s + b)
ω
n

1 −ζ
2
e
−ζωnt
sin ω
n

1 −ζ
2
t ←→
ω
2
n
s
2
+ 2ζω
n
s + ω
2
n
1 −
1

1 −ζ
2
e
−ζωnt
sin

ω
n

1 −ζ
2
t + φ

←→
ω
2
n
s(s
2
+ 2ζω
n
s + ω
2
n
)

φ = tan
−1

1 −ζ
2
ζ

(Pure Delay) y(t −τ)1(t −τ) ←→ Y (s)e
−sτ
(Time Derivative)
dy(t)
dt
←→ sY (s) −y(0)
(Time Integral)

t
0
y(τ)dτ ←→
Y (s)
s
+

0+
0−
y(t)dt
s
1.3 Laplace Transform 13
driven by an input signal x(t); the output is y(t) = g(t)∗x(t). The Convolution
Theorem is
y(t) =

t
0
g(t −τ)x(τ)dτ ⇐⇒Y (s) = G(s)X(s).
Here’s the proof given by Siebert:
Y (s) =

0
y(t)e
−st
dt
=

0
¸
t
0
g(t −τ) x(τ) dτ

e
−st
dt
=

0
¸

0
g(t −τ) 1(t −τ) x(τ) dτ

e
−st
dt
=

0
x(τ)
¸

0
g(t −τ) 1(t −τ) e
−st
dt

=

0
x(τ) G(s)e
−sτ

= G(s)X(s)
When g(t) is the impulse response of a dynamic system, then y(t) represents
the output of this system when it is driven by the external signal x(t).
1.3.4 Solution of Diﬀerential Equations by Laplace Transform
The Convolution Theorem allows one to solve (linear time-invariant) diﬀeren-
tial equations in the following way:
1. Transform the system impulse response g(t) into G(s), and the input
signal x(t) into X(s), using the transform pairs.
2. Perform the multiplication in the Laplace domain to ﬁnd Y (s).
3. Ignoring the eﬀects of pure time delays, break Y (s) into partial fractions
with no powers of s greater than 2 in the denominator.
4. Generate the time-domain response from the simple transform pairs.
Apply time delay as necessary.
Speciﬁc examples of this procedure are given in a later section on transfer
functions.
14 2 KINEMATICS OF MOVING FRAMES
2 KINEMATICS OF MOVING FRAMES
2.1 Rotation of Reference Frames
We say that a vector expressed in the inertial frame has coordinates x, and
in a body-reference frame x
b
. For the moment, we assume that the origins of
these frames are coincident, but that the body frame has a diﬀerent angular
orientation. The angular orientation has several well-known descriptions, in-
cluding the Euler angles and the Euler parameters (quaternions). The former
method involves successive rotations about the principle axes, and has a solid
link with the intuitive notions of roll, pitch, and yaw. Quaternions present a
more elegant and robust method, but with more abstraction. We will develop
the equations of motion using Euler angles.
Tape three pencils together to form a right-handed three-dimensional coordi-
nate system. Successively rotating the system about three of its own principle
axes, it is easy to see that any possible orientation can be achieved. For ex-
ample, consider the sequence of [yaw, pitch, roll]: starting from an orientation
identical to some inertial frame, rotate the movable system about its yaw axis,
to say, there are many valid Euler angle rotation sets possible to reach a given
orientation; some of them might use the same axis twice.
x
x’
y’=y’’
y
x’’=x’’’
z’’
z’’’
y’’’
z=z’
Figure 1: Successive application of three Euler angles transforms the original
coordinate frame into an arbitrary orientation.
A ﬁrst question is: what is the coordinate of a point ﬁxed in inertial space,
referenced to a rotated body frame? The transformation takes the form of
a 33 matrix, which we now derive through successive rotations of the three
2.1 Rotation of Reference Frames 15
Euler angles. Before the ﬁrst rotation, the body-referenced coordinate matches
that of the inertial frame: x
0
b
= x. Now rotate the movable frame yaw axis
(z) through an angle φ. We have
x
1
b
=

cos φ sin φ 0
−sin φ cos φ 0
0 0 1
¸
¸
¸x
0
b
= R(φ)x
0
b
. (1)
Rotation about the z-axis does not change the z-coordinate of the point; the
other axes are modiﬁed according to basic trigonometry. Now apply the second
rotation, pitch about the new y-axis by the angle θ:
x
2
b
=

cos θ 0 −sin θ
0 1 0
sin θ 0 cos θ
¸
¸
¸x
1
b
= R(θ)x
1
b
. (2)
Finally, rotate the body system an angle ψ about its newest x-axis:
x
3
b
=

1 0 0
0 cos ψ sin ψ0
0 −sin ψ cos ψ
¸
¸
¸x
2
b
= R(ψ)x
2
b
. (3)
This represents the location of the original point, in the fully-transformed
body-reference frame, i.e., x
3
b
. We will use the notation x
b
3
b
from
here on. The three independent rotations can be cascaded through matrix
multiplication (order matters!):
x
b
= R(ψ)R(θ)R(φ)x (4)
=

cθcφ cθsφ −sθ
−cψsψ + sψsθcφ cψcφ + sψsθsφ sψcθ
sψsφ + cψsθcφ −sψcφ + cψsθsψ cψcθ
¸
¸
¸x
= R(φ, θ, ψ)x.
All of the transformation matrices, including R(φ, θ, ψ), are orthonormal: their
inverse is equivalent to their transpose. Additionally, we should note that the
rotation matrix R is universal to all representations of orientation, including
quaternions. The roles of the trigonometric functions, as written, are speciﬁc
to Euler angles, and to the order in which we performed the rotations.
In the case that the movable (body) reference frame has a diﬀerent origin than
the inertial frame, we have
16 2 KINEMATICS OF MOVING FRAMES
x = x
0
+ R
T
x
b
, (5)
where x
0
is the location of the moving origin, expressed in inertial coordinates.
2.2 Diﬀerential Rotations
Now consider small rotations from one frame to another; using the small angle
assumption to ignore higher-order terms gives
R ·

1 δφ −δθ
−δφ 1 δψ
δθ −δψ 1
¸
¸
¸ (6)
=

0 δφ −δθ
−δφ 0 δψ
δθ −δψ 0
¸
¸
¸ + I
3×3
.
R comprises the identity plus a part equal to the (negative) cross-product
operator [−δ

E], where δ

E = [δψ, δθ, δφ], the vector of Euler angles ordered
with the axes [x, y, z]. Small rotations are completely decoupled; the order of
the small rotations does not matter. Since R
−1
= R
T
, we have also R
−1
=
I
3×3
+ δ

E;
x
b
= x −δ

E x (7)
x = x
b
+ δ

E x
b
. (8)
We now ﬁx the point of interest on the body, instead of in inertial space,
calling its location in the body frame r (radius). The diﬀerential rotations
occur over a time step δt, so that we can write the location of the point before
and after the rotation, with respect to the ﬁrst frame as follows:
x(t) = r (9)
x(t + δt) = R
T
r = r + δ

E r.
Dividing by the diﬀerential time step gives
2.2 Diﬀerential Rotations 17
δx
δt
=
δ

E
δt
r (10)
= ω r,
where the rotation rate vector ω · d

E/dt because the Euler angles for this
inﬁnitesimal rotation are small and decoupled. This same cross-product rela-
tionship can be derived in the second frame as well:
x
b
(t) = Rr = r −δ

E r (11)
x
b
(t + δt) = r.
such that
δx
b
δt
=
δ

E
δt
r (12)
= ω r,
On a rotating body whose origin point is ﬁxed, the time rate of change of a
constant radius vector is the cross-product of the rotation rate vector ω and
the radius vector itself. The resultant derivative is in the moving body frame.
In the case that the radius vector changes with respect to the body frame, we
dx
b
dt
= ω r +
∂r
∂t
. (13)
Finally, allowing the origin to move as well gives
dx
b
dt
= ω r +
∂r
∂t
+
dx
o
dt
. (14)
This result is often written in terms of body-referenced velocity v:
v = ω r +
∂r
∂t
+v
o
, (15)
where v
o
is the body-referenced velocity of the origin. The total velocity of the
particle is equal to the velocity of the reference frame origin, plus a component
18 2 KINEMATICS OF MOVING FRAMES
due to rotation of this frame. The velocity equation can be generalized to any
body-referenced vector

f:
d

f
dt
=
∂f
∂t
+ ω

f. (16)
2.3 Rate of Change of Euler Angles
Only for the case of inﬁnitesimal Euler angles is it true that the time rate
of change of the Euler angles equals the body-referenced rotation rate. For
example, with the sequence [yaw,pitch,roll], the Euler yaw angle (applied ﬁrst)
is deﬁnitely not about the ﬁnal body yaw axis; the pitch and roll rotations
moved the axis. An important part of any simulation is the evolution of the
Euler angles. Since the physics determine rotation rate ω, we seek a mapping
ω →d

E/dt.
The idea is to consider small changes in each Euler angle, and determine the
eﬀects on the rotation vector. The ﬁrst Euler angle undergoes two additional
rotations, the second angle one rotation, and the ﬁnal Euler angle no additional
rotations:
ω = R(ψ)R(θ)

0
0

dt

+ R(ψ)

0

dt
0

+

dt
0
0

(17)
=

1 0 −sin θ
0 cos ψ sin ψ cos θ
0 −sin ψ cos ψ cos θ
¸
¸
¸

dt

dt

dt

.
Taking the inverse gives
d

E
dt
=

1 sin ψ tan θ cos ψ tan θ
0 cos ψ −sin ψ
0 sin ψ/ cos θ cos ψ/ cos θ
¸
¸
¸ ω (18)
= Γ(

E) ω.
Singularities exist in Γ at θ = ¦π/2, 3π/2¦, because of the division by cos θ, and
hence this otherwise useful equation for propagating the angular orientation of
a body fails when the vehicle rotates about the intermediate y-axis by ninety
degrees. In applications where this is a real possibility, for example in orbiting
satellites and robotic arms, quaternions provide a seamless mapping. For most
ocean vessels, the singularity is acceptable, as long as it is not on the yaw axis!
The measurement of heading and longitudinal speed gives rise to one of the
longitudinal speed over ground is U, and the estimated heading is φ, ignoring
the lateral velocity leads to the evolution of Cartesian coordinates:
˙ x = U cos φ
˙ y = U sin φ.
Needless to say, currents and vehicle sideslip will cause this to be in error.
Nonetheless, some of the most remarkable feats of navigation in history have
20 3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS
3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS
We consider the rigid body dynamics with a coordinate system aﬃxed on the
body. A common frame for ships, submarines, and other marine vehicles has
the body-referenced x-axis forward, y-axis to port (left), and z-axis up. This
will be the sense of our body-referenced coordinate system here.
3.1 Momentum of a Particle
Since the body moves with respect to an inertial frame, dynamics expressed in
the body-referenced frame need extra attention. First, linear momentum for
a particle obeys the equality

F =
d
dt
(mv) (19)
A rigid body consists of a large number of these small particles, which can be
indexed. The summations we use below can be generalized to integrals quite
easily. We have

F
i
+

R
i
=
d
dt
(m
i
v
i
) , (20)
where

F
i
is the external force acting on the particle and

R
i
is the net force
exerted by all the other surrounding particles (internal forces). Since the
collection of particles is not driven apart by the internal forces, we must have
equal and opposite internal forces such that
N
¸
i=1

R
i
= 0. (21)
Then summing up all the particle momentum equations gives
N
¸
i=1

F
i
=
N
¸
i=1
d
dt
(m
i
v
i
) . (22)
Note that the particle velocities are not independent, because the particles are
rigidly attached.
Now consider a body reference frame, with origin 0, in which the particle i
resides at body-referenced radius vector r; the body translates and rotates,
and we now consider how the momentum equation depends on this motion.
3.2 Linear Momentum in a Moving Frame 21
z, w,
y, v,
x, u,
θ
φ
ψ
Figure 2: Convention for the body-referenced coordinate system on a vessel:
x is forward, y is sway to the left, and z is heave upwards. Looking forward
from the vessel bridge, roll about the x axis is positive counterclockwise, pitch
about the y-axis is positive bow-down, and yaw about the z-axis is positive
turning left.
3.2 Linear Momentum in a Moving Frame
The expression for total velocity may be inserted into the summed linear mo-
mentum equation to give
N
¸
i=1

F
i
=
N
¸
i=1
d
dt
(m
i
(v
o
+ ω r
i
)) (23)
= m
∂v
o
∂t
+
d
dt
¸
ω
N
¸
i=1
m
i
r
i
¸
,
where m =
¸
N
i=1
m
i
, and v
i
= v
o
+ ωr
i
. Further deﬁning the center of gravity
vector r
G
such that
mr
G
=
N
¸
i=1
m
i
r
i
, (24)
we have
N
¸
i=1

F
i
= m
∂v
o
∂t
+ m
d
dt
( ω r
G
). (25)
Using the expansion for total derivative again, the complete vector equation
in body coordinates is
22 3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS

F =
¸
i=1
N = m

∂v
o
∂t
+ ω v
o
+

dt
r
G
+ ω ( ω r
G
)

. (26)
Now we list some conventions that will be used from here on:
v
o
= ¦u, v, w¦ (body-referenced velocity)
r
G
= ¦x
G
, y
G
, z
g
¦ (body-referenced location of center of mass)
ω = ¦p, q, r¦ (rotation vector, in body coordinates)

F = ¦X, Y, Z¦ (external force, body coordinates).
The last term in the previous equation simpliﬁes using the vector triple product
identity
ω ( ω r
G
) = ( ω r
G
) ω −( ω ω)r
G
,
and the resulting three linear momentum equations are
X = m
¸
∂u
∂t
+ qw −rv +
dq
dt
z
G

dr
dt
y
G
+ (qy
G
+ rz
G
)p −(q
2
+ r
2
)x
G
¸
(27)
Y = m
¸
∂v
∂t
+ ru −pw +
dr
dt
x
G

dp
dt
z
G
+ (rz
G
+ px
G
)q −(r
2
+ p
2
)y
G
¸
Z = m
¸
∂w
∂t
+ pv −qu +
dp
dt
y
G

dq
dt
x
G
+ (px
G
+ qy
G
)r −(p
2
+ q
2
)z
G
¸
.
Note that about half of the terms here are due to the mass center being in a
diﬀerent location than the reference frame origin, i.e., r
G
=

0.
3.3 Example: Mass on a String
Consider a mass on a string, being swung around around in a circle at speed
U, with radius r. The centrifugal force can be computed in at least three
diﬀerent ways. The vector equation at the start is

F = m

∂v
o
∂t
+ ω v
o
+

dt
r
G
+ ω ( ω r
G
)

.
3.3 Example: Mass on a String 23
3.3.1 Moving Frame Aﬃxed to Mass
Aﬃxing a reference frame on the mass, with the local x oriented forward and
y inward towards the circle center, gives
v
o
= ¦U, 0, 0¦
T
ω = ¦0, 0, U/r¦
T
r
G
= ¦0, 0, 0¦
T
∂v
o
∂t
= ¦0, 0, 0¦
T
∂ ω
∂t
= ¦0, 0, 0¦
T
,
such that

F = mω v
o
= m¦0, U
2
/r, 0¦
T
.
The force of the string pulls in on the mass to create the circular motion.
3.3.2 Rotating Frame Attached to Pivot Point
Aﬃxing the moving reference frame to the pivot point of the string, with the
same orientation as above but allowing it to rotate with the string, we have
v
o
= ¦0, 0, 0¦
T
ω = ¦0, 0, U/r¦
T
r
G
= ¦0, r, 0¦
T
∂v
o
∂t
= ¦0, 0, 0¦
T
∂ ω
∂t
= ¦0, 0, 0¦
T
,
giving the same result:

F = mω ( ω r
G
) = m¦0, U
2
/r, 0¦
T
.
24 3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS
3.3.3 Stationary Frame
A frame ﬁxed in inertial space, and momentarily coincident with the frame
on the mass (3.3.1), can also be used for the calculation. In this case, as the
string travels through a small arc δψ, vector subtraction gives
δv = ¦0, U sin δψ, 0¦
T
· ¦0, Uδψ, 0¦
T
.
Since
˙
ψ = U/r, it follows easily that in the ﬁxed frame dv/dt = ¦0, U
2
/r, 0¦
T
,
as before.
3.4 Angular Momentum
For angular momentum, the summed particle equation is
N
¸
i=1
(

M
i
+r
i

F
i
) =
N
¸
i=1
r
i

d
dt
(m
i
v
i
), (28)
where

M
i
is an external moment on the particle i. Similar to the case for linear
momentum, summed internal moments cancel. We have
N
¸
i=1
(

M
i
+r
i

F
i
) =
N
¸
i=1
m
i
r
i

¸
∂v
o
∂t
+ ω v
o
¸
+
N
¸
i=1
m
i
r
i

∂ ω
∂t
r
i

+
N
¸
i=1
m
i
r
i
( ω ( ω r
i
)).
The summation in the ﬁrst term of the right-hand side is recognized simply as
mr
G
, and the ﬁrst term becomes
mr
G

¸
∂v
o
∂t
+ ω v
o
¸
. (29)
The second term expands as (using the triple product)
N
¸
i=1
m
i
r
i

∂ ω
∂t
r
i

=
N
¸
i=1
m
i

(r
i
r
i
)
∂ ω
∂t

∂ ω
∂t
r
i

r
i

(30)
=

¸
N
i=1
m
i
((y
2
i
+ z
2
i
) ˙ p −(y
i
˙ q + z
i
˙ r)x
i
)
¸
N
i=1
m
i
((x
2
i
+ z
2
i
) ˙ q −(x
i
˙ p + z
i
˙ r)y
i
)
¸
N
i=1
m
i
((x
2
i
+ y
2
i
) ˙ r −(x
i
˙ p + y
i
˙ q)z
i
)

.
3.4 Angular Momentum 25
Employing the deﬁnitions of moments of inertia,
I =

I
xx
I
xy
I
xz
I
yx
I
yy
I
yz
I
zx
I
zy
I
zz
¸
¸
¸ (inertia matrix)
I
xx
=
N
¸
i=1
m
i
(y
2
i
+ z
2
i
)
I
yy
=
N
¸
i=1
m
i
(x
2
i
+ z
2
i
)
I
zz
=
N
¸
i=1
m
i
(x
2
i
+ y
2
i
)
I
xy
= I
yx
= −
N
¸
i=1
m
i
x
i
y
i
(cross-inertia)
I
xz
= I
zx
= −
N
¸
i=1
m
i
x
i
z
i
I
yz
= I
zy
= −
N
¸
i=1
m
i
y
i
z
i
,
the second term of the angular momentum right-hand side collapses neatly
into I∂ ω/∂t. The third term can be worked out along the same lines, but
oﬀers no similar condensation:
N
¸
i=1
m
i
r
i
(( ω r
i
) ω −( ω ω)r
i
) =
N
¸
i=1
m
i
r
i
ω( ω r
i
) (31)
=

¸
N
i=1
m
i
(y
i
r −z
i
q)(x
i
p + y
i
q + z
i
r)
¸
N
i=1
m
i
(z
i
p −x
i
r)(x
i
p + y
i
q + z
i
r)
¸
N
i=1
m
i
(x
i
q −y
i
p)(x
i
p + y
i
q + z
i
r)

=

I
yz
(q
2
−r
2
) + I
xz
pq −I
xy
pr
I
xz
(r
2
−p
2
) + I
xy
rq −I
yz
pq
I
xy
(p
2
−q
2
) + I
yz
pr −I
xz
qr

+

(I
zz
−I
yy
)rq
(I
xx
−I
zz
)rp
(I
yy
−I
xx
)qp

.
26 3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS
Letting

M = ¦K, M, N¦ be the total moment acting on the body, i.e., the left
side of Equation 28, the complete moment equations are
K = I
xx
˙ p + I
xy
˙ q + I
xz
˙ r + (32)
(I
zz
−I
yy
)rq + I
yz
(q
2
−r
2
) + I
xz
pq −I
xy
pr +
m[y
G
( ˙ w + pv −qu) −z
G
( ˙ v + ru −pw)]
M = I
yx
˙ p + I
yy
˙ q + I
yz
˙ r +
(I
xx
−I
zz
)pr + I
xz
(r
2
−p
2
) + I
xy
qr −I
yz
qp +
m[z
G
( ˙ u + qw −rv) −x
G
( ˙ w + pv −qu)]
N = I
zx
˙ p + I
zy
˙ q + I
zz
˙ r +
(I
yy
−I
xx
)pq + I
xy
(p
2
−q
2
) + I
yz
pr −I
xz
qr +
m[x
G
( ˙ v + ru −pw) −y
G
( ˙ u + qw −rv)] .
3.5 Example: Spinning Book
Consider a homogeneous rectangular block with I
xx
< I
yy
< I
zz
and all oﬀ-
diagonal moments of inertia are zero. The linearized angular momentum equa-
tions, with no external forces or moments, are
I
xx
dp
dt
+ (I
zz
−I
yy
)rq = 0
I
yy
dq
dt
+ (I
xx
−I
zz
)pr = 0
I
zz
dr
dt
+ (I
yy
−I
xx
)qp = 0.
We consider in turn the stability of rotations about each of the main axes,
with constant angular rate Ω. The interesting result is that rotations about
the x and z axes are unstable, while rotation about the y axis is not.
3.5.1 x-axis
In the case of the x-axis, p = Ω + δp, q = δq, and r = δr, where the δ preﬁx
indicates a small value compared to Ω. The ﬁrst equation above is uncoupled
3.5 Example: Spinning Book 27
from the others, and indicates no change in δp, since the small term δqδr can
be ignored. Diﬀerentiate the second equation to obtain
I
yy

2
δq
∂t
2
+ (I
xx
−I
zz
)Ω
∂δr
∂t
= 0
Substitution of this result into the third equation yields
I
yy
I
zz

2
δq
∂t
2
+ (I
xx
−I
zz
)(I
xx
−I
yy
)Ω
2
δq = 0.
A simpler expression is δ¨ q + αδq = 0, which has response δq(t) = δq(0)e

−αt
,
when δ ˙ q(0) = 0. For spin about the x-axis, both coeﬃcients of the diﬀerential
equation are positive, and hence α > 0. The imaginary exponent indicates
that the solution is of the form δq(t) = δq(0)cos

αt, that is, it oscillates but
does not grow. Since the perturbation δr is coupled, it too oscillates.
3.5.2 y-axis
Now suppose q = Ω + δq: diﬀerentiate the ﬁrst equation and substitute into
the third equation to obtain
I
zz
I
xx

2
δp
∂t
2
+ (I
yy
−I
xx
)(I
yy
−I
zz
)Ω
2
δp = 0.
Here the second coeﬃcient has negative sign, and therefore α < 0. The ex-
ponent is real now, and the solution grows without bound, following δp(t) =
δp(0)e

−αt
.
3.5.3 z-axis
Finally, let r = Ω+δr: diﬀerentiate the ﬁrst equation and substitute into the
second equation to obtain
I
yy
I
xx

2
δp
∂t
2
+ (I
xx
−I
zz
)(I
yy
−I
zz
)Ω
2
δp = 0.
The coeﬃcients are positive, so bounded oscillations occur.
28 3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS
3.6 Parallel Axis Theorem
Often, the mass center of an body is at a diﬀerent location than a more con-
venient measurement point, the geometric center of a vessel for example. The
parallel axis theorem allows one to translate the mass moments of inertia refer-
enced to the mass center into another frame with parallel orientation, and vice
versa. Sometimes a translation of coordinates to the mass center will make the
cross-inertial terms I
xy
, I
yz
, I
xz
small enough that they can be ignored; in this
case r
G
=

0 also, so that the equations of motion are signiﬁcantly reduced, as
in the spinning book example.
The formulas are:
I
xx
=
¯
I
xx
+ m(δy
2
+ δz
2
) (33)
I
yy
=
¯
I
yy
+ m(δx
2
+ δz
2
)
I
zz
=
¯
I
zz
+ m(δx
2
+ δy
2
)
I
yz
=
¯
I
yz
−mδyδz
I
xz
=
¯
I
xz
−mδxδz
I
xy
=
¯
I
xy
−mδxδy,
where
¯
I represents an MMOI in the axes of the mass center, and δx, for ex-
ample, is the translation of the x-axis to the new frame. Note that translation
of MMOI using the parallel axis theorem must be either to or from a frame
resting exactly at the center of gravity.
3.7 Basis for Simulation
Except for external forces and moments

F and

M, we now have the neces-
sary terms for writing a full nonlinear simulation of a rigid body, in body
coordinates. There are twelve states, comprising the following components:
• v
o
, the vector of body-referenced velocities.
• ω, body rotation rate vector.
• x, location of the body origin, in inertial space.

E, Euler angle vector.
3.7 Basis for Simulation 29
The derivatives of body-referenced velocity and rotation rate come from Equa-
tions 27 and 32, with some coupling which generally requires a 6 6 matrix
inverse. The Cartesian position propagates according to
˙
x = R
T
(

E)v
o
, (34)
while the Euler angles follow:
˙

E = Γ(

E) ω. (35)
30 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION
4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION
The forces and moments on a vessel are complicated functions of many fac-
tors, including water density, viscosity, surface tension, pressure, vapor pres-
sure, and motions of the body. The most important factors for large ocean
vehicles are density and motion, and we can make simpliﬁcations to param-
eterize the most prominent relationships. This section pertains to the use of
hydrodynamic coeﬃcients for predicting hydrodynamic response.
4.1 Taylor Series and Hydrodynamic Coeﬃcients
Recall the Taylor expansion of a function:
f(x) = f(x
o
) +
∂f(x
o
)
∂x
(x −x
o
) +
1
2!

2
f(x
o
)
∂x
2
(x −x
o
)
2
+ . (36)
We introduce the notation
f
x
=
∂f(x
o
)
∂x
f
x
x =
1
2!

2
f(x
o
)
∂x
2
,
and so on, so that a two-variable Taylor expansion would have the form
f(x, y) = f(x
o
, y
o
) + (37)
f
x
(x −x
o
) + f
y
(y −y
o
) +
f
xx
(x −x
o
)
2
+ f
yy
(y −y
o
)
2
+ f
xy
(x −x
o
)(y −y
o
) +
f
xxx
(x −x
o
)
3
+ . (38)
Note that all of the factorials are included in the coeﬃcients. This notation
covers some instances where the formal Taylor series is meaningless, but the
notation is still clear. As one example, ﬂuid drag is often written as
F =
1
2
ρC
d
Au[u[ = F
u|u|
u[u[.
4.2 Surface Vessel Linear Model 31
4.2 Surface Vessel Linear Model
We now discuss some of the hydrodynamic parameters which govern a ship
maneuvering in the horizontal plane. The body x-axis is forward and the y-
axis is to port, so positive r has the boat turning left. We will consider motions
only in the horizontal plane, which means θ = ψ = p = q = w = 0. Since the
vessel is symmetric about the x −z plane, y
G
= 0; z
G
is inconsequential. We
then have at the outset
X = m

∂u
∂t
−rv −x
G
r
2

(39)
Y = m

∂v
∂t
+ ru + x
G
∂r
∂t

N = I
zz
∂r
∂t
+ mx
G

∂v
∂t
+ ru

.
Letting u = U + u, where U >> u, and eliminating higher-order terms, this
set is
X = m
∂u
∂t
(40)
Y = m

∂v
∂t
+ rU + x
G
∂r
∂t

N = I
zz
∂r
∂t
+ mx
G

∂v
∂t
+ rU

.
A number of coeﬃcients can be discounted. First, in a homogeneous sea, with
no current, wave, or wind eﬀects, ¦X
x
, X
y
, X
φ
, Y
x
, Y
y
, Y
φ
, N
x
, N
y
, N
φ
¦ are all
zero. We assume that no hydrodynamic forces depend on the position of the
vessel.
2
Second, consider X
v
: since this longitudinal force would have the same
sign regardless of the sign of v (because of side-to-side hull symmetry), it must
have zero slope with v at the origin. Thus X
v
= 0. The same argument shows
that ¦X
r
, X
˙ v
, X
˙ r
, Y
u
, Y
˙ u
, N
u
, N
˙ u
¦ = 0. Finally, since ﬂuid particle acceleration
relates linearly with pressure or force, we do not consider nonlinear acceleration
2
Note that the linearized heave/pitch dynamics of a submarine do depend on the pitch
angle; this topic will be discussed later.
32 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION
terms, or higher time derivatives. It should be noted that some nonlinear terms
related to those we have eliminated above are not zero. For instance, Y
uu
= 0
because of hull symmetry, but in general X
vv
= 0 only if the vessel is bow-stern
symmetric.
We have so far, considering only the linear hydrodynamic terms,
(m−X
˙ u
) ˙ u = X
u
u + X

(41)
(m−Y
˙ v
) ˙ v + (mx
G
−Y
˙ r
) ˙ r = Y
v
v + (Y
r
−mU)r + Y

(42)
(mx
G
−N
˙ v
) ˙ v + (I
zz
−N
˙ r
) ˙ r = N
v
v −(N
r
−mx
G
U)r + N

. (43)
The right side here carries also the imposed forces from a thruster(s) and
rudder(s) ¦X

, Y

, N

¦. Note that the surge equation is decoupled from the
sway and yaw, but that sway and yaw themselves are coupled, and there-
fore are of immediate interest. With the state vector s = ¦v, r¦ and exter-
nal force/moment vector

F = ¦Y

, N

¦, a state-space representation of the
sway/yaw system is
¸
m−Y
˙ v
mx
G
−Y
˙ r
mx
G
−N
˙ v
I
zz
−N
˙ r
¸
ds
dt
=
¸
Y
v
Y
r
−mU
N
v
N
r
−mx
G
U
¸
s +

F, or (44)
M
˙
s = Ps +

F
˙
s = M
−1
Ps + M
−1

F
˙
s = As + B

F. (45)
The matrix M is a mass or inertia matrix, which is always invertible. The
last form of the equation is a standard one wherein A represents the internal
dynamics of the system, and B is a gain matrix for the control and disturbance
inputs.
4.3 Stability of the Sway/Yaw System
Consider the homogeneous system
˙
s = As:
˙ s
1
= A
11
s
1
+ A
12
s
2
˙ s
2
= A
21
s
1
+ A
22
s
2
.
4.3 Stability of the Sway/Yaw System 33
We can rewrite the second equation as
s
2
=

d()
dt
−A
22

−1
A
21
s
1
(46)
and substitute into the ﬁrst equation to give
¨ s
1
+ (−A
11
−A
22
) ˙ s
1
+ (A
11
A
22
−A
12
A
21
)s
1
= 0. (47)
Note that these operations are allowed because the derivative operator is linear;
in the language of the Laplace transform, we would simply use s. A necessary
and suﬃcient condition for stability of this ODE system is that each coeﬃcient
must be greater than zero:
−A
11
−A
22
> 0 (48)
A
11
A
22
−−A
12
A
21
> 0
The components of A for the sway/yaw problem are
A
11
=
(I
zz
−N
˙ r
)Y
v
+ (Y
˙ r
−mx
G
)N
v
(m−Y
˙ v
)(I
zz
−N
˙ r
) −(mx
G
−Y
˙ r
)(mx
G
−N
˙ v
)
(49)
A
12
=
−(I
zz
−N
˙ r
)(mU −Y
r
) −(Y
˙ r
−mx
G
)(mx
G
U −N
r
)
(m−Y
˙ v
)(I
zz
−N
˙ r
) −(mx
G
−Y
˙ r
)(mx
G
−N
˙ v
)
A
21
=
(N
˙ v
−mx
G
)Y
v
+ (m−Y
˙ v
)N
v
(m−Y
˙ v
)(I
zz
−N
˙ r
) −(mx
G
−Y
˙ r
)(mx
G
−N
˙ v
)
A
22
=
−(N
˙ v
−mx
G
)(mU −Y
r
) −(m−Y
˙ v
)(mx
G
U −N
r
)
(m−Y
˙ v
)(I
zz
−N
˙ r
) −(mx
G
−Y
˙ r
)(mx
G
−N
˙ v
)
.
The denominators are identical, and can be simpliﬁed. First, let x
G
· 0;
valid for many vessels with the origin is at the geometric center. If the origin
is at the center of mass, x
G
= 0. Next, if the vessel is reasonably balanced
with regard to forward and aft areas with respect to the origin, the terms
¦N
˙ v
, Y
˙ r
, N
v
, Y
r
¦ take very small values in comparison with the others. To wit,
˙ v
is of the order of the vessel’s material mass m,
and similarly N
˙ r
· −I
zz
. Both Y
˙ v
and N
˙ r
take large negative values. Linear
drag and rotational drag are signiﬁcant also; these are the terms Y
v
and N
r
,
34 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION
both large and negative. The denominator for A’s components reduces to
(m−Y
˙ v
)(I
zz
−N
˙ r
), and
A
11
=
Yv
m−Y
˙ v
< 0
A
22
=
Nr
Izz−N
˙ r
< 0.
Hence the ﬁrst condition for stability is met: −A
11
−A
22
> 0. For the second
condition, since the denominators of the A
ij
are identical, we have only to look
at the numerators. For stability, we require
(I
zz
−N
˙ r
)Y
v
(m−Y
˙ v
)N
r
(50)
−[N
˙ v
Y
v
+ (m−Y
˙ v
)N
v
] [−(I
zz
−N
˙ r
)(mU −Y
r
) + Y
˙ r
N
r
] > 0.
The ﬁrst term is the product of two large negative and two large positive
numbers. The second part of the second term contains mU, which has a large
positive value, generally making stability critical on the (usually negative) N
v
.
When only the largest terms are considered for a vessel, a simpler form is
common:
C = Y
v
N
r
+ N
v
(mU −Y
r
) > 0. (51)
C is called the vessels stability parameter. The terms of C compete, and
yaw/sway stability depends closely on the magnitude and sign of N
v
more surface area aft drives N
v
more positive, increasing stability as ex-
pected. Stability can also be improved by moving the center of gravity forward.
Nonzero x
G
shows up as follows:
C = Y
v
(N
r
−mx
G
U) + N
v
(mU −Y
r
) > 0. (52)
Since N
r
and Y
v
are both negative, positive x
G
increases the (positive) inﬂuence
of C’s ﬁrst term.
4.4 Basic Rudder Action in the Sway/Yaw Model
Rudders are devices which develop large lift forces due to an angle of attack
with respect to the oncoming ﬂuid. As in our discussion of lift on the body,
the form is as follows: L =
1
2
ρAU
2
C
l
(α), where α is the angle of attack. The
4.4 Basic Rudder Action in the Sway/Yaw Model 35
δ
y
x
r
Figure 3: Convention for positive rudder angle in the vessel reference system.
lift coeﬃcient C
l
is normally linear with α near α = 0, but the rudder stalls
when the angle of attack reaches a critical value, and thereafter develops much
less lift. We will assume that α is small enough that the linear relationship
applies:
C
l
(α) =
∂C
l
∂α

α=0
α. (53)
Since the rudder develops force (and a small moment) far away from the body
origin, say a distance l aft, the moment equation is quite simple. We have
Y
α
=
1
2
ρA
∂C
l
∂α

α=0
U
2
(54)
N
α
= −
1
2
ρA
∂C
l
∂α

α=0
lU
2
. (55)
Note the diﬀerence between the rudder angle expressed in the body frame, δ,
and the total angle of attack α. Angle of attack is inﬂuenced by δ, as well
as v/U and lr. Thus, in tank testing with v = 0, δ = α and N
δ
= N
α
,
etc., but in real conditions, other hydrodynamic derivatives are augmented to
capture the necessary eﬀects, for example N
v
and N
r
. Generally speaking, the
hydrodynamic characteristics of the vessel depend strongly on the rudder, even
when δ = 0. In this case the rudder still opposes yaw and sway perturbations
and acts to stabilize the vessel.
A positive rudder deﬂection (deﬁned to have the same sense as the yaw angle)
causes a negative yaw perturbation, and a very small positive sway perturba-
tion.
36 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION
4.4.1 Adding Yaw Damping through Feedback
The stability coeﬃcient C resulting from the addition of a control law δ = k
r
r,
where k
r
> 0 is a feedback gain, is
C = Y
v
(N
r
−mx
G
U + k
r
N
δ
) + N
v
(mU −Y
r
−k
r
Y
δ
). (56)
Y
δ
is small positive, but N
δ
is large and negative. Hence C becomes more
positive, since Y
v
is negative.
Control system limitations and the stalling of rudders make obvious the fact
that even a very large control gain k
r
cannot completely solve stability prob-
lems of a poorly-designed vessel with an inadequate rudder. On the other
hand, a vessel which is overly stable (C >> 0 with no rudder action) is unma-
neuverable. A properly-balanced vessel just achieves stability with zero rudder
action, so that a reasonable amount of control will provide good maneuvering
capabilities.
4.4.2 Heading Control in the Sway/Yaw Model
Considering just the yaw equation of motion, i.e., v = 0, with a rudder, we
have
(I
zz
−N
˙ r
)
¨
φ + (mx
G
U −N
r
)
˙
φ = N
δ
δ. (57)
Employing the control law δ = k
φ
φ, the system equation becomes a homoge-
neous, second-order ODE:
(I
zz
−N
˙ r
)
¨
φ + (mx
G
U −N
r
)
˙
φ −N
δ
k
φ
φ = 0. (58)
Since all coeﬃcients are positive (recall N
δ
< 0), the equation gives a stable θ
response, settling under second-order dynamics to θ(∞) = 0. The control law
δ = k
φ
(φ − φ
desired
) + k
r
r is the basis for heading autopilots, which are used
to track φ
desired
. This use of an error signal to drive an actuator is in fact the
essence of feedback control. In this case, we require sensors to obtain r and φ,
a controller to calculate δ, and an actuator to implement the corrective action.
4.5 Response of the Vessel to Step Rudder Input 37
4.5 Response of the Vessel to Step Rudder Input
4.5.1 Phase 1: Accelerations Dominate
When the rudder ﬁrst moves, acceleration terms dominate, since the velocities
are zero. The equation looks like this:
¸
m−Y
˙ v
mx
G
−Y
˙ r
mx
G
−N
˙ v
I
zz
−N
˙ r
¸
˙ v
˙ r
¸
=

Y
δ
N
δ
¸
δ. (59)
Since Y
˙ r
and mx
G
are comparatively small in the ﬁrst row, we have
˙ v(0) =
Y
δ
δ
m−Y
˙ v
, (60)
and the vessel moves to the left, the positive v-direction. The initial yaw is in
the negative r-direction, since N
δ
< 0:
˙ r(0) =
N
δ
δ
I
zz
−N
˙ r
. (61)
The ﬁrst phase is followed by a period (Phase 2), in which many terms are
competing and contributing to the transient response.
When the transients have decayed, the vessel is in a steady turning condition,
and the accelerations are zero. The system equations reduce to

v
r
¸
=
δ
C

(mx
G
U −N
r
)Y
δ
+ (Y
r
−mU)N
δ
N
v
Y
δ
−Y
v
N
δ
¸
. (62)
Note that the denominator is the stability parameter. The steady turning rate
is thus approximated by
r = −
Y
v
N
δ
C
δ. (63)
With C > 0, the steady-state yaw rate is negative. If the vessel is unstable
(C < 0), it turns in the opposite direction than expected. This turning rate
equation can also be used to estimate turning radius R:
R =
U
r
=
UC
−Y
v
N
δ
δ
. (64)
38 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION
The radius goes up directly with C, indicating that too stable a ship has poor
N
δ
, decreasing R as desired. Increasing the deﬂection δ to reduce R works
only to the point of stalling.
4.6 Summary of the Linear Maneuvering Model
We conclude our discussion of the yaw/sway model by noting that
1. The linearized sway/yaw dynamics of a surface vessel are strongly cou-
pled, and they are independent of the longitudinal dynamics.
2. The design parameter C should be slightly greater than zero for easy
turning, and “ hands-oﬀ” stability. The case C < 0 should only be
considered under active feedback control.
3. The analysis is valid only up to small angles of attack and turning rates.
Very tight maneuvering requires the nonlinear inertial components and
hydrodynamic terms. Among other eﬀects, the nonlinear equations cou-
ple surge to the other motions, and the actual vessel loses forward speed
during maneuvering.
4.7 Stability in the Vertical Plane
Stability in the horizontal plane changes very little as a function of speed,
because drag and lift eﬀects generally scale with U
2
. This fact is not true
in the vertical plane, for which the dimensional weight/buoyancy forces and
moments are invariant with speed. For example, consider the case of heave
and pitch, with x
G
= 0 and no actuation:
m

∂w
∂t
−Uq

= Z
˙ w
˙ w + Z
w
w + Z
˙ q
˙ q + Z
q
q + (B −W) (65)
I
yy
dq
dt
= M
˙ w
˙ w + M
w
w + M
˙ q
˙ q + M
q
q −Bl
b
sin θ. (66)
The last term in each equation is a hydrostatic eﬀect induced by opposing net
buoyancy B and weight W. l
b
denotes the vertical separation of the center
of gravity and the center of buoyancy, creating the so-called righting moment
which nearly all underwater vehicles possess. Because buoyancy eﬀects do not
4.7 Stability in the Vertical Plane 39
change with speed, the dynamic properties and hence stability of the vehicle
may change with speed.
40 5 SIMILITUDE
5 SIMILITUDE
5.1 Use of Nondimensional Groups
For a consistent description of physical processes, we require that all terms
in an equation must have the same units. On the basis of physical laws,
some quantities are dependent on other, independent quantities. We form
nondimensional groups out of the dimensional ones in this section, and apply
the technique to maneuvering.
The Buckingham π-theorem provides a basis for all nondimensionalization.
Let a quantity Q
n
be given as a function of a set of n −1 other quantities:
Q
n
= f
Q
(Q
1
, Q
2
, , Q
n−1
). (67)
There are n variables here, but suppose also that there are only k independent
ones; k is equivalent to the number of physical unit types encountered. The
theorem asserts that there are n − k dimensionless groups π
i
that can be
formed, and the functional equivalence is reduced to
π
n−k
= f
π

1
, π
2
, , π
n−k−1
). (68)
Example. Suppose we have a block of mass m resting on a frictionless hor-
izontal surface. At time zero, a steady force of magnitude F is applied. We
want to know X(T), the distance that the block has moved as of time T. The
dimensional function is X(T) = f
Q
(m, F, T), so n = 4. The (MKS) units are
[X()] = m
[m] = kg
[F] = kgm/s
2
[T] = s,
and therefore k = 3. There is just one nondimensional group in this re-
lationship; π
1
assumes only a constant (but unknown) value. Simple term-
cancellation gives π
1
= X(T)m/FT
2
, not far at all from the known result that
X(T) = FT
2
/2m!
Example. Consider the ﬂow rate Q of water from an open bucket of height
h, through a drain nozzle of diameter d. We have
5.1 Use of Nondimensional Groups 41
Q = f
Q
(h, d, ρ, µ, g),
where the water density is ρ, and its absolute viscosity µ; g is the acceleration
due to gravity. No other parameters aﬀect the ﬂow rate. We have n = 6, and
the (MKS) units of these quantities are:
[Q] = m
3
/s
[h] = m
[d] = m
[ρ] = kg/m
3
[µ] = kg/ms
[g] = m/s
2
There are only three units that appear: [length, time, mass], and thus k = 3.
Hence, only three non-dimensional groups exist, and one is a unique func-
tion of the other two. To arrive at a set of valid groups, we must create
three nondimensional quantities, making sure that each of the original (di-
mensional) quantities is represented. Intuition and additional manipulations
come in handy, as we now show.
Three plausible ﬁrst groups are: π
1
= ρQ/dµ, π
2
= dρ

gh/µ, and π
3
= h/d.
Note that all six quantities appear at least once. Since h and d have the same
units, they could easily change places in the ﬁrst two groups. However, π
1
is
recognized as a Reynolds number pertaining to the oriﬁce ﬂow. π
2
is more
awkward, but products and fractions of groups are themselves valid groups,
and we may construct π
4
= π
1

2
= Q/d
2

gh to nondimensionalize Q with
a pressure velocity, and then π
5
= π
1

4
= ρd

gh/µ to establish an oriﬁce
Reynolds number independent of Q. We ﬁnally have the useful result
π
4
= f
π

5
, π
2
) −→
Q
d
2

gh
= f
π

ρd

gh
µ
,
h
d

.
The uncertainty about where to use h and d, and the questionable importance
of h/d as a group are remnants of the theorem. Intuition is that h/d is im-
42 5 SIMILITUDE
material, and the other two terms have a nice physical meaning, e.g., π
5
is a
Reynolds number.
The power of the π-theorem is primarily in reducing the number of parameters
which must be considered independently to characterize a process. In the ﬂow
example, the theorem reduced the number of independent parameters from
ﬁve to two, with no constraints about the actual physics taking place.
5.2 Common Groups in Marine Engineering
One frequently encounters the following groups in ﬂuid mechanics and marine
engineering:
1. Froude number:
Fr =
U

gL
, (69)
where U is the speed of the vessel, g is the acceleration due to gravity,
and L is the waterline length of the vessel. The Froude number appears
in problems involving pressure boundary conditions, such as in waves on
the ocean surface. Roughly speaking, it relates the vessel speed U to
water wave speeds of wavelength L; the phase speed of a surface wave is
V =

λg/2π, where λ is the wavelength.
2. Cavitation number:
δ =
P

−P
v
1
2
ρU
2
, (70)
where P

represents the ambient total pressure, P
v
the vapor pressure
of the ﬂuid, and U the propeller inlet velocity. A low cavitation number
means that the Bernoulli pressure loss across the lifting surface will cause
the ﬂuid to vaporize, causing bubbles, degradation of performance, and
possible deterioration of the material.
3. Reynolds number:
Re =
Ul
µ/ρ
, (71)
5.2 Common Groups in Marine Engineering 43
where U is velocity, µ is absolute viscosity, and ρ is density. Since Re
appears in many applications, l represents one of many length scales.
Reynolds number is a ratio of ﬂuid inertial pressures to viscous pres-
sures: When Re is high, viscous eﬀects are negligible. Re can be used to
characterize pipe ﬂow, bluﬀ body wakes, and ﬂow across a plate, among
others.
4. Weber number:
W =
ρU
2
l
σ
, (72)
where σ is the surface tension of a ﬂuid. Given that [σ] = N/m (MKS),
ρU
2
normalizes pressure, and l normalizes length. The Weber number
indicates the importance of surface tension.
To appreciate the origins of these terms from a ﬂuid particle’s point of view,
consider a box having side lengths [dx, dy, dz]. Various forces on the box scale
as
(inertia) F
i
= ρ
∂v
∂t
dxdydz + ρv
∂v
∂x
dxdydz · ρU
2
l
2
(gravity) F
g
= ρgdxdydz · ρgl
3
(pressure) F
p
= Pdxdy · Pl
2
(shear) F
s
= µ
∂v
∂z
dxdy · µUl
(surface tension) F
σ
= σdx · σl.
Thus the groups listed above can be written as
Fr =
F
i
F
g
·
U
2
gl
δ =
F
p
F
i
·
P
ρU
2
Re =
F
i
F
s
·
ρUl
µ
W =
F
i
F
σ
·
ρU
2
l
σ
44 5 SIMILITUDE
When testing models, it is imperative to maintain as many of the nondimen-
sional groups as possible of the full-scale system. This holds for the geometry
of the body and the kinematics of the ﬂow, the surface roughness, and the
all of the relevant groups governing ﬂuid dynamics. Consider the example of
nozzle ﬂow from a bucket. Suppose that we conduct a model test in which
Re is abnormally large, i.e., the viscous eﬀects are negligible. Under inviscid
conditions, the ﬂow rate is Q = πd
2

2gh/4. This rate cannot be achieved for
lower-Re conditions because of ﬂuid drag in the oriﬁce, however.
In a vessel, we write the functional relationship for drag as a starting point:
C
r
=
D
1
2
ρAU
2
= f
Q
(ρ, µ, g, σ, U, l)
= f
π
(Re, Fr, W).
First, since l is large, W is very large, and hence surface tension plays no role.
Next, we look at Re = Ul/ν and Fr = U/

gl, both of which are important
for surface vessels. Suppose that l
ship
= λl
model
, so that usually λ >> 1;
model
= g
ship
, i.e., the model and the true vessel operate
in the same gravity ﬁeld.
Froude number similitude requires U
model
= U
ship
/

λ. Then Reynolds number
scaling implies directly ν
model
= ν
ship

3/2
. Unfortunately, few ﬂuids with this
property are workable in a large testing tank. As a result, accurate scaling of
Re for large vessels to model scale is quite diﬃcult.
For surface vessels, and submarines near the surface, it is a routine procedure
to employ turbulence stimulators to achieve ﬂow that would normally occur
with ship-scale Re. Above a critical value Re · 500, 000, C
f
is not sensitive
to Re. With this achieved, one then tries to match Fr closely.
5.3 Similitude in Maneuvering
The linear equations of motion for the horizontal yaw/sway problem are:
(m−Y
˙ v
) ˙ v −Y
v
v + (mU −Y
r
)r + (mx
G
−Y
˙ r
) ˙ r = Y
(I
zz
−N
˙ r
) ˙ r + (mx
G
U −Nr)r + (mx
G
−N
˙ v
) ˙ v −N
v
v = N.
These equations can be nondimensionalized in a standard way, by using the
quantities [U, L, ρ]: these three values provide the necessary units of length,
5.3 Similitude in Maneuvering 45
time, and mass, and furthermore are readily accessible to the user. First, we
create nondimensional states, denoted with a prime symbol:
˙ v

=
L
U
2
˙ v (73)
v

=
1
U
v
˙ r

=
L
2
U
2
˙ r
r

=
L
U
r.
We follow a similar procedure for the constant terms as follows, including a
factor of 1/2 with ρ, for consistency with our previous expressions:
m

=
m
1
2
ρL
3
(74)
I

zz
=
I
zz
1
2
ρL
5
x

G
=
x
G
L
U

=
U
U
= 1
Y

˙ v
=
Y
˙ v
1
2
ρL
3
Y

v
=
Y
v
1
2
ρUL
2
Y

˙ r
=
Y
˙ r
1
2
ρL
4
Y

r
=
Y
r
1
2
ρUL
3
Y

=
Y
1
2
ρU
2
L
2
N

˙ v
=
N
˙ v
1
2
ρL
4
N

v
=
N
v
1
2
ρUL
3
46 5 SIMILITUDE
N

˙ r
=
N
˙ r
1
2
ρL
5
N

r
=
N
r
1
2
ρUL
4
N

=
N
1
2
ρU
2
L
3
.
Note that every force has been normalized with
1
2
ρU
2
L
2
, and every moment
with
1
2
ρU
2
L
3
; time has been also nondimensionalized with L/U. Thus we
arrive at a completely equivalent set of nondimensional system equations,
(m

−Y

˙ v
) ˙ v

−Y

v
v

+ (m

U

−Y

r
)r

+ (m

x

G
−Y

˙ r
) ˙ r

= Y

(75)
(I

zz
−N

˙ r
) ˙ r

+ (m

x

G
U

−N

r

)r

+ (m

x

G
−N

˙ v
) ˙ v

−N

v
v

= N

.
Since ﬂuid forces and moments generally scale with U
2
, the nondimensionalized
description holds for a range of velocities.
5.4 Roll Equation Similitude
Certain nondimensional coeﬃcients may arise which depend explicitly on U,
and therefore require special attention. Let us carry out a similar normaliza-
tion of the simpliﬁed roll equation
(I
xx
−K
˙ p
) ˙ p −K
p
p −K
ψ
ψ = K. (76)
For a surface vessel, the roll moment K
ψ
is based on metacentric stability, and
has the form K
ψ
= −ρg∇(GM), where ∇ is the displaced ﬂuid volume of the
vessel, and GM is the metacentric height. The nondimensional terms are
I

xx
=
I
xx
1
2
ρL
5
(77)
K

˙ p
=
K
˙ p
1
2
ρL
5
K

p
=
K
p
1
2
ρUL
4
K

ψ
=
K
ψ
1
2
ρU
2
L
3
5.4 Roll Equation Similitude 47
˙ p

=
L
2
U
2
˙ p
p

=
L
U
p,
(I

xx
−K

˙ p
) ˙ p

−K

p
p

2gL
U
2

(GM

)φ = K

. (78)
Note that the roll angle φ was not nondimensionalized. The Froude number
has a very strong inﬂuence on roll stability, since it appears explicitly in the
nondimensional righting moment term, and also has a strong inﬂuence on K

p
.
In the case of a submarine, the righting moment has the form K
ψ
= −Bh,
where B is the buoyant force, and h is the righting arm. The nondimensional
coeﬃcient becomes
K

ψ
= −
Bh
1
2
ρU
2
L
3
.
K

ψ
again depends strongly on U, since B and h are ﬁxed; this K

ψ
needs to be
maintained in model tests.
48 6 CAPTIVE MEASUREMENTS
6 CAPTIVE MEASUREMENTS
Before making the decision to measure hydrodynamic derivatives, a prelimi-
nary search of the literature may turn up useful estimates. For example, test
results for many hull-forms have already been published, and the basic lift-
ing surface models are not diﬃcult. The available computational approaches
should be considered as well; these are very good for predicting added mass
in particular. Finally, modern sensors and computer control systems make
possible the estimation of certain coeﬃcients based on open-water tests of a
model or a full-scale design.
In model tests, the Froude number Fr =
U

gL
, which scales the inﬂuence
of surface waves, must be maintained between model and full-scale surface
vessels. Reynolds number Re =
UL
ν
, which scales the eﬀect of viscosity, need
not be matched as long as the scale model attains turbulent ﬂow (supercritical
Re). One can use turbulence stimulators near the bow if necessary. Since the
control surface(s) and propeller(s) aﬀect the coeﬃcients, they should both be
implemented in model testing.
6.1 Towtank
In a towtank, tow the vehicle at diﬀerent angles of attack, measuring sway
force and yaw moment. The slope of the curve at zero angle determines Y
v
and N
v
respectively; higher-order terms can be generated if the points deviate
from a straight line. Rudder derivatives can be computed also by towing with
various rudder angles.
6.2 Rotating Arm Device
On a rotating arm device, the vessel is ﬁxed on an arm of length R, rotating at
constant rate r: the vessel forward speed is U = rR. The idea is to measure the
crossbody force and yaw moment as a function of r, giving the coeﬃcients Y
r
and N
r
. Note that the lateral force also contains the component (m−Y
˙ v
)r
2
R.
The coeﬃcients Y
v
and N
v
can also be obtained by running with a ﬁxed angle
of attack. Finally, the measurement is made over one rotation only, so that
the vessel does not re-enter its own wake.
6.3 Planar-Motion Mechanism 49
6.3 Planar-Motion Mechanism
With a planar motion mechanism, the vessel is towed at constant forward
speed U, but is held by two posts, one forward and one aft, which can each
impose independent sway motions, therefore producing variable yaw. The
model moves in pure sway if y
a
(t) = y
b
(t), in a pure yaw motion about the
mid-length point if y
a
(t) = −y
b
(t), or in a combination sway and yaw motion.
The connection points are a distance l forward and aft from the vessel origin.
Usually a sinusoidal motion is imposed:
y
a
(t) = a cos ωt (79)
y
b
(t) = b cos(ωt + ψ),
and the transverse forces on the posts are measured and approximated as
Y
a
(t) = F
a
cos(ωt + θ
a
) (80)
Y
b
(t) = F
b
cos(ωt + θ
b
).
If linearity holds, then
(m−Y
˙ v
) ˙ v −Y
v
v + (mU −Y
r
)r + (mx
G
−Y
˙ r
) ˙ r = Y
a
+ Y
b
(81)
(I
zz
−N
˙ r
) ˙ r + (mx
G
U −N
r
)r + (mx
G
−N
˙ v
) ˙ v −N
v
v = (Y
b
−Y
a
)l.
We have v = ( ˙ y
a
+ ˙ y
a
)/2 and r = ( ˙ y
b
− ˙ y
a
)/2l. When a = b, these become
v = −

2
(sin ωt(1 + cos ψ) + cos ωt sin ψ) (82)
˙ v = −

2
2
(cos ωt(1 + cos ψ) −sinωt sin ψ)
r = −

2l
(sin ωt(cos ψ −1) + cos ωt sin ψ)
˙ r = −

2
2l
(cos ωt(cos ψ −1) −sin ωt sin ψ) .
Equating the sine terms and then the cosine terms, we obtain four independent
equations:
50 6 CAPTIVE MEASUREMENTS
(m−Y
˙ v
)

2
2

(1 + cos ψ) − (83)
Y
v

2

sin ψ +
(mU −Y
r
)

2l

sin ψ +
(mx
G
−Y
˙ r
)

2
2l

(cos ψ −1) = F
a
cos θ
a
+ F
b
cos θ
b
(m−Y
˙ v
)

2
2

(−sin ψ) − (84)
Y
v

2

(1 + cos ψ) +
(mU −Y
r
)

2l

(cos ψ −1) +
(mx
G
−Y
˙ r
)

2
2l

(−sin ψ) = −F
a
sin θ
a
−F
b
sin θ
b
(I
zz
−N
˙ r
)

2
2l

(cos ψ −1) + (85)
(mx
G
U −N
r
)

2l

sin ψ +
(mx
G
−N
˙ v
)

2
2

(1 + cos ψ) −
N
v

2

sin ψ = l(F
b
cos θ
b
−F
a
cos θ
a
)
(I
zz
−N
˙ r
)

2
2l

(−sin ψ) + (86)
(mx
G
U −N
r
)

2l

(cos ψ −1) +
(mx
G
−N
˙ v
)

2
2

(−sin ψ) −
N
v

2

(1 + cos ψ) = l(−F
b
sin θ
b
+ F
a
sin θ
a
)
6.3 Planar-Motion Mechanism 51
In this set of four equations, we know from the imposed motion the values
[U, ψ, a, ω]. From the experiment, we obtain [F
a
, F
b
, θ
a
, θ
b
], and from the rigid-
body model we have [m, I
zz
, x
G
]. It turns out that the two cases of ψ = 0
(pure sway motion) and ψ = 180
o
(pure yaw motion) yield a total of eight
independent equations, exactly what is required to ﬁnd the eight coeﬃcients
[Y
˙ v
, Y
v
, Y
˙ r
, Y
r
, N
˙ v
, N
v
, N
˙ r
, N
r
]. Remarkably, we can write the eight solutions
directly: For ψ = 0,
(m−Y
˙ v
)

2
2

(2) = F
a
cos θ
a
+ F
b
cos θ
b
(87)
−Y
v

2

(2) = −F
a
sin θ
a
−F
b
sin θ
b
(mx
G
−N
˙ v
)

2
2

(2) = l(F
b
cos θ
b
−F
a
cos θ
a
)
−N
v

2

(2) = l(−F
b
sin θ
b
+ F
a
sin θ
a
),
to be solved respectively for [Y
˙ v
, Y
v
, N
˙ v
, N
v
]. For ψ = 180
o
, we have
(mx
G
−Y
˙ r
)

2
2l

(−2) = F
a
cos θ
a
+ F
b
cos θ
b
(88)
(mU −Y
r
)

2l

(−2) = −F
a
sin θ
a
−F
b
sin θ
b
(I
zz
−N
˙ r
)

2
2l

(−2) = l(F
b
cos θ
b
−F
a
cos θ
a
)
(mx
G
U −N
r
)

2l

(−2) = l(−F
b
sin θ
b
+ F
a
sin θ
a
),
to be solved for [Y
˙ r
, Y
r
, N
˙ r
, N
r
]. Thus, the eight linear coeﬃcients for a surface
vessel maneuvering, for a given speed, can be deduced from two tests with
a planar motion mechanism. We note that the nonlinear terms will play a
signiﬁcant role if the motions are too large, and that some curve ﬁtting will be
needed in any event. The PMM can be driven with more complex trajectories
which will target speciﬁc nonlinear terms.
52 7 STANDARD MANEUVERING TESTS
7 STANDARD MANEUVERING TESTS
This section describes some of the typical maneuvering tests which are per-
formed on full-scale vessels, to assess stability and performance.
7.1 Dieudonn´e Spiral
1. Achieve steady speed and direction for one minute. No changes in speed
setting are made after this point.
2. Turn rudder quickly by 15

, and keep it there until steady yaw rate is
maintained for one minute.
3. Reduce rudder angle by 5

, and keep it there until steady yaw rate is
maintained for one minute.
4. Repeat in decrements of -5

, to -15

.
5. Proceed back up to 15

.
The Dieudonn´e maneuver has the vessel path following a growing spiral, and
then a contracting spiral in the opposite direction. The test reveals if the vessel
has a memory eﬀect, manifested as a hysteresis in yaw rate r. For example,
suppose that the ﬁrst 15

rudder deﬂection causes the vessel to turn right, but
that the yaw rate at zero rudder, on the way negative, is still to the right. The
vessel has gotten “stuck” here, and will require a negative rudder action to
pull out of the turn. But if the corrective action causes the vessel to turn left
at all, the same memory eﬀect may occur. It is easy to see that the rudder in
this case has to be used excessively driving the vessel back and forth. We say
that the vessel is unstable, and clearly a poor design.
7.2 Zig-Zag Maneuver
1. With zero rudder, achieve steady speed for one minute.
2. Deﬂect the rudder to 20

, and hold until the vessel turns 20

.
3. Deﬂect the rudder to -20

, and hold until the vessel turns to -20◦ with
4. Repeat.
7.3 Circle Maneuver 53
This maneuver establishes several important characteristics of the yaw re-
sponse. These are: the response time (time to reach a given heading), the yaw
overshoot (amount the vessel exceeds ±20

when the rudder has turned the
other way), and the total period for the 20

oscillations. Of course, similar
tests can be made with diﬀerent rudder angles and diﬀerent threshold vessel
7.3 Circle Maneuver
From a steady speed, zero yaw rate condition, the rudder is moved to a new
setting. The vessel responds by turning in a circle. After steady state is
reached again, parameters of interest are the turning diameter, the drift angle
β, the speed loss, and the angle of heel ψ.
7.3.1 Drift Angle
The drift angle is the equivalent to angle of attack for lifting surfaces, and
describes how the vessel “skids” during a turn. If the turning circle has radius
R (measured from the vessel origin), then the speed tangential to the circle
is U = rR. The vessel-reference velocity components are thus u = U cos β
and v = −U sin β. A line along the vessel centerline reaches closest to the
true center of the turning circle at a point termed the turning center. At
this location, which may or may not exist on the physical vessel, there is no
apparent lateral velocity, and it appears to an observer there that the vessel
7.3.2 Speed Loss
Speed loss occurs primarily because of drag induced by the drift angle. A
vessel which drifts very little may have very little speed loss.
7.3.3 Heel Angle
Heel during turning occurs as a result of the intrinsic coupling of sway, yaw,
and roll caused by the center of gravity. In a surface vessel, the ﬂuid forces act
below the waterline, but the center of gravity is near the waterline or above.
When the rudder is ﬁrst deﬂected, inertial terms dominate (Phase 1) and the
sway equation is
54 7 STANDARD MANEUVERING TESTS
(m−Y
˙ v
) ˙ v −(Y
˙ r
−mx
G
) ˙ r = Y
δ
δ. (89)
The coeﬃcients for ˙ r are quite small, and thus the vessel ﬁrst rolls to starboard
(positive) for a positive rudder action.
When steady turning conditions are reached (Phase 3), hydrodynamic forces
equalize the centrifugal force mUr and the rudder force Y
δ
δ. The sway equation
is
−Y
v
v + (mU −Y
r
)r = Y
δ
δ, (90)
with Y
r
small, v < 0 when r > 0 for most vessels, and [Y
v
v[ > [Y
δ
δ[. Because
the centrifugal force acts above the waterline, the vessel ultimately rolls to
port (negative) for a positive rudder action.
The transition between the inertially-dominated and steady-turning regimes
includes an overshoot: in the above formulas, the vessel overshoots the ﬁnal
port roll angle as the vessel slows. From the sway equation, we see that if
the rudder is straightened out at this point, the roll will momentarily be even
worse!
In summary, the vessel rolls into the turn initially, but then out of the turn in
7.3.4 Heeling in Submarines with Sails
Submarines typically roll into a turn during all phases. Unlike surface vessels,
which have the rigid mass center above the center of ﬂuid forcing, submarines
have the mass center below the rudder action point, and additionally feel the
eﬀects of a large sail above both. The inertial equation
(m−Y
˙ v
) ˙ v −(Y
˙ r
−mx
G
) ˙ r = Y
δ
δ (91)
is dominated by m˙ v (acting low), −Y
˙ v
˙ v (acting high), and Y
δ
δ (intermediate).
Because [Y
˙ v
[ > m, the vessel rolls under the sail, the keel out of the turn. In
−Y
v
v + (mU −Y
r
)r = Y
δ
δ. (92)
The drift angle β keeps the Y
v
-force, acting high, toward the center of the turn,
and again centrifugal force mUr causes the bottom of the submarine to move
out of the turn. Hence, the roll angle of a submarine with a sail is always into
7.3 Circle Maneuver 55
the turn, both initially and in the steady state. The heel angle declines as the
speed of the submarine drops.
56 8 STREAMLINED BODIES
8 STREAMLINED BODIES
8.1 Nominal Drag Force
A symmetric streamlined body at zero angle of attack experiences only a drag
force, which has the form
F
A
= −
1
2
ρC
A
A
o
U
2
. (93)
The drag coeﬃcient C
A
has both pressure and skin friction components, and
hence area A
o
is usually that of the wetted surface. Note that the A-subscript
will be used to denote zero angle of attack conditions; also, the sign of F
A
is
negative, because it opposes the vehicle’s x-axis.
8.2 Munk Moment
Any shape other than a sphere generates a moment when inclined in an invis-
cid ﬂow. d’Alembert’s paradox predicts zero net force, but not necessarily a
zero moment. This Munk moment arises for a simple reason, the asymmetric
location of the stagnation points, where pressure is highest on the front of
the body (decelerating ﬂow) and lowest on the back (accelerating ﬂow). The
Munk moment is always destabilizing, in the sense that it acts to turn the
vehicle perpendicular to the ﬂow.
Consider a symmetric body with added mass components A
xx
along the vehicle
(slender) x-axis (forward), and A
zz
along the vehicle’s z-axis z (up). We will
limit the present discussion to the vertical plane, but similar arguments can
be used to describe the horizontal plane. Let α represent the angle of attack,
taken to be positive with the nose up – this equates to a negative pitch angle
φ in vehicle coordinates, if it is moving horizontally. The Munk moment is:
M
m
= −
1
2
(A
zz
−A
xx
)U
2
sin 2α (94)
· −(A
zz
−A
xx
)U
2
α.
A
zz
> A
xx
pitch with respect to the vehicle’s pitch axis. The added mass terms A
zz
and
A
xx
can be estimated from analytical expressions (available only for regular
shapes such as ellipsoids), from numerical calculation, or from slender body
approximation (to follow).
8.3 Separation Moment 57
8.3 Separation Moment
In a viscous ﬂuid, ﬂow over a streamlined body is similar to that of potential
ﬂow, with the exceptions of the boundary layer, and a small region near the
trailing end. In this latter area, a helical vortex may form and convect down-
stream. Since vortices correlate with low pressure, the eﬀect of such a vortex
is stabilizing, but it also induces drag. The formation of the vortex depends on
the angle of attack, and it may cover a larger area (increasing the stabilizing
moment and drag) for a larger angle of attack. For a small angle of attack, the
transverse force F
n
can be written in the same form as for control surfaces:
F
n
=
1
2
ρC
n
A
o
U
2
(95)
·
1
2
ρ
∂C
n
∂α
αA
o
U
2
.
With a positive angle of attack, this force is in the positive z-direction. The
zero-α drag force F
A
is modiﬁed by the vortex shedding:
F
a
= −
1
2
ρC
a
A
o
U
2
, where (96)
C
a
= C
A
cos
2
φ.
The last relation is based on writing C
A
(U cos φ)
2
as (C
A
cos
2
φ)U
2
, i.e., a
decomposition using apparent velocity.
8.4 Net Eﬀects: Aerodynamic Center
The Munk moment and the moment induced by separation are competing,
and their magnitudes determine the stability of a hullform. First we simplify:
F
a
= −γ
a
F
n
= γ
n
α
M
m
= −γ
m
α.
Each constant γ is taken as positive, and the signs reﬂect orientation in the
vehicle reference frame, with a nose-up angle of attack. The Munk moment is a
58 8 STREAMLINED BODIES
pure couple which does not depend on a reference point. We pick a temporary
origin O for F
n
however, and write the total pitch moment about O as:
M = M
m
+ F
n
l
n
(97)
= (−γ
m
+ γ
n
l
n
)α.
where l
n
denotes the (positive) distance between O and the application point
of F
n
. The net moment about O is zero if we select
l
n
=
γ
m
γ
n
, (98)
and the location of O is then called the aerodynamic center or AC.
The point AC has an intuitive explanation: it is the location on the hull where
F
n
would act to create the total moment. Hence, if the vehicle’s origin lies in
front of AC, the net moment is stabilizing. If the origin lies behind AC, the
moment is destabilizing. For self-propelled vehicles, the mass center must be
forward of AC for stability. Similarly, for towed vehicles, the towpoint must
be located forward of AC. In many cases with very streamlined bodies, the
aerodynamic center is signiﬁcantly ahead of the nose, and in this case, a rigid
sting would have to extend at least to AC in order for stable towing. As a
ﬁnal note, since the Munk moment persists even in inviscid ﬂow, AC moves
inﬁnitely far forward as viscosity eﬀects diminish.
8.5 Role of Fins in Moving the Aerodynamic Center
Control surfaces or ﬁxed ﬁns are often attached to the stern of a slender vehicle
to enhance directional stability. Fixed surfaces induce lift and drag on the
body:
L =
1
2
ρA
f
U
2
C
l
(α) · γ
L
α (99)
D = −
1
2
ρA
f
U
2
C
d
· −γ
D
(constant)
These forces act somewhere on the ﬁn, and are signed again to match the
vehicle frame, with γ > 0 and α > 0. The summed forces on the body are
thus:
8.5 Role of Fins in Moving the Aerodynamic Center 59
X = F
a
−[D[ cos α +[L[ sin α (100)
· −γ
a
−γ
D
+ γ
L
α
2
Z = F
n
+[L[ cos α +[D[ sin α
· γ
n
α + γ
L
α + γ
D
α.
All of the forces are pushing the vehicle up. If we say that the ﬁns act a
distance l
f
behind the temporary origin O, and that the moment carried by
the ﬁns themselves is very small (compared to the moment induced by Ll
f
)
the total moment is as follows:
M = (−γ
m
+ γ
n
l
n
)α + (γ
L
+ γ
D
)l
f
α. (101)
The moment about O vanishes if
γ
m
= γ
n
l
n
+ l
f

L
+ γ
D
). (102)
The Munk moment γ
m
opposes the aggregate eﬀects of vorticity lift γ
n
and
the ﬁns’ lift and drag γ
L

D
. With very large ﬁns, this latter term is large, so
that l
f
might be very small; this is the case of AC moving aft toward the ﬁns.
A vehicle with excessively large ﬁns will be diﬃcult to turn and maneuver.
Equation 102 contains two length measurements, referenced to an arbitrary
body point O. To solve it explicitly, let l
fn
denote the (positive) distance that
the ﬁns are located behind F
n
; this is likely a small number, since both eﬀects
usually act near the stern. We solve for l
f
:
l
f
=
γ
m
+ γ
n
l
fn
γ
n
+ γ
L
+ γ
D
. (103)
This is the distance that AC is located forward of the ﬁns, and thus AC can
be referenced to any other ﬁxed point easily. Without ﬁns, it can be recalled
that
l
n
=
γ
m
γ
n
.
Hence, the ﬁns act directly in the denominator to shorten l
f
. Note that if
the ﬁns are located forward of the vortex shedding force F
n
, i.e., l
fn
< 0, l
f
is
reduced, but since AC is referenced to the ﬁns, there is no net gain in stability.
60 8 STREAMLINED BODIES
8.6 Aggregate Eﬀects of Body and Fins
Since all of the terms discussed so far have the same dependence on α, it is
possible to group them into a condensed form. Setting
ˆ
F
a
and
ˆ
F
n
to account
for the fuselage and ﬁns, we have
X =
ˆ
F
a
· −
1
2
ρ
ˆ
C
a
ˆ
A
o
U
2
(104)
Z =
ˆ
F
n
·
1
2
ρ
ˆ
C

n
ˆ
A
o
U
2
α
M = −
ˆ
F
n
x
AC
· −
1
2
ˆ
C

n
ˆ
A
o
U
2
x
AC
α.
8.7 Coeﬃcients Z
w
, M
w
, Z
q
, and M
q
for a Slender Body
The angle of attack α is related to the cross-body velocity w as follows:
α = −tan
−1

w
u

(105)
· −
w
U
for U >> w.
We can then write several linear hydrodynamic coeﬃcients easily:
Z
w
= −
1
2
ρ
ˆ
C

n
ˆ
A
o
U (106)
M
w
=
1
2
ρ
ˆ
C

n
ˆ
A
o
Ux
AC
.
The rotation of the vessel involves complex ﬂow, which depends on both w and
q, as well as their derivatives. To start, we consider the contribution of the ﬁns
only – slender body theory, introduced shortly, provides good results for the
hull. The ﬁn center of pressure is located a distance l
f
aft of the body origin,
and we assume that the vehicle is moving horizontally, with an instantaneous
pitch angle of θ. The angle of attack seen by the ﬁn is a combination of a part
due to θ and a part linear with q:
α
f
· −θ +
l
f
q
U
(107)
8.7 Coeﬃcients Z
w
, M
w
, Z
q
, and M
q
for a Slender Body 61
and so lateral force and moment derivatives (for the ﬁn alone) emerge as
Z
q
= −
1
2
ρC

l
A
f
Ul
f
(108)
M
q
= −
1
2
ρC

l
A
f
Ul
2
f
.
62 9 SLENDER-BODY THEORY
9 SLENDER-BODY THEORY
9.1 Introduction
Consider a slender body with d << L, that is mostly straight. The body
could be asymmetric in cross-section, or even ﬂexible, but we require that
the lateral variations are small and smooth along the length. The idea of
the slender-body theory, under these assumptions, is to think of the body as
a longitudinal stack of thin sections, each having an easily-computed added
mass. The eﬀects are integrated along the length to approximate lift force and
moment. Slender-body theory is accurate for small ratios d/L, except near
the ends of the body.
As one example, if the diameter of a body of revolution is d(s), then we can
compute δm
a
(x), where the nominal added mass value for a cylinder is
δm
a
= ρ
π
4
d
2
δx. (109)
The added mass is equal to the mass of the water displaced by the cylinder.
The equation above turns out to be a good approximation for a number of
two-dimensional shapes, including ﬂat plates and ellipses, if d is taken as the
width dimension presented to the ﬂow. Many formulas for added mass of two-
dimensional sections, as well as for simple three-dimensional bodies, can be
found in the books by Newman and Blevins.
9.2 Kinematics Following the Fluid
The added mass forces and moments derive from accelerations that a ﬂuid
particles experience when they encounter the body. We use the notion of a
ﬂuid derivative for this purpose: the operator d/dt indicates a derivative taken
in the frame of the passing particle, not the vehicle. Hence, this usage has an
indirect connection with the derivative described in our previous discussion of
rigid-body dynamics.
For the purposes of explaining the theory, we will consider the two-dimensional
heave/surge problem only. The local geometry is described by the location of
the centerline; it has vertical location (in body coordinates) of z
b
(x, t), and
local angle α(x, t). The time-dependence indicates that the conﬁguration is
free to change with time, i.e., the body is ﬂexible. Note that the curvilinear
coordinate s is nearly equal to the body-reference (linear) coordinate x.
The velocity of a ﬂuid particle normal to the body at x is w
n
(t, x):
9.3 Derivative Following the Fluid 63
w
n
=
∂z
b
∂t
cos α −U sin α. (110)
The ﬁrst component is the time derivative in the body frame, and the second
due to the deﬂection of the particle by the inclined body. If the body reference
frame is rotated to the ﬂow, that is, if w = 0, then ∂z
b
/∂t will contain w. For
small angles, sin α · tan α = ∂z
b
/∂x, and we can write
w
n
·
∂z
b
∂t
−U
∂z
b
∂x
.
The ﬂuid derivative operator in action is as follows:
w
n
=
dz
b
dt
=

∂t
−U

∂x

z
b
.
9.3 Derivative Following the Fluid
A more formal derivation for the ﬂuid derivative operator is quite simple. Let
µ(x, t) represent some property of a ﬂuid particle.
d
dt
[µ(x, t)] = lim
δt→0
1
δt
[µ(x + δx, t + δt) −µ(x, t)]
=
¸
∂µ
∂t
−U
∂µ
∂x
¸
.
The second equality can be veriﬁed using a Taylor series expansion of µ(x +
δx, t + δt):
µ(x + δx, t + δt) = µ(x, t) +
∂µ
∂t
δt +
∂µ
∂x
δx + h.o.t.,
and noting that δx = −Uδt. The ﬂuid is convected downstream with respect
to the body.
64 9 SLENDER-BODY THEORY
9.4 Diﬀerential Force on the Body
If the local transverse velocity is w
n
(x, t), then the diﬀerential inertial force on
the body here is the derivative (following the ﬂuid) of the momentum:
δF = −
d
dt
[m
a
(x, t)w
n
(x, t)] δx. (111)
Note that we could here let the added mass vary with time also – this is the
case of a changing cross-section! The lateral velocity of the point z
b
(x) in the
body-reference frame is
∂z
b
∂t
= w −xq, (112)
such that
w
n
= w −xq −Uα. (113)
Taking the derivative, we have
δF
δx
= −

∂t
−U

∂x

[m
a
(x, t)(w(t) −xq(t) −Uα(x, t))] .
We now restrict ourselves to a rigid body, so that neither m
a
nor α may change
with time.
δF
δx
= m
a
(x)(− ˙ w + x ˙ q) + U

∂x
[m
a
(x)(w −xq −Uα)] . (114)
9.5 Total Force on a Vessel
The net lift force on the body, computed with strip theory is
Z =

x
N
x
T
δFdx (115)
where x
T
represents the coordinate of the tail, and x
N
is the coordinate of the
nose. Expanding, we have
9.6 Total Moment on a Vessel 65
Z =

x
N
x
T
m
a
(x) [− ˙ w + x ˙ q] dx + U

x
N
x
T

∂x
[m
a
(x)(w −xq −Uα)] dx
= −m
33
˙ w −m
35
˙ q + Um
a
(x)(w −xq −Uα)[
x=x
N
x=x
T
.
m
33
=

x
N
x
T
m
a
(x)dx
m
35
= −

x
N
x
T
xm
a
(x)dx.
Additionally, for vessels with pointed noses and ﬂat tails, the added mass m
a
at the nose is zero, so that a simpler form occurs:
Z = −m
33
˙ w −m
35
˙ q −Um
a
(x
T
)(w −x
T
q −Uα(x
T
)). (116)
In terms of the linear hydrodynamic derivatives, the strip theory thus provides
Z
˙ w
= −m
33
Z
˙ q
= −m
35
Z
w
= −Um
a
(x
T
)
Z
q
= Ux
T
m
a
(x
T
)
Z
α(x
T
)
= U
2
m
a
(x
T
).
It is interesting to note that both Z
w
and Z
α(x
T
)
depend on a nonzero base
area. In general, however, potential ﬂow estimates do not create lift (or drag)
forces for a smooth body, so this should come as no surprise. The two terms are
clearly related, since their diﬀerence depends only on how the body coordinate
system is oriented to the ﬂow. Another noteworthy fact is that the lift force
depends only on α at the tail; α could take any value(s) along the body, with
no eﬀect on Z.
9.6 Total Moment on a Vessel
A similar procedure can be applied to the moment predictions from slender
body theory (again for small α):
66 9 SLENDER-BODY THEORY
M = −

x
N
x
T
xδFdx
=

x
N
x
T
x

∂t
−U

∂x

[m
a
(x)(w −xq −Uα)] dx
=

x
N
x
T
xm
a
(x)( ˙ w −x ˙ q)dx −U

x
N
x
T
x

∂x
[m
a
(x)(w −xq + Uα)] dx.
Then we make the further deﬁnition
m
55
=

x
N
x
T
x
2
m
a
(x)dx,
(note that m
35
= m
53
) and use integration by parts to obtain
M = −m
35
˙ w −m
55
˙ q −Uxm
a
(x)(w −xq −Uα)[
x=x
N
x=x
T
+
U

x
N
x
T
m
a
(x)(w −xq −Uα)dx.
The integral above contains the product m
a
(x)α(x), which must be calculated
if α changes along the length. For simplicity, we now assume that α is in fact
constant on the length, leading to
M = −m
35
˙ w −m
55
˙ q + Ux
T
m
a
(x
T
)(w −x
T
q −Uα) +
Um
33
w + Um
35
q −U
2
m
33
α.
Finally, the linear hydrodynamic moment derivatives are
M
˙ w
= −m
35
M
˙ q
= −m
55
M
w
= Ux
T
m
a
(x
T
) + Um
33
M
q
= −Ux
2
T
m
a
(x
T
) + Um
35
M
α
= −U
2
x
T
m
a
(x
T
) −U
2
m
33
.
The derivative M
w
is closely-related to the Munk moment, whose linearization
would provide M
w
= (m
33
−m
11
)U. The Munk moment (an exact result) may
therefore be used to make a correction to the second term in the slender-body
approximation above of M
w
. As with the lift force, M
w
and M
α
are closely
related, depending only on the orientation of the body frame to the ﬂow.
9.7 Relation to Wing Lift 67
9.7 Relation to Wing Lift
There is an important connection between the slender body theory terms in-
volving added mass at the tail (m
a
(x
T
)), and low aspect-ratio wing theory.
The lift force from the latter is of the form L = −
1
2
ρUAC

l
w, where A = cs,
the product of chord (long) and span (short).
The lift coeﬃcient slope is approximated by (Hoerner)
C

l

1
2
π(AR), (117)
where (AR) is the aspect ratio. Inserting this approximation into the lift
formula, we obtain
L = −
π
4
ρs
2
Uw. (118)
Now we look at a slender body approximation of the same force: The added
mass at the tail is m
a
(x
T
) = ρs
2
π/4, and using the slender-body estimate for
Z
w
, we calculate for lift:
Z = −m
a
(x
T
)Uw
= −
π
4
ρs
2
Uw.
Slender-body theory is thus able to recover exactly the lift of a low-aspect
ratio wing. Where does the slender-body predict the force will act? Recalling
that M
w
= Um
33
+Ux
T
m
a
(x
T
), and since m
33
= 0 for a front-back symmetric
wing, the estimated lift force acts at the trailing edge. This location will tend
to stabilize the wing, in the sense that it acts to orient the wing parallel to
the incoming ﬂow.
9.8 Convention: Hydrodynamic Mass Matrix A
Hydrodynamic derivatives that depend on accelerations are often written as
components of a mass matrix A. By listing the body-referenced velocities
in the order s = [u, v, w, p, q, r], we write (M + A)
˙
s =

F, where M is the
mass matrix of the material vessel and F is a generalized force. Therefore
A
33
= −Z
˙ w
, A
5,3
= −M
˙ w
, and so on.
68 10 PRACTICAL LIFT CALCULATIONS
10 PRACTICAL LIFT CALCULATIONS
10.1 Characteristics of Lift-Producing Mechanisms
At a small angle of attack, a slender body experiences transverse force due to:
helical body vortices, the blunt trailing end, and ﬁns. The helical body vortices
are stable and symmetric in this condition, and are convected continuously into
the wake. The low pressure associated with the vortices provides the suction
force, usually toward the stern of the vehicle. The blunt trailing end induces
lift as a product of added mass eﬀects, and can be accurately modeled with
slender body theory. A blunt trailing edge also induces some drag, which itself
is stabilizing. The ﬁns can often be properly modeled using experimental data
parametrized with aspect ratio and several other geometric quantities.
As the angle of attack becomes larger, the approximations in the ﬁn and
slender-body analysis will break down. The helical vortices can become bigger
while remaining stable, but eventually will split randomly. Some of it convects
downstream, and the rest peels away from the body; this shedding is nonsym-
metric, and greatly increases drag by widening the wake. In the limit of a 90

angle of attack, vorticity sheds as if from a bluﬀ-body, and there is little axial
convection.
10.2 Jorgensen’s Formulas
There are some heuristic and theoretical formulas for predicting transverse
force and moment on a body at various angles of attack, and we now present
one of them due to Jorgensen. The formulas provide a good systematic proce-
dure for design, and are best suited to vehicles with a blunt trailing edge. We
call the area of the stern the base area.
Let the body have length L, and reference area A
r
. This area could be the
frontal projected area, the planform area, or the wetted area. The body travels
at speed U, and angle of attack α. The normal force, axial force, and moment
coeﬃcients are deﬁned as follows:
C
N
=
F
N
1
2
ρU
2
A
r
(119)
C
A
=
F
A
1
2
ρU
2
A
r
10.2 Jorgensen’s Formulas 69
C
M
=
M
xm
1
2
ρU
2
A
r
L
.
The moment M
xm
is taken about a point x
m
, measured back from the nose; this
location is arbitrary, and appears explicitly in the formula for C
m
. Jorgensen
gives the coeﬃcients as follows:
C
N
=
A
b
A
r
sin 2αcos
α
2
+
A
p
A
r
C
dn
sin
2
α (120)
C
A
= C
Ao
cos
2
α (121)
C
M
= −
∇−A
b
(L −x
m
)
A
r
L
sin 2αcos
α
2
−C
dn
A
p
A
r

x
m
−x
c
L

sin
2
α.(122)
We have listed only the formulas for the special case of circular cross-section,
although the complete equations do account for more complex shapes. Further,
we have assumed that L >> D, which is also not a constraint in the complete
equations. The parameters used here are
• A
b
: stern base area. A
b
= 0 for a body that tapers to a point at the
stern.
• C
dn
: crossﬂow drag coeﬃcient; equivalent to that of an inﬁnite circular
cylinder. If “normal” Reynolds number Re
n
= U sin αD/ν,
– C
d
≈ 1.2, Re
n
< 3 10
5
– C
d
≈ 0.3, 3 10
5
< Re
n
< 7 10
5
– C
d
≈ 0.6, 7 10
5
< Re
n
.
• A
p
: planform area.
• C
Ao
: axial drag at zero angle of attack, both frictional and form. C
Ao
·
0.002 − 0.006 for slender streamlined bodies, based on wetted surface
area. It depends on Re = UL/ν.
• ∇: body volume.
• x
c
: distance from the nose backwards to the center of the planform area.
70 10 PRACTICAL LIFT CALCULATIONS
In the formula for normal force, we see that if A
b
= 0, only drag forces act
to create lift, through a sin
2
α-dependence. Similarly, the axial force is simply
the zero-α result, modiﬁed by cos
2
α. In both cases, scaling of U
2
into the
body principle directions is all that is required.
There are several terms that match exactly the slender-body theory approxi-
mations for small α. These are the ﬁrst term in the normal force (C
N
), and
the entire ﬁrst term in the moment (C
M
), whether or not A
b
= 0. Finally, we
note that the second term in C
M
disappears if x
m
= x
c
, i.e., if the moment is
referenced to the center of the planform area. The idea here is that the fore
and aft components of crossﬂow drag cancel out.
The aerodynamic center (again referenced toward the stern, from the nose)
can be found after the coeﬃcients are computed:
x
AC
= x
m
+
C
M
C
N
L. (123)
As written, the moment coeﬃcient is negative if the moment destabilizes the
body, while C
N
is always positive. Thus, the moment seeks to move the AC
forward on the body, but the eﬀect is moderated by the lift force.
10.3 Hoerner’s Data: Notation
An excellent reference for experimental data is the two-volume set by S. Ho-
erner. It contains a large amount of aerodynamic data from many diﬀerent
types of vehicles, wings, and other common engineering shapes. A few nota-
tions are used throughout the books, and are described here.
First, dynamic pressure is given as q =
1
2
ρU
2
, such that two typical body lift
coeﬃcients are:
C
Y
=
Y
DLq
C
Y
d
=
Y
D
2
q
.
The ﬁrst version uses the rectangular planform area as a reference, while the
second uses the square frontal area. Hence, C
Y
= C
Y
d
D/L. Two moment
coeﬃcients are:
10.4 Slender-Body Theory vs. Experiment 71
C
N
=
N
LD
2
q
C
N
1
=
N
1
LD
2
q
,
where N is the moment taken about the body mid-point, and N
1
is taken
about the nose. Note that the reference area for moment is the square frontal
projection, and the reference length is body length L. The following relation
holds for these deﬁnitions
C
N
1
= C
N
+
1
2
C
Y
d
.
The lift and moment coeﬃcients are strongly dependent on angle of attack;
Hoerner uses the notation
C
nb
=
∂C
N
∂b
C
n·b
=
∂C
N
1
∂b
C
yb
=
∂C
y
∂b
,
and so on, where b is the angle of attack, usually in degrees. It follows from
above that C
n·b
= C
nb
+ C
ydb
/2.
10.4 Slender-Body Theory vs. Experiment
In an experiment, the net moment is measured, comprising both the desta-
bilizing part due to the potential ﬂow, and the stabilizing part due to vortex
shedding or a blunt tail. Comparison of the measurements and the theory
allows us to place the action point of the suction force. This section gives the
formula for this location in Hoerner’s notation, and gives two further examples
of how well the slender-body theory matches experiments.
For L/D > 6, the slender-body (pure added mass) estimates give
˜
C
nb
·
−0.015/deg, acting to destabilize the vehicle. The value compares well with
−0.027/deg for a long cylinder and −0.018/deg for a long ellipsoid; it also
72 10 PRACTICAL LIFT CALCULATIONS
reduces to −0.009 for L/D = 4. Note that the negative sign here is consistent
with Hoerner’s convention that destabilizing moments have negative sign.
The experimental lift force is typically given by C
Y b
· 0.003/deg; this acts at
a point on the latter half of the vehicle, stabilizing the angle. Because this
coeﬃcient scales roughly with wetted area, proportional to LD, it changes
little with L/D. It can be compared with a low-aspect ratio wing, which
achieves an equivalent lift of π(AR)/2 = 0.0027 for (AR) = 10 · D/L.
The point at which the viscous forces act can then be estimated as the following
distance aft of the nose:
x
L
=
C
n·b

˜
C
nb
C
ydb
(124)
The calculation uses experimental values of C
ydb
and C
n·b
, the moment slope
referenced to the nose. In the table following are values from Hoerner (p. 13-2,
Figure 2) for a symmetric and a blunt-ended body.
symmetric blunt
L/D 6.7 6.7
˜
C
nb
-0.012 -0.012
C
yb
0.0031 0.0037
C
ydb
0.021 0.025
C
n·b
0.0012 (stable) 0.0031 (stable)
C
nb
-0.0093 (unstable) -0.0094 (unstable)
x/L 0.63 0.60
In comparing the two body shapes, we see that the moment at the nose is
much more stable (positive) for the body with a blunt trailing edge. At the
body midpoint, however, both vehicles are equally unstable. The blunt-tailed
geometry has a much larger lift force, but it acts too close to the midpoint to
The lift force dependence on the blunt tail is not diﬃcult to see, using slender-
body theory. Consider a body, with trailing edge radius r. The slender-body
lift force associated with this end is simply the product of speed U and local
a
(x
T
) (in our previous notation). It comes out to be
Z =
1
2
ρU
2
(πr
2
)(2α), (125)
such that the ﬁrst term in parentheses is an eﬀective area, and the second is
a lift coeﬃcient. With respect to the area πr
2
, the lift curve slope is therefore
10.5 Slender-Body Approximation for Fin Lift 73
2/rad. Expressed in terms of the Hoerner reference area D
2
, the equivalent
lift coeﬃcient is C
ydb
= 0.0044/deg, where we made the assumption here that
2r/D = 0.4 for the data in the table. This lift diﬀerence, due solely to the
blunt end condition, is consistent with measurements.
10.5 Slender-Body Approximation for Fin Lift
Let us now consider two ﬁns of span s each, acting at the tail end of the
vehicle. This is the case if the vehicle body tapers to a point where the ﬁns
have their trailing edge. The slender-body approximation of lift as a result of
blunt-end conditions is
Z = πs
2
ρU
2
α. (126)
Letting the aspect ratio be (AR) = (2s)
2
/A
f
, where A
f
is the total area of the
ﬁn pair, substitution will give a lift curve slope of
C

l
=
π
2
(AR).
This is known as Jones’ formula, and is quite accurate for (AR) · 1. It is
inadequate for higher-aspect ratio wings however, overestimating the lift by
about 30% when (AR) = 2, and worsening further as (AR) grows.
74 11 FINS AND LIFTING SURFACES
11 FINS AND LIFTING SURFACES
Vessels traveling at signiﬁcant speed typically use rudders, elevators, and other
streamlined control surfaces to maneuver. Their utility arises mainly from the
high lift forces they can develop, with little drag penalty. Lift is always deﬁned
to act in a direction perpendicular to the ﬂow, and drag in the same direction
as the ﬂow.
11.1 Origin of Lift
A lifting surface is nominally an extrusion of a streamlined cross-section: the
cross-section has a rounded leading edge, sharp trailing edge, and a smooth
surface. The theory of lifting surfaces centers on the Kutta condition, which
requires that ﬂuid particle streamlines do not wrap around the trailing edge
of the surface, but instead rejoin with streamlines from the other side of the
wing at the trailing edge. This fact is true for a non-stalled surface at any
angle of attack.
Since the separation point on the front of the section rotates with the angle
of attack, it is clear that the ﬂuid must travel faster over one side of the
surface than the other. The reduced Bernoulli pressure this induces can then
be thought of as the lift-producing mechanism. More formally, lift arises from
circulation Γ:
Γ =

V ds. (127)
and then L = −ρUΓ. Circulation is the integral of velocity around the cross-
section, and a lifting surface requires circulation in order to meet the Kutta
condition.
11.2 Three-Dimensional Eﬀects: Finite Length
Since all practical lifting surfaces have ﬁnite length, the ﬂow near the ends
may be three-dimensional. Prandtl’s inviscid theory provides some insight.
Since bound circulation cannot end abruptly at the wing end, it continues on
in the ﬂuid, leading to so-called wing-tip vortices. This continuation causes
induced velocities at the tips, and some induced drag. Another description for
the wing-tip vortices is that the pressure diﬀerence across the surface simply
causes ﬂow around the end.
11.3 Ring Fins 75
A critical parameter which governs the extent of three-dimensional eﬀects is
the aspect ratio:
AR =
span
chord
=
span
2
area
. (128)
The second representation is useful for non-rectangular control surfaces. The
eﬀective span is taken to be the length between the free ends of a symmetric
wing. If the wing is attached to a wall, the eﬀective span is twice the physical
value, by reﬂection, and in this case the eﬀective aspect ratio is therefore twice
the physical value.
The aspect ratio is a strong determinant of wing performance: for a given
angle of attack, a larger aspect ratio achieves a higher lift value, but also stalls
earlier.
Lift is written as
L =
1
2
ρU
2
AC
l
, (129)
where A is the single-side area of the surface. For angles of attack α below
stall, the lift coeﬃcient C
l
is nearly linear with α: C
l
= C

l
α, where C

l
is called
the lift coeﬃcient slope, and has one empirical description
C

l
=
1
1
2π¯ α
+
1
π(AR)
+
1
2π(AR)
2
, (130)
where α is in radians, ¯ α · 0.90, and AR is the eﬀective aspect ratio. When
AR →∞, the theoretical and maximum value for C

l
is 2π.
The lift generated on a surface is the result of a distributed pressure ﬁeld; this
fact creates both a net force and a net moment. A single equivalent force acts
at a so-called center of action x
A
, which depends mainly on the aspect ratio.
For high AR, x
A
· c/4, measured back from the front of the wing. For low
AR, x
A
· c/2.
11.3 Ring Fins
Ring ﬁns are useful when space allows, since they are omnidirectional, and
structurally more robust than cantilevered plane surfaces. The eﬀective aspect
ratio for a ring of diameter d is given as
AR =
4d
πc
. (131)
76 11 FINS AND LIFTING SURFACES
The eﬀective area of the ring is taken as
A
e
=
π
2
dc, (132)
and we thus have L =
1
2
ρU
2
A
e
C

l
α, where one formula for C

l
is
C

l
=
1
0.63 +
1
π(AR)
. (133)
77
12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION
12.1 Introduction
We discuss in this section the nature of steady and unsteady propulsion. In
many marine vessels and vehicles, an engine (diesel or gas turbine, say) or an
electric motor drives the propeller through a linkage of shafts, reducers, and
bearings, and the eﬀects of each part are important in the response of the net
system. Large, commercial surface vessels spend the vast majority of their time
operating in open-water and at constant speed. In this case, steady propulsion
conditions are generally optimized for fuel eﬃciency. An approximation of the
transient behavior of a system can be made using the quasi-static assumption.
In the second section, we list several low-order models of thrusters, which have
recently been used to model and simulate truly unsteady conditions.
The notation we will use is as given in Table 1, and there are two diﬀerent ﬂow
conditions to consider. Self-propelled conditions refer to the propeller being
installed and its propelling the vessel; there are no additional forces or moments
on the vessel, such as would be caused by a towing bar or hawser. Furthermore,
the ﬂow around the hull interacts with the ﬂow through the propeller. We use
an sp subscript to indicate speciﬁcally self-propulsion conditions. Conversely,
when the propeller is run in open water, i.e., not behind a hull, we use an o
subscript; when the hull is towed with no propeller we use a t subscript. When
subscripts are not used, generalization to either condition is implied. Finally,
because of similitude (using diameter D in place of L when the propeller is
involved), we do not distinguish between the magnitude of forces in model and
full-scale vessels.
12.2.1 Basic Characteristics
In the steady state, force balance in self-propulsion requires that
R
sp
= T
sp
. (134)
The gear ratio λ is usually large, indicating that the propeller turns much
more slowly than the driving engine or motor. The following relations deﬁne
the gearbox:
78 12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION
R
sp
N hull resistance under self-propulsion
R
t
N towed hull resistance (no propeller attached)
T N thrust of the propeller
n
e
Hz rotational speed of the engine
n
m
Hz maximum value of n
e
n
p
Hz rotational speed of the propeller
λ gear ratio
Q
e
Nm engine torque
Q
p
Nm propeller torque
η
g
gearbox eﬃciency
P
e
W engine power
P
p
W propeller shaft power
D m propeller diameter
U m/s vessel speed
U
p
m/s water speed seen at the propeller
Q
m
Nm maximum engine torque
f kg/s fuel rate (or energy rate in electric motor)
f
m
kg/s maximum value of f
Table 1: Nomenclature
n
e
= λn
p
(135)
Q
p
= η
g
λQ
e
,
and power follows as P
p
= η
g
P
e
, for any ﬂow condition. We call J = U
p
/n
p
D
the advance ratio of the prop when it is exposed to a water speed U
p
; note
that in the wake of the vessel, U
p
may not be the same as the speed of the
vessel U. A propeller operating in open water can be characterized by two
nondimensional parameters which are both functions of J:
K
T
=
T
o
ρn
2
p
D
4
(thrust coeﬃcient) (136)
K
Q
=
Q
po
ρn
2
p
D
5
(torque coeﬃcient). (137)
12.2 Steady Propulsion of Vessels 79
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0 0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
0.0
K
η
0
T
K
Q
η
0
K
T
J
K
Q
Figure 4: Typical thrust and torque coeﬃcients.
The open propeller eﬃciency can be written then as
η
o
=
T
o
U
2πn
p
Q
po
=
J(U)K
T
2πK
Q
. (138)
This eﬃciency divides the useful thrust power by the shaft power. Thrust and
torque coeﬃcients are typically nearly linear over a range of J, and therefore
ﬁt the approximate form:
K
T
(J) = β
1
−β
2
J (139)
K
Q
(J) = γ
1
−γ
2
J.
As written, the four coeﬃcients [β
1
, β
2
, γ
1
, γ
2
] are usually positive, as shown in
the ﬁgure.
We next introduce three factors useful for scaling and parameterizing our
mathematical models:
• U
p
= U(1 − w); w is referred to as the wake fraction. A typical wake
fraction of 0.1, for example, indicates that the incoming velocity seen by
the propeller is only 90% of the vessel’s speed. The propeller is operating
in a wake.
open water thrust of a propeller is known at a given U and n
p
. Behind
80 12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION
a vessel moving at speed U, and with the propeller spinning at the same
n
p
, the prop creates some extra thrust. w scales U at the prop and thus
J; w is then chosen so that the open water thrust coeﬃcient matches
what is observed. The wake fraction can also be estimated by making
direct velocity measurements behind the hull, with no propeller.
• R
t
= R
sp
(1 − t). Often, a propeller will increase the resistance of the
vessel by creating low-pressure on its intake side (near the hull), which
makes R
sp
> R
t
. In this case, t is a small positive number, with 0.2 as a
typical value. t is called the thrust deduction even though it is used to
model resistance of the hull; it is obviously speciﬁc to both the hull and
the propeller(s), and how they interact.
The thrust deduction is particularly useful, and can be estimated from
published values, if only the towed resistance of a hull is known.
• Q
po
= η
R
Q
psp
. The rotative eﬃciency η
R
, which may be greater than
one, translates self-propelled torque to open water torque, for the same
incident velocity U
p
, thrust T, and rotation rate n
p
. η
R
is meant to
account for spatial variations in the wake of the vessel which are not
captured by the wake fraction, as well as the turbulence induced by the
hull. Note that in comparison with the wake fraction, rotative eﬃciency
A common measure of eﬃciency, the quasi-propulsive eﬃciency, is based on
the towed resistance, and the self-propelled torque.
η
QP
=
R
t
U
2πn
p
Q
psp
(140)
=
T
o
(1 −t)U
p
η
R
2πn
p
(1 −w)Q
po
= η
o
η
R
(1 −t)
(1 −w)
.
T
o
and Q
po
are values for the inﬂow speed U
p
, and thus that η
o
is the open
propeller eﬃciency at this speed. It follows that T
o
(U
p
) = T
sp
, which was used
to complete the above equation. The quasi-propulsive eﬃciency can be greater
than one, since it relies on the towed resistance and in general R
t
> R
sp
. The
ratio (1 − t)/(1 − w) is often called the hull eﬃciency, and we see that a
12.2 Steady Propulsion of Vessels 81
small thrust deduction t and a large wake fraction w are beneﬁcial eﬀects, but
which are in competition. A high rotative eﬃciency and open water propeller
eﬃciency (at U
p
) obviously contribute to an eﬃcient overall system.
The linear form of K
T
and K
Q
(Equation 140) allows a closed-form solution
for the steady-operating conditions. Suppose that the towed resistance is of
the form
R
t
=
1
2
ρC
r
A
w
U
2
, (141)
where C
r
is the resistance coeﬃcient (which will generally depend on Re and
Fr), and A
w
is the wetted area. Equating the self-propelled thrust and resis-
tance then gives
T
sp
= R
sp
T
o
= R
t
/(1 −t)
K
T
(J(U
p
))ρn
2
p
D
4
(1 −t) =
1
2
ρC
r
A
w
U
2

1
−β
2
J(U
p
))ρn
2
p
D
4
(1 −t) =
1
2
ρC
r
A
w
U
2
p
(1 −w)
2
β
1
−β
2
J(U
p
) =
C
r
A
w
2D
2
(1 −t)(1 −w)
2
. .. .
δ
J(U
p
)
2
J(U
p
) =
−β
2
+

β
2
2
+ 4β
1
δ

. (142)
The last equation predicts the steady-state advance ratio of the vessel, depend-
ing only on the propeller open characteristics, and on the hull. The vessel speed
can be computed by recalling that J(U) = U/n
p
D and U
p
= U(1 −w), but it
is clear that we need now to ﬁnd n
p
. This requires a torque equation, which
necessitates a model of the drive engine or motor.
12.2.3 Engine/Motor Models
The torque-speed maps of many engines and motors ﬁt the form
82 12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION
1
2
3
f
f
f
m
Q /Q
e
n /n
e m
Figure 5: Typical gas turbine engine torque-speed characteristic for increasing
fuel rates f
1
, f
2
, f
3
.
Q
e
= Q
m
F(f/f
m
, n
e
/n
m
), (143)
where F() is the characteristic function. For example, gas turbines roughly ﬁt
the curves shown in the ﬁgure (Rubis). More speciﬁcally, if F() has the form
F(f/f
f
m, n
e
/n
m
) = −

a
f
f
m
+ b

n
e
n
m
+

c
f
f
m
+ d

(144)
= −α
1
n
p
n
m

+ α
2
.
then a closed-form solution for n
e
(and thus n
p
) can be found. The manipula-
tions begin by equating the engine and propeller torque:
Q
po
(J(U
p
)) = η
R
Q
psp
(J(U
p
))
ρn
2
p
D
5
K
Q
(J(U
p
)) = η
R
η
g
λQ
e
ρn
2
p
D
5

1
−γ
2
J(U
p
)) = η
R
η
g
λQ
m
F(f/f
m
, n
e
/n
m
)
n
2
p
(n
m
/λ)
2
=
η
R
η
g
λQ
m
ρD
5

1
−γ
2
J(U
p
))(n
m
/λ)
2
. .. .

−α
1
n
p
(n
m
/λ)
+ α
2

n
p
(n
m
/λ)
=
−α
1
+

2
α
2
1
+ 4α
2
2
. (145)
Note that the fuel rate enters through both α
1
and α
2
.
The dynamic response of the coupled propulsion and ship systems, under the
assumption of quasi-static propeller conditions, is given by
(m + m
a
) ˙ u = T
sp
−R
sp
(146)
2πI
p
˙ n
p
= η
g
λQ
e
−Q
psp
.
Making the necessary substitutions creates a nonlinear model with f as the
input; this is left as a problem for the reader.
When accurate positioning of the vehicle is critical, the quasi-static assumption
used above does not suﬃce. Instead, the transient behavior of the propulsion
system needs to be considered. The problem of unsteady propulsion is still in
development, although there have been some very successful models in recent
years. It should be pointed out that the models described below all pertain to
open-water conditions and electric motors, since the positioning problem has
been central to bluﬀ vehicles with multiple electric thrusters.
We use the subscript m to denote a quantity in the motor, and p for the
propeller.
12.3.1 One-State Model: Yoerger et al.
The torque equation at the propeller and the thrust relation are
I
p
˙ ω
p
= λQ
m
−K
ω
ω
p

p
[ (147)
T = C
t
ω
p

p
[. (148)
where I
p
is the total (material plus ﬂuid) inertia reﬂected to the prop;the
propeller spins at ω
p
radians per second. The diﬀerential equation in ω
p
pits
the torque delivered by the motor against a quadratic-drag type loss which
depends on rotation speed. The thrust is then given as a static map directly
from the rotation speed.
This model requires the identiﬁcation of three parameters: I
p
, K
ω
, and C
t
.
It is a ﬁrst-order, nonlinear, low-pass ﬁlter from Q
m
to T, whose bandwidth
depends directly on Q
m
.
84 12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION
12.3.2 Two-State Model: Healey et al.
The two-state model includes the velocity of a mass of water moving in the
vicinity of the blades. It can accommodate a tunnel around the propeller,
which is very common in thrusters for positioning. The torque equation, sim-
ilarly to the above, is referenced to the motor and given as
I
m
˙ ω
m
= −K
ω
ω
m
+ K
v
V −Q
p
/λ. (149)
Here, K
ω
represents losses in the motor due to spinning (friction and resistive),
and K
v
is the gain on the input voltage (so that the current ampliﬁer is included
in K
v
). The second dynamic equation is for the ﬂuid velocity at the propeller:
ρALγ
˙
U
p
= −ρA∆β(U
p
−U)[U
p
−U[ + T. (150)
Here A is the disc area of the tunnel, or the propeller disk diameter if no tunnel
exists. L denotes the length of the tunnel, and γ is the eﬀective added mass
ratio. Together, ρALγ is the added mass that is accelerated by the blades; this
mass is always nonzero, even if there is no tunnel. The parameter ∆β is called
the diﬀerential momentum ﬂux coeﬃcient across the propeller; it may be on
the order of 0.2 for propellers with tunnels, and up to 2.0 for open propellers.
The thrust and torque of the propeller are approximated using wing theory,
which invokes lift and drag coeﬃcients, as well as an eﬀective angle of attack
and the propeller pitch. However, these formulae are static maps, and therefore
introduce no new dynamics. As with the one-state model of Yoerger et al., this
version requires the identiﬁcation of the various coeﬃcients from experiments.
This model has the advantage that it creates a thrust overshoot for a step
input, which is in fact observed in experiments.
85
13 TOWING OF VEHICLES
Vehicles which are towed have some similarities to the vehicles that have been
discussed so far. For example, towed vehicles are often streamlined, and usu-
ally need good directional stability. Some towed vehicles might have active
lifting surfaces or thrusters for attitude control. On the other hand, if they
are to be supported by a cable, towed vehicles may be quite heavy in water,
and do not have to be self-propelled. The cable itself is an important factor in
the behavior of the complete towed system, and in this section, we concentrate
on cable mechanics more than vehicle characteristics, which can generally be
handled with the same tools as other vehicles, i.e., slender-body theory, wing
theory, linearization, etc.. Some basic guidelines for vehicle design are given
at the end of this section.
Modern cables can easily exceed 5000m in length, even a heavy steel cable with
2cm diameter. The cables are generally circular in cross section, and may
carry power conductors and multiple communication channels (ﬁber optic).
The extreme L/D ratio for these cables obviates any bending stiﬀness eﬀects.
Cable systems come in a variety of conﬁgurations, and one main division may
be made simply of the density of the cable. Light-tether systems are character-
ized by neutrally-buoyant (or nearly so) cables, with either a minimal vehicle
at the end, as in a towed array, or a vehicle capable of maneuvering itself, such
as a remotely-operated vehicle. The towed array is a relatively high-velocity
system that nominally streams out horizontally behind the vessel. An ROV,
on the other hand, operates at low speed, and must have large propulsors to
control the tether if there are currents. Heavy systems, in contrast, employ a
heavy cable and possibly a heavy weight; the rationale is that gravity will tend
to keep the cable vertical and make the deployment robust against currents
and towing speed. The heavy systems will generally transmit surface motions
and tensions to the towed vehicle much more easily than light-tether systems.
We will not discuss light systems speciﬁcally here, but rather look at heavy
systems. Most of the analysis can be adapted to either case, however.
13.1 Statics
13.1.1 Force Balance
For the purposes of deriving the static conﬁguration of a cable in a ﬂow, we
assume for the moment that that it is inextensible. Tension and hydrostatic
86 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES
n
T
ds
φ
T+dT
ds W
ds R
n
ds R
t
s+
U
x
y
pressure will elongate a cable, but the eﬀect is usually a small percentage of
the total length.
We employ the curvilinear axial coordinate s, which we take to be zero at the
bottom end of the cable; upwards along the cable is the positive direction.
The free-body diagram shown has the following components:
• W
n
: net in-water weight of the cable per unit length.
• R
n
(s): external normal force, per unit length.
• R
t
(s): external tangential force, per unit length.
• T(s): local tension.
• φ(s): local inclination angle.
Force balance in the tangential and normal coordinates gives two coupled
equations for T and φ:
dT
ds
amp; = amp; W
n
sin φ −R
t
(151)
T

ds
amp; = amp; W
n
cos φ + R
n
. (152)
The external forces are primarily ﬂuid drag; the tangential drag is controlled
by a frictional drag coeﬃcient C
t
, and the normal drag scales with a crossﬂow
drag coeﬃcient C
n
. In both cases, the ﬂuid velocity vector, U horizontal
toward the left, is to be projected onto the relevant axes, leading to
13.1 Statics 87
R
t
= −
1
2
ρC
t
dU
2
cos
2
φ (153)
R
n
= −
1
2
ρC
n
dU
2
sin
2
φ. (154)
Note that we simpliﬁed the drag laws from a usual form v[v[ to v
2
, since as
drawn, 0 ≤ φ ≤ π/2.
The equations for T and φ can be integrated along the cable coordinate s to
ﬁnd the cable’s static conﬁguration. Two boundary conditions are needed, and
the common case is that a force balance on the vehicle, dominated by drag,
weight, and the cable tension, provides both T(0) and φ(0). For example, a
very heavy but low-drag vehicle will impose φ(0) · π/2, with T(0) equal to
the in-water weight of the vehicle.
With regard to Cartesian coordinates x, y, the cable conﬁguration follows
dx
ds
amp; = amp; cos φ (155)
dy
ds
amp; = amp; sin φ. (156)
The simultaneous integration of all four equations (T, φ, x, y) deﬁnes the cable
conﬁguration, and current dependency may be included, say U is a function
of y.
13.1.2 Critical Angle
For very deep systems, the total weight of cable will generally exceed that the
vehicle. This gives rise to a conﬁguration in which the cable is straight for
a majority of its length, but turns as necessary at the vehicle end, to meet
the bottom boundary condition. In the straight part of the cable, normal
weight and drag components are equalized. The uniform angle is called the
critical angle φ
c
, and can be approximated easily. Let the relative importance
of weight be given as
δ =
W
n
ρC
n
dU
2
,
88 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES
85
13 TOWING OF VEHICLES
Vehicles which are towed have some similarities to the vehicles that have been
discussed so far. For example, towed vehicles are often streamlined, and usu-
ally need good directional stability. Some towed vehicles might have active
lifting surfaces or thrusters for attitude control. On the other hand, if they
are to be supported by a cable, towed vehicles may be quite heavy in water,
and do not have to be self-propelled. The cable itself is an important factor in
the behavior of the complete towed system, and in this section, we concentrate
on cable mechanics more than vehicle characteristics, which can generally be
handled with the same tools as other vehicles, i.e., slender-body theory, wing
theory, linearization, etc.. Some basic guidelines for vehicle design are given
at the end of this section.
Modern cables can easily exceed 5000min length, even a heavy steel cable with
2cm diameter. The cables are generally circular in cross section, and may
carry power conductors and multiple communication channels (ﬁber optic).
The extreme L/D ratio for these cables obviates any bending stiﬀness eﬀects.
Cable systems come in a variety of conﬁgurations, and one main division may
be made simply of the density of the cable. Light-tether systems are character-
ized by neutrally-buoyant (or nearly so) cables, with either a minimal vehicle
at the end, as in a towed array, or a vehicle capable of maneuvering itself, such
as a remotely-operated vehicle. The towed array is a relatively high-velocity
system that nominally streams out horizontally behind the vessel. An ROV,
on the other hand, operates at low speed, and must have large propulsors to
control the tether if there are currents. Heavy systems, in contrast, employ a
heavy cable and possibly a heavy weight; the rationale is that gravity will tend
to keep the cable vertical and make the deployment robust against currents
and towing speed. The heavy systems will generally transmit surface motions
and tensions to the towed vehicle much more easily than light-tether systems.
We will not discuss light systems speciﬁcally here, but rather look at heavy
systems. Most of the analysis can be adapted to either case, however.
13.1 Statics
13.1.1 Force Balance
For the purposes of deriving the static conﬁguration of a cable in a ﬂow, we
assume for the moment that that it is inextensible. Tension and hydrostatic
so that the condition dφ/ds = 0 requires from the force balance
δ cos φ
c

1
2
sin
2
φ
c
= 0.
We are considering the case of 0 < φ
c
< π/2. Substituting sin
2
φ
c
= 1−cos
2
φ
c
,
we solve a quadratic equation and keep only the positive solution:
cos φ
c
=

δ
2
+ 1 −1. (157)
In the case of a very heavy cable, δ is large, and the linear approximation of
the square root

1 + ≈ 1 + /2 gives
cos φ
c
amp; · amp;
1

−→
φ
c
amp; · amp;
π
2

1

. (158)
For a very light cable, δ is small; the same approximation gives
13.2 Linearized Dynamics 89
cos φ
c
· 1 −δ −→φ
c
·

2δ.
The table below gives some results of the exact solution, and the approxima-
tions.
δ amp; exact amp; δ >> 1 amp; δ << 1
0.1 amp; 0.44 amp; - amp; 0.45
0.2 amp; 0.61 amp; - amp; 0.63
0.5 amp; 0.91 amp; 0.57 amp; 1.00
1.0 amp; 1.14 amp; 1.07 amp; 1.41
2.0 amp; 1.33 amp; 1.32 amp; -
5.0 amp; 1.47 amp; 1.47 amp; -
13.2 Linearized Dynamics
13.2.1 Derivation
The most direct procedure for deriving useful linear dynamic equations for a
planar cable problem is to consider the total tension and angle as made up of
static parts summed with dynamic parts:
T(s, t) =
¯
T(s) +
˜
T(s, t)
φ(s, t) =
¯
φ(s) +
˜
φ(s, t).
We also write the axial deﬂection with respect to the static conﬁguration as
p(s, t), and the lateral deﬂection q(s, t). It follows that
˜
φ = ∂q/∂s. Now
augment the two static conﬁguration equations with inertial components:
m

2
p
∂t
2
amp; = amp;

¯
T
∂s
+

˜
T
∂s
−W
n
sin(
¯
φ +
˜
φ) −
1
2
ρC
t
d

U cos φ +
∂p
∂t

2
(m + m
a
)

2
q
∂t
2
amp; = amp; (
¯
T +
˜
T)

¯
φ
∂s
+

˜
φ
∂s

−W
n
cos(
¯
φ +
˜
φ) +
amp; amp;
1
2
ρC
n
d

U sin φ −
∂q
∂t

2
.
90 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES
Here the material mass of the cable per unit length is m, and its transverse
a
. Note that avoiding the drag law form v[v[ again, we have
implicitly assumed that U cos φ > [∂p/∂t[ and U sin φ > [∂q/∂t[. If it is not
the case, say U = 0, then equivalent linearization can be used for the quadratic
drag.
Now we perform the trigonometry substitutions in the weight terms, let φ ·
¯
φ
for the calculation of drag, and substitute the constitutive (Hooke’s) law

˜
T
∂s
= EA

2
p
∂s
2
.
The static solution cancels out of both governing equations, and keeping only
linear terms we obtain
m

2
p
∂t
2
amp; = amp; EA

2
p
∂s
2
−W
n
cos
¯
φ
∂q
∂s
−ρC
t
dU cos
¯
φ
∂p
∂t
(m + m
a
)

2
q
∂t
2
amp; = amp;
¯
T

2
q
∂s
2
+ EA
∂p
∂s

¯
φ
∂s
+ W
n
sin
¯
φ
∂q
∂s
−ρC
n
dU sin
¯
φ
∂q
∂t
.
The axial dynamics (p) couples with the lateral equation through the weight
term −W
n
cos
¯
φ
˜
φ. The lateral dynamics (q) couples with the axial through the
term
˜
T∂
¯
φ/∂s. An additional weight term W
n
sin
¯
φ∂q/∂s also appears. The
uncoupled dynamics are both in the form of damped wave equations
m

2
p
∂t
2
+ b
t
∂p
∂t
amp; = amp; EA

2
p
∂s
2
(m + m
a
)

2
q
∂t
2
+ b
n
∂q
∂t
amp; = amp;
¯
T

2
q
∂s
2
+ W
n
sin
¯
φ
∂q
∂s
,
where we made the substitution b
t
= ρC
t
dU cos
¯
φ and b
n
= ρC
n
dU sin
¯
φ. To a
linear approximation, the out-of-plane vibrations of a cable are also governed
by the second equation above.
Because of light damping in the tangential direction, heavy cables easily trans-
mit motions and tensions along their length, and can develop longitudinal
resonant conditions (next section). In contrast, the lateral cable motions are
heavily damped, such that disturbances only travel a few tens or hundreds of
meters before they dissipate. The nature of the lateral response, in and out
13.2 Linearized Dynamics 91
of the towing plane, is a very slow, damped nonlinear ﬁlter. High-frequency
vessel motions in the horizontal plane are completely missed by the vehicle,
while low-frequency motions occur sluggishly, and only after a signiﬁcant delay
time.
amp; axial amp; lateral
wave speed amp;

EA
m
amp;

¯
T(s)
m+ma
amp; FAST amp; SLOW
natural frequency amp;

L

EA
m
amp; O

L

¯
T(L/2)
m+ma

mode shape amp; sine/cosine amp; Bessel function
damping amp; C
t
· O(0.01) amp; C
n
· O(1)
disturbances amp; amp;
travel down amp; YES amp; NO
cable? amp; amp;
13.2.2 Damped Axial Motion
Mode Shape. The axial direction is of particular interest, since it is lightly
damped and forced by the heaving of vessels in seas. Consider a long cable
governed by the damped wave equation
m¨ p + b
t
˙ p = EAp

(159)
We use over-dots to indicate time derivatives, and primes to indicate spatial
derivatives. At the surface, we impose the motion
p(L, t) = P cos ωt, (160)
while the towed vehicle, at the lower end, is an undamped mass responding to
the local tension variations:
EA
∂p(0, t)
∂s
= M¨ p(0, t). (161)
These top and bottom behaviors comprise the boundary conditions for the
wave equation. We let p(s, t) = ˜ p(s) cos ωt, so that
92 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES
˜ p

+

2
−iωb
t
EA

˜ p = 0. (162)
This admits the solution ˜ p(s) = c
1
cos ks + c
2
sin ks, where
k =

2
−iωb
t
EA
. (163)
Note that k is complex when b
t
= 0. The top and bottom boundary conditions
give, respectively,
P amp; = amp; c
1
cos kL + c
2
sin kL
0 amp; = amp; c
1
+ δc
2
,
where δ = EAk/ω
2
M. These can be combined to give the solution
˜ p = P
δ cos ks −sin ks
δ cos kL −sin kL
. (164)
In the case that M → 0, the scalar δ → ∞, simplifying the result to ˜ p =
P cos ks/ cos kL.
Dynamic Tension. It is possible to compute the dynamic tension via
˜
T =
EA˜ p

. We obtain
˜
T = −EAPk
δ sin ks + cos ks
δ cos kL −sin kL
. (165)
There are two dangerous situations:
• The maximum tension is
¯
T +[
˜
T[ and must be less than the working load
of the cable. This is normally problematic at the top of the cable, where
the static tension is highest.
• If [
˜
T[ >
¯
tremely high impulsive forces. This is known as snap loading; it occurs
primarily at the vehicle, where
¯
T is low.
Natural Frequency. The natural frequency can be found by letting b
t
= 0,
and investigating the singularity of ˜ p, for which δ cos kL = sin kL. In general,
13.2 Linearized Dynamics 93
kL << 1, but we ﬁnd that a ﬁrst-order approximation yields ω =

EA/LM,
which is only a correct answer if M >> mL, i.e., the system is dominated by
the vehicle mass. Some higher order terms need to be kept. We start with
better approximations for sin() and cos():
δ

1 −
(kL)
2
2

= kL

1 −
(kL)
2
6

.
Employing the deﬁnition for δ, and recalling that ω
2
= k
2
EA/m, we arrive at
mL
M

1 −
(kL)
2
2

= (kL)
2

1 −
(kL)
2
6

.
If we match up to second order in kL, then
ω =

EA/L
M + mL/2
.
This has the familiar form of the square root of a stiﬀness divided by a mass:
the stiﬀness of the cable is EA/L, and the mass that is oscillating is M+mL/2.
In very deep water, the eﬀects of mL/2 dominate; if ρ
c
= m/A is the density
of the cable, we have the approximation
ω ·
1
L

2E
ρ
c
.
A few examples are given below for a steel cable with E = 200 10
9
Pa, and
ρ
c
= 7000kg/m
3
. The natural frequencies near wave excitation at the surface
vessel must be taken into account in any design or deployment. Even if a
cable can withstand the eﬀects of resonance, it may be undesirable to expose
the vehicle to these motions. Some solutions in use today are: stable vessels
(e.g., SWATH), heave compensation through an active crane, a clump weight
below which a light cable is employed, and an S-shaped length of cable at the
bottom formed with ﬂotation balls.
94 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES
L = 500m amp; ω
n
13.3 Cable Strumming
Cable strumming causes a host of problems, including obvious fatigue when
the amplitudes and frequencies are high. The most noteworthy issue with
towing is that the vibrations may cause the normal drag coeﬃcient C
n
to
increase dramatically – from about 1.2 for a non-oscillating cable to as high
as 3.5. This drag penalty decreases the critical angle of towing, so that larger
lengths of cable are needed to reach a given depth, and the towed system lags
further and further behind the surface vessel. The static tension will increase
accordingly as well.
Strumming of cables is caused by the proximity of a preferred vortex forma-
tion frequency ω
S
to the natural frequency of the structure ω
n
. This latter
frequency can be obtained as a zero of the lightly-damped Bessel function
solution of the lateral dynamics equation above. The preferred frequency of
vortex formation is given by the empirical relation ω
S
= 2πSU/d, where S
is the Strouhal number, about 0.16-0.20 for a large range of Re. Strumming
of amplitude d/2 or greater can occur for 0.6 < ω
S

n
< 2.0. The book by
Blevins is a good general reference.
13.4 Vehicle Design
The physical layout of a towed vehicle is amenable to the analysis tools of
self-propelled vehicles, with the main exceptions that the towpoint presents
a large mean force as well as some disturbances, and that the vehicle can be
quite heavy in water. Here are basic guidelines to be considered:
1. The towpoint must be located above the vehicle center of in-water weight,
for basic roll and pitch stability.
2. The towpoint should be forward of the aerodynamic center, for towing
stability reasons.
3. The combined center of mass (material and added mass) should be longi-
tudinally between the towpoint and the aerodynamic center, and nearer
13.4 Vehicle Design 95
the towpoint. This will ensure that high-frequency disturbances do not
induce excessive pitching.
4. The towpoint should be longitudinally forward of the center of in-air
weight, so that the vehicle enters the water ﬁns ﬁrst, and self-stabilizes
with U > 0.
5. The center of buoyancy should be behind the in-water center of weight,
so that the vehicle pitches downward at small U, and hence the net lift
force is downward, away from the surface.
Meeting all of these criteria simultaneously is no small feat, and the perfor-
mance of the device is very sensitive to small perturbations in the geometry.
For this reason, full-scale experiments are commonly used in the design pro-
cess.
96 14 TRANSFER FUNCTIONS & STABILITY
14 TRANSFER FUNCTIONS & STABILITY
The reader is referred to Laplace Transforms in the section MATH FACTS for
preliminary material on the Laplace transform. Partial fractions are presented
here, in the context of control systems, as the fundamental link between pole
locations and stability.
14.1 Partial Fractions
Solving linear time-invariant systems by the Laplace Transform method will
generally create a signal containing the (factored) form
Y (s) =
K(s + z
1
)(s + z
2
) (s + z
m
)
(s + p
1
)(s + p
2
) (s + p
n
)
. (166)
Although for the moment we are discussing the signal Y (s), later we will see
that dynamic systems are described in the same format: in that case we call
the impulse response G(s) a transfer function. A system transfer function is
identical to its impulse response, since L(δ(t)) = 1.
The constants −z
i
are called the zeros of the transfer function or signal, and
−p
i
are the poles. Viewed in the complex plane, it is clear that the magnitude
of Y (s) will go to zero at the zeros, and to inﬁnity at the poles.
Partial fraction expansions alter the form of Y (s) so that the simple transform
pairs can be used to ﬁnd the time-domain output signals. We must have
m < n; if this is not the case, then we have to divide the numerator by the
denominator as necessary to ﬁnd a simple form.
14.2 Partial Fractions: Unique Poles
Under the condition m < n, it is a fact that Y (s) is equivalent to
Y (s) =
a
1
s + p
1
+
a
2
s + p
2
+
a
n
s + p
n
, (167)
in the special case that all of the poles are unique and real. The coeﬃcient
a
i
is termed the residual associated with the i’th pole, and once all these are
found it is a simple matter to go back to the transform table and look up the
time-domain responses.
14.3 Example: Partial Fractions with Unique Real Poles 97
How to ﬁnd a
i
? A simple rule applies: multiply the right-hand sides of the
two equations above by (s + p
i
), evaluate them at s = −p
i
, and solve for a
i
,
the only one left.
14.3 Example: Partial Fractions with Unique Real Poles
G(s) =
s(s + 6)
(s + 4)(s −1)
e
−2s
.
Since we have a pure delay and m = n, we can initially work with G(s)/se
−2s
.
We have
s + 6
(s + 4)(s −1)
=
a
1
s + 4
+
a
2
s −1
, giving
a
1
=

(s+6)(s+4)
(s+4)(s−1)

s=−4
= −
2
5
a
2
=

(s+6)(s−1)
(s+4)(s−1)

s=1
=
7
5
Thus
L
−1
(G(s)/se
−2s
) = −
2
5
e
−4t
+
7
5
e
t
−→
g(t) = δ(t −2) +
8
5
e
−4(t−2)
+
7
5
e
t−2
.
The impulse response is needed to account for the step change at t = 2. Note
that in this example, we were able to apply the derivative operator s after
expanding the partial fractions. For cases where a second derivative must be
taken, i.e., m ≥ n + 1, special care should be used when accounting for the
signal slope discontinuity at t = 0. The more traditional method, exempliﬁed
by Ogata, may prove easier to work through.
The case of repeated real roots may be handled elegantly, but this condition
rarely occurs in applications.
98 14 TRANSFER FUNCTIONS & STABILITY
14.4 Partial Fractions: Complex-Conjugate Poles
A complex-conjugate pair of poles should be kept together, with the following
procedure: employ the form
Y (s) =
b
1
s + b
2
(s + p
1
)(s + p
2
)
+
a
3
s + p
3
+ , (168)
where p
1
= p

2
(complex conjugate). As before, multiply through by (s +
p
1
)(s + p
2
), and then evaluate at s = −p
1
.
14.5 Example: Partial Fractions with Complex Poles
G(s) =
s + 1
s(s + j)(s −j)
=
b
1
s + b
2
(s + j)(s −j)
+
a
3
s
:
¸
s + 1
s

s=−j
= [b
1
s + b
2
]
s=−j
−→
1 + j = −b
1
j + b
2
−→
b
1
= −1
b
2
= 1; also
¸
s + 1
(s + j)(s −j)
¸
s=0
= a
3
= 1.
Working out the inverse transforms from the table of pairs, we have simply
(noting that ζ = 0)
g(t) = −cos t + sin t + 1(t).
14.6 Stability in Linear Systems
In linear systems, exponential stability occurs when all the real exponents of e
are strictly negative. The signals decay within an exponential envelope. If one
exponent is 0, the response never decays or grows in amplitude; this is called
marginal stability. If at least one real exponent is positive, then one element
of the response grows without bound, and the system is unstable.
14.7 Stability ⇐⇒ Poles in LHP 99
14.7 Stability ⇐⇒ Poles in LHP
In the context of partial fraction expansions, the relationship between stability
and pole locations is especially clear. The unit step function 1(t) has a pole at
zero, the exponential e
−at
has a pole at −a, and so on. All of the other pairs
exhibit the same property: A system is stable if and only if all of the poles
occur in the left half of the complex plane. Marginally stable parts correlate
with a zero real part, and unstable parts to a positive real part.
14.8 General Stability
There are two deﬁnitions, which apply to systems with input u(t) and output
y(t).
1. Exponential. If u(t) =

0 and y(0) = y
o
, then [y
i
(t)[ < αe
−γt
, for ﬁnite
α and γ > 0. The output asymptotically approaches zero, within a
decaying exponential envelope.
2. Bounded-Input Bounded-Output (BIBO). If y(0) =

0, and [f
i
(t)[ <
γ, γ > 0 and ﬁnite, then [y
i
(t)[ < α, α > 0 and ﬁnite.
In linear time-invariant systems, the two deﬁnitions are identical. Exponential
stability is easy to check for linear systems, but for nonlinear systems, BIBO
stability is usually easier to achieve.
100 15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
15.1 Introduction
15.1.1 Plants, Inputs, and Outputs
Controller design is about creating dynamic systems that behave in useful
ways. Many target systems are physical; we employ controllers to steer ships,
ﬂy jets, position electric motors and hydraulic actuators, and distill alcohol.
Controllers are also applied in macro-economics and many other important,
non-physical systems. It is the fundamental concept of controller design that
a set of input variables acts through a given “plant” to create an output.
Feedback control then uses sensed plant outputs to apply corrective inputs:
Plant Inputs Outputs Sensors
Jet aircraft elevator, rudder, etc. altitude, hdg altimeter, GPS
Marine vessel rudder angle heading gyrocompass
Hydraulic robot valve position tip position joint angle
U.S. economy fed interest rate, etc. prosperity inﬂation, M1
Nuclear reactor cooling, neutron ﬂux power level temp., pressure
15.1.2 The Need for Modeling
Eﬀective control system design usually beneﬁts from an accurate model of
the plant, although it must be noted that many industrial controllers can be
tuned up satisfactorily with no knowledge of the plant. Ziegler and Nichols, for
example, developed a general recipe which we detail later. In any event, plant
models simply do not match real-world systems exactly; we can only hope to
capture the basic components in the form of diﬀerential or integro-diﬀerential
equations.
Beyond prediction of plant behavior based on physics, the process of system
identiﬁcation generates a plant model from data. The process is often prob-
lematic, however, since the measured response could be corrupted by sensor
noise or physical disturbances in the system which cause it to behave in unpre-
dictable ways. At some frequency high enough, most systems exhibit eﬀects
that are diﬃcult to model or reproduce, and this is a limit to controller per-
formance.
15.2 Representing Linear Systems 101
15.1.3 Nonlinear Control
The bulk of this subject is taught using the tools of linear systems analysis.
The main reason for this restriction is that nonlinear systems are diﬃcult
to model, diﬃcult to design controllers for, and diﬃcult overall! Within the
paradigm of linear systems, there are many sets of powerful tools available.
The reader interested in nonlinear control is referred to the book by Slotine
and Li.
15.2 Representing Linear Systems
Except for the most heuristic methods of tuning up simple systems, control
system design depends on a model of the plant. The transfer function de-
scription of linear systems has already been described in the discussion of the
Laplace transform. The state-space form is an entirely equivalent time-domain
representation that makes a clean extension to systems with multiple inputs
and multiple outputs, and opens the way to standard tools from linear algebra.
15.2.1 Standard State-Space Form
We write a linear system in a state-space form as follows
˙ x = Ax + Bu + Gw (169)
y = Cx + Du + v
where
• x is a state vector, with as many elements as there are orders in the
governing diﬀerential equations.
• A is a matrix mapping x to its derivative; A captures the natural dy-
namics of the system without external inputs.
• B is an input gain matrix for the control input u.
• G is a gain matrix for unknown disturbance w; w drives the state just
like the control u.
• y is the observation vector, comprised mainly of a linear combination of
states Cx (where C is a matrix.
102 15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
• Du is a direct map from input to output (usually zero for physical sys-
tems).
• v is an unknown sensor noise which corrupts the measurement.
u
w
B
G
A
1/s C
v
D
y
+
+
+
+
+
+
x x’
15.2.2 Converting a State-Space Model into a Transfer Function
There are a number of canonical state-space forms available, which can create
the same transfer function. In the case of no disturbances or noise, the transfer
function (or transfer matrix) can be written as
G(s) =
y(s)
u(s)
= C(sI −A)
−1
B + D, (170)
where I is the identity matrix with the same size as A. A similar equation
holds for y(s)/w(s), and clearly y(s)/v(s) = I.
15.2.3 Converting a Transfer Function into a State-Space Model
It may be possible to write the corresponding diﬀerential equation along one
row of the state vector, and then cascade derivatives. For example, consider
the following system:
my

(t) + by

(t) + ky(t) = u

(t) + u(t) (mass-spring-dashpot)
G(s) =
s + 1
ms
2
+ bs + k
15.3 PID Controllers 103
Setting x = [y

, y]
T
, we obtain the system
dx
dt
=
¸
−b/m −k/m
1 0
¸
x +
¸
1/m
0
¸
u
y = [1 1] x
Note speciﬁcally that dx
2
/dt = x
1
, leading to an entry of 1 in the oﬀ-diagonal
of the second row in A. Entries in the C-matrix are easy to write in this case
because of linearity; the system response to u

is the same as the derivative of
the system response to u.
15.3 PID Controllers
The most common type of industrial controller is the proportional-integral-
derivative (PID) design. If u is the output from the controller, and e is the
error signal it receives, this control law has the form
u(t) = k
p
e(t) + k
i

t
0
e(τ)dτ + k
d
e

(t),
C(s) =
U(s)
E(s)
= k
p
+
k
i
s
+ k
d
s (171)
= k
p
¸
1 +
1
τ
i
s
+ τ
d
s

,
where the last line is written using the conventions of one overall gain k
p
, plus
a time characteristic to the integral part (τ
i
) and and time characteristic to
the derivative part (τ
d
).
In words, the proportional part of this control law will create a control action
that scales linearly with the error – we often think of this as a spring-like action.
The integrator is accumulating the error signal over time, and so the control
action from this part will continue to grow as long as an error exists. Finally,
the derivative action scales with the derivative of the error. The controller will
retard motion toward zero error, which helps to reduce overshoot.
The common variations are: P, PD, PI, PID.
15.4 Example: PID Control
Consider the case of a mass (m) sliding on a frictionless table. It has a per-
fect thruster that generates force u(t), but is also subject to an unknown
104 15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
disturbance d(t). If the linear position of the mass is y(t), and it is perfectly
measured, we have the plant
my

(t) = u(t) + d(t).
Suppose that the desired condition is simply y(t) = 0, with initial conditions
y(0) = y
o
and y

(0) = 0.
15.4.1 Proportional Only
A proportional controller alone invokes the control law u(t) = −k
p
y(t), so that
the closed-loop dynamics follow
my

(t) = −k
p
y(t) + d(t).
In the absence of d(t), we see that y(t) = y
o
cos

kp
m
t, a marginally stable
response that is undesirable.
15.4.2 Proportional-Derivative Only
Let u(t) = −k
p
y(t) −k
d
y

(t), and it follows that
my

(t) = −k
p
y(t) −k
d
y

(t) + d(t).
The system now resembles a second-order mass-spring-dashpot system where
k
p
plays the part of the spring, and k
d
the part of the dashpot. With an
excessively large value for k
d
, the system would be overdamped and very slow
to respond to any command. In most applications, a small amount of overshoot
is employed because the response time is shorter. The k
d
value for critical
damping in this example is 2

mk
p
, and so the rule is k
d
< 2

mk
p
. The
result, easily found using the Laplace transform, is
y(t) = y
o
e
−k
d
2m
t
¸
cos ω
d
t +
k
d
2mω
d
sin ω
d
t
¸
,
15.5 Heuristic Tuning 105
where ω
d
=

4mk
p
−k
2
d
/2m. This response is exponentially stable as desired.
Note that if the mass had a very large amount of natural damping, a negative
k
d
could be used to cancel some of its eﬀect and speed up the system response.
Now consider what happens if d(t) has a constant bias d
o
: it balances exactly
the proportional control part, eventually settling out at y(t = ∞) = d
o
/k
p
. To
achieve good rejection of d
o
with a PD controller, we would need to set k
p
very
large. However, very large values of k
p
will also drive the resonant frequency
ω
d
up, which is unacceptable.
15.4.3 Proportional-Integral-Derivative
Now let u(t) = −k
p
y(t) −k
i

t
0
y(τ)dτ −k
d
y

(t): we have
my

(t) = −k
p
y(t) −k
i

t
0
y(τ)dτ −k
d
y

(t) + d(t).
The control system has now created a third-order closed-loop response. If
d(t) = d
o
, a time derivative leads to
my

(t) + k
p
y

(t) + k
i
y(t) + k
d
y

(t) = 0,
so that y(t = ∞) = 0, as desired, provided the roots are stable.
15.5 Heuristic Tuning
For many practical systems, tuning of a PID controller may proceed without
any system model. This is especially pertinent for plants which are open-loop
stable, and can be safely tested with varying controllers. One useful approach
is due to Ziegler and Nichols (1942), which transforms the basic characteristics
of a step response (e.g., the input is 1(t)) into a reasonable PID design. The
idea is to approximate the response curve by a ﬁrst-order lag (gain k and time
constant τ) and a pure delay T:
G(s) ·
ke
−Ts
τs + 1
(172)
The following rules apply only if the plant contains no dominating, lightly-
damped complex poles, and has no poles at the origin:
106 15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
P k
p
= 1.0τ/T
PI k
p
= 0.9τ/T k
i
= 0.27τ/T
2
PID k
p
= 1.2τ/T k
i
= 0.60τ/T
2
k
d
= 0.60τ
Note that if no pure time delay exists (T = 0), this recipe suggests the pro-
portional gain can become arbitrarily high! Any characteristic other than a
true ﬁrst-order lag would therefore be expected to cause a measurable delay.
15.6 Block Diagrams of Systems
15.6.1 Fundamental Feedback Loop
The topology of a feedback system can be represented graphically by consid-
ering each dynamical system element to reside within a box, having an input
line and an output line. For example, the plant used above (a simple mass)
has transfer function P(s) = 1/ms
2
, which relates the input, force u(s), into
the output, position y(s). In turn, the PD-controller has transfer function
C(s) = k
p
+ k
d
s; its input is the error signal E(s) = −y(s), and its output is
force u(s). The feedback loop in block diagram form is shown below.
u(s) y(s)
C(s) P(s)
15.6.2 Block Diagrams: General Case
The simple feedback system above is augmented in practice by three external
inputs. The ﬁrst is a process disturbance, which can be taken to act at the
input of the physical plant, or at the output. In the former case, it is additive
with the control action, and so has some physical meaning. In the second case,
the disturbance has the same units as the plant output.
Another external input is the reference command or setpoint, used to create a
more general error signal e(s) = r(s) − y(s). Note that the feedback loop, in
trying to force e(s) to zero, will necessarily make y(s) approximate r(s).
The ﬁnal input is sensor noise, which usually corrupts the feedback signal y(s),
causing some error in the evaluation of e(s), and so on. Sensors with very poor
15.6 Block Diagrams of Systems 107
noise properties can ruin the performance of a control system, no matter how
perfectly understood are the other components.
y
r
e
u
C
u
d
y
d
n
P
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
+
15.6.3 Primary Transfer Functions
Some algebra shows that
e
r
=
1
1 + PC
= S
y
r
=
PC
1 + PC
= T
u
r
=
C
1 + CP
= U.
e/r = S relates the reference input and noise to the error, and is known as the
sensitivity function. We would generally like S to be small at low frequencies,
so that the tracking error there is small. y/r = T is called the complementary
sensitivity function. Note that S + T = 1, implying that these two functions
must always trade oﬀ; they cannot both be small or large at the same time.
Other systems we encounter again later are the (forward) loop transfer function
PC, the loop transfer function broken between C and P: CP, and
e
d
u
=
−P
1 + PC
y
d
u
=
P
1 + PC
u
d
u
=
−CP
1 + CP
e
d
y
=
−1
1 + PC
= −S
108 15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
y
d
y
=
1
1 + PC
= S
u
d
y
=
−C
1 + CP
= −U
e
n
=
−1
1 + PC
= −S
y
n
=
−PC
1 + PC
= −T
u
n
=
−C
1 + CP
= −U.
If the disturbance is taken at the plant output, then the three functions S, T,
and U (control action) completely describe the system. This will in fact be
the procedure when we address loopshaping.
109
16 MODAL ANALYSIS
16.1 Introduction
The evolution of states in a linear system occurs through independent modes,
which can be driven by external inputs, and observed through plant output.
This section provides the basis for modal analysis of systems. Throughout, we
use the state-space description of a system with D = 0:
˙
x = Ax + Bu
y = Cx.
16.2 Matrix Exponential
16.2.1 Deﬁnition
In the instance of an unforced response to initial conditions, consider the
system
˙
x = Ax, x(t = 0) = χ.
In the scalar case, the response is x(t) = χe
at
, giving a decaying exponential
if a < 0. The same notation holds for the case of a vector x, and matrix A:
x(t) = e
At
χ, where
e
At
= I + At +
(At)
2
2!
+
e
At
is usually called the matrix exponential.
16.2.2 Modal Canonical Form
Introductory material on the eigenvalue problem and modal decomposition
can be found in the MATH FACTS section. This modal decomposition of A
leads to a very useful state-space representation. Namely, since A = V ΛV
−1
,
a transformation of state variables can be made, x = V z, leading to
110 16 MODAL ANALYSIS
˙
z = Λz + V
−1
Bu (173)
y = CV z.
This is called the modal canonical form, since the states are simply the modal
amplitudes. These states are uncoupled in Λ, but may be coupled through the
input (V
−1
B) and output (CV ) mappings. The modal form is numerically
robust for computations.
16.2.3 Modal Decomposition of Response
Now we are ready to look at the matrix exponential e
At
in terms of its con-
stituent modes. Employing the above form for A, we ﬁnd that
e
At
= I + At +
(At)
2
2!
+
= V

I + Λt +
(Λt)
2
2!
+

W
T
= V e
Λt
W
T
=
n
¸
i=1
e
λ
i
t
v
i
w
T
i
.
In terms of the response to an initial condition χ, we have
x(t) =
n
¸
i=1
e
λ
i
t
v
i
( w
T
i
χ).
The product w
T
i
χ is a scalar, the projection of the initial conditions onto the
i’th mode. If χ is perpendicular to w
i
, then the product is zero and the i’th
mode does not respond. Otherwise, the i’th mode does participate in the
response. The projection of the i’th mode onto the states x is through the
right eigenvector v
i
.
For stability of the system, the eigenvalues of A, that is, λ
i
, must have neg-
ative real parts; they are in fact the poles of the equivalent transfer function
description.
16.3 Forced Response and Controllability 111
16.3 Forced Response and Controllability
Now consider the system with an external input u:
˙
x = Ax + Bu, x(t = 0) = χ.
Taking the Laplace transform of the system, taking into account the initial
condition for the derivative, we have
sx(s) − χ = Ax(s) + Bu(s) −→
x(s) = (sI −A)
−1
χ + (sI −A)
−1
Bu(s).
Thus (sI − A)
−1
can be recognized as the Laplace transform of the matrix
exponential e
At
. In the time domain, the second term then has the form of a
convolution of the matrix exponential and the net input Bu:
x(t) =

t
0
e
A(t−τ)
Bu(τ)dτ
=
n
¸
i=1

t
0
e
λ
i
(t−τ)
v
i
w
T
i
Bu(τ)dτ.
Suppose now that there are m inputs, such that B = [

b
1
,

b
2
, ,

b
m
]. Then
some rearrangement will give
x(t) =
n
¸
i=1
v
i
m
¸
k=1
( w
T
i

b
k
)

t
0
e
λ
i
(t−τ)
u
k
(τ)dτ.
The product w
T
i

b
k
, a scalar, represents the projection of the k’th control chan-
nel onto the i’th mode. We say that the i’th mode is controllable from the
k’th input if the product is nonzero. If a given mode i has w
T
i

b
k
= 0 for all
input channels k, then the mode is uncontrollable.
In normal applications, controllability for the entire system is checked using
the following test: Construct the so-called controllability matrix:
M
c
= [B, AB, , A
n−1
B]. (174)
This matrix has size n (nm), where m is the number of input channels. If
M
c
has rank n, then the system is controllable, i.e., all modes are controllable.
112 16 MODAL ANALYSIS
16.4 Plant Output and Observability
We now turn to a related question: can the complete state vector of the system
be observed given only the output measurements y, and the known control u?
The response due to the external input is easy to compute deterministically,
through the convolution integral. Consider the part due to initial conditions
χ. We found above
x(t) =
n
¸
i=1
e
λ
i
t
v
i
w
T
i
χ.
The observation is y = Cx (r channels of output), and writing
C =

c
T
1

c
T
r
¸
¸
¸ .
the k’th channel of the output is
y
k
(t) =
n
¸
i=1
(c
T
k
v
i
)e
λ
i
t
( w
T
i
χ).
The i’th mode is observable in the k’th output if the product c
T
k
v
i
= 0. We
say that a system is observable if every mode can be seen in at least one output
channel. The usual test for system observability requires computation of the
observability matrix:
M
o
=

C
T
, A
T
C
T
, , (A
T
)
n−1
C
T

. (175)
This matrix has size n (rn); the system is observable if M
o
has rank n.
113
17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING
17.1 Introduction
This section formalizes the notion of loopshaping for linear control system
design. The loopshaping approach is inherently two-fold. First, we shape the
open-loop transfer function (or matrix) P(s)C(s), to meet performance and
robustness speciﬁcations. Once this is done, then the compensator must be
computed, from from knowing the nominal product P(s)C(s), and the nominal
plant P(s).
Most of the analysis here is given for single-input, single-output systems, but
the link to multivariable control is not too diﬃcult. In particular, absolute
values of transfer functions are replaced with the maximum singular values of
transfer matrices. Design based on singular values is the idea of L
2
-control, or
LQG/LTR, to be presented in the next lectures.
17.2 Roots of Stability – Nyquist Criterion
We consider the SISO feedback system with reference trajectory r(s) and plant
output y(s), as given previously. The tracking error signal is deﬁned as e(s) =
r(s) −y(s), thus forming the negative feedback loop. The sensitivity function
is written as
S(s) =
e(s)
r(s)
=
1
1 + P(s)C(s)
,
where P(s) represents the plant transfer function, and C(s) the compensator.
The closed-loop characteristic equation, whose roots are the poles of the closed-
loop system, is 1 + P(s)C(s) = 0, equivalent to P(s)C(s) + P(s)C(s) =
0, where the underline and overline denote the denominator and numerator,
respectively. The Nyquist criterion allows us to assess the stability properties
of a system based on P(s)C(s) only. This method for design involves plotting
the complex loci of P(s)C(s) for the range ω = [−∞, ∞]. There is no explicit
calculation of the closed-loop poles, and in this sense the design approach is
quite diﬀerent from the root-locus method (see Ogata).
114 17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING
17.2.1 Mapping Theorem
We impose a reasonable assumption from the outset: The number of poles in
P(s)C(s) exceeds the number of zeros. It is a reasonable constraint because
otherwise the loop transfer function could pass signals with inﬁnitely high
frequency. In the case of a PID controller (two zeros) and a second-order zero-
less plant, this constraint can be easily met by adding a high-frequency rolloﬀ
to the compensator, the equivalent of low-pass ﬁltering the error signal.
Let F(s) = 1 + P(s)C(s). The heart of the Nyquist analysis is the mapping
theorem, which answers the following question: How do paths in the s-plane
map into paths in the F-plane? We limit ourselves to closed, clockwise(CW)
paths in the s-plane, and the remarkable result of the mapping theorem is
Every zero of F(s) enclosed in the s-plane generates exactly one CW encir-
clement of the origin in the F(s)-plane. Conversely, every pole of F(s) enclosed
in the s-plane generates exactly one CCW encirclement of the origin in the
F(s)-plane. Since CW and CCW encirclements of the origin may cancel, the
relation is often written Z −P = CW.
The trick now is to make the trajectory in the s-plane enclose all unstable poles,
i.e., the path encloses the entire right-half plane, moving up the imaginary
axis, and then proceeding to the right at an arbitrarily large radius, back to
the negative imaginary axis.
Since the zeros of F(s) are in fact the poles of the closed-loop transfer function,
e.g., S(s), stability requires that there are no zeros of F(s) in the right-half
s-plane. This leads to a slightly shorter form of the above relation:
P = CCW. (176)
In words, stability requires that the number of unstable poles in F(s) is equal
to the number of CCW encirclements of the origin, as s sweeps around the
entire right-half s-plane.
17.2.2 Nyquist Criterion
The Nyquist criterion now follows from one translation. Namely, encirclements
of the origin by F(s) are equivalent to encirclements of the point (−1 + 0j)
by F(s) −1, or P(s)C(s). Then the stability criterion can be cast in terms of
the unstable poles of P(s)C(s), instead of those of F(s):
P = CCW ←→ closed-loop stability (177)
17.2 Roots of Stability – Nyquist Criterion 115
This is in fact the complete Nyquist criterion for stability. It is a necessary and
suﬃcient condition that the number of unstable poles in the loop transfer func-
tion P(s)C(s) must be matched by an equal number of CCW encirclements
of the critical point (−1 + 0j).
There are several details to keep in mind when making Nyquist plots:
• If neither the plant nor the controller have unstable modes, then the loci
of P(s)C(s) must not encircle the critical point at all.
• Because the path taken in the s-plane includes negative frequencies (i.e.,
the negative imaginary axis), the loci of P(s)C(s) occur as complex
conjugates – the plot is symmetric about the real axis.
• The requirement that the number of poles in P(s)C(s) exceeds the num-
ber of zeros means that at high frequencies, P(s)C(s) always decays such
that the loci go to the origin.
• For the multivariable (MIMO) case, the procedure of looking at individ-
ual Nyquist plots for each element of a transfer matrix is unreliable and
outdated. Referring to the multivariable deﬁnition of S(s), we should
count the encirclements for the function [det(I +P(s)C(s)) −1] instead
of P(s)C(s). The use of gain and phase margin in design is similar to
the SISO case.
17.2.3 Robustness on the Nyquist Plot
The question of robustness in the presence of modelling errors is central to
control system design. There are two natural measures of robustness for the
Nyquist plot, each having a very clear graphical representation. The loci need
to stay away from the critical point; how close the loci come to it can be
expressed in terms of magnitude and angle.
• When the angle of P(s)C(s) is −180

, the magnitude [P(s)C(s)[ should
not be near one.
• When the magnitude [P(s)C(s)[ = 1, its angle should not be −180

.
These notions lead to deﬁnition of the gain margin k
g
and phase margin γ for
a design. As the ﬁgure shows, the deﬁnition of k
g
is diﬀerent for stable and
unstable P(s)C(s). Rules of thumb are as follows. For a stable plant, k
g
≥ 2
and γ ≥ 30

; for an unstable plant, k
g
≤ 0.5 and γ ≥ 30

.
116 17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING
g
Re(s)
1/k
Re(s)
Im(s) Im(s) P(s)C(s)
P(s)C(s)
γ
γ
g
1/k
Stable P(s)C(s) Unstable P(s)C(s)
17.3 Design for Nominal Performance
Performance requirements of a feedback controller, using the nominal plant
model, can be cast in terms of the Nyquist plot. We restrict the discussion to
the scalar case in the following sections.
Since the sensitivity function maps reference input r(s) to tracking error e(s),
we know that [S(s)[ should be small at low frequencies. For example, if one-
percent tracking is to be maintained for all frequencies below ω = λ, then
[S(s)[ < 0.01, ∀ω < λ. This can be formalized by writing
[W
1
(s)S(s)[ < 1, (178)
where W
1
(s) is a stable weighting function of frequency. To force S(s) to be
small at low ω, W
1
(s) should be large in the same range. The requirement
[W
1
(s)S(s)[ < 1 is equivalent to [W
1
(s)[ < [1 + P(s)C(s)[, and this latter
condition can be interpreted as: The loci of P(s)C(s) must stay outside the
1
(s), which is to be centered on the critical point (−1 + 0j).
The disk is to be quite large, possibly inﬁnitely large, at the lower frequencies.
17.4 Design for Robustness
It is a ubiquitous observation that models of plants degrade with increasing
frequency. For example, the DC gain and slow, lightly-damped modes or zeros
are easy to observe, but higher-frequency components in the response may
17.4 Design for Robustness 117
be hard to capture or even excite repeatably. Higher-frequency behavior may
have more nonlinear properties as well.
The eﬀects of modeling uncertainty can be considered to enter the nominal
feedback system as a disturbance at the plant output, d
y
. One of the most
useful descriptions of model uncertainty is the multiplicative uncertainty:
˜
P(s) = (1 + ∆(s)W
2
(s))P(s). (179)
Here, P(s) represents the nominal plant model used in the design of the control
loop, and
˜
P(s) is the actual, perturbed plant. The perturbation is of the
multiplicative type, ∆(s)W
2
(s)P(s), where ∆(s) is an unknown but stable
function of frequency for which [∆(s)[ ≤ 1. The weighting function W
2
(s)
scales ∆(s) with frequency; W
2
(s) should be growing with increasing frequency,
since the uncertainty grows. However, W
2
(s) should not grow any faster than
necessary, since it will turn out to be at the cost of nominal performance.
In the scalar case, the weight can be estimated as follows: since
˜
P/P − 1 =
∆W
2
, it will suﬃce to let [
˜
P/P −1[ < [W
2
[.
Example: Let
˜
P = k/(s −1), where k is in the range 2–5. We need to create
a nominal model P = k
0
/(s−1), with the smallest possible value of W
2
, which
will not vary with frequency in this case. Two equations can be written using
the above estimate, for the two extreme values of k, yielding k
0
= 7/2, and
W
2
= 3/7.
For constructing the Nyquist plot, we observe that
˜
P(s)C(s) = (1+∆(s)W
2
(s))P(s)C(s). The path of the perturbed plant could
be anywhere on a disk of radius [W
2
(s)P(s)C(s)[, centered on the nominal loci
P(s)C(s). The robustness condition is that this disk should not intersect the
critical point. This can be written as
[1 + PC[ > [W
2
PC[ ←→
1 >
[W
2
PC[
[1 + PC[
←→
1 > [W
2
T[, (180)
where T is the complementary sensitivity function. The last inequality is thus
a condition for robust stability in the presence of multiplicative uncertainty
parametrized with W
2
.
118 17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING
17.5 Robust Performance
The condition for good performance with plant uncertainty is a combination
of the above two conditions. Graphically, the disk at the critical point, with
1
[, should not intersect the disk of radius [W
2
PC[, centered on the
nominal locus PC. This is met if
[W
1
S[ +[W
2
T[ < 1. (181)
The robust performance requirement is related to the magnitude [PC[ at dif-
ferent frequencies, as follows:
1. At low frequency, [W
1
S[ · [W
1
/PC[, since [PC[ is large. This leads
directly to the performance condition [PC[ > [W
1
[ in this range.
2. At high frequency, W
2
T[ · [W
2
PC[, since [PC[ is small. We must
therefore have [PC[ < 1/[W
2
[, for robustness.
17.6 Implications of Bode’s Integral
The loop transfer function PC cannot roll oﬀ too rapidly in the crossover
region. The simple reason is that a steep slope induces a large phase loss,
which in turn degrades the phase margin. To see this requires a short foray
into Bode’s integral. For a transfer function H(s), the crucial relation is
angle(H(jω
0
)) =
1
π

−∞
d

(ln[H(jω)) ln(coth([ν[/2))dν, (182)
where ν = ln(ω/ω
0
). The integral is hence taken over the log of a frequency
normalized with ω
0
. It is not hard to see how the integral controls the angle:
the function ln(coth([ν[/2)) is nonzero only near ν = 0, implying that the
angle depends only on the local slope d(ln[H[)/dν. Thus, if the slope is large,
the angle is large.
Example: Suppose H(s) = ω
n
0
/s
n
, i.e., it is a simple function with n poles at
the origin, and no zeros; ω
0
is a ﬁxed constant. It follows that [H[ = ω
n
0

n
,
and ln[H[ = −nln(ω/ω
0
), so that d(ln[H[)/dν = −n. Then we have just
angle(H) = −
n
π

−∞
ln(coth([ν[/2))dν = −

2
. (183)
17.7 The Recipe for Loopshaping 119
This integral is trivial to look up or compute. Each pole at the origin clearly
induces 90

of phase loss. In the general case, each pole not at the origin
induces 90

of phase loss for frequencies above the pole. Each zero at the

phase lead, while zeros not at the origin at 90

for frequencies above the zero. In the immediate neighborhood of these poles
and zeros, the phase may vary signiﬁcantly with frequency.
The Nyquist loci are clearly susceptible to these variations is phase, and
the phase margin can be easily lost if the slope of PC at crossover (where
the magnitude is unity) is too steep. The slope can safely be ﬁrst-order
(−20dB/decade, equivalent to a single pole), and may be second-order
17.7 The Recipe for Loopshaping
In the above analysis, we have extensively described what the open loop trans-
fer function PC should look like, to meet robustness and performance speci-
ﬁcations. We have said very little about how to get the compensator C, the
critical component. For clarity, let the designed loop transfer function be re-
named, L = PC. We will use concepts from optimal linear control for the
MIMO case, but in the scalar case, it suﬃces to just pick
C = L/P. (184)
This extraordinarily simple step involves a plant inversion.
The overall idea is to ﬁrst shape L as a stable transfer function meeting the
requirements of stability and robustness, and then divide through by the plant.
• When the plant is stable and has stable zeros (minimum-phase), the
• One caveat for the well-behaved plant is that lightly-damped poles or
zeros should not be cancelled verbatim by the compensator, because
the closed-loop response will be sensitive to any slight change in the
resonant frequency. The usual procedure is to widen the notch or pole
in the compensator, through a higher damping ratio.
• Non-minimum phase or unstable behavior in the plant can usually be
handled by performing the loopshaping for the closest stable model, and
then explicitly considering the eﬀects of adding the unstable parts. In
120 17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING
the case of unstable zeros, we ﬁnd that they impose an unavoidable
frequency limit for the crossover. In general, the troublesome zeros must
be faster than the closed-loop frequency response.
In the case of unstable poles, the converse is true: The feedback system
must be faster than the corresponding frequency of the unstable mode.
When a control system involves multiple inputs and outputs, the ideas from
scalar loopshaping can be adapted using the singular value. We list below
some basic properties of the singular value decomposition, which is analogous
to an eigenvector, or modal, analysis. Useful properties and relations for the
singular value are found in the section MATH FACTS.
The condition for MIMO robust performance can be written in many ways,
including a direct extension of our scalar condition
σ(W
1
S) + σ(W
2
T) < 1. (185)
The open-loop transfer matrix L should be shaped accordingly. In the follow-
ing sections, we use the properties of optimal state estimation and control to
perform the plant inversion for MIMO systems.
121
18.1 Introduction
The simple form of loopshaping in scalar systems does not extend directly
to multivariable (MIMO) plants, which are characterized by transfer matrices
The notion of optimality is closely tied to MIMO control system design. Op-
timal controllers, i.e., controllers that are the best possible, according to some
ﬁgure of merit, turn out to generate only stabilizing controllers for MIMO
plants. In this sense, optimal control solutions provide an automated design
procedure – we have only to decide what ﬁgure of merit to use. The lin-
ear quadratic regulator (LQR) is a well-known design technique that provides
practical feedback gains.
18.2 Full-State Feedback
For the derivation of the linear quadratic regulator, we assume the plant to be
written in state-space form ˙ x = Ax + Bu, and that all of the n states x are
available for the controller. The feedback gain is a matrix K, implemented as
u = −K(x −x
desired
). The system dynamics are then written as:
˙ x = (A −BK)x + Kx
desired
. (186)
x
desired
represents the vector of desired states, and serves as the external input
to the closed-loop system. The “A-matrix” of the closed loop system is (A −
BK), and the “B-matrix” of the closed-loop system is K. The closed-loop
system has exactly as many outputs as inputs: n. The column dimension
of B equals the number of channels available in u, and must match the row
dimension of K. Pole-placement is the process of placing the poles of (A−BK)
in stable, suitably-damped locations in the complex plane.
18.3 Dynamic Programming
There are at least two conventional derivations for the LQR; we present here
one based on dynamic programming, due to R. Bellman. The key observation
is best given through a loose example:
Suppose that we are driving from Point A to Point C, and we ask what is
the shortest path in miles. If A and C represent Los Angeles and Boston,
A
B
B
1
B
2
3
1
C
C
2
3
C
D
n = 3
s = 2
for example, there are many paths to choose from! Assume that one way or
another we have found the best path, and that a Point B lies along this path,
say Las Vegas. Let X be an arbitrary point east of Las Vegas. If we were to
now solve the optimization problem for getting from only Las Vegas to Boston,
this same arbitrary point X would be along the new optimal path as well.
The point is a subtle one: the optimization problem from Las Vegas to Boston
is easier than that from Los Angeles to Boston, and the idea is to use this
property backwards through time to evolve the optimal path, beginning in
Boston.
Example: Nodal Travel. We now add some structure to the above experi-
ment. Consider now traveling from point A (Los Angeles) to Point D (Boston).
Suppose there are only three places to cross the Rocky Mountains, B
1
, B
2
, B
3
,
and three places to cross the Mississippi River, C
1
, C
2
, C
3
.
3
By way of no-
tation, we say that the path from A to B
1
is AB
1
. Suppose that all of the
paths (and distances) from A to the B-nodes are known, as are those from the
B-nodes to the C-nodes, and the C-nodes to the terminal point D. There are
nine unique paths from A to D.
A brute-force approach sums up the total distance for all the possible paths,
and picks the shortest one. In terms of computations, we could summarize that
this method requires nine additions of three numbers, equivalent to eighteen
additions of two numbers. The comparison of numbers is relatively cheap.
The dynamic programming approach has two steps. First, from each B-node,
pick the best path to D. There are three possible paths from B
1
to D, for
example, and nine paths total from the B-level to D. Store the best paths
as B
1
D[
opt
, B
2
D[
opt
, B
3
D[
opt
. This operation involves nine additions of two
3
Apologies to readers not familiar with American geography.
18.4 Dynamic Programming and Full-State Feedback 123
numbers.
Second, compute the distance for each of the possible paths from A to D,
constrained to the optimal paths from the B-nodes onward: AB
1
+ B
1
D[
opt
,
AB
2
+ B
2
D[
opt
, or AB
3
+ B
3
D[
opt
. The combined path with the shortest
distance is the total solution; this second step involves three sums of two
numbers, and total optimization is done in twelve additions of two numbers.
Needless to say, this example gives only a mild advantage to the dynamic
programming approach over brute force. The gap widens vastly, however, as
one increases the dimensions of the solution space. In general, if there are s
layers of nodes (e.g., rivers or mountain ranges), and each has width n (e.g., n
river crossing points), the brute force approach will take (sn
s
the dynamic programming procedure involves only (n
2
In the case of n = 5, s = 5, brute force requires 6250 additions; dynamic
programming needs only 105.
18.4 Dynamic Programming and Full-State Feedback
We consider here the regulation problem, that is, of keeping x
desired
= 0.
The closed-loop system thus is intended to reject disturbances and recover
from initial conditions, but not necessarily follow y-trajectories. There are
several necessary deﬁnitions. First we deﬁne an instantaneous penalty function
l(x(t), u(t)), which is to be greater than zero for all nonzero x and u. The cost
associated with this penalty, along an optimal trajectory, is
J =

0
l(x(t), u(t))dt, (187)
i.e., the integral over time of the instantaneous penalty. Finally, the optimal
return is the cost of the optimal trajectory remaining after time t:
V (x(t), u(t)) =

t
l(x(τ), u(τ))dτ. (188)
.
We have directly from the dynamic programming principle
V (x(t), u(t)) = min
u
¦l(x(t), u(t))δt + V (x(t + δt), u(t + δt))¦ . (189)
The minimization of V (x(t), u(t)) is made by considering all the possible con-
trol inputs u in the time interval (t, t + δt). As suggested by dynamic pro-
gramming, the return at time t is constructed from the return at t + δt, and
the diﬀerential component due to l(x, u). If V is smooth and has no explicit
dependence on t, as written, then
V (x(t + δt), u(t + δt)) = V (x(t), u(t)) +
∂V
∂x
dx
dt
δt + h.o.t. −→ (190)
= V (x(t), u(t)) +
∂V
∂x
(Ax(t) + Bu(t))δt.
Now control input u in the interval (t, t + δt) cannot aﬀect V (x(t), u(t)), so
inserting the above and making a cancellation gives
0 = min
u

l(x(t), u(t)) +
∂V
∂x
(Ax(t) + Bu(t))
¸
. (191)
We next make the assumption that V (x, u) has the following form:
V (x, u) =
1
2
x
T
Px, (192)
where P is a symmetric matrix, and positive deﬁnite.
45
It follows that
∂V
∂x
= x
T
P −→ (193)
0 = min
u

l(x, u) + x
T
P(Ax + Bu)
¸
.
We ﬁnally specify the instantaneous penalty function. The LQR employs the
l(x, u) =
1
2
x
T
Qx +
1
2
u
T
Ru, (194)
where Q and R are both symmetric and positive deﬁnite. The matrices Q
and R are to be set by the user, and represent the main “tuning knobs” for
the LQR. Substitution of this form into the above equation, and setting the
derivative with respect to u to zero gives
4
Positive deﬁniteness means that x
T
Px > 0 for all nonzero x, and x
T
Px = 0 if x = 0.
5
This suggested form for the optimal return can be conﬁrmed after the optimal controller
is derived.
18.5 Properties and Use of the LQR 125
0 = u
T
R + x
T
PB (195)
u
T
= −x
T
PBR
−1
u = −R
−1
B
T
Px.
The gain matrix for the feedback control is thus K = R
−1
B
T
P. Inserting
this solution back into equation 194, and eliminating u in favor of x, we have
0 =
1
2
x
T
Qx −
1
2
x
T
PBR
−1
B
T
P + x
T
PAx.
All the matrices here are symmetric except for PA; since x
T
PAx = x
T
A
T
Px,
we can make its eﬀect symmetric by letting
x
T
PAx =
1
2
x
T
PAx +
1
2
x
T
A
T
Px,
leading to the ﬁnal matrix-only result
0 = Q + PA + A
T
P −PBR
−1
B
T
P. (196)
This equation is the matrix algebraic Riccati equation (MARE), whose solution
P is needed to compute the optimal feedback gain K. The MARE is easily
solved by standard numerical tools in linear algebra.
18.5 Properties and Use of the LQR
Static Gain. The LQR generates a static gain matrix K, which is not a
dynamical system. Hence, the order of the closed-loop system is the same as
that of the plant.
Robustness. The LQR achieves inﬁnite gain margin: k
g
= ∞, implying that
the loci of (PC) (scalar case) or (det(I + PC) − 1) (MIMO case) approach
the origin along the imaginary axis. The LQR also guarantees phase margin
γ ≥ 60 degrees. This is in good agreement with the practical guidelines for
control system design.
Output Variables. In many cases, it is not the states x which are to be
minimized, but the output variables y. In this case, we set the weighting
matrix Q = C
T
Q

C, since y = Cx, and the auxiliary matrix Q

weights the
plant output.
Behavior of Closed-Loop Poles: Expensive Control. When R >>
C
T
Q

C, the cost function is dominated by the control eﬀort u, and so the
controller minimizes the control action itself. In the case of a completely stable
plant, the gain will indeed go to zero, so that the closed-loop poles approach
the open-loop plant poles in a manner consistent with the scalar root locus.
The optimal control must always stabilize the closed-loop system, however,
so there should be some account made for unstable plant poles. The expen-
sive control solution puts stable closed-loop poles at the mirror images of the
unstable plant poles.
Behavior of Closed-Loop Poles: Cheap Control. When R << C
T
Q

C,
the cost function is dominated by the output errors y, and there is no penalty
for using large u. There are two groups of closed-loop poles. First, poles
are placed at stable plant zeros, and at the mirror images of the unstable
plant zeros. This part is akin to the high-gain limiting case of the root locus.
The remaining poles assume a Butterworth pattern, whose radius increases to
inﬁnity as R becomes smaller and smaller.
The Butterworth pattern refers to an arc in the stable left-half plane, as shown
in the ﬁgure. The angular separation of n closed-loop poles on the arc is
constant, and equal to 180

/n. An angle 90

/n separates the most lightly-
damped poles from the imaginary axis.
18.5 Properties and Use of the LQR 127
n = 4
φ = 45 degrees
X
X
X
X
φ
φ/2
φ
φ
φ/2
128 19 KALMAN FILTER
19 KALMAN FILTER
19.1 Introduction
In the previous section, we derived the linear quadratic regulator as an optimal
solution for the full-state feedback control problem. The inherent assumption
was that each state was known perfectly. In real applications, the measure-
ments are subject to disturbances, and may not allow reconstruction of all the
states. This state estimation is the task of a model-based estimator having
the form:
˙
ˆ x = Aˆ x + Bu + H(y −Cˆ x) (197)
The vector ˆ x represents the state estimate, whose evolution is governed by
the nominal A and B matrices of the plant, and a correction term with the
estimator gain matrix H. H operates on the estimation error mapped to
the plant output y, since Cˆ x = ˆ y. Given statistical properties of real plant
disturbances and sensor noise, the Kalman Filter designs an optimal H.
+
-
y
x
+
+
+
1/s
A
H
C
x
y
Bu
19.2 Problem Statement
We consider the state-space plant model given by:
˙ x = Ax + Bu + W
1
(198)
y = Cx + W
2
.
There are n states, m inputs, and l outputs, so that A has dimension nn, B
is n m, and C is l n. The plant subject to two random input signals, W
1
19.3 Step 1: An Equation for
˙
Σ 129
and W
2
. W
1
represents disturbances to the plant, since it drives ˙ x directly;
W
2
denotes sensor noise, which corrupts the measurement y.
An important assumption of the Kalman Filter is that W
1
and W
2
are each
vectors of unbiased, independent white noise, and that all the n + l channels
are uncorrelated. Hence, if E() denotes the expected value,
E(W
1
(t
1
)W
1
(t
2
)
T
) = V
1
δ(t
1
−t
2
) (199)
E(W
2
(t
1
)W
2
(t
2
)
T
) = V
2
δ(t
1
−t
2
) (200)
E(W
1
(t)W
2
(t)
T
) = 0
n×l
. (201)
Here δ(t) represents the impulse (or delta) function. V
1
is an n n diagonal
matrix of intensities, and V
2
is an l l diagonal matrix of intensities.
The estimation error may be deﬁned as e = x−ˆ x. It can then be veriﬁed that
˙ e = [Ax + Bu + W
1
] −[Aˆ x + Bu + H(y −Cˆ x)] (202)
= (A −HC)e + (W
1
−HW
2
).
The eigenvalues of the matrix A−HC thus determine the stability properties
of the estimation error dynamics. The second term above, W
1
+ HW
2
is
considered an external input.
The Kalman ﬁlter design provides H that minimizes the scalar cost function
J = E(e
T
We), (203)
where W is an unspeciﬁed symmetric, positive deﬁnite weighting matrix. A
related matrix, the symmetric error covariance, is deﬁned as
Σ = E(ee
T
). (204)
There are two main steps for deriving the optimal gain H.
19.3 Step 1: An Equation for
˙
Σ
The evolution of Σ follows from some algebra and the convolution form of e(t).
We begin with
130 19 KALMAN FILTER
˙
Σ = E( ˙ ee
T
+ e ˙ e
T
) (205)
= E[(A −HC)ee
T
+ (W
1
−HW
2
)e
T
+ ee
T
(A
T
−C
T
H
T
) +
e(W
T
1
−W
T
2
H
T
)].
The last term above can be expanded, using the property that
e(t) = e
(A−HC)t
e(0) +

t
0
e
(A−HC)(t−τ)
(W
1
(τ) −HW
2
(τ)) dτ.
We have
E(e(W
T
1
−W
T
2
H
T
)) = e
(A−HC)t
E(e(0)(W
T
1
−W
T
2
H
T
)) +

t
0
e
(A−HC)(t−τ)
E((W
1
(τ) −HW
2
(τ))
(W
T
1
(t) −W
T
2
(t)H
T
)) dτ
=

t
0
e
(A−HC)(t−τ)
E((W
1
(τ) −HW
2
(τ))
(W
T
1
(t) −W
T
2
(t)H
T
)) dτ
=

t
0
e
(A−HC)(t−τ)
(V
1
δ(t −τ) + HV
2
H
T
δ(t −τ)) dτ
=
1
2
V
1
+
1
2
HV
2
H
T
.
To get from the ﬁrst right-hand side to the second, we note that the initial
condition e(0) is uncorrelated with W
T
1
−W
T
2
H
T
. The fact that W
1
and HW
2
are uncorrelated leads to the third line, and the ﬁnal result follows from

t
0
δ(t −τ)dτ =
1
2
,
i.e., the written integral includes only half of the impulse.
The ﬁnal expression for E(e(W
T
1
− W
T
2
H
T
)) is symmetric, and therefore ap-
pears in Equation 205 twice, leading to
˙
Σ = (A −HC)Σ + Σ(A
T
−C
T
H
T
) + V
1
+ HV
2
H
T
. (206)
This equation governs propagation of the error covariance. It is independent
of the initial condition e(0), and depends on the (as yet) unknown estimator
gain matrix H.
19.4 Step 2: H as a Function of Σ 131
19.4 Step 2: H as a Function of Σ
We now make the connection between Σ = E(ee
T
) (a matrix) and J =
E(e
T
We) (a scalar). The trace of a matrix is the sum of its diagonal ele-
ments, and it can be veriﬁed that
J = E(e
T
We) = trace(ΣW). (207)
We now introduce an auxiliary cost function deﬁned as
J

= trace(ΣW + ΛF), (208)
where F is an n n matrix of zeros, and Λ is an n n matrix of unknown
Lagrange multipliers. Note that since F is zero, J

= J, so minimizing J

solves
the same problem. Lagrange multipliers provide an ingenious mechanism for
drawing constraints into the optimization; the constraint we invoke is the
evolution of Σ, Equation 206:
J

= trace

ΣW + Λ(−
˙
Σ + AΣ −HCΣ + ΣA
T
−ΣC
T
H
T
+ V
1
+ HV
2
H
T
)

(209)
If J

is an optimal cost, it follows that ∂J

/∂H = 0, i.e., the correct choice of
H achieves an extremal value. We need the following lemmas, which give the
derivative of a trace with respect to a constituent matrix:

∂H
trace(−ΛHCΣ) = −Λ
T
ΣC
T

∂H
trace(−ΛΣC
T
H
T
) = −ΛΣC
T

∂H
trace(ΛHV
2
H
T
) = Λ
T
HV
2
+ ΛHV
2
.
Proofs of the ﬁrst two are given at the end of this section; the last lemma uses
the chain rule, and the previous two lemmas. Next, we enforce Λ = Λ
T
, since
the values are arbitrary. Then the condition ∂J

0 = 2Λ(−ΣC
T
+ HV
2
), satisﬁed if
H = ΣC
T
V
−1
2
. (210)
132 19 KALMAN FILTER
Duality of Linear Quadratic Regulator and Kalman Filter
˙ x = Ax + Bu ˙ x = Ax + Bu + W
1
y = Cx + W
2
u = −Kx
˙
ˆ x = Aˆ x + Bu + H(y −Cˆ x)
2J =

0
(x
T
Qx + u
T
Ru)dt J = E(e
T
We)
Q ≥ 0, R > 0 V
1
≥ 0, V
2
> 0
K = R
−1
B
T
P H = ΣC
T
V
−1
2
PA + A
T
P + Q−PBR
−1
B
T
P = 0 ΣA
T
+ AΣ + V
1
−ΣC
T
V
−1
2
CΣ = 0
Hence the estimator gain matrix H can be written as a function of Σ. Inserting
this back into Equation 206, we obtain
˙
Σ = AΣ + ΣA
T
+ V
1
−ΣC
T
V
−1
2
CΣ. (211)
Equations 210 and 211 represent the practical solution to the Kalman ﬁltering
problem, which minimizes the squared-norm of the estimation error. The
evolution of Σ is always stable, and depends only on the constant matrices
[A, C, V
1
, V
2
]. Notice also that the result is independent of the weighting matrix
W, which might as well be the identity.
19.5 Properties of the Solution
The solution involves a matrix Riccati equation, like the LQR, suggesting a
duality with the LQR problem. This is in fact the case, and the same analysis
and numerical tools can be applied to both methodologies.
The steady-state solution for Σ is valid for time-invariant systems, leading to
a more common MARE form of Equation 211:
0 = AΣ + ΣA
T
+ V
1
−ΣC
T
V
−1
2
CΣ. (212)
The Kalman Filter is guaranteed to create a stable nominal dynamics A−HC,
as long as the plant is fully state-observable. This is dual to the stability
guarantee of the LQR loop, when the plant is state-controllable. Furthermore,
like the LQR, the KF loop achieves 60

phase margin, and inﬁnite gain margin,
for all the channels together or independently.
19.6 Combination of LQR and KF 133
The qualitative dependence of the estimator gain H = ΣC
T
V
−1
2
on the other
parameters can be easily seen. Recall that V
1
is the intensity matrix of the
plant disturbance, V
2
is the intensity of the sensor noise, and Σ is the error
covariance matrix.
• A large uncertainty Σ creates large H, placing emphasis on the corrective
action of the ﬁlter.
• A small disturbance V
1
, and large sensor noise V
2
creates a small H,
weighting the model dynamics Aˆ x + Bu more.
• A large disturbance V
1
, and small sensor noise V
2
creates a large H, so
that the ﬁlter’s correction is dominant.
The limiting closed-loop poles of the Kalman ﬁlter are similar, and dual to
those of the LQR:
• V
2
<< V
1
: good sensors, large disturbance, H >> 1, dual to cheap-
control problem. Some closed-loop poles go to the stable plant zeros, or
the mirror image of unstable plant zeros. The remaining poles follow a
Butterworth pattern whose radius increases with increasing V
1
/V
2
.
• V
2
>> V
1
: poor sensors, small disturbance, H small, dual to expensive-
control problem. Closed-loop poles go to the stable plant poles, and the
mirror images of the unstable plant poles.
19.6 Combination of LQR and KF
An optimal output feedback controller is created through the use of a Kalman
ﬁlter coupled with an LQR full-state feedback gain. This combination is usu-
ally known as the Linear Quadratic Gaussian design, or LQG. For the plant
given as
˙ x = Ax + Bu + W
1
y = Cx + W
2
,
we put the Kalman Filter and controller gain G together as follows:
134 19 KALMAN FILTER
˙
ˆ x = Aˆ x + Bu + H(y −Cˆ x) (213)
u = −Kˆ x. (214)
H
C
-K
B
+
-
+
+
φ y u
C(s)
φ = (sI-A)
-1
There are two central points to this construction:
1. Separation Principle: The eigenvalues of the nominal closed-loop sys-
tem are made of up the eigenvalues of (A−HC) and the eigenvalues of
(A −BK), separately. See proof below.
2. Output Tracking: This compensator is a stand-alone system that,
as written, tries to drive its input y to zero. It can be hooked up to
receive tracking error e(s) = r(s) − y(s) as an input instead, so that it
is not limited to the regulation problem alone. In this case, ˆ x no longer
represents an estimated state, but rather an estimated state tracking
error. We use the output error as a control input in the next section, on
loopshaping via loop transfer recovery.
19.7 Proofs of the Intermediate Results
19.7.1 Proof that E(e
T
We) = trace(ΣW)
E(e
T
We) = E

¸
n
¸
i=1
e
i

¸
n
¸
j=1
W
ij
e
j
¸

¸

=
n
¸
i=1
n
¸
j=1
Σ
ij
W
ji
,
19.7 Proofs of the Intermediate Results 135
the transpose of W being valid since it is symmetric. Now consider the diagonal
elements of the product ΣW:
ΣW =

Σ
11
W
11
+ Σ
12
W
21
+
Σ
21
W
12
+ Σ
22
W
22
+

¸
¸
¸ →
trace(ΣW) =
n
¸
i=1
n
¸
j=1
Σ
ij
W
ji
. 2
19.7.2 Proof that

∂H
trace(−ΛHCΣ) = −Λ
T
ΣC
T
trace(AHB) = trace

n
¸
j=1
A
ij
l
¸
k=1
H
jk
B
kl
¸
¸
, the il

th element
=
n
¸
i=1
n
¸
j=1
A
ij
l
¸
k=1
H
jk
B
ki
,
where the second form is a sum over i of the ii’th elements. Now

∂H
joko
trace(AHB) =
n
¸
i=1
A
ijo
B
koi
= (BA)
kojo
= (BA)
T
joko
−→

∂H
trace(AHB) = (BA)
T
= A
T
B
T
. 2
19.7.3 Proof that

∂H
trace(−ΛΣC
T
H
T
) = −ΛΣC
T
trace(AH
T
) = trace

n
¸
j=1
A
ij
H
T
jl
¸
¸
, the il

th element
= trace

n
¸
j=1
A
ij
H
lj
¸
¸
=
n
¸
i=1
n
¸
j=1
A
ij
H
ij
,
136 19 KALMAN FILTER
where the last form is a sum over the ii’th elements. It follows that

∂H
iojo
trace(AH
T
) = A
iojo
−→

∂H
trace(AH
T
) = A. 2
19.7.4 Proof of the Separation Principle
Without external inputs W
1
and W
2
, the closed-loop system evolves according
to
d
dt

x
ˆ x
¸
=
¸
A −BK
HC A −BK −HC
¸
x
ˆ x
¸
.
Using the deﬁnition of estimation error e = x − ˆ x, we can write the above in
another form:
d
dt

x
e
¸
=
¸
A −BK BK
0 A −HC
¸
x
e
¸
.
If A

represents this compound A-matrix, then its eigenvalues are the roots of
det(sI − A

) = 0. However, the determinant of an upper triangular block
matrix is the product of the determinants of each block on the diagonal:
det(sI−A

) = det(sI−(A−BK))det(sI−(A−HC)), and hence the separation
of eigenvalues follows.
137
20 LOOP TRANSFER RECOVERY
20.1 Introduction
The Linear Quadratic Regulator(LQR) and Kalman Filter (KF) provide prac-
tical solutions to the full-state feedback and state estimation problems, respec-
tively. If the sensor noise and disturbance properties of the plant are indeed
well-known, then an LQG design approach, that is, combining the LQR and
KF into an output feedback compensator, may yield good results. The LQR
tuning matrices Q and R would be picked heuristically to give a reasonable
closed-loop response.
There are two reasons to avoid this kind of direct LQG design procedure,
however. First, although the LQR and KF each possess good robustness
properties, there do exist plants for which there is no robustness guarantee
for an LQG compensator. Even if one could steer clear of such pathological
cases, a second problem is that this design technique has no clear equivalent
in frequency space. It cannot be directly mapped to the intuitive ideas of
loopshaping and the Nyquist plot, which are at the root of feedback control.
We now reconsider just the feedback loop of the Kalman ﬁlter. The KF has
open-loop transfer function L(s) = Cφ(s)H, where φ(s) = (sI − A)
−1
. This
follows from the estimator evolution equation
˙
ˆ x = Aˆ x + Bu + H(y −Cˆ x)
and the ﬁgure. Note that we have not included the factor Bu as part of the
ﬁgure, since it does not aﬀect the error dynamics of the ﬁlter.
As noted previously, the KF loop has good robustness properties, speciﬁcally
to perturbations at the output ˆ y, and further is amenable to output tracking.
In short, the KF loop is an ideal candidate for a loopshaping design. Supposing
that we have an estimator gain H which creates an attractive loop function
L(s), we would like to ﬁnd the compensator C(s) that establishes
P(s)C(s) ≈ Cφ(s)H, or (215)
Cφ(s)BC(s) ≈ Cφ(s)H.
It will turn out that the LQR can be set up so that the an LQG-type com-
pensator achieves exactly this result. The procedure is termed Loop Transfer
138 20 LOOP TRANSFER RECOVERY
H
y
x
C
φ (s)
^
Recovery (LTR), and has two main parts. First, one carries out a KF design for
H, so that the Kalman ﬁlter loop itself has good performance and robustness
properties. In this regard, the KF loop has sensitivity function S(s) = (I +
Cφ(s)H)
−1
and complementary sensitivity T(s) = (I + Cφ(s)H)
−1
Cφ(s)H.
The condition σ(W
1
(s)S(s)) + σ(W
2
(s)T(s)) < 1 is suﬃcient for robust per-
formance with multiplicative plant uncertainty at the output. Secondly, we
pick suitable parameters of the LQR design, so that the LQG compensator
satisﬁes the approximation of Equation 215.
LTR is useful as a SISO control technique, but has a much larger role in
multivariable control.
20.2 A Special Property of the LQR Solution
Letting Q = C
T
C and R = ρI, where I is the identity matrix, we will show
(roughly) that
lim
ρ→0
(

ρK) = WC,
where K is the LQR gain matrix, and W is an orthonormal matrix, for which
W
T
W = I.
First recall the gain and Riccati equations for the LQR:
K = R
−1
B
T
P
0 = Q + PA + A
T
P −PBR
−1
B
T
P.
Now Q = C
T
C = C
T
W
T
WC = (WC)
T
WC. The Riccati equation becomes
0 = ρ(WC)
T
WC + ρPA + ρA
T
P −PBB
T
P = 0.
In the limit as ρ →0, it must be the case that P →0 also, and so in this limit
20.3 The Loop Transfer Recovery Result 139
ρ(WC)
T
WC ≈ PBB
T
P
= (B
T
P)
T
B
T
P
= (R
−1
B
T
P)
T
RR(R
−1
B
T
P)
= ρ
2
K
T
K −→
WC ≈

ρK. 2
Note that another orthonormal matrix W

could be used in separating K
T
from K in the last line. This matrix may be absorbed into W through a
matrix inverse, however, and so does not need to be written. The result of the
last line establishes that the plant must be square: the number of inputs (i.e.,
rows of K) is equal to the number of outputs (i.e., rows of C).
Finally, we note that the above property is true only for LQR designs with
minimum-phase plants, i.e., those with only stable zeros (Kwakernaak and
Sivan).
20.3 The Loop Transfer Recovery Result
The theorem is stated as: If lim
ρ→0
(

ρK) = WC (the above result), with W
an orthonormal matrix, then the limiting LQG controller C(s) satisﬁes
lim
ρ→0
P(s)C(s) = Cφ(s)H.
The LTR method is limited by two conditions:
• The plant has an equal number of inputs and outputs.
• The design plant has no unstable zeros. The LTR method can be in fact
be applied in the presence of unstable plant zeros, but the recovery is
not to the Kalman ﬁlter loop transfer function. Instead, the recovered
function will exhibit reasonable limitations inherent to unstable zeros.
See Athans for more details and references on this topic.
The proof of the LTR result depends on some easy lemmas, given at the end
of this section. First, we develop C(s), with the deﬁnitions φ(s) = (sI −A)
−1
and X(s) = (φ
−1
(s) + HC)
−1
= (sI −A + HC)
−1
.
140 20 LOOP TRANSFER RECOVERY
C(s) = K(sI −A + BK + HC)
−1
H
= K(X
−1
(s) + BK)
−1
H, then use Lemma 2 →
= K(X(s) −X(s)B(I + KX(s)B)
−1
KX(s))H
= KX(s)H −KX(s)B(I + KX(s)B)
−1
KX(s)H
= (I −KX(s)B(I + KX(s)B)
−1
)KX(s)H, then use Lemma 3 →
= (I + KX(s)B)
−1
KX(s)H
= (

ρI +

ρKX(s)B)
−1

ρKX(s)H.
Next we invoke the result from the LQR design, with ρ → 0, to eliminate

ρK:
lim
ρ→0
C(s) = (WCX(s)B)
−1
WCX(s)H
= (CX(s)B)
−1
CX(s)H.
In the last expression, we used the assumption that W is square and invertible,
both properties of orthonormal matrices. Now we look at the product CX(s):
CX(s) = C(SI −A + HC)
−1
= C(φ
−1
(s) + HC)
−1
, then use Lemma 2 →
= C(φ(s) −φ(s)H(I + Cφ(s)H)
−1
Cφ(s))
= (I −Cφ(s)H(I + Cφ(s)H)
−1
)Cφ(s), then use Lemma 3 →
= (I + Cφ(s)H)
−1
Cφ(s).
This result, reintroduced into the limiting compensator, gives
lim
ρ→0
C(s) = ((I + Cφ(s)H)
−1
Cφ(s)B)
−1
(I + Cφ(s)H)
−1
Cφ(s)H
= (Cφ(s)B)
−1
Cφ(s)H
= P
−1
(s)Cφ(s)H.
Finally it follows that lim
ρ→0
P(s)C(s) = Cφ(s)H, as desired.
20.4 Usage of the Loop Transfer Recovery 141
20.4 Usage of the Loop Transfer Recovery
The idea of LTR is to “recover” a Kalman ﬁlter loop transfer function L(s) =
Cφ(s)H, by using the limiting cheap-control LQR design, with Q = C
T
C and
R = ρI. The LQR design step is thus trivial.
Some speciﬁc techniques are useful.
• Scale the plant outputs (and references), so that one unit of error in one
channel is as undesirable as one unit of error in another channel. For
example, in depth and pitch control of a large submarine, one meter of
depth error cannot be compared directly with one radian of pitch error.
• Scale the plant inputs in the same way. One Newton of propeller thrust
cannot be compared with one radian of rudder angle.
• Design for crossover frequency. The bandwidth of the controller is
roughly equal to the frequency at which the (recovered) loop transfer
function crosses over 0dB. Often, the bandwidth of is a more intuitive
design parameter than is, for example, the high-frequency multiplicative
weighting W
2
. Quantitative uncertainty models are usually at the cost
of a lengthy identiﬁcation eﬀort.
• Integrators should be part of the KF loop transfer function, if no steady-
state error is to be allowed. Since the Kalman ﬁlter loop has only as many
poles as the plant, the plant input channels must be augmented with the
necessary additional poles (at the origin). Then, once the KF design is
completed, and the compensator C(s) is constructed, the integrators are
moved from the plant over to the input side of the compensator. The
tracking errors will accrue as desired.
20.5 Three Lemmas
Lemma 1: Matrix Inversion
(A + BCD)
−1
= A
−1
−A
−1
B(C
−1
+ DA
−1
B)
−1
DA
−1
.
Proof:
142 20 LOOP TRANSFER RECOVERY
(A + BCD)(A + BCD)
−1
= I
A(A + BCD)
−1
= I −BCD(A + BCD)
−1
(A + BCD)
−1
= A
−1
−A
−1
BCD(A + BCD)
−1
= A
−1
−A
−1
BCD(I + A
−1
BCD)
−1
A
−1
= A
−1
−A
−1
B(D
−1
C
−1
+ A
−1
B)
−1
A
−1
= A
−1
−A
−1
B(C
−1
+ DA
−1
B)
−1
DA
−1
. 2
Lemma 2: Short Form of Lemma 1
(X
−1
+ BD)
−1
= X −XB(I + DXB)
−1
DX
Proof: substitute A = X
−1
and C = I into Lemma 1.
Lemma 3
I −A(I + A)
−1
= (I + A)
−1
Proof:
I −A(I + A)
−1
= (I + A)(I + A)
−1
−A(I + A)
−1
= (I + A −A)(I + A)
−1
= (I + A)
−1
. 2
143
21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
21.1 Introduction
Model-based controller design techniques, such as the LQR and LTR, require
a plant model. The process of generating workable models from observed
data is the goal of system identiﬁcation. Good controllers usually have some
reasonable robustness guarantees, which motivates identiﬁcation with simple
methods. We discuss in this section four fundamental but useful techniques
for approximate system identiﬁcation of single-input, single-output plants. It
should be noted that the area of system identiﬁcation is a very rich one, and
that the methods are only a small subset of what is available.
Except for the last approach, time-domain simulation, the methods are limited
to linear models. If diﬀerent inputs give diﬀerent linear model coeﬃcients, then
it is likely that nonlinear terms are playing a role. The user then has the choice
of ignoring the nonlinearity, for example if the operating point is controlled
very closely, or developing a controller which takes speciﬁc account of the it.
In any event, simulations with the nonlinear plant should always be performed
to assess the robustness of the control strategy.
21.2 Visual Output from a Simple Input
For low-order plants which can tolerate impulse or step input, a great amount
can be learned through step and impulse responses. The basic idea is to
express what is observed as a time signal whose Laplace-domain equivalent
can be recognized. As an example, consider the plant transfer function P(s) =
k/(τs +1), a ﬁrst-order lag with gain k, and time constant τ. We have y(s) =
k/s(τs + 1) for the step input u(s) = 1/s, and therefore y(t) = k(1 − e
−t/τ
).
The gain k is evident as the maximum value taken by the measured output.
The time constant τ is equal to the time required for y(t) to reach the value
k(1 −e
−1
) = 0.632k. Similar estimates can be made for second-order systems,
especially with the help of step functions parametrized on damping ratio ζ.
Systems with order three or higher will usually be more diﬃcult to assess with
this visual technique.
Example: Two raw step responses in heading were recorded for two dif-
ferent vessels. The ﬁrst vessel was strongly unstable and had to be powered
down abruptly after one second; however, the smoothed data can still be ﬁt-
ted to the curve y(t) = 0.58(e
t
−1). Give estimates of the two plant transfer
144 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
−0.5
0
0.5
1
1.5
seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
seconds
functions P(s), assuming that the step input was of magnitude one.
The time trace of the ﬁrst system looks like the Laplace transform pair:
y(t) =
1
b −a
(e
−at
−e
−bt
) ↔y(s) =
1
(s + a)(s + b)
for the values b = 0 and a = −1. Thus for the experimental data,
y(s) =
0.58
s(s −1)
.
Since y(s) =
ˆ
P(s)u(s), where u(s) = 1/s, we have
ˆ
P(s) = 0.58/(s − 1). The
second trace looks like a second-order response of the form
y(s)
u(s)
=

2
n
s
2
+ 2ζω
n
s + ω
2
n
,
where gain k, undamped frequency ω
n
, and ζ are to be determined. First,
we note that the steady value of y(t) is about 0.5, so let k = 0.5. Next,
with respect to the steady value, the ﬁrst overshoot is about 0.3, and the
second overshoot (same side) is about 0.1. The ratio is often written as the
logarithmic decrement δ = ln(0.3/0.1) · 1.10, so that the damping ratio is
simply ζ = δ/2π · 0.175. Finally, the damped natural period is about 1.7s,
leading to the damped natural frequency ω
d
undamped natural frequency ω
n
is related to ω
d
as follows:
21.3 Transfer Function Estimation – Sinusoidal Input 145
ω
n
=
ω
d

1 −ζ
2
Inserting these into the template above, we have
ˆ
P(s) =
7.0
s
2
+ 1.28s + 14.1
.
21.3 Transfer Function Estimation – Sinusoidal Input
The main idea of transfer function estimation is that P(s) can be estimated by
simply dividing the measured output by the measured input, in the frequency
domain:
ˆ
P(s) =
y(s)
u(s)
. (216)
In applications, the input signal u(s) is known quite accurately because it is
generated by a computer. Two sources of error can corrupt the output signal
y(s), however: real disturbances and sensor noise. In some cases, disturbances
may be band-limited (e.g., water waves), and if these occur in a frequency
range far away from the dominant dynamics, the estimated transfer function
approach will succeed. A similar argument holds for sensor noise, which in
many devices is negligible for low frequencies. A sensor which has noise in the
frequency range of the system dynamics is problematic for obvious reasons.
This section discusses the use of periodic inputs to create a Bode plot, while
the next section generalizes to broadband input. Bode plots are ﬁgures of
transfer function magnitude and phase as functions of frequency, which can
be either parameterized in terms of poles, zeros, and a gain, or used directly
in a loopshaping or Nyquist plot approach.
Certain plants which cannot admit a step or impulsive input will tolerate a
sinusoidal input. The idea then is to drive the plant with a narrow-band, i.e.,
periodic, input signal u(s). For each such test at a speciﬁc frequency, compute
the magnitude and phase relating the input to the output. Conduct as many
tests as are necessary to build a Bode plot of the plant estimate
ˆ
P(s).
Example: Sinusoidal rudder angles trajectories, of 10deg amplitude ([u(t)[ =
10deg), were implemented on a vessel operating near its cruising speed. The
data are plotted, along with the magnitude and phase of the transfer function
146 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
ˆ
P(s) =
0.093
s
2
+ 0.83s + 0.21
,
which holds reasonably well at low frequencies. The phase angle of y(s) is taken
with respect to the input signal u(s). Note that the experimental magnitude
and phase in this example deteriorate at the higher frequencies. This is a
property of almost all physical systems, and an indicator that the plant model
cannot be trusted above a certain frequency range.
−40
−30
−20
−10
0
|
y
(
s
)
/
u
(
s
)
|
,

d
B
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
10
1
10
2
−200
−150
−100
−50
0
a
n
g
l
e
(
y
(
s
)
)
,

d
e
g
21.4 Transfer Function Estimation – Broadband Input
Many times one needs to deal with experimental data that is broadband, either
as the result of a closed-loop run, or of signiﬁcant disturbances. In this case,
frequency-domain analysis can still be used, but elements of spectral analysis
are necessary.
21.4 Transfer Function Estimation – Broadband Input 147
21.4.1 Fourier Transform of Sampled Data
For the purpose of analyzing transfer functions, the discrete Fourier transform
(DFT) is a standard, optimized tool. It operates on a data vector x(n) of
length N:
X(m) =
N−1
¸
n=0
x(n)e
−j2πnm/N
, (217)
for m = [1, N]. We review several points for dealing with the DFT calculation:
• The m’th DFT point is a summation of complex unit-magnitude vectors
(e
−j2πnm/N
) times the original data (x(n)). Dividing the DFT result by
N returns the signal to its real magnitude.
• The DFT generates a vector of N complex points as outputs. These
correspond to the frequency range
ω
m
=

dt
m−1
N
, (218)
i.e., the ﬁrst frequency is 0, and the last frequency is slightly less than
the sampling rate.
• The sampling theorem limits our usable frequency range to only one-half
of the sampling rate, called the Nyquist rate. The points higher than
π/dt correspond to negative frequencies, and a complex-conjugacy holds:
X(2) = X

(m), X(3) = X

(m−1), and so on. What happens near the
Nyquist rate depends on whether N is odd or even.
An additional multiplication of the DFT result by 2 will give peaks which
are of about the right magnitude to be compared with the time-domain
signal. With this scaling, the value X(1) is twice the true DC value.
• The Nyquist rate depends only on the sampling time step dt, but the
frequency vector accompanying the DFT can be made arbitrarily long
by increasing the number of data points. To improve the frequency
resolution of the DFT, a common approach is to zero-pad the end of the
real data,
148 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
• The data x(k) should be multiplied by a smoothing window w(k), for
two reasons. First, if the window goes to a small value near its tails,
Gibb’s eﬀect (the spectral signature of a discontinuity between x(1) and
x(N)) can be minimized. The second rationale for windowing is based
on the discrete nature of the transform. Because the DFT provides
frequency data at only N/2 unique frequencies, there is the possibility
that a component in the real data lies in between one of these DFT
frequencies. The DFT magnitude at a speciﬁc ω(m) is in fact an average
of continuous frequencies from the neighborhood of the point. Smoothing
windows are generally chosen to achieve a tradeoﬀ of two conﬂicting
properties relating to the average: the width of the primary lobe (wide
primary lobes bring in frequencies that belong to the adjacent bins ω(m−
1) and ω(m + 1)), and the magnitude of the side lobes (tall side lobes
bring in frequencies that are far away from ω(m)).
There are many smoothing windows to choose from; no windowing at
all is usually referred to as applying a rectangular window. One of the
simplest is the Hann, or cosine, window:
w(k) =
1
2
¸
1 −cos

2πk
N
¸
• The DFT of a given signal is subject to bias and variance. These can
be reduced by taking separate DFT’s of sub-sections of data (perhaps
zero-padded to maintain frequency resolution), and then averaging them.
It is common to use segments which do not overlap, but it is not a
necessity. This averaging idea is especially important in transfer function
veriﬁcation; see below.
• If possible, the DFT should be run on a number of samples N which is
a multiple of a large power of two. If N is prime, the DFT will take a
long time to execute.
The above steps, all of which are available through the Matlab function
spectrum() for example, will ensure a fair spectral analysis of a time series.
21.4.2 Estimating the Transfer Function
In continuous time, when the plant input y(t) and output u(t) are transformed
into frequency space, the estimated transfer function follows from
21.4 Transfer Function Estimation – Broadband Input 149
ˆ
P(s) =
y(s)
u(s)
. (219)
As noted above, spectral analysis of a signal beneﬁts by using multiple seg-
ments and averaging; we now want to include the same approach in our esti-
mation of P(s). The procedure is:
• For the p’th segment of data, compute the transfer function estimate
ˆ
P
p
(m) =
Y
p
(m)Y

p
(m)
U
p
(m)U

p
(m)
.
• For the p’th segment of data, compute two covariances and a cross-
covariance:
Γ
p
uu
(m) = U
p
(m)U

p
(m)
Γ
p
yy
(m) = Y
p
(m)Y

p
(m)
Γ
p
yu
(m) = Y
p
(m)U

p
(m).
• Construct average values of the transfer function estimate and the other
quantities:
ˆ
P(m) = avg
p
(
ˆ
P
p
(m))
Γ
uu
(m) = avg
p

p
uu
(m))
Γ
yy
(m) = avg
p

p
yy
(m))
Γ
yu
(m) = avg
p

p
yu
(m))
• Compute the coherence function, which assesses the quality of the ﬁnal
estimate
ˆ
P(m):
Coh(m) =
Γ
yu
(m)Γ

yu
(m)
Γ
yy
(m)Γ
uu
(m)
.
150 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
If the coherence is near zero, then the segmental cross-covariances Γ
p
yu
(m)
are sporadic and have cancelled out; there is no clear relation between
the input and the output. This result could be caused by either dis-
turbances or sensor noise, both of which are reasonably assumed to be
random processes, and uncoupled to the input signal. Alternatively, if
the coherence is near one, then the cross-covariances are in agreement
and a real input-output relationship exists. With real data, the coher-
ence will deteriorate at high frequencies and also at any frequency where
disturbances or noise occur.
21.5 Time-Domain Simulation
The time-domain simulation approach tweaks the parameters of a simulation
so that its output matches the observed output. The method has its main
strength in the fact that it applies to any model that can be simulated, in-
cluding those of high order and with signiﬁcant nonlinearities. On the other
hand, the method is computationally expensive and gives no guarantee of a
useful solution, or even of convergence.
At the outset, we need to come up with some structure of the plant model.
This can be based on physics in many cases. Consider, for example, the case
of a mass mounted on a spring and a dashpot, driven by the input force u(t).
A fair guess for the actual dynamics has the form my

+by

+ky = u(t), and
we plan to look through the three-dimensional parameter space

θ = [m, b, k].
The simulation operation can be written this way: ˆ y(t) = G(

θ, u(t)), and the
system identiﬁcation problem is to minimize [[ˆ y(t) −y
obs
(t)[[, say, where [[ [[
here indicates the Euclidean norm. For a given parameter vector

θ, running the
simulation generates a new ˆ y, and computing the norm gives a scalar measure
of goodness.
Since the normed error is a complicated function of both u(t) and

θ, the mini-
mization must proceed iteratively. The Nelder-Meade simplex method is easy
to use, and can be invoked with the Matlab function fmins. As an example,
the three programs listed comprise a working Matlab set for identiﬁcation of
a ﬁrst-order, nonlinear system. Some notes on use:
• In this example, the same simulation generates the “observed” data and
the simulated response. Since the program simulate always uses the
global variable theta as the parameters, we must be careful about setting
theta in the calling programs.
21.5 Time-Domain Simulation 151
• After a simulation run is complete, the data is interpolated to the same
time scale as the observed data, in order to compute the error.
• The initial guess for theta is a random vector; the Simplex method will
take over from this point. In many instances, however, theta is roughly
known, and a better starting value can be given.
• The Simplex method may head into invalid parameter space, e.g., nega-
tive mass. The error calculation, however, can be easily augmented by
a term which penalizes invalid parameters, e.g.,
err = err + 1000*(1-sign(mass)).
• There is no guarantee that a global minimum will be found or even exists.
Starting from diﬀerent initial guesses for θ may help ﬁnd better results,
but we are still at the mercy of the minimization algorithm, and a very
complicated function.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
clear all ; clear global ;
global u_obs t_obs y_obs dt theta ;
dt = .3 ; % time step
theta = [1 2] ; % true parameter vector
t_obs = 0:dt:20*dt ; % observed time vector
u_obs = ones(length(t_obs),1) ; % observed input
[t_raw, y_raw] = ode45(’simulate’, [0 max(t_obs)], 0) ;
y_obs = spline(t_raw, y_raw, t_obs) ; % observed output
[theta_final] = fmins(’get_err’, randn(2,1)) ;
disp(sprintf(’final theta(1): %g.’, theta_final(1))) ;
disp(sprintf(’final theta(2): %g.’, theta_final(2))) ;
theta = theta_final ;
[t_raw, y_raw] = ode45(’simulate’, [0 max(t_obs)], 0) ;
y_sim = spline(t_raw, y_raw, t_obs) ;
figure(1) ; clf ; hold off ;
plot(t_obs, y_obs, t_obs, y_sim, t_obs, u_obs) ;
152 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
function [err] = get_err(theta_arg) ;
global y_obs t_obs theta ;
theta = theta_arg ;
[t_raw, y_raw] = ode45(’simulate’, [0 max(t_obs)], 0) ;
y_sim = spline(t_raw, y_raw, t_obs) ;
err = norm(y_sim - y_obs) ;
disp(sprintf(’error: %f.’, err)) ;
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
function [ydot] = simulate(t,y) ;
global u_obs dt theta ;
k = theta(1) ;
tau = theta(2) ;
ind = floor(t/dt) + 1 ; % we have to choose which u_obs to use:
% a zero-order hold as implemented.
ydot = ( k*u_obs(ind) - y^3 ) / tau ;
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
153
The bulk of our discussion on maneuvering and control has assumed that the
necessary system states can be measured. The marine engineer is in fact faced
with choices between many diﬀerent basic sensor packages, notably compasses,
paddle wheels, inertial navigation units, rate gyros, and depth guages, for ex-
ample. These listed sensors are self-contained and rely primarily on the phys-
ical properties of the natural environment. There is also a class of distributed
sensor systems; these generally involve an array of communicating elements, lo-
cated remotely from the vehicle. We present the fundamental concepts behind
two methodologies in this second class: the global positioning system (GPS)
and acoustic navigation, both of which can provide high-accuracy absolute
Consider a transponder A, which can transmit an acoustic signal, and also
measure, with microsecond accuracy, the time to receive a reply. Next, place
a responder B at a distance R away from A; the job of B is just to transmit
a signal whenever it receives one, with a (short) predictable response time T
t
.
Thus, the elapsed time T between a tranmission and consequent reception at
A is
T = T
t
+ 2R/c
w
,
where c
w
is the speed of sound in water, about 1450m/s. The range R follows
by inversion:
R =
(T −T
t
)c
2
2
.
Suppose that the location of B is known; then a given measurement of R
places A on a sphere around B. It is a case of three unknowns (x, y, z) and one
equation:
(x
A
−x
B
)
2
+ (y
A
−y
B
)
2
+ (z
A
−z
B
)
2
= R
2
.
The introduction of a another responder C (typically listening and responding
at a diﬀerent frequency than B) places A on the intersection of two spheres,
i.e., a circle. There are two equations, but still three unknowns. When A,
B, and C lie in a nearly horizontal plane, then the intersection circle lies in a
vertical plane; the addition of a depth sensor to our suite would allow us to pin
A’s location at one of two points on the circle. Finally, if we know which side A
is on, and do not allow for abrupt crossovers, then we have a functional set of
measurements for acoustic navigation with just two responders. The baseline is
the line connecting responders B and C; when A is near this baseline, positional
accuracy will be very poor since the two solution spheres are tangent.
Better and better performance can be obtained by increasing the number of
responders, and consequently of the baselines and spheres. With three re-
sponders, for example, the intersection of a sphere (responder D) and a circle
(responders B and C) is two points. Here there are three equations and three
unknowns, but the nonlinearity of the equations leads to the non-uniqueness
in the solution. A fourth responder or a depth transducer would be needed to
completely constrain the solution.
The above discussion is a minimum conceptual explanation of acoustic naviga-
tion. There are many other pieces to the approach, including an account of the
variation of sound speed c
w
with water depth, obtaining the Cartesian loca-
tions of the responder network, and handling various geometric conﬁgurations
that give rise to poor or degenerate solutions.
There are two common conﬁgurations used for acoustic navigation, named for
the length of the baselines relative to the target (transponder A) range.
(Ultra) Short-Baseline The geometry of SBL or USBL puts very short
baselines between the responders compared to the target distance. For in-
stance, the ﬁxed net is often attached to a vessel or other structure, with base-
line lengths on the order of 10-100m. Typical frequencies in use are around
100kHz, with a working range of 100-500m to the target. The wavelength of a
100kHz signal is about 1cm and 5cm is a reasonable estimate of the accuracy
for these systems.
Long-Baseline Long-baseline systems typically involve a larger responder
net, and the target ranges are similar to the baseline lengths. Very large
systems utilize frequencies of 10-15kHz (for a placement accuracy around 2-
5m), and may have ten-kilometer baselines. Frequent sources of error in long-
baseline systems are variations of c
w
, and also in multipath. In the latter
22.2 Global Positioning System (GPS) 155
B
C
A
3
A*
3
2
A
A*
2
A
1
C B
A
Figure 6: Left: General conﬁguration of a long-baseline acoustic system, with
target transponder A and ﬁxed responders B and C. The position A
1
is on
the baseline and has poor accuracy in the direction normal to the baseline; in
contrast, A
3
is well-posed. A

3
is an additional solution to the two-responder
problem. Right: General conﬁguration of a short-baseline system.
condition, false signals can be caused by reﬂections oﬀ the seaﬂoor and the
surface; these signals are typically eliminated by rejecting those receptions
which are outside a very tight and slowly moving window on travel time T.
Sometimes, bottom topography can shield a direct acoustic path, and the only
receptions available are via multipath!
22.2 Global Positioning System (GPS)
The GPS system is the most powerful system publicly available for absolute
position reference above water. It is similar in concept to the acoustic naviga-
tion systems described above, but with one fundamental diﬀerence: only the
one-way travel time from each satellite is measured at the target. The accu-
racies achieved with GPS are therefore strongly dependent on the accuracy of
time-keeping.
The core of the system is a network of 24 satellites arranged in six planes (4
per plane) inclined at 55 degrees from the equatorial plane, at an altitude of
about 20,000km. The altitude is chosen carefully to correspond with a 12-hour
orbit; geosynchronous orbit is much higher, at around 40,000km. The orbit
lines over a non-rotating earth are thus near-sinusoids that reach lattitudes
of 55

N and 55

S, and the six lines are spaced 60

apart in longitude. With
reference to a rotating Earth, the spatial frequency is doubled, so that the
longitudinal distance between tracks is 30 degrees, or 1800 nautical miles.
Each satellite transmits a regular signal which contains, among other items, the
time of its transmission, and the three-dimensional location of the satellite (the
ephemeris). It is from these two pieces of information, from many satellites,
that triangulation and navigation are performed at the target.
For the ideal case that the time bases of the target and the satellites are
exactly aligned, triangulation of the type described for acoustic navigation is
possible. In practical terms, the speed of light c = 3 10
8
m/s implies that
a 1ns timing error will cause a 0.3m range error. For this reason, each of
the satellites carries four atomic clocks on board, good to 1ns per day. The
time base is continually monitored and updated from a ground station, and
accurate to within 1ns. The ephemeris of each satellite is also monitored and
updated from the ground station, using a combination of least-squares analysis
of past data (1 week), and a Kalman ﬁlter to predict the future ephemeris.
The accuracy of satellite position is better than 10m.
We now come to the last thorny issue: how to make target receivers that don’t
require atomic clocks! The solution is very clever, and illustrated for the case
of two-dimensions; the arguments for three dimensions are the same. In two
dimensions, the range measurements from two sources locate the target on one
of two points (the intersection of two circles). Suppose that the target clock
is too slow by an amount
˜
t, so that the range estimate is
r + ˜ r = c(t +
˜
t).
The estimated range circles are too large, and the estimated location of the
target too far from the baseline. Introduce a third satellite now so that the
intersections of the circle pairs now occur at six points. Three of these are
very close, and indicate the approximate true solution. The trick is to ﬁnd the
correction for
˜
t that puts the three close solutions onto a single point. This
single point is near the centroid of the three approximate points, and represents
the best position solution. The target time base can be kept up to date by
22.2 Global Positioning System (GPS) 157
performing this check for every set of signals. Hence, the two-dimensional
timing problem is solved with three satellites; the three-dimensional timing
problem is solved with four satellites.
The position speciﬁcation for GPS is 25m, at the 95’th percentile. This is a re-
markable feat, given that it is an absolute measure over the entire surface and
atmosphere of our 6000km-radius Earth. Major sources of error include: clock
base and satellite navigation (≈ 2.5m), ionosphere and troposphere electro-
magnetic variations (≈ 2.5m), and inaccuracies in the receiver and multipath
(≈ 2m). GPS is also subject to selective availability or S/A, the addition of
a slow-varying random component in the satellite ephemeris data. Selective
availability is controlled by the United States Department of Defense, and de-
GPS solved most of the S/A concerns of American allies, by providing high-
accuracy navigation in local areas. The idea here is that a stationary target
can detect the eﬀects of S/A (since it is not moving) and then transmit the
corrections over a small geographical area. Many current GPS receivers are
capable of decoding these local corrections, which are then applied to their
own satellite navigation processing. Diﬀerential GPS typically provides 1-2m
accuracy.
Finally, as with the acoustic navigation systems described, an independent
altitude measurement will enhance the accuracy of GPS, essentially reducing
a three-dimensional to a two-dimensional problem.
159
23 REFERENCES
Short notes indicate how the reference is related to the text.
Dynamics of Mechanical and Electromechanical Systems, S.H. Crandall, D.C.
Karnopp, E.F. Kurtz, Jr., and D.C. Pridmore-Brown, Krieger: Malabar, FL,
1985. Coordinate systems and rigid-body dynamics.
Optimal Spacecraft Rotational Maneuvers, J.L. Junkins and J.D. Turner, El-
sevier: New York, 1986. Euler angles and quaternions.
Principles of Naval Architecture, 2nd Revision, E.V. Lewis, ed., Society of
Naval Architects and Marine Engineers: Jersey City, NJ, 1988. Classical treat-
ment of stability, propulsion, and lifting surfaces.
Marine Hydrodynamics, J.N. Newman, MIT Press: Cambridge, 1997. General
reference.
Guidance and Control of Ocean Vehicles, T.I. Fossen, Wiley: New York, 1994.
Comprehensive modern treatment of marine dynamics and control.
Formulas for Natural Frequency and Mode Shape, R.D. Blevins, Krieger: Mal-
abar, FL, 1984. Extensive added mass formulas.
A method for estimating static aerodynamic characteristics for slender bodies
of circular and noncircular cross section alone and with lifting surfaces at
angles of attack from 0

to 90

, L. Jorgensen, NASA Technical Note D-7228,
April 1973.
Fluid Dynamic Lift, S.F. Hoerner and H.V. Borst, Hoerner Fluid Dynamics:
Bakersﬁeld, CA, 1975. Extensive data on lift of bodies and wings.
Fluid Dynamic Drag, S.F. Hoerner and H.V. Borst, Hoerner Fluid Dynamics:
Bakersﬁeld, CA, 1975. Data on drag of bodies and wings.
Marine Propellers and Propulsion, J.S. Carleton, Butterworth-Heinemann:
Boston, 1994. Includes a chapter on transverse and azimuthing thrusters.
The inﬂuence of thruster dynamics on underwater vehicle behavior and their
160 23 REFERENCES
incorporation into control system design, D. R. Yoerger, J.G. Cooke, and J.-
J. E. Slotine, IEEE J. Oceanic Engineering, 15:167-178, 1990. First-order
nonlinear thruster model.
Toward an improved understanding of thruster dynamics for underwater ve-
hicles, A.J. Healey, S.M. Rock, S. Cody, D. Miles, and J.P. Brown, Proc.
IEEE Symposium on Autonomous Underwater Vehicle Technology, pp 340-
352. 1994. Second-order nonlinear thruster model.
Accurate four-quadrant nonlinear dynamical model for marine thrusters: The-
ory and experimental validation, R. Bachmayer, L.L. Whitcomb, and M.A.
Grosenbaugh, IEEE J. Oceanic Engineering, 25:146-159, 2000. State-of-the-
art in thruster modeling.
Acceleration and steady-state propulsion dynamics of a gas turbine ship with
controllable-pitch propeller, C.J. Rubis, Proc. SNAME Annual Meeting, No.
10, 1972.
Governing ship propulsion gas turbine engines, C.J. Rubis and T.R. Harper,
SNAME Trans., 94:283-308, 1986.
Flow-Induced Vibrations, 2nd Edition, R.D. Blevins, Van Nostrand Reinhold,
New York, 1990. Cable strumming.
Modern Control Engineering, K. Ogata, Prentice-Hall: Englewood Cliﬀs, NJ,
1970. SISO linear control.
Circuits, Signals, and Systems, W.M. Siebert, MIT Press: Cambridge, MA,
1986. General reference on transforms.
Applied Nonlinear Control, J.J.-E. Slotine and W. Li, Prentice-Hall: Engle-
wood Cliﬀs, NJ, 1991.
Feedback Control Theory, J.C. Doyle, B.A. Francis, and A.R. Tannenbaum,
Macmillan: New York, 1992. Loopshaping concepts.
Control Engineering: A Modern Approach, P.R. B´elanger, Sauders College
Publishing, Philadelphia, 1995. General control reference.
Introduction to Dynamic Systems, D.G. Luenberger, Wiley: New York, 1979.
161
Dynamic programming and LQR derivation.
Applied Optimal Estimation, A. Gelb, ed., MIT Press: Cambridge, 1988.
Kalman ﬁlter practical aspects.
Linear Optimal Control Systems, H. Kwakernaak and R. Sivan, Wiley: New
York, 1972. Kalman ﬁlter derivation and properties.
Multivariable feedback design: concepts for a classical/modern synthesis, J.C.
Doyle and G. Stein, IEEE Trans. Automatic Control, 26:4-16, 1981. Seminal
paper on LTR.
A tutorial on the LQG/LTR method, M. Athans, Proc. American Control
Conference, pp 1289-1296, 1986.
Multivariable control of a submersible using the LQG/LTR design methodol-
ogy, R. Martin, L. Valavani, and M. Athans, Proc. American Control Confer-
ence, pp 1313-1324, 1986. More tutorial LTR.
Optimal Control, F.L. Lewis and V.L. Syrmos, Wiley: New York, 1995. Gen-
eral reference on LTR.
Numerical Recipes in C, 2nd Edition, W.H. Press, S.A. Teukolsky, W.T. Vet-
terling, and B.P. Flannery, Cambridge University Press: Cambridge, UK,
1992. Function minimization.
Spectral Analysis in Engineering, G.E. Hearn and A.V. Metcalfe, Halsted:
New York, 1996. Transfer functions from spectral analysis.
NAVSTAR: Global positioning system – Ten years later, B.W. Parkinson, S.W.
Gilbert, Proc. IEEE, 71:1177-1186, 1983. The whole issue is in fact dedicated
to global positioning systems. There is another such issue: IEEE Proc. Vol.
87, No. 1, 1999.
162 23 REFERENCES
163
24 PROBLEMS
Many of the following problems use data presented by Fossen and in Principles
of Naval Architecture.
1. Inertial dynamics. The gas generator turbine of a LM-2500 marine
engine rotates at p = 10, 000rpm (revolutions per minute), and has a
mass of approximately 200kg. The following question pertains to the
inertial forces experienced by this spinning rigid body, with I
xy
= I
xz
=
I
yz
= x
g
= z
g
= 0.
Because of high rotational speed, the turbine is exceedingly sensitive to
lateral balancing. Estimate the net force that the radial bearings would
have to support for a 1mm mass imbalance, say, y
g
= 1mm with respect
to the spin axis.
2. Kinematics. Although dead-reckoning is not recommended as a method
for long-term navigation, it can be quite useful for pre-planning trajec-
tories. For example, consider a surface vessel heading proﬁle as follows:
t = 0 φ(t) = 0 rad
0 < t <= 60s φ(t) = t/60 π/4 rad
60s < t < 240s φ(t) = π/4 rad
240s < t < 300s φ(t) = (300 −t)/60 π/4 rad
t = 300s φ(t) = 0 rad
φ
π/4
t = 60s t = 0s t = 240s t = 300s
y
x
φ
What is the total distance traveled in the Cartesian x direction during
these ﬁve minutes? You may assume that the forward speed of the vessel
is u = 1m/s, and that there is no signiﬁcant sideslip. Hint: Break the
trajectory up into three parts, which can be evaluated separately.
164 24 PROBLEMS
3. Coeﬃcients and system modeling. Consider a weather vane in a
wind of velocity U
o
. If θ is the angle of the vane with respect to the wind
direction,
(a) Write the single-degree of freedom (N) linearized equations of mo-
tion about the ﬁxed axis 0.
(b) Write N
θ
, N
˙
θ
, and N
¨
θ
in terms of N
v
, N
r
, N
˙ r
, etc..
(c) If we consider the diﬀerential equation
A¨ y(t) + B ˙ y(t) + Cy(t) = 0,
the condition for stability is that A, B, and C must have the same
sign. Express this requirement in terms of the derivatives in the
previous question. Give physical interpretations for what would
make such a device stable or unstable.
(d) Create a numerical model of this system, using the MATLAB ODE
solver ode45. The system equation can be written as two ﬁrst-order
equations:
d
dt

˙
θ
θ
¸
=
¸
−B/A −C/A
1 0
¸
˙
θ
θ
¸
.
Simulate the system response to nonzero initial conditions (e.g.,
θ(0) = 1,
˙
θ(0) = 0). Discuss, using several examples, response
sensitivity to B and C, which are related to the aerodynamic coef-
ﬁcients. For example, look at the range ¦A, B, C¦ = ¦1, ±3, ±3¦.
U
ο
x
y
θ O
165
4. Hydrodynamics. The ﬁgure below shows some characteristic ﬂuid
force curves versus a motion parameter. Give the linear hydrodynamic
coeﬃcient at two diﬀerent operating conditions, origin O and A: is it
zero, small, ﬁnite positive, ﬁnite negative?
F F F
A A A O
O O
u u u
5. Second-order system. Consider the vibration of a mass-spring-dashpot
system:
m¨ x + b ˙ x + kx = 0,
wherein all the coeﬃcients are positive and real (i.e., physical).
(a) Set x(t) = e
st
, and ﬁnd two solutions for s in terms of m, b, and k,
using the quadratic formula. The solution pairs depend on whether
b exceeds a critical value: what is the critical value and how do the
solutions change?
(b) From the initial condition x(0) = x
o
, and ˙ x(0) = 0, ﬁnd the coeﬃ-
cients for the general solution
x(t) = c
1
e
s
1
t
+ c
2
e
s
2
.
in terms of x
o
, s
1
, and s
2
. What do you think will happen when
s
1
= s
2
?
(c) Write this x(t) for sub-critical b (that is, complex s) in terms of the
standard parameters
166 24 PROBLEMS
ω
n
=

k
m
(undamped natural frequency)
ζ =
b
2

km
(damping ratio)
ω
d
= ω
n

1 −ζ
2
(damped natural frequency).
Give your answer in terms of a real exponential multiplied by a
single sine or cosine, and make a sketch.
(d) Sketch the response x(t) for supercritical b, i.e., both s are real, for
the same initial conditions. What happens when the roots s
i
are
far apart vs. when they are close together?
(e) Consider now the case where an input acts to drive the mass from
zero initial conditions:
m¨ x + b ˙ x + kx = u.
This equation deﬁnes a system, with input u, and output x. Using
the Laplace transform, write the transfer function for this system,
i.e., the impulse response, both in frequency (Laplace) space, and
in the time-domain. Make a sketch of the time-domain result. Be
sure to cover both the sub-critical and super-critical damping cases.
(f) What is the step response of this system, in both the subcritical
and super-critical damping cases? Include sketches.
6. Submarine roll dynamics and control. A submarine has weight
1200t (tons) and the center of gravity is 0.5m above the center of buoy-
ancy (What can you conclude?). The rolling motion can be assumed
to be decoupled from the other motions. This submarine has anti-
rolling ﬁns to ensure stability. The control hydrodynamic derivative is
K
δ
= −2.8tm per degree of ﬁn rotation δ, at a forward speed of 5m/s.
(a) Write the equation of motion for roll (K).
(b) If the automatic control law δ = k
1
ψ is used, where ψ is the roll
angle, what range of k
1
ensures stability?
167
(c) If the speed suddenly drops to 2.5m/s, how does the range of sta-
bilizing k
1
change?
7. Steering. Draw curves of rudder angle δ vs. yaw rate r for a dynamically
stable surface vessel, and then for an unstable vessel. Indicate areas
where the vessel turns against the rudder action.
8. Submarine pitch/heave dynamics. Consider a submarine moving
forward at speed U, and restricted to small motions in the vertical (x−z)
plane. Assume that:
• The submarine is symmetric in the x − y plane and y
G
= 0. The
submarine is not symmetric in the x −z plane due to the sail, etc.,
but assume it is nearly symmetric, so that you can omit certain
hydrodynamic terms.
• At rest, the submarine is neutrally buoyant and stable with the x
and y axes horizontal. What does this tell us about the magnitude
of the buoyant force and where it acts with respect to the center of
weight?
(a) Derive the equations of motion for the submarine moving at speed
U.
(b) Derive the hydrostatic, restoring pitch moment for small pitch θ.
(c) Linearize the inertial terms in the equations of motion.
(d) Expand the ﬂuid forces and moments in terms of the motions. Omit
nonlinear and memory eﬀects, and be sure to include the hydrostatic
(e) Write out the complete linearized equations of motion. Does surge
decouple from pitch and heave? Write out the coupled equations in
matrix form.
(f) Can the submarine be stable in pitch without feedback control?
Can the submarine be stable in depth without feedback control?
9. Submarine stability via slender body theory.
(a) An underwater vehicle hull has the shape of a circular cylinder,
except at the very ends, where it rapidly tapers down to a point. If
168 24 PROBLEMS
the radius is 0.5m, length is 17m, and speed is 2m/s, use slender-
body theory to express the following coeﬃcients: Z
˙ w
, M
˙ q
, and M
w
,
all referenced to the body midpoint.
(b) It turns out that in order to match the lift and moment of the hull
in experiments, a ﬂat tail of radius 0.4m has to be included in the
slender-body estimate. Determine the corrected value for M
w
, and
w
. Where is the aerodynamic center with
respect to the center of the hull, and is this hull stable in pitch?
Recall that the aerodynamic center is the equivalent location of the
observed lift force that creates the observed moment.
(c) A ﬁn with pre-determined lift slope of 3.6/rad is to be applied at
the tail to make the device just stable in pitch. How big is the
required ﬁn area that brings the net M
w
to zero, as desired?
10. Lifting surfaces. Using the lifting surface formulas, estimate the coef-
ﬁcient K
v
of a submarine sail as shown below, for U = 10m/s.
15m
10m
7m
11. Slender body theory. Consider a long ellipsoidal body of length l and
diameter d.
(a) With l/d = 7.0, approximate the cross-body added mass, using
slender-body theory, and compare it with the exact results from
the table below (Blevins).
(b) Perform the slender body calculation also for a sphere, and compare
again to the exact result.
(c) What is the added mass in the in-line direction?
169
3
/3
2
/3
where a/b = 0.1: α = 0.075
0.2: 0.143
0.6: 0.355
1.0: 0.500
2.0: 0.704
5.0: 0.894
7.0: 0.933
10.0: 0.960
∞: 1.000
2
/3
where a/b = 0.1: α = 6.148
0.2: 3.008
0.6: 0.908
1.0: 0.500
2.0: 0.210
5.0: 0.059
7.0: 0.036
10.0: 0.021
∞: 0.000
2a
2b
12. Submarine pitch stability with various methods. We will calculate
the pitch derivative due to an angle of attack, M
w
, for a small submarine,
using several diﬀerent methods.
The submarine is a rotationally symmetric ellipsoid with L/D = 7, L =
35m. We ﬁx the body origin to the midpoint as shown below. The body
170 24 PROBLEMS
is appended with two ﬁns as shown in the ﬁgure: each has an area of
1m
2
, geometric aspect ratio of 3, and has its longitudinal center of action
1m forward of the body stern.
(a) Apply wing theory to characterize M
w
due to the ﬁns alone.
(b) Apply slender body theory to estimate M
w
for the body alone.
(c) Linearize the Munk moment, and give a corrected slender-body
value for M
w
of the body.
(d) Apply Jorgensen’s approximate formulas to estimate M
w
for the
body; make linearizations where necessary.
(e) Use the experimental data from Hoerner (p. 13.2) below to estimate
M
w
for the body.
(f) Use the Hoerner result and your result from wing theory to write a
net M
w
for the body plus ﬁns.
(g) What is the location of the net aerodynamic center? If it has an
unstable location forward of the midpoint, what increase in ﬁn area
would bring it back to the midpoint?
(h) What is the diameter of a ﬂat stern that will allow the slender body
theory to give the same moment as the Hoerner (experimental)
data, for the body alone?
(i) What is the diameter of a ﬂat stern that allows the approximate
formulas of Jorgensen to give the same moment as the Hoerner data,
for the body alone?
Hoerner p. 13.2:
Symmetric body of revolution with L/D = 6.7.
Force and moment referenced to body midpoint:
Z = −0.5ρU
2
D
2
C
ydb
tan(w/u). C
y
= 1.20.
M = 0.5ρU
2
D
2
LC
nb
tan(w/u). C
m
= 0.53. DESTABILIZING
171
1m
Each fin: 1m area
AR = 3
2
L = 35m
y
x
L/D = 7
13. Cable dynamics. A towing cable is steel-jacketed, with diameter 3cm,
an eﬀective extensibility of E = 100 10
9
Pa, and a density of ρ
c
=
5000kg/m
3
. The vehicle it tows is streamlined, and has negligible mass
(M). If we are towing at low speed and L = 4000m depth,
(a) Calculate ω
1
, the ﬁrst undamped natural frequency in heave, with
mL >> M.
(b) If the vessel heaves with a P = 2m amplitude and a 4.5-second
period, what is the dynamic tension amplitude at the top (s = L) of
the cable? The formula for this dynamic tension (with mL >> M)
is
˜
T = EAPk sin(ks)/cos(kL), where A is the cross-sectional area
of the cable, k = ω

m/EA, and m is the cable mass per unit
length.
(c) Taking into account the static tension induced by in-water weight,
does the cable unload at the surface, for the heaving conditions
above?
14. Cable mechanics (hard!). You are asked to assess the operational
envelope of a cable/vehicle system which has been installed on a vessel.
The cable is steel-jacketed, with diameter 3cm, an eﬀective extensibility
of 100 10
9
Pa, and a density of 5000kg/m. The vehicle is streamlined,
and has a mass (material plus added) of 100kg.
(a) The towing angle at the vessel cannot exceed 25deg from vertical,
for reasons of deck and crane geometry. If this angle is considered
equal to the critical angle φ
c
, what is the maximum speed for the
system? Assume the normal drag coeﬃcient of the cable is C
n
=
1.2.
172 24 PROBLEMS
(b) Considering the undamped, uncoupled axial dynamics, express the
natural frequency as a function of the vehicle depth, and sketch the
curve. If the fastest waves that the surface vessel responds to have
period 4s, what is the “threshold” operating depth?
(c) The undamped, uncoupled lateral dynamics follow the equation
(m + m
a
)

2
q
∂t
2
=
¯
T

2
q
∂s
+ w
n
sin
¯
φ
∂q
∂s
,
where m
a
is the added mass of the cable per unit length, and w
n
is
the in-water weight of the cable. Separation of variables q(s, t) =
˜ q(s) cos ωt gives
¯
T

2
˜ q
∂s
2
+ w
n
sin
¯
φ
∂˜ q
∂s
+ w
n
γ˜ q = 0,
where γ = (m + m
a

2
/w
n
. Simplify this expression by writing
¯
T = w
n
s (the vehicle weight eﬀect is small), sin
¯
φ · 1 (the cable is
nearly vertical), and then use the substitution z = 2

γs to arrive
at the Bessel equation
z
2

2
˜ q
∂z
2
+ z
∂˜ q
∂z
+ z
2
˜ q = 0.
The derivatives can be transformed from s to z coordinates via the
chain rule:
∂˜ q
ds
=
∂˜ q
∂z

∂z
∂s

2
˜ q
ds
2
=

2
˜ q
∂z
2

∂z
∂s

2
+
∂˜ q
∂z

2
z
∂z∂s

∂z
∂s
.
(d) The equation above has a solution of the form ˜ q = cJ
0
(z), where
c is a constant to be found, and J
0
(z) is the zero’th order Bessel
function of the ﬁrst kind. If ˜ q(s = L) = Q, that is, we impose a
harmonic input at the top, ﬁnd c in terms of Q and z(s = L). What
condition makes ˜ q blow up, indicating a resonance frequency ω
n
?
173
(e) Recalling that strumming occurs when ω
n
· 0.2U/d, construct a
graph of towing velocities vs. deployment depths for which the
strumming would be centered. Include at least the three lowest
modes in your sketch, and discuss the trends for the higher modes.
J
0
(x) = 0 for for x · π(n −0.25), n = 0, 1, 2, , especially when x
is large. You should ﬁnd that strumming is hard to avoid in deep
towing applications!
15. Vessel heading control. We consider the yaw/sway dynamics of a
high-speed container ship. All the calculations below are to be made in
nondimensional coordinates, so you do not need to perform any trans-
formations in this question.
(a) The nondimensional system with states x

= [v

, r

] evolves accord-
ing to dx

/dt

= Ax

+ Bδ, where
A =
¸
−0.90 −0.42
−4.8 −2.3
¸
, B =

−0.13
1.4
¸
.
If the output is yaw rate r

, i.e., C = [0 1], write the transfer
function r

(s)/δ(s) = C(sI − A)
−1
B. Use matrix inversion for the
22 matrix (sI −A), perform the matrix multiplications, and then
r

(s)
δ(s)
= K
s + z
1
(s + p
1
)(s + p
2
)
,
where K is a constant gain, −z
1
is the zero (there is one real zero),
and [−p
1
, −p
2
] are the two poles of the second-order system. Are
both poles stable?
(b) For the purposes of autopilot design, the transfer function φ(s)/δ(s)
is crucial. Fortunately, all you have to do is divide r

(s)/δ(s) by an-
other factor of s to account for the fact that dφ/dt

= r

. Sketch all
the poles and zeros of the plant transfer function P(s) = φ(s)/δ(s)
on a root locus plot.
174 24 PROBLEMS
(c) A PID controller C(s) will work to stabilize the heading angle,
and brings to P(s)C(s) one additional pole at the origin, and two
arbitrary zeros. Demonstrate a rough PID design by devising two
controller zero locations that will attract the closed-loop poles into
the left-half plane. Draw the path that you expect each closed-loop
pole to follow, as the control gain increases from zero to very large
values.
You do not need to calculate the PID gains that go with your pro-
posed zero locations.
16. Full-state feedback of a submarine. The coeﬃcients governing the
pitch/heave dynamics of a Deep Submergence Rescue Vehicle (DSRV)
are given below. They are nondimensionalized as in the lecture notes,
using the factors ρ/2, U, and L.
I

xx
= 0.000118 M

q
= −0.0113 Z

q
= −0.0175
I

zz
= 0.00193 M

˙ q
= −0.00157 Z

˙ q
= −0.000130
x

G
= 0 M

w
= 0.0112 Z

w
= −0.0439
m

= 0.0364 M

˙ w
= −0.000146 Z

˙ w
= −0.0315
U = 2.0m/s M

δ
= −0.0128 Z

δ
= −0.0277
L = 15.0m M

θ
= −0.156/U
2
(a) Write the linearized (nondimensional) dynamics in the matrix form
˙ x = Ax + Bu, where the input u = δ, and the state vector is
x = [w

, q

, θ, Z

]. Z

here is the elevation of the vehicle in inertial
˙
Z

should include both w

and
θ.
(b) Is the DSRV vehicle open-loop stable, that is, without control action
δ? You can assess this either by ﬁnding the eigenvalues of your A-
matrix above, or by computing the stability parameter C

.
(c) In preparation for controller design, create a simulation using Mat-
lab. Make a graph of the open-loop step response, showing all the
dimensional state variables versus dimensional time.
(d) Assuming that all the states can be measured accurately, a full-
state controller δ = −Kx can be used, where K is a 1 4 gain
matrix. Under this control, the system dynamics are governed by
175
˙ x = (A − BK)x, so that if A − BK has all negative eigenvalues,
the system is stable.
Use the Matlab function place to put the four closed-loop poles at
g(−0.95 ± 0.31i) and g(−0.59 ± 0.81i), g = 1. Demonstrate that
your closed-loop design is stable against nonzero initial conditions.
What are the eﬀects of increasing or decreasing g?
Note that the pole locations suggested above are with respect to
the dimensional system, i.e., using dimensional time.
17. Nyquist stability. The inverted pendulum shown below is often used
as a simple model for rocket ﬂight, and can also illustrate the dynamic
behavior of an unstable ocean vessel which is propelled from the stern,
e.g., a barge being pushed by a tugboat.
For this problem, we assume that all of the mass (m) is concentrated
at the distal end of an arm of length l; a high-performance positioning
system sets the horizontal position of the cart u
o
.
u
o
m
φ
g
l
A Lagrangian derivation of the dynamics gives:
¨
φ =
g
l
sin(φ) −
1
l
cos(φ)¨ u
o
.
Note that the acceleration of the cart is now considered to be the input
to the plant, e.g., u = ¨ u
o
.
(a) If the observation is taken to be the angle of the bar φ, i.e., y =
φ, write the state-space representation of the dynamics linearized
about the point φ = 0.
176 24 PROBLEMS
(b) Show that this plant is fully state observable and controllable.
(c) Now make the assumption that l = 1, and g = 1 (it can be achieved
through a proper nondimensionalization) What is the transfer func-
tion of the plant, P(s)? Use this plant model for the rest of this
question.
(d) Where are the plant poles and zeros, if any?
(e) A stabilizing controller is not hard to ﬁnd, and a suggested one is:
C(s) =
−4(2s + 1)
s + 2
.
Create a rough Nyquist plot of the loci of P(s)C(s), for the frequen-
cies ω = [0, 2.2, ∞]rad/s. These three frequencies are all that you
need to sketch the overall shape; there are no hidden loops or other
features. In the case of ω = 2.2, for which you will need to make
explicit calculations, you may ﬁnd the following identity useful:
a + jb
c + jd
=
(a + jb)
(c + jd)
(c −jd)
(c −jd)
=
(ac + bd) + j(bc −ad)
c
2
+ d
2
.
Be sure to include the complex-conjugate points for −ω on your
plot.
(f) Invoke the Nyquist stability criterion to conﬁrm that the closed-
loop system is stable.
(g) About how many degrees of phase margin does this design provide?
What reduction in low-frequency gain can be tolerated? Is it a
reasonable design?
18. Root locus and loopshaping. The parameters governing the surface
maneuvering of a high-speed container ship are given below for reference:
m

0.00792 I

zz
0.000456 x

G
−0.05
L 175.0m U 8m/s Y

˙ v
−0.00705
Y

˙ r
0.0000 Y

v
−0.0116 Y

r
0.00242
Y

δ
−0.00258 N

˙ v
0.0000 N

˙ r
−0.000419
N

v
−0.00385 N

r
−0.00222 N

δ
0.00126
177
Note that the center of vessel mass is located aft of the origin; for this
model, the origin coincides with the center of added mass, so that Y
˙ r
=
N
˙ v
= 0. The nondimensional system with states x

= [v

, r

] evolves
according to dx

/dt

= Ax

+ Bδ, where
A =
¸
−0.90 −0.42
−4.8 −2.3
¸
, B =

−0.13
1.4
¸
.
The relevant output is yaw rate: C = [0 1] and D = 0. For the purposes
of autopilot design, however, the transfer function φ(s)/δ(s) is needed.
The following steps create two heading autopilots, using the root-locus
and loopshaping techniques. In addition to the Matlab commands listed
below, you will ﬁnd very useful the convolution function conv() which
can be used to combine systems, e.g., for numerators,
numPC = conv(numP,numC);. Also, be sure that you equalize axis scal-
ing for your plots in the complex-plane, by using axis(’equal’);.
(a) Use the Matlab command tf(), or ss(), to create a system model
of the open-loop transfer function P(s)C(s), using the plant above
and a PID-type controller:
C(s) = k
p

1 + τ
d
s +
1
τ
i
s

.
The actual numerical values for k
p
, τ
d
, and τ
i
are to be found in the
next step.
(b) Using τ
d
= 2 and τ
i
= 6 as suggested values, use the Matlab com-
mand rlocus() and then rlocfind() to select a controller gain
k
p
, that puts the three slow poles in the following sector: 1) min-
imum undamped frequency (nondimensional) of 0.3, 2) maximum
frequency of 0.5, and 3) minimum damping ratio 0.7. Give a root
locus plot, with your pole locations clearly marked on top of the
trajectories taken as k
p
varies. You don’t need to show the fourth,
fast pole, which will be quite far to the left.
(c) Apply the k
p
you selected to P(s)C(s), and then use the Matlab
functions feedback() to create the resulting feedback system, and
178 24 PROBLEMS
step() to plot the closed-loop system response to a step input in
(d) Use the Matlab command nyquist() to make a Nyquist plot of
P(s)C(s) for your design. Make a visual estimate of the gain and
phase margins.
(e) An alternate approach for controller design of this stable plant
is loopshaping: For the open-loop function L(s) = ω
c
/s, where
ω
c
= 2.0, invert the plant to come up with a compensator: C(s) =
L(s)/P(s). This design has inﬁnite gain margin and 90 degrees
phase margin.
(f) As above, create the feedback system, and plot the closed-loop step
response.
(g) The loopshaping control is not quite a PID-controller; how does it
diﬀer, and what would L(s) have to contain to make it a PID?
(h) The controllers you just designed are in nondimensional time coor-
dinates; give the P,I, and D gains for use on a real time scale, for
the root-locus design.
19. LQR. Consider the state-space system and LQR design:
A =
¸
0 −1
1 0
¸
,
B = [1 0]
T
C = [0 1]
D = 0
Q = C
T
C
R = ρ.
The plant is an undamped oscillator with undamped poles at ±j. Note
that the plant output is position for this problem.
(a) What is the control gain K in terms of ρ? Hints: There are two
solutions for p
12
; choose the positive one. Also, the expression for
p
22
is messy; luckily, you won’t need to use it.
179
(b) Determine the limiting approximations for K with ρ very small
and very large – these are the cheap control and expensive control
problems.
(c) Derive the limiting closed-loop pole locations for ρ −→0, giving the
frequency and damping ratio of the Butterworth pattern in terms of
ρ. You can get the characteristic equation for the poles as det(sI −
(A−BK)) = 0, and then make it ﬁt the form s
2
+ 2ζω
n

2
n
= 0.
20. LQR. Consider the ﬁrst-order, unstable system governed by ˙ x = x +u,
for which the output is y = x. The state-space matrices are A = B =
C = 1.
(a) Solve the LQR Riccati equation for P, for the case Q = C
T
C and
R = ρ. Your answer should give a positive P as a function of ρ
alone.
(b) Consider the cheap-control problem, with ρ →0. Write the leading-
term approximations for P and then K, and compute the eigenvalue
(there is only one) of the closed-loop system. Note that eig(M) =
M, if M is a scalar instead of a matrix.
(c) Now look at the expensive-control problem, with ρ → ∞. Again,
write the approximations for P and K, and ﬁnd the closed-loop
system eigenvalue.
21. LQG/LTR. For the inverted pendulum plant (see previous question)
with state-space matrices
A =
¸
0 1
1 0
¸
, C = [0 1] ,
the KF Riccati equation yields H = [100 14]
T
, for the choices V
1
=
[100 0 ; 0 0], and V
2
= 0.01.
(a) Compute the open-loop transfer function for the Kalman ﬁlter loop:
L(s) = C(sI −A)
−1
H.
180 24 PROBLEMS
(b) Even though this L(s) is unstable, its magnitude plot conﬁrms that
it is a reasonable loopshaping design. What is the low-frequency
gain for this L(s), and what kind of tracking performance should
we expect from the associated LTR design?
(c) Now consider the closed-loop transfer function, which you can write
as S(s) = L(s)/(1 +L(s)) (the sensitivity). What is the character-
istic equation for the closed-loop system, and about what damping
ratio has the Kalman ﬁlter provided?
22. LQG/LTR design. The parameters for the linearized sway/yaw mo-
tions of a swimmer delivery vehicle are given below.
% Parameters, all nondimensional except [U,L]
U = 4.0 ; % m/s
L = 5.3 ; % m
Izz = 0.006326 ;
m = 0.1415 ;
xg = 0. ;
Yv = -0.1 ;
Yr = 0.03 ;
Nv = -0.0074 ;
Nr = -0.016 ;
Ydelta = 0.027 ;
Yvdot = -0.055 ;
Yrdot = 0. ;
Nvdot = 0. ;
Nrdot = -0.0034 ;
Ndelta = -0.013 ;
You are asked to develop an LQG/LTR controller for this plant, and it is
suggested that you compose a single Matlab script to perform the steps
in sequence. Please make sure you answer all the questions, and include
a listing of your code. This entire design is made in nondimensional
coordinates.
(a) Plant Modeling and Characteristics
181
i. Construct a state-space plant model, to take rudder angle δ as
an input and give heading angle φ as an output. Please provide
the numerical values for the A, B, C matrices. There should be
three states in your model, with one input channel and one
output channel.
ii. Compute and list the controllability and observability matrices;
is the plant state-controllable and state-observable?
iii. Where are the poles of your plant model? Is this model stable?
iv. Show a plot of your plant’s step response.
(b) LQR and KF Designs
i. Using the Matlab command lqr(), you can compute the LQR
feedback gain K, for given A, B, Q, and R matrices. With the
choices Q = C
T
C, and R = ρ, list K and plot the closed-loop
step responses for the choices ρ = [0.1, 0.001, 0.00001]. How do
the gains and step responses change as you make ρ smaller and
smaller?
Note that the fundamental closed-loop LQR system is
˙
x = (A −BK)x + BKx
desired
y = x,
i.e., the input to the closed-loop system is x
desired
and the out-
put is x. Your plot should show speciﬁcally the output φ, for an
input of x
desired
= [v
desired
= 0, r
desired
= 0, φ
desired
= 1]. This
compression can be achieved in one step by premultiplying the
system by C
T
, and post-multiplying it by C:
˙
x = (A −BK)x + BKC
T
y
desired
y = Cx,
ii. The Matlab command lqe() can be used to generate the Kal-
man ﬁlter gain H, given design matrices A, C, V
1
, and V
2
. For
the choices V
1
= I
3×3
and V
2
= 0.01, compute H, and make
a plot of the closed-loop step response. Be sure to give the
numerical values of H.
182 24 PROBLEMS
Note that the lqe() command asks for a disturbance gain ma-
trix G; you should set this to I
3×3
. The closed-loop KF system
is as follows:
˙
ˆ x = (A −HC)ˆ x + Hy
ˆ y = Cˆ x,
i.e., the input is the measurement y and the output is an esti-
mated version of it, ˆ y.
(c) Loop Transfer Recovery
The LQG compensator is a combination of the KF and LQR designs
above. With normal negative feedback, the compensator C(s) has
the following state space representation:
˙
z = (A −BK −HC)z + He
u = Kz,
so that the input to the compensator is the tracking error e =
r − y, and its output u is the control action to be applied as
input to the plant. The total open-loop transfer function is the
P(s)C(s); in Matlab, you may simply multiply the systems, e.g.,
sysPC = sysP * sysC ;.
i. Make a log(magnitude) plot of the KF open-loop transfer func-
tion L(s) = C(sI − A)
−1
H, versus log(frequency). You may
ﬁnd the Matlab command freqresp() helpful. [L(s)[ should
be large at low frequencies, and small at high frequencies, con-
sistent with the rules of loopshaping.
ii. As ρ →0, the product P(s)C(s) →L(s). Demonstrate this by
computing P(s)C(s) for the three diﬀerent values of ρ above,
and overlaying the respective [P(s)C(s)[ over the plot of part
3a).
iii. Make a closed-loop step response plot for the smallest value of
ρ. How does it compare with the KF step response of part 2b)?
In real LTR applications, the particular values of V
1
and V
2
can be picked
to control the low-frequency gain, and crossover frequency of the open-
loop KF system L(s) = C(sI −A)
−1
H.
183
23. Inertial navigation. A triaxial accelerometer package is aligned with
the [x,y,z] (fwd, port, up) axes of an underwater vehicle. At a particular
instant in time, the three raw accelerations from the strain guages are
[¨ x = −0.96, ¨ y = 0.80, ¨ z = 9.73] meters/second. Note that under the
inﬂuence of gravity alone, this sensor will always report that the vehicle
is accelerating upwards.
(a) Ignoring the coupling of Euler small angles, what estimates can
you give for the roll and pitch angles? I suggest that you draw the
measurement vector in the coordinates of the vehicle frame, and
then consider the orientation of the body which would lead to it.
(b) Given that the acceleration due to gravity is 9.81m/s, how do we
know that these are reasonable (but not foolproof!) angle calcula-
tions to make?
184 24 PROBLEMS
24. LQG/LTR design: term project. You are asked to carry out mod-
eling and control system design for the surge dynamics of an oceanic
cable-laying vessel. This vessel needs to have very good speed control
so that the cable, which is being paid out constantly and sinks slowly
under its own weight, lies properly on the seaﬂoor. The bathymetry
for the path is well-known but variable, so the vessel will need to slow
down and speed up frequently. Unexpected deviations in speed from the
calculated trajectory are likely to create loops or kinks in the cable, or
induce large tensions.
vessel length L 145m
draft h 9m
beam b 22m
displacement ∇ 17750m
3
a
0.07ρ∇
thrust reduction factor t 0.19
wetted surface area A
w
5585m
3
towed resistance coeﬃcient C
r
0.0025
wake fraction at propeller w 0.22
propeller diameter D 7.21m
pitch/diameter ratio P/D 1.1
rotative eﬃciency η
r
1.025
zero-speed thrust coeﬃcient k
t
(J = 0) 0.6
slope of k
t
with J -0.522
zero-speed torque coeﬃcient k
q
(J = 0) 0.1
slope of k
q
with J -0.0833
rotational moment of inertia I
p
2.03 10
5
kgm
2
engine parameter a 0.876
b 0.208
c 2.173
d -.0939
maximum fuel rate f
m
1.5kg/s
maximum torque Q
m
70000Nm
maximum speed n
m
60Hz
gearbox reduction ratio λ 32
eﬃciency η
g
0.97
185
It is desired to create a linear controller for the nominal surge motion,
and then demonstrate that it will work with a simulation of the real
nonlinear system, within a neighborhood of the nominal speed.
The vessel is powered by a single gas turbine engine, driving one pro-
peller. The parameters for the vessel, propeller, and engine system are
as given in the table.
The gas turbine torque-speed characteristic ﬁts the relation:
Q
e
Q
m
= −

a
f
f
m
+ b

n
e
n
m
+

c
f
f
m
+ d

,
where Q
e
represents the engine torque in Nm, f the fuel rate in kg/s,
and n
e
the rotation rate of the engine in Hz.
(a) Make a map of the gas turbine characteristics. For instance, make
a contour plot which gives Q
e
/Q
m
(the fraction of maximum torque
developed) as a function of f/f
m
(the fraction of the maximum fuel
rate) and n
e
/n
m
(the fraction of the maximum rotation rate of the
engine).
Be sure to include clipping on your contours, where the calculated
torque exceeds Q
m
. Similarly, the engine cannot develop negative
torque.
(b) Make a table of some steady operating conditions for f
o
/f
m
in the
range of 0.05–0.95, in which you show: advance ratio seen by the
propeller, engine torque, propeller rotational speed, engine rota-
tional speed, and vessel linear speed.
Plot the pairs [f
o
/f
m
, n
eo
/n
m
] on the characteristic plot from Part
1, and assess whether the vessel, engine, and propeller are well
matched to operate over a range of f
o
.
(c) Construct a linear approximation for the plant dynamics around
the operating condition f
o
/f
m
= 0.8. If the plant input is δf, and
the output is δu, list the A, B, C matrices for your plant, and the
eigenvalues. δ here indicates the perturbed value from the steady
state, e.g., f = f
o
+ δf.
186 24 PROBLEMS
(d) Create an LTR-type controller for the plant. First, choose the ﬁlter
gains V
1
and V
2
to make the crossover frequency (where the magni-
tude of L(s) = C(sI−A)
−1
This choice corresponds with the closed-loop system being able to
overcome waves with period 10seconds or longer. Note that for this
scalar design, you will be able to move the curve [L(s)[ up or down
on the Bode plot, but you cannot easily change its shape, or move
it side-to-side.
Secondly, recover this loop shape with an LQG-type controller, us-
ing a small control penalty.
You should prepare for this part: a plot of log([L(s)[) versus log(ω),
1
and V
2
choices, and the A, B, C matrices of your
LQG compensator.
(e) In the event of a current or wind disturbance, the actual vessel
speed will vary from the nominal value. This is not acceptable in
the long term, given that the vessel is laying out a cable.
An integral action can be added quite easily in the LTR design
technique. First, add an integrator to the input of the plant, so
that an “augmented plant” is created. This augmented plant has
one more state than the original plant:
A
aug
=
¸
A B
0 0
¸
B
aug
= [0 1]
T
C
aug
= [C 0]
The idea is to then carry out the KF design and LTR as before, with
the augmented plant model. When this is done, move the integrator
from the augmented plant into the compensator. The addition of an
integrator channel to the plant or compensator can be accomplished
with the command sysPaug = sysP * tf([0 1],[1 0]) ;, for ex-
ample.
Present a ﬁgure of [L(s)[ and the other quantities as you gave them
in Part 4. This is to be kept as a separate controller design.
(f) For the purpose of demonstrating your controllers, construct a non-
linear simulation of the plant system, with input f. You don’t
187
need to show anything for this task; it is mostly to verify that
the steady conditions you calculated above, with f = 0.8f
m
, are
actually steady conditions from the point of view of the whole sim-
ulation. You may wish to use global variables in Matlab so that
you don’t have to type everything in more than once.
(g) Augment your simulation above with the compensator dynamics. If
the compensator has states z, and your simulation has states [u, n
p
],
make a new state vector [u, n
p
, z]. You will propagate the ﬁrst two
states as usual with the nonlinear equations and the fuel rate f as
input. The compensator states z are propagated by a set of system
matrices [A
c
, B
c
, C
c
], which you just designed. Note that the input
to the compensator is an error signal: e = r − u, where u is the
speed of the vessel and r is a reference speed. The output of the
compensator is then fuel rate f.
We are interested mainly in disturbance rejection, for which you
will just set r = u
o
, the steady condition speed. Recall that you are
implementing a controller for operation about a nominal condition;
whenever your compensator generates f from the error signal, be
sure to then add on 0.8f
m
, the part needed to keep us near the
Demonstrate four properties, showing time-domain simulations for
each:
• The ﬁrst controller, without integral action, does not com-
pletely reject steady disturbances. I suggest you implement
a disturbance as an acceleration:
uprime = uprime + k. In the absence of a controller, this
line would drive the system with an additional acceleration of
km/s
2
, thus modelling the eﬀects of steady wind or current.
This line is to be added after computing the usual parts of
uprime.
• The ﬁrst controller does not reject high frequency disturbances.
A suggestion is to let
uprime = uprime + k*sin(10*omega_c*t), where omega_c is
the crossover frequency. This adds an oscillating acceleration
at ten times the crossover frequency.
• The ﬁrst controller does, however, reject some lower frequency
disturbances. For example, try
188 24 PROBLEMS
uprime = uprime + k*sin(omega_c/10*t)/100. Note the ex-
tra factor of 100 is included so that the result can be compared
directly with the high-frequency disturbance case above. The
eﬀect of an acceleration disturbance onto the observed output,
velocity u, scales with the inverse of the frequency.
• The second controller, with integral action, rejects steady dis-
turbances. Use the same approach as above for steady distur-
bances
(h) What is the propeller response during the high-frequency distur-
bances? Is it reasonable or do we need to slow down the controller
bandwidth?

These notes were developed in the instruction of the MIT graduate subject 13.49: Maneuvering and Control of Surface and Underwater Vehicles. We plan many enhancements; your comments are welcome!

Maneuvering and Control of Marine Vehicles Latest Revision: January 11, 2002 c Michael S. Triantafyllou and Franz S. Hover

. . . . . . 1. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Momentum of a Particle . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . .3. .4 Vector Cross Product . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . .9 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vectors . 1.2. . . . .1 Deﬁnition .1 Deﬁnition . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . .3 Convolution Theorem .2 Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . .1. . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . .2. . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . .4 Solution of Diﬀerential Equations by Laplace 2 KINEMATICS OF MOVING FRAMES 2. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . Transform 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 9 9 11 11 11 11 13 14 14 16 18 19 20 20 21 22 23 23 . . . . . 2. . .1 Rotation of Reference Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . .3 Multiplying a Matrix by a Matrix . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Linear Momentum in a Moving Frame . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . .2 Diﬀerential Rotations . . .2.8 Trace . . . . . . . . . .3 Vector Dot Product . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. 3.1. . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . .2 Multiplying a Vector by a Matrix . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Determinant . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Rotating Frame Attached to Pivot Point i . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. 1. 1. . . . . . . . . .2 Vector Magnitude . . . .3 Laplace Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Rate of Change of Euler Angles . . . . 3. . 1. . . . .3. .1. . . . .5 Transpose . . . .1 Deﬁnition .Contents 1 MATH FACTS 1. . . . . . . . . . .3 Example: Mass on a String . . . . . . . . . . .4 Dead Reckoning . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . 1. 3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS 3. . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Convergence .1 Moving Frame Aﬃxed to Mass .11 Singular Value .4 Common Matrices . . . . .10 Modal Decomposition . . . . . . . 1. . . .7 Inverse . . . . . . .

. . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Surface Vessel Linear Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SIMILITUDE 5. . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . . . . . . . 7 STANDARD MANEUVERING TESTS 7.4 Basic Rudder Action in the Sway/Yaw Model . . . . . . . .5. . .7 3. . . . . . . . . .3. . .1 Dieudonn´ Spiral . . 5.2 Common Groups in Marine Engineering 5. . . .4. .5. . . . . . . 7. . . . . . . . . . . .3 z-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Similitude in Maneuvering . . . . ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Zig-Zag Maneuver . .1 Drift Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Heading Control in the Sway/Yaw Model 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . . . . . .7 Stability in the Vertical Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . 6. . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel Axis Theorem . . . . . . . .3 Planar-Motion Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 3. . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Response of the Vessel to Step Rudder Input . Basis for Simulation .3 Circle Maneuver . . . Example: Spinning Book 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 24 26 26 27 27 28 28 30 30 31 32 34 36 36 37 37 37 38 38 40 40 42 44 46 48 48 48 49 52 52 52 53 53 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION 4. . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Roll Equation Similitude . 3. . . . . . .6 3. . .1 x-axis . . . . . . . . . .3 Stability of the Sway/Yaw System .6 Summary of the Linear Maneuvering Model . . . . . . . . . . .1 Towtank . . . . . . . .2 Rotating Arm Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 CAPTIVE MEASUREMENTS 6. . . . 3. . . . .4 3. . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 y-axis . . .2 Phase 3: Steady State . . . . .4. . .3. . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . e 7. . . . . . . . .1 Taylor Series and Hydrodynamic Coeﬃcients .1 Phase 1: Accelerations Dominate . . . . . . .3 Stationary Frame Angular Momentum . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . .1 Use of Nondimensional Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . .1 Adding Yaw Damping through Feedback 4.

. . 11. . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . 11. . . . . . . . .2 Steady Propulsion of Vessels . . . . .7. . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . Experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 53 54 56 56 56 57 57 58 60 60 62 62 62 63 64 64 65 67 67 68 68 68 70 71 73 74 74 74 75 77 77 77 77 8 STREAMLINED BODIES 8. . 8. . . . 8. . . . . . . 8. . 9. . . . . . Mw . . . .3. . . . . . . . . .2. .8 Convention: Hydrodynamic Mass Matrix A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Relation to Wing Lift . . . . . . 10. . Heeling in Submarines with Sails . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Diﬀerential Force on the Body . 9. . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zq . . .1 Nominal Drag Force . .4 Net Eﬀects: Aerodynamic Center . .7 Coeﬃcients Zw . . . . . . . . . .3 Ring Fins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Origin of Lift . . . . . . . . . and Mq for a Slender Body 9 SLENDER-BODY THEORY 9. . . . . . .5 Role of Fins in Moving the Aerodynamic Center . . . . . .6 Total Moment on a Vessel . . . . . . . 11 FINS AND LIFTING SURFACES 11. . . . . . .1 Characteristics of Lift-Producing Mechanisms 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 7. . . . . . . . . . .3 Separation Moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Hoerner’s Data: Notation . . . . . . . . .4 Slender-Body Theory vs. 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 7. . . . . .2 Jorgensen’s Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Munk Moment . 10. . . . . . . . .3. . . .1 Basic Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . 10 PRACTICAL LIFT CALCULATIONS 10. . . . . .4 Speed Loss . . . . .5 Total Force on a Vessel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION 12. . . . . . . .3 Derivative Following the Fluid . . . 9. . . . .2 Three-Dimensional Eﬀects: Finite Length . .2 Kinematics Following the Fluid . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . 8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . .5 Slender-Body Approximation for Fin Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heel Angle . . iii . . . . . . . . . . .6 Aggregate Eﬀects of Body and Fins . . . .

. 12. . . . 13.2. . . 15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS 100 15. . . . . 81 81 83 83 84 85 85 85 87 89 89 91 94 94 96 96 96 97 98 98 98 99 99 . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . . .1. . . . . . . .2 Solution for Steady Conditions 12. . .4 Partial Fractions: Complex-Conjugate Poles . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14. . . . 100 15. . . .2 Damped Axial Motion 13.1 Derivation . . . .2 Converting a State-Space Model into a Transfer Function 102 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Stability in Linear Systems . . . .3 Unsteady Propulsion Models . . .3 Engine/Motor Models . . . . . . . . .1 Standard State-Space Form . . . . .1 Proportional Only . . .7 Stability ⇐⇒ Poles in LHP . . . . . . 100 15. . . . . . . . . . . . 101 15. . . .1.1. . . . . . .1 Force Balance . . and Outputs . . . .2. . . . . . 101 15.1 Plants. . . . 13. . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Example: Partial Fractions with Unique Real Poles 14. . . . . . . . . .2.5 Example: Partial Fractions with Complex Poles . . . . .3.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Example: PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Critical Angle . . . 103 15. . . . . . . . . 12. 103 15. . . . . . . .4 Vehicle Design . . .8 General Stability . . . . . . . .12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs. . . .2 The Need for Modeling .1 One-State Model: Yoerger et al. . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14. . . . .3 Nonlinear Control . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14. . . . . . . . . . . .1. 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14. . .2 Linearized Dynamics . . . . . . .2 Two-State Model: Healey et al. . . . .3 Converting a Transfer Function into a State-Space Model 102 15.3 Cable Strumming . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Partial Fractions . 14 TRANSFER FUNCTIONS & STABILITY 14. .2 Partial Fractions: Unique Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Representing Linear Systems . 100 15. . . . . . . . . 14. . . .4.3 PID Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1 Statics . . . . . . . . . . .3. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14. . . 104 iv . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES 13. . . 101 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.1 Fundamental Feedback Loop . . . . .2. . .1 Mapping Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16. 18. . . . . . .2. . . .6. .7 The Recipe for Loopshaping . . .5 Robust Performance . . . . . . . 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Matrix Exponential . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Proportional-Integral-Derivative 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Design for Robustness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . 16. . . . . . 17. . . .3 Robustness on the Nyquist Plot . . . . 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Forced Response and Controllability . . . . .3 Primary Transfer Functions . . . . . . . . .15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Modal Decomposition of Response 16. . . . . . . . 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. . . . 18. . . . . . .5 Properties and Use of the LQR .4. . . . .2. 17. .4 Dynamic Programming and Full-State Feedback 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . .2 Proportional-Derivative Only . . . . . .6 Implications of Bode’s Integral . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. . . . . .4. . 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. .5 Heuristic Tuning . 15. . . 15. . . . . . 17. . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Nyquist Criterion .1 Deﬁnition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Design for Nominal Performance . . . . .2 Roots of Stability – Nyquist Criterion . . .2 Block Diagrams: General Case . . . . . . .2 Modal Canonical Form . . 16.4 Plant Output and Observability . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 LINEAR QUADRATIC REGULATOR 18. . . . . . . . . . . 104 105 105 106 106 106 107 109 109 109 109 109 110 111 112 113 113 113 114 114 115 116 116 118 118 119 121 121 121 121 123 125 16 MODAL ANALYSIS 16. 17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING 17. . . . . .2 Full-State Feedback . . . . . . .6. 17. . .6 Block Diagrams of Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Dynamic Programming .

. . 20. . . . . . . . . 128 128 128 129 131 132 133 134 134 135 135 136 137 137 138 139 141 141 143 143 143 145 146 147 148 150 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 21. . . .4 Transfer Function Estimation – Broadband Input 21. .3 Proof that ∂H trace(−ΛΣC T H T ) = −ΛΣC T 19.7 Proofs of the Intermediate Results . . . . . .6 Combination of LQR and KF . . . . . . . . . . . . ∂ 19.1 Fourier Transform of Sampled Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3 Step 1: An Equation for Σ . . . . . . .2 Proof that ∂H trace(−ΛHCΣ) = −ΛT ΣC T . . . .4 Usage of the Loop Transfer Recovery . . . 20. . . . . . .1 Proof that E(eT W e) = trace(ΣW ) . . . 19. . . . 20 LOOP TRANSFER RECOVERY 20. . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . 21. . . . . . . . 155 23 REFERENCES 24 PROBLEMS 159 163 vi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ˙ 19. . . . . . . 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . ∂ 19. . . . . . . . . . . 20. . . .1 Introduction . . . . . .5 Time-Domain Simulation . . . . . . 21. 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21. . . . . . . . . . . .7.7. . . . . . . . . . . . .3 The Loop Transfer Recovery Result . . . .2 Problem Statement . . . . . .7. . 19. .2 Visual Output from a Simple Input . . . . . .2 A Special Property of the LQR Solution 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Properties of the Solution . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Acoustic Navigation . . . . . . . . .3 Transfer Function Estimation – Sinusoidal Input . . . . . . . . 19. .4 Proof of the Separation Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . 22 CARTESIAN NAVIGATION 153 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 KALMAN FILTER 19. . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Global Positioning System (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Step 2: H as a Function of Σ . . . . . .2 Estimating the Transfer Function . . 19. . . . . . . . . 153 22. . . . .5 Three Lemmas .

.

.

.1 1 1.1 1. . which is particularly easy to see in two or three dimensions.  7  The elements of a vector have a graphical interpretation.e. addition is stringing the vectors together head to tail.1 MATH FACTS Vectors Deﬁnition We use the overhead arrow to denote a column vector.1. a number with a direction. Vector addition is pointwise. For example. =          7 2 9     3    a+b =  c   5    Graphically. we write    2    a =  1 . in three-space.    2      1 + 3 4 . i. z 7 a 1 2 x y 1.

Scalar multiplication is pointwise. whose 1. rotating from x to y.2 Vector Magnitude    2        The total length of a vector of dimension m. direction is given by the right-hand rule. 1 MATH FACTS −4   −2 ×  1  =  −2  . its Euclidean norm. 1.4 Vector Cross Product The cross product of two three-dimensional vectors is another vector.1. where θ is the angle between the vectors. 1. direction is normal to the plane formed by the two vectors.2 2. The dot product also satisﬁes x · y = ||x||||y|| cos θ. is given by m ||x|| = i=1 x2 . .1.3 Vector Dot Product The dot product of two vectors is the sum of the products of the elements: m x · y = xT y = i=1 xi yi . 2.  7   −14  1. i this scalar is commonly used to normalize a vector to length one. x×y = z.1.

2. Matrices. where θ is the angle between the two vectors. permit pointwise addition and scalar multiplication.  x1 y2 − x2 y1  1. 1. 7 2 This matrix has three rows (m = 3) and two columns (n = 2). (signed) magnitude is equal to ||x||||y|| sin θ. We usually use an upper-case symbol to denote a matrix. say 2 3   A = [a b] =  1 3  .2.2 Multiplying a Vector by a Matrix   If Aij denotes the element of matrix A in the i’th row and the j’th column. where n is the number of columns in A. arranged side by side. is equivalent to a set of row vectors.1 Matrices Deﬁnition A matrix.2 Matrices 3 3. Note that this multiplication is well-deﬁned only if v has .2 1. magnitude is the area of the parallelogram formed by the two vectors – the cross product of two parallel vectors is zero – and 4. c will have as many columns as A has rows (m). then the multiplication c = Av is constructed as: n ci = Ai1 v1 + Ai2 v2 + · · · + Ain vn = j=1 Aij vj . The schoolbook formula is    x2 y3 − x3 y2      x×y = x3 y1 − x1 y3 . a vector is a special case of a matrix with one column. or array. like vectors. measured from x to y.1.

(B + C)A = BA + CA.  0 0 1   I3×3 The identity always satisﬁes AIn×n = Im×m A = A. The identity matrix is usually denoted I. so that each A:j is the j’th column vector. Distributive. so that C = AB = [AB:1 AB:2 · · · AB:k ]. (AB)C = A(BC). they have consistent inner dimension n. 1 0 0  =  0 1 0 .4 1 MATH FACTS as many rows as A has columns. except in special cases. There is another important interpretation of this vector multiplication: Let the subscript : indicate all rows. 2.g. and zeros elsewhere.2. We are multiplying column vectors of A by the scalar elements of v. The same inner dimension condition applies as noted above: the number of columns in A must equal the number of rows in B. where k is the number of columns in matrix B. and comprises a square matrix with ones on the diagonal.3 Multiplying a Matrix by a Matrix The multiplication C = AB is equivalent to a side-by-side arrangement of column vectors C:j = AB:j .. and the proper number of columns. . 1. 1. AB = BA. NOT Commutative. Matrix multiplication is: 1.2. e. Associative.4 Common Matrices Identity . Then c = Av = A:1 v1 + A:2 v2 + · · · + A:n vn . A(B + C) = AB + AC. The product vA would be well-posed only if A had one row. 3.

2 Matrices 5 Diagonal Matrices . 1. it is equivalent to “ﬂipping” the vector or matrix around the diagonal line. and has all zeros oﬀ the diagonal. and in this case the operation is commutative. For instance. A very useful property of the transpose is (AB)T = B T AT .5 Transpose   The transpose of a vector or matrix. indicated by a T superscript results from simply swapping the row-column indices of each entry.2. 1. The two-dimensional case is particularly easy to remember.6 Determinant The determinant of a square matrix A is a scalar equal to the volume of the parallelepiped enclosed by the constituent vectors.1. For example. the following is a diagonal matrix: 4 0 0 A =  0 −2 0  .   0 0 3 The product of a diagonal matrix with another diagonal matrix is diagonal. 1 1 det .2. A diagonal matrix is square. and illustrates the principle of volume: det(A) = A11 A22 − A21 A12 1 −1 = 1 + 1 = 2.    1    a= 2 −→ a T = {1 2 3} 1 4 8 2 5 9   A =  4 5  −→ AT =    3    1 2 8 9 .

in the sense that one could also target the k’th column: j=n det(A) = j=1 Ajk (−1)k+j ∆jk .7 Inverse The inverse of a square matrix A.2. and apply j=n det(A) = j=1 Akj (−1)k+j ∆kj . in two dimensions.6 y Area = det(A) = 2 A:2 -1 A:1 x 1 1 MATH FACTS In higher dimensions. and the following deﬁnition of the n × n adjoint matrix: (−1)1+1 ∆11 · · · (−1)1+n ∆1n   ··· ··· ··· adj(A) =   . 1. For instance. The general formula allows one to pick a row k. n+1 n+n (−1) ∆n1 · · · (−1) ∆nn . If the determinant of a matrix is zero.  T . in three dimensions. denoted A−1 . and this results from the fact that the constituent vectors do not span the matrix dimension. a singular matrix has all its vectors lying in a (two-dimensional) plane. If det(A) = 0. the determinant is more complicated to compute. then the matrix is said to be nonsingular. then the matrix is said to be singular – there is no volume. perhaps the one containing the most zeros. Its computation requires the determinant above. Note also that det(A) = det(AT ). where ∆kj is the determinant of the sub-matrix formed by neglecting the k’th row and the j’th column. satisﬁes AA−1 = A−1 A = I. a singular matrix has the vectors colinear. The formula is symmetric.

det(A) 7 If A is singular.2. the inverse follows from A−1 = adj(A) . The inverse ﬁnds common application in solving systems of linear equations such as Ax = b −→ x = A−1 b. . 1. i. 1. Since the above is equivalent to (A − λI)x = 0.9 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors A typical eigenvalue problem is stated as Ax = λx.8 Trace The trace of a matrix is simply the sum of the diagonals: n tr(A) = i=1 Aii . We ask for what nonzero vectors x (right eigenvectors).1.e. where A is an n × n matrix. here is an example for the two-dimensional case: 4 −5 2 −3 A = A − λI = −→ 4−λ −5 −→ 2 −3 − λ det(A − λI) = (4 − λ)(−3 − λ) + 10 = λ2 − λ − 2 = (λ + 1)(λ − 2). This observation leads to the solutions for λ. det(A) = 0.. then the inverse does not exist.2 Matrices Once this computation is made.2. and scalars λ (eigenvalues) will the equation be satisﬁed. and λ is a scalar. it is clear that det(A − λI) = 0. x is a column vector with n elements.

2 29/29 T . since they share the same determinant. Each is associated with a right eigenvector x. (A − λ1 I)x1 = 0 −→ 5 −5 x1 = 0 −→ 2 −2 √ √ x1 = 2/2. λ1 = −1 and λ2 = 2. Example: (AT − λ1 I)y1 = 0 −→ 5 2 y1 = 0 −→ −5 −2 √ √ y1 = 2 29/29. The above discussion relates only the right eigenvectors. In this example. (A − λ2 I)x2 = 0 −→ 2 −5 x2 = 0 −→ 2 −5 √ √ x2 = 5 29/29. pertain to the transpose of A: AT y = λy. Left eigenvectors. . and positive ﬁrst element (as above). Eigenvectors have arbitrary magnitude and sign. −5 29/29 (AT − λ2 I)y2 = 0 −→ 2 2 y2 = 0 −→ −5 −5 √ √ y2 = 2/2. also useful for many problems. A set of n eigenvectors is always linearly independent. The condition that rank(A − λi I) = rank(A)−1 indicates that there is only one eigenvector for the eigenvalue λi . generated from the equation Ax = λx.8 1 MATH FACTS Thus. A has two eigenvalues. If the left-hand side is less than this. then there are multiple unique eigenvectors that go with λi . they are often normalized to have unity magnitude. 2/2 T . − 2/2 T . A and AT share the same eigenvalues λ. T .

1.2 Matrices 1.2.10 Modal Decomposition

9

The right and left eigenvectors of a particular eigenvalue have unity dot product, that is xT yi = 1, with the normalization noted above. The dot product i of a left eigenvector with the right eigenvector of a diﬀerent eigenvalue is zero. Thus, if X = [x1 · · · xn ] , and Y = [y1 · · · yn ] , then we have Y T X = I, or Y T = X −1 . Next, construct a diagonal matrix of eigenvalues:
 

λ1 · 0

0 λn

Λ= it follows that

 ;

AV = V Λ −→ A = V ΛW T
n

=
i=1

T λi vi wi .

Hence A can be written as a sum of modal components.1 1.2.11 Singular Value

Let G(s) be an m × n, possibly complex matrix. The singular value decomposition (SVD) computes three matrices satisfying
By carrying out successive multiplications, it can be shown that Ak has its eigenvalues at λk , and keeps the same eigenvectors as A. i
1

10

1 MATH FACTS

G = U ΣV ∗ , where U is m × m, Σ is m × n, and V is n × n. The star notation indicates a complex-conjugate transpose. The matrix Σ is diagonal, with the form

Σ=

  

σ1 0 0 0

0 0 · 0 0 σp 0 0

0 0 0 0

  , 

where p = min(m, n). Each nonzero entry on the diagonal is a real, positive singular value, ordered such that σ1 > σ2 > · · · σp . The notation is common that σ1 = σ, the maximum singular value, and σp = σ, the minimum singular value. The auxiliary matrices U and V are unitary, i.e., they satisfy X ∗ = X −1 . Like eigenvalues, the singular values of G are related to projections. σi represents the Euclidean size of the matrix G along the i’th singular vector:

σ = max||x||=1 ||Gx|| σ = min||x||=1 ||Gx||. Other properties of the singular value include: • σ(AB) ≤ σ(A)σ(B). • σ(A) = • σ(A) = λmax (A∗ A). λmin (A∗ A).

• σ(A) = 1/σ(A−1 ). • σ(A) = 1/σ(A−1 ).

1.3 Laplace Transform

11

1.3
1.3.1

Laplace Transform
Deﬁnition

The Laplace transform converts time-domain signals into a frequency-domain equivalent. The signal y(t) has transform Y (s) deﬁned as follows:
∞ 0

Y (s) = L(y(t)) =

y(τ )e−sτ dτ,

where s is an unspeciﬁed complex number; Y (s) is considered to be complex as a result. Note that the Laplace transform is linear, and so it is is distributive: L(x(t) + y(t)) = L(x(t)) + L(y(t)) will hold throughout. The following table gives a list of some useful transform pairs and other properties, for reference. The last two properties are of special importance: for control system design, the diﬀerentiation of a signal is equivalent to multiplication of its Laplace transform by s; integration of a signal is equivalent to division by s. The other terms that arise will cancel if y(0) = 0, or if y(0) is ﬁnite, so they are usually ignored. 1.3.2 Convergence

We note ﬁrst that the value of s aﬀects the convergence of the integral. For instance, if y(t) = et , then the integral converges only for Re(s) > 1, since the integrand is e1−s in this case. Convergence issues are not a problem for evaluation of the Laplace transform, however, because of analytic continuation. This result from complex analysis holds that if two complex functions are equal on some arc (or line) in the complex plane, then they are equivalent everywhere. This fact allows us to always pick a value of s for which the integral above converges, and then by extension infer the existence of the general transform. 1.3.3 Convolution Theorem

One of the main points of the Laplace transform is the ease of dealing with dynamic systems. As with the Fourier transform, the convolution of two signals in the time domain corresponds with the multiplication of signals in the frequency domain. Consider a system whose impulse response is g(t), being

12

1 MATH FACTS

y(t) ←→ Y (s) (Impulse) δ(t) ←→ 1 1 (Unit Step) 1(t) ←→ s 1 (Unit Ramp) t ←→ 2 s 1 −αt e ←→ s+α ω sin ωt ←→ 2 s + ω2 s cos ωt ←→ 2 s + ω2 ω e−αt sin ωt ←→ (s + α)2 + ω 2 s+α e−αt cos ωt ←→ (s + α)2 + ω 2 1 1 (e−at − e−bt ) ←→ b−a (s + a)(s + b) 1 1 1+ (be−at − ae−bt ) ab a−b √ 1− √ ←→ 1 s(s + a)(s + b)

2 ωn ωn e−ζωn t sin ωn 1 − ζ 2 t ←→ 2 2 s + 2ζωn s + ωn 1 − ζ2

1 e−ζωn t sin ωn 1 − ζ 2 t + φ 2 1−ζ √ 1 − ζ2 −1 φ = tan ζ (Pure Delay)

←→

2 ωn 2 s(s2 + 2ζωn s + ωn )

y(t − τ )1(t − τ ) ←→ Y (s)e−sτ dy(t) (Time Derivative) ←→ sY (s) − y(0) dt 0+ t Y (s) 0− y(t)dt y(τ )dτ ←→ + (Time Integral) s s 0

Here’s the proof given by Siebert: Y (s) = 0 ∞ ∞ 0 0 ∞ 0 0 ∞ 0 ∞ 0 y(t)e−st dt t = = = = g(t − τ ) x(τ ) dτ e−st dt g(t − τ ) 1(t − τ ) x(τ ) dτ e−st dt ∞ 0 ∞ x(τ ) g(t − τ ) 1(t − τ ) e−st dt dτ x(τ ) G(s)e−sτ dτ = G(s)X(s) When g(t) is the impulse response of a dynamic system. 2. . and the input signal x(t) into X(s).3 Laplace Transform 13 driven by an input signal x(t). 3. Ignoring the eﬀects of pure time delays. 1.4 Solution of Diﬀerential Equations by Laplace Transform The Convolution Theorem allows one to solve (linear time-invariant) diﬀerential equations in the following way: 1.3. then y(t) represents the output of this system when it is driven by the external signal x(t). Perform the multiplication in the Laplace domain to ﬁnd Y (s). using the transform pairs. Generate the time-domain response from the simple transform pairs. Transform the system impulse response g(t) into G(s). Speciﬁc examples of this procedure are given in a later section on transfer functions. The Convolution Theorem is t y(t) = 0 g(t − τ )x(τ )dτ ⇐⇒ Y (s) = G(s)X(s). Apply time delay as necessary. break Y (s) into partial fractions with no powers of s greater than 2 in the denominator. the output is y(t) = g(t)∗x(t). 4.1.

it is easy to see that any possible orientation can be achieved. roll]: starting from an orientation identical to some inertial frame. consider the sequence of [yaw. and in a body-reference frame xb . The angular orientation has several well-known descriptions.14 2 KINEMATICS OF MOVING FRAMES 2 2. A ﬁrst question is: what is the coordinate of a point ﬁxed in inertial space. which we now derive through successive rotations of the three . z=z’ z’’ z’’’ x’ y’’’ y y’=y’’ x x’’=x’’’ Figure 1: Successive application of three Euler angles transforms the original coordinate frame into an arbitrary orientation. then about the new pitch axis. some of them might use the same axis twice. we assume that the origins of these frames are coincident. then about the newer still roll axis. Tape three pencils together to form a right-handed three-dimensional coordinate system. pitch. The former method involves successive rotations about the principle axes. rotate the movable system about its yaw axis. For example. We will develop the equations of motion using Euler angles. there are many valid Euler angle rotation sets possible to reach a given orientation. and yaw. Quaternions present a more elegant and robust method. but with more abstraction. For the moment. but that the body frame has a diﬀerent angular orientation. pitch. referenced to a rotated body frame? The transformation takes the form of a 3×3 matrix. including the Euler angles and the Euler parameters (quaternions). Successively rotating the system about three of its own principle axes. and has a solid link with the intuitive notions of roll.1 KINEMATICS OF MOVING FRAMES Rotation of Reference Frames We say that a vector expressed in the inertial frame has coordinates x. Needless to say.

In the case that the movable (body) reference frame has a diﬀerent origin than the inertial frame. we should note that the rotation matrix R is universal to all representations of orientation. Additionally. pitch about the new y-axis by the angle θ: cos θ 0 − sin θ  2 0 1 0  xb1 = R(θ)xb1 . 0 0 1   (1) Rotation about the z-axis does not change the z-coordinate of the point. θ. Now rotate the movable frame yaw axis (z) through an angle φ. in the fully-transformed body-reference frame. including quaternions. the other axes are modiﬁed according to basic trigonometry. are orthonormal: their inverse is equivalent to their transpose. and to the order in which we performed the rotations.. xb =  0  0 − sin ψ cos ψ     (2) (3) This represents the location of the original point. xb3 . Now apply the second rotation. The roles of the trigonometric functions. we have . are speciﬁc to Euler angles. as written. ψ).1 Rotation of Reference Frames 15 Euler angles. i. ψ)x. The three independent rotations can be cascaded through matrix multiplication (order matters!): xb = R(ψ)R(θ)R(φ)x   cθcφ cθsφ −sθ  cψcφ + sψsθsφ sψcθ  x =  −cψsψ + sψsθcφ  sψsφ + cψsθcφ −sψcφ + cψsθsψ cψcθ = R(φ.2. the body-referenced coordinate matches that of the inertial frame: xb0 = x. We will use the notation xb instead of xb3 from here on. including R(φ. θ.e. (4) All of the transformation matrices. rotate the body system an angle ψ about its newest x-axis: 1 0 0  3 cos ψ sin ψ0  xb2 = R(ψ)xb2 . We have cos φ sin φ 0   xb1 =  − sin φ cos φ 0  xb0 = R(φ)xb0 . xb =   sin θ 0 cos θ Finally. Before the ﬁrst rotation.

δθ. the order of the small rotations does not matter. expressed in inertial coordinates. so that we can write the location of the point before and after the rotation. Since R−1 = RT . xb = x − δ E × x x = xb + δ E × xb . using the small angle assumption to ignore higher-order terms gives  R 1 δφ −δθ  1 δψ   −δφ  δθ −δψ 1 0 δφ −δθ  0 δψ  + I3×3 . y. instead of in inertial space.2 Diﬀerential Rotations Now consider small rotations from one frame to another. δφ]. Small rotations are completely decoupled. Dividing by the diﬀerential time step gives T (9) . =  −δφ  δθ −δψ 0    (6) R comprises the identity plus a part equal to the (negative) cross-product operator [−δ E×].16 2 KINEMATICS OF MOVING FRAMES x = x0 + R T xb . (5) where x0 is the location of the moving origin. The diﬀerential rotations occur over a time step δt. where δ E = [δψ. calling its location in the body frame r (radius). with respect to the ﬁrst frame as follows: x(t) = r x(t + δt) = R r = r + δ E × r. the vector of Euler angles ordered with the axes [x. 2. we have also R−1 = I3×3 + δ E×. z]. (7) (8) We now ﬁx the point of interest on the body.

allowing the origin to move as well gives ∂r dxo dxb =ω×r+ + .2. (11) (12) On a rotating body whose origin point is ﬁxed. dt ∂t dt This result is often written in terms of body-referenced velocity v: v =ω×r+ (13) (14) ∂r + vo .2 Diﬀerential Rotations 17 δx δE = ×r δt δt = ω × r. such that δxb δE = ×r δt δt = ω × r. (10) where the rotation rate vector ω dE/dt because the Euler angles for this inﬁnitesimal rotation are small and decoupled. dt ∂t Finally. In the case that the radius vector changes with respect to the body frame. This same cross-product relationship can be derived in the second frame as well: xb (t) = Rr = r − δ E × r xb (t + δt) = r. we need an additional term: dxb ∂r =ω×r+ . the time rate of change of a constant radius vector is the cross-product of the rotation rate vector ω and the radius vector itself. (15) ∂t where vo is the body-referenced velocity of the origin. The total velocity of the particle is equal to the velocity of the reference frame origin. plus a component . The resultant derivative is in the moving body frame.

roll]. An important part of any simulation is the evolution of the Euler angles.18 2 KINEMATICS OF MOVING FRAMES due to rotation of this frame. because of the division by cos θ. and the ﬁnal Euler angle no additional rotations:    0       0      dθ dt ω = R(ψ)R(θ)  0 + R(ψ) + 1 0 cos ψ =  0  0 − sin ψ cos ψ cos θ Taking the inverse gives   dφ dt  − sin θ   sin ψ cos θ       0 dψ dt dθ dt dφ dt        dψ dt      0  0     (17) .3 Rate of Change of Euler Angles Only for the case of inﬁnitesimal Euler angles is it true that the time rate of change of the Euler angles equals the body-referenced rotation rate. The ﬁrst Euler angle undergoes two additional rotations. For example. The velocity equation can be generalized to any body-referenced vector f : df ∂f = + ω × f. The idea is to consider small changes in each Euler angle. the pitch and roll rotations moved the axis.pitch. we seek a mapping ω → dE/dt. Since the physics determine rotation rate ω. the second angle one rotation. the Euler yaw angle (applied ﬁrst) is deﬁnitely not about the ﬁnal body yaw axis. and hence this otherwise useful equation for propagating the angular orientation of a body fails when the vehicle rotates about the intermediate y-axis by ninety .   (18) Singularities exist in Γ at θ = {π/2. and determine the eﬀects on the rotation vector. with the sequence [yaw. 1 sin ψ tan θ cos ψ tan θ dE  cos ψ − sin ψ  ω =  0  dt 0 sin ψ/ cos θ cos ψ/ cos θ = Γ(E)ω. 3π/2}. dt ∂t (16) 2.

19

degrees. In applications where this is a real possibility, for example in orbiting satellites and robotic arms, quaternions provide a seamless mapping. For most ocean vessels, the singularity is acceptable, as long as it is not on the yaw axis!

2.4

The measurement of heading and longitudinal speed gives rise to one of the oldest methods of navigation: dead reckoning. Quite simply, if the estimated longitudinal speed over ground is U , and the estimated heading is φ, ignoring the lateral velocity leads to the evolution of Cartesian coordinates: x = U cos φ ˙ y = U sin φ. ˙ Needless to say, currents and vehicle sideslip will cause this to be in error. Nonetheless, some of the most remarkable feats of navigation in history have depended on dead reckoning.

20

3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS

3

VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS

We consider the rigid body dynamics with a coordinate system aﬃxed on the body. A common frame for ships, submarines, and other marine vehicles has the body-referenced x-axis forward, y-axis to port (left), and z-axis up. This will be the sense of our body-referenced coordinate system here.

3.1

Momentum of a Particle

Since the body moves with respect to an inertial frame, dynamics expressed in the body-referenced frame need extra attention. First, linear momentum for a particle obeys the equality d (mv) (19) dt A rigid body consists of a large number of these small particles, which can be indexed. The summations we use below can be generalized to integrals quite easily. We have F = Fi + Ri = d (mi vi ) , dt (20)

where Fi is the external force acting on the particle and Ri is the net force exerted by all the other surrounding particles (internal forces). Since the collection of particles is not driven apart by the internal forces, we must have equal and opposite internal forces such that
N

Ri = 0.
i=1

(21)

Then summing up all the particle momentum equations gives
N

Fi =
i=1

d (mi vi ) . i=1 dt

N

(22)

Note that the particle velocities are not independent, because the particles are rigidly attached. Now consider a body reference frame, with origin 0, in which the particle i resides at body-referenced radius vector r; the body translates and rotates, and we now consider how the momentum equation depends on this motion.

3.2 Linear Momentum in a Moving Frame

21

z, w, φ y, v, θ x, u, ψ

Figure 2: Convention for the body-referenced coordinate system on a vessel: x is forward, y is sway to the left, and z is heave upwards. Looking forward from the vessel bridge, roll about the x axis is positive counterclockwise, pitch about the y-axis is positive bow-down, and yaw about the z-axis is positive turning left.

3.2

Linear Momentum in a Moving Frame

The expression for total velocity may be inserted into the summed linear momentum equation to give
N

Fi =
i=1

d (mi (vo + ω × ri )) i=1 dt
N ∂vo d + ω× m i ri , ∂t dt i=1

N

(23)

= m

where m = N mi , and vi = vo +ω ×ri . Further deﬁning the center of gravity i=1 vector rG such that
N

mrG =
i=1

mi ri ,

(24)

we have
N

Fi = m
i=1

∂vo d + m (ω × rG ). ∂t dt

(25)

Using the expansion for total derivative again, the complete vector equation in body coordinates is

22

3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS

F =
i=1

N =m

dω ∂vo + ω × vo + × rG + ω × (ω × rG ) . ∂t dt

(26)

Now we list some conventions that will be used from here on: vo = {u, v, w} (body-referenced velocity) rG = {xG , yG , zg } (body-referenced location of center of mass) ω = {p, q, r} (rotation vector, in body coordinates) F = {X, Y, Z} (external force, body coordinates). The last term in the previous equation simpliﬁes using the vector triple product identity ω × (ω × rG ) = (ω · rG )ω − (ω · ω)rG , and the resulting three linear momentum equations are ∂u dq dr + qw − rv + zG − yG + (qyG + rzG )p − (q 2 + r2 )xG (27) ∂t dt dt ∂v dr dp Y = m + ru − pw + xG − zG + (rzG + pxG )q − (r2 + p2 )yG ∂t dt dt ∂w dp dq + pv − qu + yG − xG + (pxG + qyG )r − (p2 + q 2 )zG . Z = m ∂t dt dt

X = m

Note that about half of the terms here are due to the mass center being in a diﬀerent location than the reference frame origin, i.e., rG = 0.

3.3

Example: Mass on a String

Consider a mass on a string, being swung around around in a circle at speed U , with radius r. The centrifugal force can be computed in at least three diﬀerent ways. The vector equation at the start is ∂vo dω + ω × vo + × rG + ω × (ω × rG ) . ∂t dt

F =m

U/r}T = {0. 0. 0. 0}T . 0}T = {0.3.1 Moving Frame Aﬃxed to Mass 23 Aﬃxing a reference frame on the mass. gives = {U. 0}T . 0}T = {0. 3. 0. with the same orientation as above but allowing it to rotate with the string. 0. 0}T = {0. U 2 /r. vo ω rG ∂vo ∂t ∂ω ∂t giving the same result: F = mω × (ω × rG ) = m{0. The force of the string pulls in on the mass to create the circular motion. 0.3. with the local x oriented forward and y inward towards the circle center. 0}T . 0. 0}T = {0. 0. 0}T . U 2 /r. r. 0. . 0}T = {0. vo ω rG ∂vo ∂t ∂ω ∂t such that F = mω × vo = m{0.2 Rotating Frame Attached to Pivot Point Aﬃxing the moving reference frame to the pivot point of the string. 0.3 Example: Mass on a String 3. U/r}T = {0. 0}T = {0.3. we have = {0.

U sin δψ. summed internal moments cancel.4 Angular Momentum N N For angular momentum. 0}T .24 3. the summed particle equation is (Mi + ri × Fi ) = i=1 i=1 ri × d (mi vi ). dt (28) where Mi is an external moment on the particle i. vector subtraction gives δv = {0. U δψ. The summation in the ﬁrst term of the right-hand side is recognized simply as mrG . 0}T . as before. ∂t The second term expands as (using the triple product) mrG × ∂ω mi ri × × ri ∂t i=1 N N (29) = i=1 mi (ri · ri )    ∂ω ∂ω − · ri r i ∂t ∂t + zi2 )p − (yi q + zi r)xi ) ˙ ˙ ˙ 2 + zi )q − (xi p + zi r)yi ) ˙ ˙ ˙ 2 + yi )r − (xi p + yi q)zi ) ˙ ˙ ˙      (30) =   N 2 i=1 mi ((yi N 2 i=1 mi ((xi N 2 i=1 mi ((xi . . and the ﬁrst term becomes ∂vo + ω × vo .3.3 Stationary Frame 3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS A frame ﬁxed in inertial space. as the string travels through a small arc δψ. We have N N (Mi + ri × Fi ) = i=1 i=1 N i=1 mi ri × N ∂ω ∂vo + ω × vo + m i ri × × ri + ∂t ∂t i=1 mi ri × (ω × (ω × ri )). it follows easily that in the ﬁxed frame dv/dt = {0. 3. In this case. and momentarily coincident with the frame on the mass (3. can also be used for the calculation.1).3. Similar to the case for linear momentum. ˙ Since ψ = U/r. 0}T {0. U 2 /r.

The third term can be worked out along the same lines.3. Ixx Ixy Ixz I =  Iyx Iyy Iyz    Izx Izy Izz N 25   (inertia matrix) Ixx = i=1 N 2 mi (yi + zi2 ) Iyy = i=1 N mi (x2 + zi2 ) i 2 mi (x2 + yi ) i i=1 N Izz = Ixy = Iyx = − i=1 N mi xi yi mi xi zi i=1 N (cross-inertia) Ixz = Izx = − Iyz = Izy = − i=1 mi yi zi .4 Angular Momentum Employing the deﬁnitions of moments of inertia. the second term of the angular momentum right-hand side collapses neatly into I∂ω/∂t.  (Iyy − Ixx )qp  . but oﬀers no similar condensation: N N mi ri × ((ω · ri )ω − (ω · ω)ri ) = i=1 i=1 mi ri × ω(ω · ri )    (31)      = =           (Izz − Iyy )rq      N i=1 mi (yi r − zi q)(xi p + yi q + zi r) N i=1 mi (zi p − xi r)(xi p + yi q + zi r) N i=1 mi (xi q − yi p)(xi p + yi q + zi r)  Iyz (q 2 − r2 ) + Ixz pq − Ixy pr   Ixz (r2 − p2 ) + Ixy rq − Iyz pq +  Ixy (p2 − q 2 ) + Iyz pr − Ixz qr  (Ixx − Izz )rp .

3. with constant angular rate Ω. ˙ ˙ (32) 3. The interesting result is that rotations about the x and z axes are unstable. the complete moment equations are K = Ixx p + Ixy q + Ixz r + ˙ ˙ ˙ (Izz − Iyy )rq + Iyz (q 2 − r2 ) + Ixz pq − Ixy pr + m [yG (w + pv − qu) − zG (v + ru − pw)] ˙ ˙ M = Iyx p + Iyy q + Iyz r + ˙ ˙ ˙ (Ixx − Izz )pr + Ixz (r2 − p2 ) + Ixy qr − Iyz qp + m [zG (u + qw − rv) − xG (w + pv − qu)] ˙ ˙ N = Izx p + Izy q + Izz r + ˙ ˙ ˙ (Iyy − Ixx )pq + Ixy (p2 − q 2 ) + Iyz pr − Ixz qr + m [xG (v + ru − pw) − yG (u + qw − rv)] . where the δ preﬁx indicates a small value compared to Ω. The ﬁrst equation above is uncoupled .e. while rotation about the y axis is not. the left side of Equation 28.5. The linearized angular momentum equations.5 Example: Spinning Book Consider a homogeneous rectangular block with Ixx < Iyy < Izz and all oﬀdiagonal moments of inertia are zero. are dp + (Izz − Iyy )rq = 0 dt dq Iyy + (Ixx − Izz )pr = 0 dt dr Izz + (Iyy − Ixx )qp = 0. N } be the total moment acting on the body.26 3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS Letting M = {K. p = Ω + δp..1 x-axis In the case of the x-axis. M. q = δq. and r = δr. with no external forces or moments. dt Ixx We consider in turn the stability of rotations about each of the main axes. i.

Since the perturbation δr is coupled. ∂t2 Iyy Ixx The coeﬃcients are positive. so bounded oscillations occur.3 z-axis Finally. 3. following δp(t) = √ δp(0)e −αt . which has response δq(t) = δq(0)e −αt . since the small term δqδr can be ignored. ∂t2 Izz Ixx Here the second coeﬃcient has negative sign. The exponent is real now. 3. it oscillates but does not grow.3. it too oscillates. both coeﬃcients of the diﬀerential ˙ equation are positive. and the solution grows without bound.5. that is. let r = Ω + δr: diﬀerentiate the ﬁrst equation and substitute into the second equation to obtain ∂ 2 δp + (Ixx − Izz )(Iyy − Izz )Ω2 δp = 0.5. and indicates no change in δp.5 Example: Spinning Book 27 from the others. For spin about the x-axis. ¨ when δ q(0) = 0. The imaginary exponent indicates √ that the solution is of the form δq(t) = δq(0)cos αt. and therefore α < 0.2 y-axis Now suppose q = Ω + δq: diﬀerentiate the ﬁrst equation and substitute into the third equation to obtain ∂ 2 δp + (Iyy − Ixx )(Iyy − Izz )Ω2 δp = 0. and hence α > 0. ∂t2 √ Iyy Izz A simpler expression is δ q + αδq = 0. . Diﬀerentiate the second equation to obtain ∂ 2 δq ∂δr + (Ixx − Izz )Ω =0 2 ∂t ∂t Iyy Substitution of this result into the third equation yields ∂ 2 δq + (Ixx − Izz )(Ixx − Iyy )Ω2 δq = 0.

for example. Euler angle vector. • x. . is the translation of the x-axis to the new frame. • E. Note that translation of MMOI using the parallel axis theorem must be either to or from a frame resting exactly at the center of gravity. so that the equations of motion are signiﬁcantly reduced. The parallel axis theorem allows one to translate the mass moments of inertia referenced to the mass center into another frame with parallel orientation. Iyz . in inertial space. as in the spinning book example. and vice versa. and δx. Sometimes a translation of coordinates to the mass center will make the cross-inertial terms Ixy . There are twelve states. location of the body origin. body rotation rate vector. Ixx Iyy Izz Iyz Ixz Ixy = = = = = = (33) ¯ where I represents an MMOI in the axes of the mass center.7 Basis for Simulation Except for external forces and moments F and M . Ixz small enough that they can be ignored. 3. in body coordinates. The formulas are: ¯ Ixx + m(δy 2 + δz 2 ) ¯ Iyy + m(δx2 + δz 2 ) ¯ Izz + m(δx2 + δy 2 ) ¯ Iyz − mδyδz ¯ Ixz − mδxδz ¯ Ixy − mδxδy.28 3 VESSEL INERTIAL DYNAMICS 3. in this case rG = 0 also.6 Parallel Axis Theorem Often. • ω. we now have the necessary terms for writing a full nonlinear simulation of a rigid body. the mass center of an body is at a diﬀerent location than a more convenient measurement point. the vector of body-referenced velocities. the geometric center of a vessel for example. comprising the following components: • vo .

3. while the Euler angles follow: ˙ E = Γ(E)ω. with some coupling which generally requires a 6 × 6 matrix inverse. (35) (34) .7 Basis for Simulation 29 The derivatives of body-referenced velocity and rotation rate come from Equations 27 and 32. The Cartesian position propagates according to ˙ x = RT (E)vo .

30 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION The forces and moments on a vessel are complicated functions of many factors. including water density. and we can make simpliﬁcations to parameterize the most prominent relationships. surface tension. This notation covers some instances where the formal Taylor series is meaningless. but the notation is still clear. ∂x 2! ∂x2 We introduce the notation f (x) = f (xo ) + ∂f (xo ) ∂x 1 ∂ 2 f (xo ) fx x = . ﬂuid drag is often written as 1 F = ρCd Au|u| = Fu|u| u|u|. so that a two-variable Taylor expansion would have the form (36) f (x. vapor pressure. yo ) + fx (x − xo ) + fy (y − yo ) + fxx (x − xo )2 + fyy (y − yo )2 + fxy (x − xo )(y − yo ) + fxxx (x − xo )3 + · · · . 2! ∂x2 fx = and so on. 2 . pressure. (37) (38) Note that all of the factorials are included in the coeﬃcients. and motions of the body. This section pertains to the use of hydrodynamic coeﬃcients for predicting hydrodynamic response.1 Taylor Series and Hydrodynamic Coeﬃcients Recall the Taylor expansion of a function: ∂f (xo ) 1 ∂ 2 f (xo ) (x − xo ) + (x − xo )2 + · · · . y) = f (xo . viscosity. 4. As one example. The most important factors for large ocean vehicles are density and motion.

since ﬂuid particle acceleration ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ relates linearly with pressure or force. this set is ∂u ∂t ∂v ∂r Y = m + rU + xG ∂t ∂t ∂r ∂v + mxG + rU . Xv . {Xx .2 Surface Vessel Linear Model We now discuss some of the hydrodynamic parameters which govern a ship maneuvering in the horizontal plane. Yy . ∂t ∂t X = m (39) Letting u = U + u. with no current. Yu . and eliminating higher-order terms. in a homogeneous sea. Thus Xv = 0. 2 . wave. yG = 0. Nx . Finally. Xφ . which means θ = ψ = p = q = w = 0. Yu . or wind eﬀects. Yφ . Since the vessel is symmetric about the x − z plane. Nu } = 0. so positive r has the boat turning left.2 Surface Vessel Linear Model 31 4. Xr . N = Izz ∂t ∂t X = m (40) A number of coeﬃcients can be discounted. Nφ } are all zero. Yx . consider Xv : since this longitudinal force would have the same sign regardless of the sign of v (because of side-to-side hull symmetry). We assume that no hydrodynamic forces depend on the position of the vessel. We will consider motions only in the horizontal plane. we do not consider nonlinear acceleration Note that the linearized heave/pitch dynamics of a submarine do depend on the pitch angle.2 Second. where U >> u. Xy . Ny . zG is inconsequential. it must have zero slope with v at the origin.4. this topic will be discussed later. Nu . First. The body x-axis is forward and the yaxis is to port. The same argument shows that {Xr . We then have at the outset ∂u − rv − xG r2 ∂t ∂v ∂r Y = m + ru + xG ∂t ∂t ∂r ∂v N = Izz + mxG + ru .

It should be noted that some nonlinear terms related to those we have eliminated above are not zero. and therefore are of immediate interest. ˙ .3 Stability of the Sway/Yaw System ˙ Consider the homogeneous system s = As: s1 = A11 s1 + A12 s2 ˙ s2 = A21 s1 + A22 s2 . a state-space representation of the sway/yaw system is m − Yv mxG − Yr ˙ ˙ mxG − Nv Izz − Nr ˙ ˙ ds dt ˙ Ms ˙ s ˙ s Yv Yr − mU Nv Nr − mxG U = s + F . Y . which is always invertible. r} and external force/moment vector F = {Y . The last form of the equation is a standard one wherein A represents the internal dynamics of the system. considering only the linear hydrodynamic terms. Yuu = 0 because of hull symmetry. or (44) = Ps + F = M −1 P s + M −1 F = As + B F . N }. We have so far. or higher time derivatives. With the state vector s = {v. (m − Xu )u = Xu u + X ˙ ˙ (m − Yv )v + (mxG − Yr )r = Yv v + (Yr − mU )r + Y ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ (mxG − Nv )v + (Izz − Nr )r = Nv v − (Nr − mxG U )r + N . For instance. but in general Xvv = 0 only if the vessel is bow-stern symmetric. and B is a gain matrix for the control and disturbance inputs. but that sway and yaw themselves are coupled. 4. Note that the surge equation is decoupled from the sway and yaw. ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ (41) (42) (43) The right side here carries also the imposed forces from a thruster(s) and rudder(s) {X .32 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION terms. N }. (45) The matrix M is a mass or inertia matrix.

To wit. (m − Yv )(Izz − Nr ) − (mxG − Yr )(mxG − Nv ) ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ (48) A11 = A12 = A21 = A22 = (49) The denominators are identical. Yr } take very small values in comparison with the others. If the origin is at the center of mass. . we would simply use s.4. First. ¨ ˙ (47) Note that these operations are allowed because the derivative operator is linear. A necessary and suﬃcient condition for stability of this ODE system is that each coeﬃcient must be greater than zero: −A11 − A22 > 0 A11 A22 − −A12 A21 > 0 The components of A for the sway/yaw problem are (Izz − Nr )Yv + (Yr − mxG )Nv ˙ ˙ (m − Yv )(Izz − Nr ) − (mxG − Yr )(mxG − Nv ) ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ −(Izz − Nr )(mU − Yr ) − (Yr − mxG )(mxG U − Nr ) ˙ ˙ (m − Yv )(Izz − Nr ) − (mxG − Yr )(mxG − Nv ) ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ (Nv − mxG )Yv + (m − Yv )Nv ˙ ˙ (m − Yv )(Izz − Nr ) − (mxG − Yr )(mxG − Nv ) ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ −(Nv − mxG )(mU − Yr ) − (m − Yv )(mxG U − Nr ) ˙ ˙ . Nv . if the vessel is reasonably balanced with regard to forward and aft areas with respect to the origin. in the language of the Laplace transform. valid for many vessels with the origin is at the geometric center. the terms {Nv . let xG 0. xG = 0. ˙ and similarly Nr −Izz . ˙ ˙ the added mass term −Yv is of the order of the vessel’s material mass m.3 Stability of the Sway/Yaw System We can rewrite the second equation as s2 = d(·) − A22 dt −1 33 A21 s1 (46) and substitute into the ﬁrst equation to give s1 + (−A11 − A22 )s1 + (A11 A22 − A12 A21 )s1 = 0. Both Yv and Nr take large negative values. and can be simpliﬁed. Linear ˙ ˙ ˙ drag and rotational drag are signiﬁcant also. these are the terms Yv and Nr . Next. Yr .

When only the largest terms are considered for a vessel. we have only to look at the numerators. The 2 . Stability can also be improved by moving the center of gravity forward. 4. increasing stability as expected.4 Basic Rudder Action in the Sway/Yaw Model Rudders are devices which develop large lift forces due to an angle of attack with respect to the oncoming ﬂuid. a simpler form is common: C = Yv Nr + Nv (mU − Yr ) > 0.34 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION both large and negative. where α is the angle of attack. For the second condition. ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ (50) The ﬁrst term is the product of two large negative and two large positive numbers. The second part of the second term contains mU . which has a large positive value. Nonzero xG shows up as follows: C = Yv (Nr − mxG U ) + Nv (mU − Yr ) > 0. Hence the ﬁrst condition for stability is met: −A11 − A22 > 0. and ˙ ˙ A11 = Yv m−Yv ˙ Nr Izz −Nr ˙ < 0 A22 = < 0. For stability. we require (Izz − Nr )Yv (m − Yv )Nr ˙ ˙ − [Nv Yv + (m − Yv )Nv ] [−(Izz − Nr )(mU − Yr ) + Yr Nr ] > 0. (51) C is called the vessels stability parameter. The terms of C compete. The denominator for A’s components reduces to (m − Yv )(Izz − Nr ). generally making stability critical on the (usually negative) Nv . positive xG increases the (positive) inﬂuence of C’s ﬁrst term. and yaw/sway stability depends closely on the magnitude and sign of Nv . As in our discussion of lift on the body. the form is as follows: L = 1 ρAU 2 Cl (α). (52) Since Nr and Yv are both negative. since the denominators of the Aij are identical. Adding more surface area aft drives Nv more positive.

etc. other hydrodynamic derivatives are augmented to capture the necessary eﬀects. . lift coeﬃcient Cl is normally linear with α near α = 0. α=0 (53) Since the rudder develops force (and a small moment) far away from the body origin.. In this case the rudder still opposes yaw and sway perturbations and acts to stabilize the vessel. and the total angle of attack α. δ = α and Nδ = Nα .4. δ. Angle of attack is inﬂuenced by δ. but in real conditions. Generally speaking. We will assume that α is small enough that the linear relationship applies: Cl (α) = ∂Cl ∂α α. and thereafter develops much less lift. and a very small positive sway perturbation. in tank testing with v = 0. We have 1 ∂Cl Yα = ρA 2 ∂α 1 ∂Cl Nα = − ρA 2 ∂α U2 α=0 (54) (55) lU 2 . say a distance l aft. α=0 Note the diﬀerence between the rudder angle expressed in the body frame. for example Nv and Nr . A positive rudder deﬂection (deﬁned to have the same sense as the yaw angle) causes a negative yaw perturbation. even when δ = 0. but the rudder stalls when the angle of attack reaches a critical value.4 Basic Rudder Action in the Sway/Yaw Model y δ r x 35 Figure 3: Convention for positive rudder angle in the vessel reference system. as well as v/U and lr. Thus. the moment equation is quite simple. the hydrodynamic characteristics of the vessel depend strongly on the rudder.

4. where kr > 0 is a feedback gain. A properly-balanced vessel just achieves stability with zero rudder action. so that a reasonable amount of control will provide good maneuvering capabilities. we have ¨ ˙ (Izz − Nr )φ + (mxG U − Nr )φ = Nδ δ. i. ˙ (58) Since all coeﬃcients are positive (recall Nδ < 0). a vessel which is overly stable (C >> 0 with no rudder action) is unmaneuverable. ˙ (57) Employing the control law δ = kφ φ. second-order ODE: ¨ ˙ (Izz − Nr )φ + (mxG U − Nr )φ − Nδ kφ φ = 0. This use of an error signal to drive an actuator is in fact the essence of feedback control. The control law δ = kφ (φ − φdesired ) + kr r is the basis for heading autopilots.. . In this case. the equation gives a stable θ response. Hence C becomes more positive. is C = Yv (Nr − mxG U + kr Nδ ) + Nv (mU − Yr − kr Yδ ).4.2 Heading Control in the Sway/Yaw Model Considering just the yaw equation of motion. (56) Yδ is small positive.36 4. settling under second-order dynamics to θ(∞) = 0. a controller to calculate δ. the system equation becomes a homogeneous. 4. and an actuator to implement the corrective action. but Nδ is large and negative. with a rudder. we require sensors to obtain r and φ. v = 0. On the other hand. Control system limitations and the stalling of rudders make obvious the fact that even a very large control gain kr cannot completely solve stability problems of a poorly-designed vessel with an inadequate rudder.e.1 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION Adding Yaw Damping through Feedback The stability coeﬃcient C resulting from the addition of a control law δ = kr r. which are used to track φdesired . since Yv is negative.

(59) Since Yr and mxG are comparatively small in the ﬁrst row. The initial yaw is in the negative r-direction. acceleration terms dominate. The system equations reduce to v r = δ C (mxG U − Nr )Yδ + (Yr − mU )Nδ N v Y δ − Y v Nδ . since the velocities are zero.5 4. 4. it turns in the opposite direction than expected. If the vessel is unstable (C < 0). This turning rate equation can also be used to estimate turning radius R: r=− R= U UC = . the steady-state yaw rate is negative.5 Response of the Vessel to Step Rudder Input 37 4. the positive v-direction.5. in which many terms are competing and contributing to the transient response. The equation looks like this: m − Yv mxG − Yr ˙ ˙ mxG − Nv Izz − Nr ˙ ˙ v ˙ r ˙ = Yδ Nδ δ. (60) m − Yv ˙ and the vessel moves to the left. we have ˙ Yδ δ . The steady turning rate is thus approximated by Yv N δ δ. (63) C With C > 0.5. the vessel is in a steady turning condition. and the accelerations are zero. (62) Note that the denominator is the stability parameter.2 Phase 3: Steady State When the transients have decayed. since Nδ < 0: v(0) = ˙ r(0) = ˙ Nδ δ .1 Response of the Vessel to Step Rudder Input Phase 1: Accelerations Dominate When the rudder ﬁrst moves. r −Yv Nδ δ (64) . Izz − Nr ˙ (61) The ﬁrst phase is followed by a period (Phase 2).4.

Very tight maneuvering requires the nonlinear inertial components and hydrodynamic terms. lb denotes the vertical separation of the center of gravity and the center of buoyancy. consider the case of heave and pitch. This fact is not true in the vertical plane. and they are independent of the longitudinal dynamics.6 Summary of the Linear Maneuvering Model We conclude our discussion of the yaw/sway model by noting that 1. decreasing R as desired. The analysis is valid only up to small angles of attack and turning rates. ˙ ˙ ˙ dt m (65) (66) The last term in each equation is a hydrostatic eﬀect induced by opposing net buoyancy B and weight W . The linearized sway/yaw dynamics of a surface vessel are strongly coupled. The case C < 0 should only be considered under active feedback control. the nonlinear equations couple surge to the other motions. for which the dimensional weight/buoyancy forces and moments are invariant with speed. because drag and lift eﬀects generally scale with U 2 .7 Stability in the Vertical Plane Stability in the horizontal plane changes very little as a function of speed. and the actual vessel loses forward speed during maneuvering. We see also that increasing the rudder area increases Nδ . 4. 4. Among other eﬀects. indicating that too stable a ship has poor turning performance. 2.38 4 HYDRODYNAMICS: INTRODUCTION The radius goes up directly with C. The design parameter C should be slightly greater than zero for easy turning. For example. Because buoyancy eﬀects do not . and “ hands-oﬀ” stability. Increasing the deﬂection δ to reduce R works only to the point of stalling. creating the so-called righting moment which nearly all underwater vehicles possess. with xG = 0 and no actuation: ∂w − Uq = Zw w + Zw w + Zq˙ q + Zq q + (B − W ) ˙ ˙ ˙ ∂t dq Iyy = Mw w + Mw w + Mq˙ q + Mq q − Blb sin θ. 3.

the dynamic properties and hence stability of the vehicle may change with speed.4. .7 Stability in the Vertical Plane 39 change with speed.

The theorem asserts that there are n − k dimensionless groups πi that can be formed. We want to know X(T ). We form nondimensional groups out of the dimensional ones in this section. independent quantities. and the functional equivalence is reduced to πn−k = fπ (π1 . (68) Example. some quantities are dependent on other. the distance that the block has moved as of time T . Simple termcancellation gives π1 = X(T )m/F T 2 . The dimensional function is X(T ) = fQ (m. π2 . The Buckingham π-theorem provides a basis for all nondimensionalization. but suppose also that there are only k independent ones. a steady force of magnitude F is applied. Q2 . The (MKS) units are [X(·)] [m] [F ] [T ] = = = = m kg kgm/s2 s. and apply the technique to maneuvering. not far at all from the known result that X(T ) = F T 2 /2m! Example. we require that all terms in an equation must have the same units. On the basis of physical laws. T ). We have . π1 assumes only a constant (but unknown) value. πn−k−1 ). At time zero. F. There is just one nondimensional group in this relationship.40 5 SIMILITUDE 5 5.1 SIMILITUDE Use of Nondimensional Groups For a consistent description of physical processes. k is equivalent to the number of physical unit types encountered. Qn−1 ). (67) There are n variables here. Let a quantity Qn be given as a function of a set of n − 1 other quantities: Qn = fQ (Q1 . · · · . · · · . through a drain nozzle of diameter d. so n = 4. and therefore k = 3. Consider the ﬂow rate Q of water from an open bucket of height h. Suppose we have a block of mass m resting on a frictionless horizontal surface.

We ﬁnally have the useful result π4 = fπ (π5 . π2 is more awkward. only three non-dimensional groups exist. Hence. and the questionable importance of h/d as a group are remnants of the theorem. π2 = dρ gh/µ.5. g). No other parameters aﬀect the ﬂow rate. √ and we may construct π4 = π1 /π2 = Q/d2 gh √ nondimensionalize Q with to a pressure velocity. µ d d2 gh The uncertainty about where to use h and d. and the (MKS) units of these quantities are: [Q] [h] [d] [ρ] [µ] [g] = = = = = = m3 /s m m kg/m3 kg/ms m/s2 There are only three units that appear: [length. √ Three plausible ﬁrst groups are: π1 = ρQ/dµ. and thus k = 3. π1 is recognized as a Reynolds number pertaining to the oriﬁce ﬂow. ρ. π2 ) −→ √ ρd gh h Q √ = fπ . as we now show. and one is a unique function of the other two. µ. time. We have n = 6. making sure that each of the original (dimensional) quantities is represented. they could easily change places in the ﬁrst two groups. However.1 Use of Nondimensional Groups 41 Q = fQ (h. d. mass]. To arrive at a set of valid groups. and then π5 = π1 /π4 = ρd gh/µ to establish an oriﬁce Reynolds number independent of Q. and its absolute viscosity µ. Note that all six quantities appear at least once. we must create three nondimensional quantities. and π3 = h/d. Since h and d have the same units. Intuition and additional manipulations come in handy. g is the acceleration due to gravity. where the water density is ρ. Intuition is that h/d is im- . . but products and fractions of groups are themselves valid groups.

Roughly speaking.2 Common Groups in Marine Engineering One frequently encounters the following groups in ﬂuid mechanics and marine engineering: 1. with no constraints about the actual physics taking place. A low cavitation number means that the Bernoulli pressure loss across the lifting surface will cause the ﬂuid to vaporize.g. 3.42 5 SIMILITUDE material. Froude number: U Fr = √ . and U the propeller inlet velocity. 5. Reynolds number: Re = Ul . it relates the vessel speed U to water wave speeds of wavelength L. degradation of performance. the theorem reduced the number of independent parameters from ﬁve to two. 1 ρU 2 2 (70) where P∞ represents the ambient total pressure. e. 2.. π5 is a Reynolds number. g is the acceleration due to gravity. and the other two terms have a nice physical meaning. Pv the vapor pressure of the ﬂuid. Cavitation number: δ= P∞ − P v . µ/ρ (71) . The power of the π-theorem is primarily in reducing the number of parameters which must be considered independently to characterize a process. such as in waves on the ocean surface. and L is the waterline length of the vessel. and possible deterioration of the material. The Froude number appears in problems involving pressure boundary conditions. where λ is the wavelength. the phase speed of a surface wave is V = λg/2π. gL (69) where U is the speed of the vessel. causing bubbles. In the ﬂow example.

among others. and ﬂow across a plate. Reynolds number is a ratio of ﬂuid inertial pressures to viscous pressures: When Re is high. ρU 2 normalizes pressure. Various forces on the box scale as (inertia) Fi = ρ (gravity) Fg = (pressure) Fp = (shear) Fs = (surface tension) Fσ = ∂v ∂v dxdydz + ρv dxdydz ∂t ∂x 3 ρgdxdydz ρgl P dxdy P l2 ∂v µ dxdy µU l ∂z σdx σl. and l normalizes length. To appreciate the origins of these terms from a ﬂuid particle’s point of view. viscous eﬀects are negligible. dz].5. Weber number: W = ρU 2 l . The Weber number indicates the importance of surface tension. dy. and ρ is density. Given that [σ] = N/m (MKS). bluﬀ body wakes. σ (72) where σ is the surface tension of a ﬂuid. Re can be used to characterize pipe ﬂow.2 Common Groups in Marine Engineering 43 where U is velocity. l represents one of many length scales. Since Re appears in many applications. 4. consider a box having side lengths [dx. µ is absolute viscosity. ρU 2 l2 Thus the groups listed above can be written as Fi Fr = Fg Fp δ= Fi Fi Re = Fs Fi W = Fσ U2 gl P ρU 2 ρU l µ ρU 2 l σ .

we set gmodel = gship . so that usually λ >> 1.e. Above a critical value Re 500. one then tries to match F r closely. l) = fπ (Re. √ Next. ρ]: these three values provide the necessary units of length. since l is large. the model and the true vessel operate in the same gravity ﬁeld. This holds for the geometry of the body and the kinematics of the ﬂow. the surface roughness. it is imperative to maintain as many of the nondimensional groups as possible of the full-scale system. W is very large.. √ Froude number similitude requires Umodel = Uship / λ. 5. As a result.3 Similitude in Maneuvering The linear equations of motion for the horizontal yaw/sway problem are: (m − Yv )v − Yv v + (mU − Yr )r + (mxG − Yr )r = Y ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ (Izz − Nr )r + (mxG U − N r)r + (mxG − Nv )v − Nv v = N. U. ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ These equations can be nondimensionalized in a standard way. Unfortunately. Suppose that lship = λlmodel . i. For surface vessels. L. additionally. both of which are important for surface vessels. i. Then Reynolds number scaling implies directly νmodel = νship /λ3/2 .e. F r. First. the viscous eﬀects are negligible. Cf is not sensitive to Re. by using the quantities [U. This rate cannot be achieved for lower-Re conditions because of ﬂuid drag in the oriﬁce. and submarines near the surface. however. few ﬂuids with this property are workable in a large testing tank. . 000. the ﬂow rate is Q = πd2 2gh/4.44 5 SIMILITUDE When testing models. g. and hence surface tension plays no role. accurate scaling of Re for large vessels to model scale is quite diﬃcult. µ.. Suppose that we conduct a model test in which Re is abnormally large. Under inviscid √ conditions. we write the functional relationship for drag as a starting point: Cr = D 1 ρAU 2 2 = fQ (ρ. W ). we look at Re = U l/ν and F r = U/ gl. σ. In a vessel. and the all of the relevant groups governing ﬂuid dynamics. it is a routine procedure to employ turbulence stimulators to achieve ﬂow that would normally occur with ship-scale Re. With this achieved. Consider the example of nozzle ﬂow from a bucket.

for consistency with our previous expressions: v ˙ = m = m 1 ρL3 2 (74) Izz = xG = U = Izz 1 ρL5 2 xG L U =1 U Yv ˙ 1 ρL3 2 Yv 1 ρU L2 2 Yr ˙ 1 ρL4 2 Yr 1 ρU L3 2 Y 1 ρU 2 L2 2 Nv ˙ 1 ρL4 2 Nv 1 ρU L3 2 Yv = ˙ Yv = Yr = ˙ Yr = Y = Nv = ˙ Nv = . and mass. denoted with a prime symbol: L v ˙ (73) U2 1 v = v U L2 r = ˙ r ˙ U2 L r = r. and furthermore are readily accessible to the user. U We follow a similar procedure for the constant terms as follows. we create nondimensional states. First. including a factor of 1/2 with ρ.3 Similitude in Maneuvering 45 time.5.

and every moment 2 1 with 2 ρU 2 L3 . Let us carry out a similar normalization of the simpliﬁed roll equation (Ixx − Kp )p − Kp p − Kψ ψ = K. the roll moment Kψ is based on metacentric stability. the nondimensionalized description holds for a range of velocities. and GM is the metacentric height. 1 ρU 2 L3 2 N 5 SIMILITUDE Nr = ˙ Nr = N = Note that every force has been normalized with 1 ρU 2 L2 . ˙ ˙ (76) For a surface vessel. 5. and therefore require special attention.46 Nr ˙ 1 ρL5 2 Nr 1 ρU L4 2 . where is the displaced ﬂuid volume of the vessel. and has the form Kψ = −ρg (GM ).4 Roll Equation Similitude Certain nondimensional coeﬃcients may arise which depend explicitly on U . time has been also nondimensionalized with L/U . The nondimensional terms are Ixx 1 ρL5 2 Kp ˙ 1 ρL5 2 Kp 1 ρU L4 2 Kψ 1 ρU 2 L3 2 Ixx = Kp = ˙ Kp = Kψ = (77) . Since ﬂuid forces and moments generally scale with U 2 . Thus we arrive at a completely equivalent set of nondimensional system equations. (m − Yv )v − Yv v + (m U − Yr )r + (m xG − Yr )r ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ (Izz − Nr )r + (m xG U − N r )r + (m xG − Nv )v − Nv v ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ = Y (75) = N.

5. = U 47 p ˙ p leading to the equivalent system 2gL (GM )φ = K . this Kψ needs to be maintained in model tests. . the righting moment has the form Kψ = −Bh. The Froude number has a very strong inﬂuence on roll stability. In the case of a submarine. since it appears explicitly in the nondimensional righting moment term. ρU 2 L3 2 Kψ = − 1 Kψ again depends strongly on U . and h is the righting arm. The nondimensional coeﬃcient becomes (Ixx − Kp )p − Kp p − ˙ ˙ Bh . (78) U2 Note that the roll angle φ was not nondimensionalized. and also has a strong inﬂuence on Kp . where B is the buoyant force.4 Roll Equation Similitude L2 = p ˙ U2 L p. since B and h are ﬁxed.

the Froude number F r = √U . Finally. Rudder derivatives can be computed also by towing with various rudder angles. For example. the measurement is made over one rotation only.48 6 CAPTIVE MEASUREMENTS 6 CAPTIVE MEASUREMENTS Before making the decision to measure hydrodynamic derivatives. . The idea is to measure the crossbody force and yaw moment as a function of r. 6. The available computational approaches should be considered as well. a preliminary search of the literature may turn up useful estimates. Since the control surface(s) and propeller(s) aﬀect the coeﬃcients. Finally. Note that the lateral force also contains the component (m − Yv )r2 R. The slope of the curve at zero angle determines Yv and Nv respectively. modern sensors and computer control systems make possible the estimation of certain coeﬃcients based on open-water tests of a model or a full-scale design. giving the coeﬃcients Yr and Nr . Reynolds number Re = UνL . 6. these are very good for predicting added mass in particular. higher-order terms can be generated if the points deviate from a straight line. which scales the inﬂuence gL of surface waves. need not be matched as long as the scale model attains turbulent ﬂow (supercritical Re). which scales the eﬀect of viscosity. rotating at constant rate r: the vessel forward speed is U = rR.1 Towtank In a towtank. One can use turbulence stimulators near the bow if necessary. must be maintained between model and full-scale surface vessels. the vessel is ﬁxed on an arm of length R. ˙ The coeﬃcients Yv and Nv can also be obtained by running with a ﬁxed angle of attack. tow the vehicle at diﬀerent angles of attack. test results for many hull-forms have already been published. In model tests. measuring sway force and yaw moment. they should both be implemented in model testing.2 Rotating Arm Device On a rotating arm device. and the basic lifting surface models are not diﬃcult. so that the vessel does not re-enter its own wake.

or in a combination sway and yaw motion. When a = b. we obtain four independent equations: . then (m − Yv )v − Yv v + (mU − Yr )r + (mxG − Yr )r = Ya + Yb (81) ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ (Izz − Nr )r + (mxG U − Nr )r + (mxG − Nv )v − Nv v = (Yb − Ya )l. one forward and one aft. 2l v = − (82) (80) Equating the sine terms and then the cosine terms. The model moves in pure sway if ya (t) = yb (t). Usually a sinusoidal motion is imposed: ya (t) = a cos ωt yb (t) = b cos(ωt + ψ). ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ We have v = (ya + ya )/2 and r = (yb − ya )/2l. The connection points are a distance l forward and aft from the vessel origin. therefore producing variable yaw. If linearity holds. the vessel is towed at constant forward speed U . in a pure yaw motion about the mid-length point if ya (t) = −yb (t). which can each impose independent sway motions. these become ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ aω (sin ωt(1 + cos ψ) + cos ωt sin ψ) 2 aω 2 v = − ˙ (cos ωt(1 + cos ψ) − sinωt sin ψ) 2 aω r = − (sin ωt(cos ψ − 1) + cos ωt sin ψ) 2l aω 2 r = − ˙ (cos ωt(cos ψ − 1) − sin ωt sin ψ) .6. but is held by two posts.3 Planar-Motion Mechanism With a planar motion mechanism.3 Planar-Motion Mechanism 49 6. (79) and the transverse forces on the posts are measured and approximated as Ya (t) = Fa cos(ωt + θa ) Yb (t) = Fb cos(ωt + θb ).

50 6 CAPTIVE MEASUREMENTS (m − Yv ) − ˙ aω 2 (1 + cos ψ) − 2 aω Yv − sin ψ + 2 aω (mU − Yr ) − sin ψ + 2l aω 2 (mxG − Yr ) − (cos ψ − 1) = Fa cos θa + Fb cos θb ˙ 2l (m − Yv ) − ˙ (83) aω 2 (− sin ψ) − 2 aω (1 + cos ψ) + Yv − 2 aω (mU − Yr ) − (cos ψ − 1) + 2l aω 2 (mxG − Yr ) − (− sin ψ) = −Fa sin θa − Fb sin θb ˙ 2l aω 2 (cos ψ − 1) + 2l aω sin ψ + (mxG U − Nr ) − 2l aω 2 (mxG − Nv ) − (1 + cos ψ) − ˙ 2 aω Nv − sin ψ = l(Fb cos θb − Fa cos θa ) 2 (Izz − Nr ) − ˙ (Izz − Nr ) − ˙ (84) (85) aω 2 (− sin ψ) + (86) 2l aω (mxG U − Nr ) − (cos ψ − 1) + 2l aω 2 (mxG − Nv ) − (− sin ψ) − ˙ 2 aω Nv − (1 + cos ψ) = l(−Fb sin θb + Fa sin θa ) 2 .

Nr . a. and that some curve ﬁtting will be needed in any event. and from the rigidbody model we have [m. Remarkably. Nv . can be deduced from two tests with a planar motion mechanism. Fb . θa .6. the eight linear coeﬃcients for a surface ˙ ˙ vessel maneuvering. Yr . Nr . Nv . Nr ]. we can write the eight solutions ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ directly: For ψ = 0. Nv ]. aω 2 2 aω −Yv − 2 aω 2 (mxG − Nv ) − ˙ 2 aω −Nv − 2 (m − Yv ) − ˙ (2) = Fa cos θa + Fb cos θb (2) = −Fa sin θa − Fb sin θb (2) = l(Fb cos θb − Fa cos θa ) (2) = l(−Fb sin θb + Fa sin θa ). (88) to be solved for [Yr . Nv . Thus. Nr ]. for a given speed. we know from the imposed motion the values [U. xG ]. .3 Planar-Motion Mechanism 51 In this set of four equations. we have ˙ ˙ aω 2 2l aω (mU − Yr ) − 2l aω 2 (Izz − Nr ) − ˙ 2l aω (mxG U − Nr ) − 2l (mxG − Yr ) − ˙ (−2) = Fa cos θa + Fb cos θb (−2) = −Fa sin θa − Fb sin θb (−2) = l(Fb cos θb − Fa cos θa ) (−2) = l(−Fb sin θb + Fa sin θa ). ψ. Yr . For ψ = 180o . θb ]. From the experiment. We note that the nonlinear terms will play a signiﬁcant role if the motions are too large. ω]. Yv . Yv . The PMM can be driven with more complex trajectories which will target speciﬁc nonlinear terms. we obtain [Fa . (87) to be solved respectively for [Yv . exactly what is required to ﬁnd the eight coeﬃcients [Yv . It turns out that the two cases of ψ = 0 (pure sway motion) and ψ = 180o (pure yaw motion) yield a total of eight independent equations. Yr . Izz .

With zero rudder. is still to the right. Repeat in decrements of -5◦ . to -15◦ . and keep it there until steady yaw rate is maintained for one minute. 4. and hold until the vessel turns to -20◦ with respect to the starting heading.2 Zig-Zag Maneuver 1. 7. 2. suppose that the ﬁrst 15◦ rudder deﬂection causes the vessel to turn right. Deﬂect the rudder to 20◦ . But if the corrective action causes the vessel to turn left at all. We say that the vessel is unstable. and hold until the vessel turns 20◦ . Deﬂect the rudder to -20◦ . and clearly a poor design. manifested as a hysteresis in yaw rate r. Reduce rudder angle by 5◦ . The test reveals if the vessel has a memory eﬀect. 7. 5. The vessel has gotten “stuck” here. It is easy to see that the rudder in this case has to be used excessively driving the vessel back and forth.1 Dieudonn´ Spiral e 1.52 7 STANDARD MANEUVERING TESTS 7 STANDARD MANEUVERING TESTS This section describes some of the typical maneuvering tests which are performed on full-scale vessels. No changes in speed setting are made after this point. 4. For example. to assess stability and performance. Repeat. . and keep it there until steady yaw rate is maintained for one minute. Turn rudder quickly by 15◦ . on the way negative. 3. Achieve steady speed and direction for one minute. and e then a contracting spiral in the opposite direction. the same memory eﬀect may occur. and will require a negative rudder action to pull out of the turn. The Dieudonn´ maneuver has the vessel path following a growing spiral. 2. Proceed back up to 15◦ . achieve steady speed for one minute. but that the yaw rate at zero rudder. 3.

the rudder is moved to a new setting.3. and the angle of heel ψ. 7.2 Speed Loss Speed loss occurs primarily because of drag induced by the drift angle. and describes how the vessel “skids” during a turn. the ﬂuid forces act below the waterline. the speed loss.7.3. then the speed tangential to the circle is U = rR. inertial terms dominate (Phase 1) and the sway equation is . 7. If the turning circle has radius R (measured from the vessel origin). 7. and the total period for the 20◦ oscillations.3 Circle Maneuver From a steady speed. A line along the vessel centerline reaches closest to the true center of the turning circle at a point termed the turning center. similar tests can be made with diﬀerent rudder angles and diﬀerent threshold vessel headings.3. yaw.3 Circle Maneuver 53 This maneuver establishes several important characteristics of the yaw response. zero yaw rate condition. These are: the response time (time to reach a given heading). there is no apparent lateral velocity. After steady state is reached again. and roll caused by the center of gravity. In a surface vessel. A vessel which drifts very little may have very little speed loss. but the center of gravity is near the waterline or above. the drift angle β.3 Heel Angle Heel during turning occurs as a result of the intrinsic coupling of sway. the yaw overshoot (amount the vessel exceeds ±20◦ when the rudder has turned the other way). which may or may not exist on the physical vessel. The vessel-reference velocity components are thus u = U cos β and v = −U sin β. When the rudder is ﬁrst deﬂected. parameters of interest are the turning diameter. Of course. At this location. The vessel responds by turning in a circle. and it appears to an observer there that the vessel turns about this point.1 Drift Angle The drift angle is the equivalent to angle of attack for lifting surfaces. 7.

3.54 7 STANDARD MANEUVERING TESTS (m − Yv )v − (Yr − mxG )r = Yδ δ. v < 0 when r > 0 for most vessels. In ˙ the steady state. the roll will momentarily be even worse! In summary. Because the centrifugal force acts above the waterline. Hence. but then out of the turn in the steady state. Unlike surface vessels. and Yδ δ (intermediate). we see that if the rudder is straightened out at this point. −Yv v (acting high). The sway equation is −Yv v + (mU − Yr )r = Yδ δ. the vessel rolls into the turn initially. acting high. and thus the vessel ﬁrst rolls to starboard ˙ (positive) for a positive rudder action. which have the rigid mass center above the center of ﬂuid forcing. (92) The drift angle β keeps the Yv -force. the keel out of the turn. ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ (89) The coeﬃcients for r are quite small. The inertial equation (m − Yv )v − (Yr − mxG )r = Yδ δ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ (91) is dominated by mv (acting low). and additionally feel the eﬀects of a large sail above both. the vessel ultimately rolls to port (negative) for a positive rudder action. From the sway equation. and |Yv v| > |Yδ δ|. (90) with Yr small. The transition between the inertially-dominated and steady-turning regimes includes an overshoot: in the above formulas. 7. hydrodynamic forces equalize the centrifugal force mU r and the rudder force Yδ δ. and again centrifugal force mU r causes the bottom of the submarine to move out of the turn. the roll angle of a submarine with a sail is always into . the vessel rolls under the sail. ˙ ˙˙ Because |Yv | > m. submarines have the mass center below the rudder action point.4 Heeling in Submarines with Sails Submarines typically roll into a turn during all phases. When steady turning conditions are reached (Phase 3). toward the center of the turn. −Yv v + (mU − Yr )r = Yδ δ. the vessel overshoots the ﬁnal port roll angle as the vessel slows.

both initially and in the steady state. The heel angle declines as the speed of the submarine drops. .7.3 Circle Maneuver 55 the turn.

the asymmetric location of the stagnation points. Note that the A-subscript will be used to denote zero angle of attack conditions.56 8 STREAMLINED BODIES 8 8. but similar arguments can be used to describe the horizontal plane. d’Alembert’s paradox predicts zero net force. because it opposes the vehicle’s x-axis.2 Munk Moment Any shape other than a sphere generates a moment when inclined in an inviscid ﬂow. . where pressure is highest on the front of the body (decelerating ﬂow) and lowest on the back (accelerating ﬂow). which has the form 1 FA = − ρCA Ao U 2 . but not necessarily a zero moment.1 STREAMLINED BODIES Nominal Drag Force A symmetric streamlined body at zero angle of attack experiences only a drag force. 8. The Munk moment is always destabilizing. and Azz along the vehicle’s z-axis z (up). if it is moving horizontally. or from slender body approximation (to follow). and hence area Ao is usually that of the wetted surface. also. (93) 2 The drag coeﬃcient CA has both pressure and skin friction components. (94) Azz > Axx for a slender body. Consider a symmetric body with added mass components Axx along the vehicle (slender) x-axis (forward). and the negative sign indicates a negative pitch with respect to the vehicle’s pitch axis. the sign of FA is negative. Let α represent the angle of attack. The added mass terms Azz and Axx can be estimated from analytical expressions (available only for regular shapes such as ellipsoids). from numerical calculation. We will limit the present discussion to the vertical plane. taken to be positive with the nose up – this equates to a negative pitch angle φ in vehicle coordinates. The Munk moment is: 1 Mm = − (Azz − Axx )U 2 sin 2α 2 −(Azz − Axx )U 2 α. This Munk moment arises for a simple reason. in the sense that it acts to turn the vehicle perpendicular to the ﬂow.

8. a helical vortex may form and convect downstream. the transverse force Fn can be written in the same form as for control surfaces: 1 ρCn Ao U 2 2 1 ∂Cn ρ αAo U 2 . The zero-α drag force FA is modiﬁed by the vortex shedding: 1 Fa = − ρCa Ao U 2 . Each constant γ is taken as positive. with the exceptions of the boundary layer. First we simplify: Fa = −γa Fn = γn α Mm = −γm α. For a small angle of attack. and a small region near the trailing end. 2 ∂α Fn = (95) With a positive angle of attack. i. a decomposition using apparent velocity. In this latter area. 8. this force is in the positive z-direction.3 Separation Moment In a viscous ﬂuid. ﬂow over a streamlined body is similar to that of potential ﬂow. but it also induces drag. and the signs reﬂect orientation in the vehicle reference frame.e. The Munk moment is a . Since vortices correlate with low pressure. and it may cover a larger area (increasing the stabilizing moment and drag) for a larger angle of attack. the eﬀect of such a vortex is stabilizing.4 Net Eﬀects: Aerodynamic Center The Munk moment and the moment induced by separation are competing. with a nose-up angle of attack. The formation of the vortex depends on the angle of attack.. and their magnitudes determine the stability of a hullform. where 2 Ca = CA cos2 φ.3 Separation Moment 57 8. (96) The last relation is based on writing CA (U cos φ)2 as (CA cos2 φ)U 2 .

the aerodynamic center is signiﬁcantly ahead of the nose. the net moment is stabilizing. and write the total pitch moment about O as: M = Mm + Fn ln = (−γm + γn ln )α. The net moment about O is zero if we select ln = γm . AC moves inﬁnitely far forward as viscosity eﬀects diminish. Similarly. if the vehicle’s origin lies in front of AC. For self-propelled vehicles. In many cases with very streamlined bodies. The summed forces on the body are thus: . the moment is destabilizing. the towpoint must be located forward of AC. γn (98) and the location of O is then called the aerodynamic center or AC.5 Role of Fins in Moving the Aerodynamic Center Control surfaces or ﬁxed ﬁns are often attached to the stern of a slender vehicle to enhance directional stability. We pick a temporary origin O for Fn however. As a ﬁnal note. and in this case.58 8 STREAMLINED BODIES pure couple which does not depend on a reference point. (97) where ln denotes the (positive) distance between O and the application point of Fn . and are signed again to match the vehicle frame. with γ > 0 and α > 0. 8. for towed vehicles. Hence. since the Munk moment persists even in inviscid ﬂow. Fixed surfaces induce lift and drag on the body: 1 L = ρAf U 2 Cl (α) 2 1 D = − ρAf U 2 Cd 2 γL α −γD (constant) (99) These forces act somewhere on the ﬁn. If the origin lies behind AC. a rigid sting would have to extend at least to AC in order for stable towing. The point AC has an intuitive explanation: it is the location on the hull where Fn would act to create the total moment. the mass center must be forward of AC for stability.

8. (100) All of the forces are pushing the vehicle up.. With very large ﬁns. Equation 102 contains two length measurements. this latter term is large. We solve for lf : γm + γn lf n . A vehicle with excessively large ﬁns will be diﬃcult to turn and maneuver. since both eﬀects usually act near the stern. lf is reduced. so that lf might be very small. this is the case of AC moving aft toward the ﬁns. (102) (101) The Munk moment γm opposes the aggregate eﬀects of vorticity lift γn and the ﬁns’ lift and drag γL + γD . lf n < 0. .e.5 Role of Fins in Moving the Aerodynamic Center 59 X = Fa − |D| cos α + |L| sin α −γa − γD + γL α2 Z = Fn + |L| cos α + |D| sin α γn α + γL α + γD α. (103) γn + γL + γD This is the distance that AC is located forward of the ﬁns. but since AC is referenced to the ﬁns. there is no net gain in stability. i. the ﬁns act directly in the denominator to shorten lf . To solve it explicitly. Note that if the ﬁns are located forward of the vortex shedding force Fn . it can be recalled that lf = ln = γm . this is likely a small number. The moment about O vanishes if γm = γn ln + lf (γL + γD ). let lf n denote the (positive) distance that the ﬁns are located behind Fn . γn Hence. and thus AC can be referenced to any other ﬁxed point easily. Without ﬁns. and that the moment carried by the ﬁns themselves is very small (compared to the moment induced by Llf ) the total moment is as follows: M = (−γm + γn ln )α + (γL + γD )lf α. referenced to an arbitrary body point O. If we say that the ﬁns act a distance lf behind the temporary origin O.

as well as their derivatives. Zq .60 8 STREAMLINED BODIES 8.6 Aggregate Eﬀects of Body and Fins Since all of the terms discussed so far have the same dependence on α. Mw . 2 ˆ X = Fa (104) 8. U We can then write several linear hydrodynamic coeﬃcients easily: 1 ˆ ˆ Zw = − ρCn Ao U 2 1 ˆ ˆ Mw = ρC Ao U xAC . and we assume that the vehicle is moving horizontally. Setting Fa and Fn to account for the fuselage and ﬁns. To start. and Mq for a Slender Body The angle of attack α is related to the cross-body velocity w as follows: α = − tan−1 − w u (105) w for U >> w.7 Coeﬃcients Zw . we have 1 ˆ ˆ − ρCa Ao U 2 2 1 ˆ ˆ 2 ˆ Z = Fn ρ C Ao U α 2 n 1ˆ ˆ ˆ M = −Fn xAC − Cn Ao U 2 xAC α. provides good results for the hull. The angle of attack seen by the ﬁn is a combination of a part due to θ and a part linear with q: αf −θ + lf q U (107) . 2 n (106) The rotation of the vessel involves complex ﬂow. introduced shortly. we consider the contribution of the ﬁns only – slender body theory. it is ˆ ˆ possible to group them into a condensed form. which depends on both w and q. The ﬁn center of pressure is located a distance lf aft of the body origin. with an instantaneous pitch angle of θ.

8.7 Coeﬃcients Zw , Mw , Zq , and Mq for a Slender Body and so lateral force and moment derivatives (for the ﬁn alone) emerge as 1 Zq = − ρCl Af U lf 2 1 2 Mq = − ρCl Af U lf . 2

61

(108)

62

9 SLENDER-BODY THEORY

9
9.1

SLENDER-BODY THEORY
Introduction

Consider a slender body with d << L, that is mostly straight. The body could be asymmetric in cross-section, or even ﬂexible, but we require that the lateral variations are small and smooth along the length. The idea of the slender-body theory, under these assumptions, is to think of the body as a longitudinal stack of thin sections, each having an easily-computed added mass. The eﬀects are integrated along the length to approximate lift force and moment. Slender-body theory is accurate for small ratios d/L, except near the ends of the body. As one example, if the diameter of a body of revolution is d(s), then we can compute δma (x), where the nominal added mass value for a cylinder is π (109) δma = ρ d2 δx. 4 The added mass is equal to the mass of the water displaced by the cylinder. The equation above turns out to be a good approximation for a number of two-dimensional shapes, including ﬂat plates and ellipses, if d is taken as the width dimension presented to the ﬂow. Many formulas for added mass of twodimensional sections, as well as for simple three-dimensional bodies, can be found in the books by Newman and Blevins.

9.2

Kinematics Following the Fluid

The added mass forces and moments derive from accelerations that a ﬂuid particles experience when they encounter the body. We use the notion of a ﬂuid derivative for this purpose: the operator d/dt indicates a derivative taken in the frame of the passing particle, not the vehicle. Hence, this usage has an indirect connection with the derivative described in our previous discussion of rigid-body dynamics. For the purposes of explaining the theory, we will consider the two-dimensional heave/surge problem only. The local geometry is described by the location of the centerline; it has vertical location (in body coordinates) of zb (x, t), and local angle α(x, t). The time-dependence indicates that the conﬁguration is free to change with time, i.e., the body is ﬂexible. Note that the curvilinear coordinate s is nearly equal to the body-reference (linear) coordinate x. The velocity of a ﬂuid particle normal to the body at x is wn (t, x):

9.3 Derivative Following the Fluid

63

wn =

∂zb cos α − U sin α. ∂t

(110)

The ﬁrst component is the time derivative in the body frame, and the second due to the deﬂection of the particle by the inclined body. If the body reference frame is rotated to the ﬂow, that is, if w = 0, then ∂zb /∂t will contain w. For small angles, sin α tan α = ∂zb /∂x, and we can write ∂zb ∂zb −U . ∂t ∂x

wn

The ﬂuid derivative operator in action is as follows:

wn =

dzb = dt

∂ ∂ −U zb . ∂t ∂x

9.3

Derivative Following the Fluid

A more formal derivation for the ﬂuid derivative operator is quite simple. Let µ(x, t) represent some property of a ﬂuid particle. d 1 [µ(x, t)] = lim [µ(x + δx, t + δt) − µ(x, t)] δt→0 δt dt ∂µ ∂µ = −U . ∂t ∂x The second equality can be veriﬁed using a Taylor series expansion of µ(x + δx, t + δt): ∂µ ∂µ δt + δx + h.o.t., ∂t ∂x

µ(x + δx, t + δt) = µ(x, t) +

and noting that δx = −U δt. The ﬂuid is convected downstream with respect to the body.

64

9 SLENDER-BODY THEORY

9.4

Diﬀerential Force on the Body

If the local transverse velocity is wn (x, t), then the diﬀerential inertial force on the body here is the derivative (following the ﬂuid) of the momentum: δF = − d [ma (x, t)wn (x, t)] δx. dt (111)

Note that we could here let the added mass vary with time also – this is the case of a changing cross-section! The lateral velocity of the point zb (x) in the body-reference frame is ∂zb = w − xq, ∂t such that wn = w − xq − U α. Taking the derivative, we have δF ∂ ∂ =− −U [ma (x, t)(w(t) − xq(t) − U α(x, t))] . δx ∂t ∂x We now restrict ourselves to a rigid body, so that neither ma nor α may change with time. δF ∂ = ma (x)(−w + xq) + U ˙ ˙ [ma (x)(w − xq − U α)] . δx ∂x (114) (113) (112)

9.5

Total Force on a Vessel

The net lift force on the body, computed with strip theory is
xN

Z =
xT

δF dx

(115)

where xT represents the coordinate of the tail, and xN is the coordinate of the nose. Expanding, we have

˙ ˙ x=xT ma (x) [−w + xq] dx + U ˙ ˙ xN xN We made use here of the added mass deﬁnitions xN m33 = xT ma (x)dx xN xT m35 = − xma (x)dx. for vessels with pointed noses and ﬂat tails. The two terms are clearly related. It is interesting to note that both Zw and Zα(xT ) depend on a nonzero base area. ˙ ˙ (116) In terms of the linear hydrodynamic derivatives. so that a simpler form occurs: Z = −m33 w − m35 q − U ma (xT )(w − xT q − U α(xT )). Another noteworthy fact is that the lift force depends only on α at the tail. potential ﬂow estimates do not create lift (or drag) forces for a smooth body.6 Total Moment on a Vessel A similar procedure can be applied to the moment predictions from slender body theory (again for small α): . In general. Additionally. α could take any value(s) along the body. so this should come as no surprise. with no eﬀect on Z. 9. the added mass ma at the nose is zero. however.6 Total Moment on a Vessel 65 Z = ∂ [ma (x)(w − xq − U α)] dx xT xT ∂x = −m33 w − m35 q + U ma (x)(w − xq − U α)|x=xN . the strip theory thus provides Zw ˙ Zq˙ Zw Zq Zα(xT ) = = = = = −m33 −m35 −U ma (xT ) U xT ma (xT ) U 2 ma (xT ).9. since their diﬀerence depends only on how the body coordinate system is oriented to the ﬂow.

The Munk moment (an exact result) may therefore be used to make a correction to the second term in the slender-body approximation above of Mw . the linear hydrodynamic moment derivatives are Mw ˙ Mq˙ Mw Mq Mα = = = = = −m35 −m55 U xT ma (xT ) + U m33 −U x2 ma (xT ) + U m35 T −U 2 xT ma (xT ) − U 2 m33 . . ∂x xT xT Then we make the further deﬁnition x xN m55 = xT x2 ma (x)dx. which must be calculated if α changes along the length. we now assume that α is in fact constant on the length. Mw and Mα are closely related. leading to M = −m35 w − m55 q + U xT ma (xT )(w − xT q − U α) + ˙ ˙ U m33 w + U m35 q − U 2 m33 α. The integral above contains the product ma (x)α(x).66 9 SLENDER-BODY THEORY M = − = xN xδF dx xT xN ∂ ∂ −U [ma (x)(w − xq − U α)] dx ∂t ∂x xT xN xN ∂ = xma (x)(w − xq)dx − U ˙ ˙ x [ma (x)(w − xq + U α)] dx. depending only on the orientation of the body frame to the ﬂow. For simplicity. As with the lift force. (note that m35 = m53 ) and use integration by parts to obtain M = −m35 w − m55 q − U xma (x)(w − xq − U α)|x=xN + ˙ ˙ x=xT xN U xT ma (x)(w − xq − U α)dx. Finally. The derivative Mw is closely-related to the Munk moment. whose linearization would provide Mw = (m33 − m11 )U .

v.8 Convention: Hydrodynamic Mass Matrix A Hydrodynamic derivatives that depend on accelerations are often written as components of a mass matrix A. and using the slender-body estimate for Zw . and low aspect-ratio wing theory. we obtain π L = − ρs2 U w. Inserting this approximation into the lift formula. r].7 Relation to Wing Lift 67 9. and since m33 = 0 for a front-back symmetric wing. (118) 4 Now we look at a slender body approximation of the same force: The added mass at the tail is ma (xT ) = ρs2 π/4. w. 4 Slender-body theory is thus able to recover exactly the lift of a low-aspect ratio wing.3 = −Mw . A5. p. This location will tend to stabilize the wing.7 Relation to Wing Lift There is an important connection between the slender body theory terms involving added mass at the tail (ma (xT )). where A = cs. Therefore A33 = −Zw . Where does the slender-body predict the force will act? Recalling that Mw = U m33 + U xT ma (xT ). we write (M + A)s = F . By listing the body-referenced velocities ˙ in the order s = [u. ˙ ˙ . q. and so on. (117) 2 where (AR) is the aspect ratio. the estimated lift force acts at the trailing edge.9. where M is the mass matrix of the material vessel and F is a generalized force. The lift force from the latter is of the form L = − 1 ρU ACl w. The lift coeﬃcient slope is approximated by (Hoerner) 1 Cl ≈ π(AR). we calculate for lift: Z = −ma (xT )U w π = − ρs2 U w. 9. in the sense that it acts to orient the wing parallel to the incoming ﬂow. 2 the product of chord (long) and span (short).

The normal force. The low pressure associated with the vortices provides the suction force. usually toward the stern of the vehicle. The ﬁns can often be properly modeled using experimental data parametrized with aspect ratio and several other geometric quantities. A blunt trailing edge also induces some drag. The helical vortices can become bigger while remaining stable. and we now present one of them due to Jorgensen. and ﬁns. and reference area Ar . Let the body have length L. a slender body experiences transverse force due to: helical body vortices. Some of it convects downstream. this shedding is nonsymmetric. and greatly increases drag by widening the wake. The body travels at speed U .68 10 PRACTICAL LIFT CALCULATIONS 10 10. and are convected continuously into the wake. The helical body vortices are stable and symmetric in this condition. As the angle of attack becomes larger. the approximations in the ﬁn and slender-body analysis will break down. which itself is stabilizing. and angle of attack α.2 Jorgensen’s Formulas There are some heuristic and theoretical formulas for predicting transverse force and moment on a body at various angles of attack. In the limit of a 90◦ angle of attack. the blunt trailing end. We call the area of the stern the base area. or the wetted area. and can be accurately modeled with slender body theory. the planform area. 10. The blunt trailing end induces lift as a product of added mass eﬀects. but eventually will split randomly. and there is little axial convection. This area could be the frontal projected area. axial force. and the rest peels away from the body. and are best suited to vehicles with a blunt trailing edge.1 PRACTICAL LIFT CALCULATIONS Characteristics of Lift-Producing Mechanisms At a small angle of attack. vorticity sheds as if from a bluﬀ-body. The formulas provide a good systematic procedure for design. and moment coeﬃcients are deﬁned as follows: FN 1 ρU 2 Ar 2 FA 1 ρU 2 Ar 2 CN = CA = (119) .

• xc : distance from the nose backwards to the center of the planform area. – Cd ≈ 1. equivalent to that of an inﬁnite circular cylinder.(122) L We have listed only the formulas for the special case of circular cross-section.2. this location is arbitrary. The parameters used here are • Ab : stern base area. • Cdn : crossﬂow drag coeﬃcient. If “normal” Reynolds number Ren = U sin αD/ν.002 − 0. . 1 ρU 2 Ar L 2 69 CM = The moment Mxm is taken about a point xm . • Ap : planform area.3. measured back from the nose.2 Jorgensen’s Formulas M xm . we have assumed that L >> D.006 for slender streamlined bodies.10. Further. Jorgensen gives the coeﬃcients as follows: Ab α Ap sin 2α cos + Cd sin2 α Ar 2 Ar n = CAo cos2 α − Ab (L − xm ) α Ap sin 2α cos − Cdn = − Ar L 2 Ar CN = CA CM (120) (121) xm − xc sin2 α. which is also not a constraint in the complete equations. and appears explicitly in the formula for Cm . although the complete equations do account for more complex shapes. Ren < 3 × 105 – Cd ≈ 0. Ab = 0 for a body that tapers to a point at the stern. 3 × 105 < Ren < 7 × 105 – Cd ≈ 0.6. CAo 0. It depends on Re = U L/ν. both frictional and form. 7 × 105 < Ren . • CAo : axial drag at zero angle of attack. based on wetted surface area. • : body volume.

whether or not Ab = 0. while CN is always positive. A few notations are used throughout the books. while the second uses the square frontal area. It contains a large amount of aerodynamic data from many diﬀerent types of vehicles. Hoerner. There are several terms that match exactly the slender-body theory approximations for small α. Hence. CN (123) As written. the moment coeﬃcient is negative if the moment destabilizes the body. Similarly. only drag forces act to create lift. These are the ﬁrst term in the normal force (CN ). but the eﬀect is moderated by the lift force. the moment seeks to move the AC forward on the body.3 Hoerner’s Data: Notation An excellent reference for experimental data is the two-volume set by S.70 10 PRACTICAL LIFT CALCULATIONS In the formula for normal force. The idea here is that the fore and aft components of crossﬂow drag cancel out. In both cases.e. and the entire ﬁrst term in the moment (CM ). Thus. First. Two moment coeﬃcients are: . and other common engineering shapes. such that two typical body lift 2 coeﬃcients are: Y DLq Y = 2 . we note that the second term in CM disappears if xm = xc . through a sin2 α-dependence. Finally. modiﬁed by cos2 α. the axial force is simply the zero-α result. from the nose) can be found after the coeﬃcients are computed: xAC = xm + CM L. dynamic pressure is given as q = 1 ρU 2 . D q CY = CYd The ﬁrst version uses the rectangular planform area as a reference. wings. scaling of U 2 into the body principle directions is all that is required. The aerodynamic center (again referenced toward the stern. 10. CY = CYd D/L. if the moment is referenced to the center of the planform area. we see that if Ab = 0. i. and are described here..

and the reference length is body length L. The value compares well with −0.4 Slender-Body Theory vs. and N1 is taken about the nose. the slender-body (pure added mass) estimates give Cnb −0.015/deg. the net moment is measured. Comparison of the measurements and the theory allows us to place the action point of the suction force.027/deg for a long cylinder and −0.10.018/deg for a long ellipsoid. where b is the angle of attack. and gives two further examples of how well the slender-body theory matches experiments. acting to destabilize the vehicle. and the stabilizing part due to vortex shedding or a blunt tail. 2 The lift and moment coeﬃcients are strongly dependent on angle of attack. This section gives the formula for this location in Hoerner’s notation. ˜ For L/D > 6. 10. The following relation holds for these deﬁnitions 1 CN1 = CN + CYd . Note that the reference area for moment is the square frontal projection. It follows from above that Cn·b = Cnb + Cydb /2. Experiment 71 CN = CN1 N LD2 q N1 = . LD2 q where N is the moment taken about the body mid-point. Hoerner uses the notation ∂CN ∂b ∂CN1 = ∂b ∂Cy .4 Slender-Body Theory vs. usually in degrees. Experiment In an experiment. = ∂b Cnb = Cn·b Cyb and so on. comprising both the destabilizing part due to the potential ﬂow. it also .

60 In comparing the two body shapes.009 for L/D = 4. Figure 2) for a symmetric and a blunt-ended body. The blunt-tailed geometry has a much larger lift force. using slenderbody theory.72 10 PRACTICAL LIFT CALCULATIONS reduces to −0.021 0.025 0. Consider a body. we see that the moment at the nose is much more stable (positive) for the body with a blunt trailing edge. Note that the negative sign here is consistent with Hoerner’s convention that destabilizing moments have negative sign. however. but it acts too close to the midpoint to add any stability there.012 0. which achieves an equivalent lift of π(AR)/2 = 0.003/deg. It can be compared with a low-aspect ratio wing. The experimental lift force is typically given by CY b 0. At the body midpoint. With respect to the area πr2 .0037 0. The lift force dependence on the blunt tail is not diﬃcult to see.7 -0.63 blunt 6.012 0. The slender-body lift force associated with this end is simply the product of speed U and local added mass ma (xT ) (in our previous notation). Because this coeﬃcient scales roughly with wetted area. The point at which the viscous forces act can then be estimated as the following distance aft of the nose: ˜ Cn·b − Cnb x = (124) L Cydb The calculation uses experimental values of Cydb and Cn·b .0031 (stable) -0.0012 (stable) -0.0031 0.7 -0. In the table following are values from Hoerner (p. and the second is a lift coeﬃcient. the lift curve slope is therefore . with trailing edge radius r. both vehicles are equally unstable. (125) 2 such that the ﬁrst term in parentheses is an eﬀective area. proportional to LD.0093 (unstable) 0.0094 (unstable) 0. It comes out to be 1 Z = ρU 2 (πr2 )(2α).0027 for (AR) = 10 D/L. stabilizing the angle. it changes little with L/D. the moment slope referenced to the nose. L/D ˜ Cnb Cyb Cydb Cn·b Cnb x/L symmetric 6. 13-2. this acts at a point on the latter half of the vehicle.

The slender-body approximation of lift as a result of blunt-end conditions is Z = πs2 ρU 2 α. This lift diﬀerence. and worsening further as (AR) grows. 10.5 Slender-Body Approximation for Fin Lift Let us now consider two ﬁns of span s each. Expressed in terms of the Hoerner reference area D2 . due solely to the blunt end condition.0044/deg. where Af is the total area of the ﬁn pair. the equivalent lift coeﬃcient is Cydb = 0. where we made the assumption here that 2r/D = 0. substitution will give a lift curve slope of Cl = π (AR).5 Slender-Body Approximation for Fin Lift 73 2/rad. . It is inadequate for higher-aspect ratio wings however. overestimating the lift by about 30% when (AR) = 2. is consistent with measurements. and is quite accurate for (AR) 1.4 for the data in the table. acting at the tail end of the vehicle.10. (126) Letting the aspect ratio be (AR) = (2s)2 /Af . 2 This is known as Jones’ formula. This is the case if the vehicle body tapers to a point where the ﬁns have their trailing edge.

Another description for the wing-tip vortices is that the pressure diﬀerence across the surface simply causes ﬂow around the end. This fact is true for a non-stalled surface at any angle of attack.74 11 FINS AND LIFTING SURFACES 11 FINS AND LIFTING SURFACES Vessels traveling at signiﬁcant speed typically use rudders. 11. sharp trailing edge. Lift is always deﬁned to act in a direction perpendicular to the ﬂow. leading to so-called wing-tip vortices. The reduced Bernoulli pressure this induces can then be thought of as the lift-producing mechanism. and drag in the same direction as the ﬂow. Their utility arises mainly from the high lift forces they can develop. Circulation is the integral of velocity around the crosssection.1 Origin of Lift A lifting surface is nominally an extrusion of a streamlined cross-section: the cross-section has a rounded leading edge. it is clear that the ﬂuid must travel faster over one side of the surface than the other. Prandtl’s inviscid theory provides some insight. and some induced drag. Since the separation point on the front of the section rotates with the angle of attack. and other streamlined control surfaces to maneuver. (127) and then L = −ρU Γ. but instead rejoin with streamlines from the other side of the wing at the trailing edge. Since bound circulation cannot end abruptly at the wing end. and a smooth surface. The theory of lifting surfaces centers on the Kutta condition. it continues on in the ﬂuid. the ﬂow near the ends may be three-dimensional. which requires that ﬂuid particle streamlines do not wrap around the trailing edge of the surface. More formally. . lift arises from circulation Γ: Γ= V · ds. 11.2 Three-Dimensional Eﬀects: Finite Length Since all practical lifting surfaces have ﬁnite length. This continuation causes induced velocities at the tips. and a lifting surface requires circulation in order to meet the Kutta condition. with little drag penalty. elevators.

and structurally more robust than cantilevered plane surfaces. which depends mainly on the aspect ratio. 11. measured back from the front of the wing. xA c/4. α 0. The aspect ratio is a strong determinant of wing performance: for a given angle of attack. since they are omnidirectional. The lift generated on a surface is the result of a distributed pressure ﬁeld. If the wing is attached to a wall. the eﬀective span is twice the physical value.3 Ring Fins 75 A critical parameter which governs the extent of three-dimensional eﬀects is the aspect ratio: span span2 = .11. πc (131) .90. Lift is written as AR = 1 L = ρU 2 ACl . (130) where α is in radians.3 Ring Fins Ring ﬁns are useful when space allows. this fact creates both a net force and a net moment. For low AR. (128) chord area The second representation is useful for non-rectangular control surfaces. the theoretical and maximum value for Cl is 2π. (129) 2 where A is the single-side area of the surface. A single equivalent force acts at a so-called center of action xA . For high AR. the lift coeﬃcient Cl is nearly linear with α: Cl = Cl α. When ¯ AR → ∞. xA c/2. by reﬂection. and has one empirical description Cl = 1 1 2π α ¯ + 1 π(AR) + 1 2π(AR)2 . and AR is the eﬀective aspect ratio. For angles of attack α below stall. The eﬀective span is taken to be the length between the free ends of a symmetric wing. a larger aspect ratio achieves a higher lift value. and in this case the eﬀective aspect ratio is therefore twice the physical value. where Cl is called the lift coeﬃcient slope. but also stalls earlier. The eﬀective aspect ratio for a ring of diameter d is given as AR = 4d .

63 + π(AR) (132) (133) . 2 1 and we thus have L = 2 ρU 2 Ae Cl α.76 11 FINS AND LIFTING SURFACES The eﬀective area of the ring is taken as π dc. where one formula for Cl is Ae = Cl = 1 . 1 0.

The following relations deﬁne the gearbox: . reducers. In the second section. indicating that the propeller turns much more slowly than the driving engine or motor. when the hull is towed with no propeller we use a t subscript. force balance in self-propulsion requires that Rsp = Tsp .77 12 12.2. we list several low-order models of thrusters. the ﬂow around the hull interacts with the ﬂow through the propeller. 12. Conversely.. When subscripts are not used. there are no additional forces or moments on the vessel. In many marine vessels and vehicles. and the eﬀects of each part are important in the response of the net system. we do not distinguish between the magnitude of forces in model and full-scale vessels.1 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION Introduction We discuss in this section the nature of steady and unsteady propulsion. generalization to either condition is implied. not behind a hull. which have recently been used to model and simulate truly unsteady conditions. In this case.2 Steady Propulsion of Vessels The notation we will use is as given in Table 1. An approximation of the transient behavior of a system can be made using the quasi-static assumption. steady propulsion conditions are generally optimized for fuel eﬃciency. we use an o subscript. an engine (diesel or gas turbine. 12. We use an sp subscript to indicate speciﬁcally self-propulsion conditions. when the propeller is run in open water. say) or an electric motor drives the propeller through a linkage of shafts. i. and bearings. Finally. Furthermore. because of similitude (using diameter D in place of L when the propeller is involved).1 Basic Characteristics In the steady state. Large. (134) The gear ratio λ is usually large.e. and there are two diﬀerent ﬂow conditions to consider. Self-propelled conditions refer to the propeller being installed and its propelling the vessel. commercial surface vessels spend the vast majority of their time operating in open-water and at constant speed. such as would be caused by a towing bar or hawser.

(135) and power follows as Pp = ηg Pe . for any ﬂow condition. A propeller operating in open water can be characterized by two nondimensional parameters which are both functions of J: To (thrust coeﬃcient) ρn2 D4 p Qp KQ = 2 o 5 (torque coeﬃcient). ρnp D KT = (136) (137) . note that in the wake of the vessel.78 Rsp Rt T ne nm np λ Qe Qp ηg Pe Pp D U Up Qm f fm N N N Hz Hz Hz 12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION hull resistance under self-propulsion towed hull resistance (no propeller attached) thrust of the propeller rotational speed of the engine maximum value of ne rotational speed of the propeller gear ratio Nm engine torque Nm propeller torque gearbox eﬃciency W engine power W propeller shaft power m propeller diameter m/s vessel speed m/s water speed seen at the propeller Nm maximum engine torque kg/s fuel rate (or energy rate in electric motor) kg/s maximum value of f Table 1: Nomenclature ne = λnp Qp = ηg λQe . We call J = Up /np D the advance ratio of the prop when it is exposed to a water speed Up . Up may not be the same as the speed of the vessel U .

for example.8 K η T 0 η0 0.4 0. and therefore ﬁt the approximate form: KT (J) = β1 − β2 J KQ (J) = γ1 − γ2 J.02 0. A typical wake fraction of 0.6 J 0.4 0.0 0.00 0.06 K Q 0. w is referred to as the wake fraction.2 0.08 0.12. 2πnp Qpo 2πKQ (138) This eﬃciency divides the useful thrust power by the shaft power. Thrust and torque coeﬃcients are typically nearly linear over a range of J.0 0. Behind .10 0.2 Steady Propulsion of Vessels 79 1.04 0.1. the wake fraction comes about this way: Suppose the open water thrust of a propeller is known at a given U and np . The propeller is operating in a wake. The open propeller eﬃciency can be written then as ηo = To U J(U )KT = .0 K Q Figure 4: Typical thrust and torque coeﬃcients. We next introduce three factors useful for scaling and parameterizing our mathematical models: • Up = U (1 − w).6 0. γ1 . β2 . the four coeﬃcients [β1 . as shown in the ﬁgure. γ2 ] are usually positive. In practical terms. (139) As written.2 KT 0. indicates that the incoming velocity seen by the propeller is only 90% of the vessel’s speed.0 0.8 1.

which may be greater than one. and we see that a . A common measure of eﬃciency. Often. and thus that ηo is the open propeller eﬃciency at this speed. t is a small positive number. and can be estimated from published values. if only the towed resistance of a hull is known. and rotation rate np . is based on the towed resistance. The quasi-propulsive eﬃciency can be greater than one. In this case. (1 − w) ηQP = (140) To and Qpo are values for the inﬂow speed Up . the quasi-propulsive eﬃciency. since it relies on the towed resistance and in general Rt > Rsp . rotative eﬃciency equalizes torque instead of thrust. w scales U at the prop and thus J. The thrust deduction is particularly useful. The rotative eﬃciency ηR . • Rt = Rsp (1 − t). with 0. as well as the turbulence induced by the hull. and the self-propelled torque. with no propeller. The wake fraction can also be estimated by making direct velocity measurements behind the hull. thrust T . a propeller will increase the resistance of the vessel by creating low-pressure on its intake side (near the hull). w is then chosen so that the open water thrust coeﬃcient matches what is observed. • Qpo = ηR Qpsp . It follows that To (Up ) = Tsp . ηR is meant to account for spatial variations in the wake of the vessel which are not captured by the wake fraction. which was used to complete the above equation. the prop creates some extra thrust. Note that in comparison with the wake fraction. and with the propeller spinning at the same np . for the same incident velocity Up . t is called the thrust deduction even though it is used to model resistance of the hull. it is obviously speciﬁc to both the hull and the propeller(s).80 12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION a vessel moving at speed U .2 as a typical value. which makes Rsp > Rt . and how they interact. The ratio (1 − t)/(1 − w) is often called the hull eﬃciency. Rt U 2πnp Qpsp To (1 − t)Up ηR = 2πnp (1 − w)Qpo (1 − t) = ηo ηR . translates self-propelled torque to open water torque.

and on the hull. but which are in competition. 12. Suppose that the towed resistance is of the form 1 Rt = ρCr Aw U 2 . (141) 2 where Cr is the resistance coeﬃcient (which will generally depend on Re and F r).2. The vessel speed can be computed by recalling that J(U ) = U/np D and Up = U (1 − w). which necessitates a model of the drive engine or motor. but it is clear that we need now to ﬁnd np . Equating the self-propelled thrust and resistance then gives Tsp = Rsp To = Rt /(1 − t) 1 ρCr Aw U 2 KT (J(Up ))ρn2 D4 (1 − t) = p 2 2 Up 1 (β1 − β2 J(Up ))ρn2 D4 (1 − t) = ρCr Aw p 2 (1 − w)2 Cr Aw β1 − β2 J(Up ) = J(Up )2 2 (1 − t)(1 − w)2 2D δ J(Up ) = −β2 + 2 β2 + 4β1 δ . This requires a torque equation. depending only on the propeller open characteristics.12.3 Engine/Motor Models The torque-speed maps of many engines and motors ﬁt the form . A high rotative eﬃciency and open water propeller eﬃciency (at Up ) obviously contribute to an eﬃcient overall system.2 Steady Propulsion of Vessels 81 small thrust deduction t and a large wake fraction w are beneﬁcial eﬀects. 12. 2δ (142) The last equation predicts the steady-state advance ratio of the vessel. and Aw is the wetted area.2.2 Solution for Steady Conditions The linear form of KT and KQ (Equation 140) allows a closed-form solution for the steady-operating conditions.

For example. More speciﬁcally. f2 . gas turbines roughly ﬁt the curves shown in the ﬁgure (Rubis). ne /nm ) = ρD5 (γ1 ηR ηg λQm np + α2 −α1 2 − γ2 J(Up ))(nm /λ) (nm /λ) 2 α2 1 − α1 + np = (nm /λ) + 4 α2 2 . f3 . nm /λ F (f /ff m.82 12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION Q e /Q m f3 f2 f1 n e /n m Figure 5: Typical gas turbine engine torque-speed characteristic for increasing fuel rates f1 . ne /nm ) = − a (144) then a closed-form solution for ne (and thus np ) can be found. if F () has the form f ne f +b + c +d fm nm fm np = −α1 + α2 . The manipulations begin by equating the engine and propeller torque: Qpo (J(Up )) 2 5 ρnp D KQ (J(Up )) ρn2 D5 (γ1 − γ2 J(Up )) p n2 p (nm /λ)2 = ηR Qps p (J(Up )) = ηR ηg λQe = ηR ηg λQm F (f /fm . (143) where F () is the characteristic function. (145) . Qe = Qm F (f /fm . ne /nm ).

although there have been some very successful models in recent years.1 One-State Model: Yoerger et al. The dynamic response of the coupled propulsion and ship systems. Kω . It is a ﬁrst-order. since the positioning problem has been central to bluﬀ vehicles with multiple electric thrusters. the transient behavior of the propulsion system needs to be considered.3. 12. This model requires the identiﬁcation of three parameters: Ip . under the assumption of quasi-static propeller conditions.the propeller spins at ωp radians per second.3 Unsteady Propulsion Models 83 Note that the fuel rate enters through both α1 and α2 . . We use the subscript m to denote a quantity in the motor. The thrust is then given as a static map directly from the rotation speed. The problem of unsteady propulsion is still in development.12. is given by (m + ma )u = Tsp − Rsp ˙ 2πIp np = ηg λQe − Qps p .3 Unsteady Propulsion Models When accurate positioning of the vehicle is critical. nonlinear. The diﬀerential equation in ωp pits the torque delivered by the motor against a quadratic-drag type loss which depends on rotation speed. It should be pointed out that the models described below all pertain to open-water conditions and electric motors. (147) (148) where Ip is the total (material plus ﬂuid) inertia reﬂected to the prop. the quasi-static assumption used above does not suﬃce. 12. and p for the propeller. and Ct . this is left as a problem for the reader. whose bandwidth depends directly on Qm . low-pass ﬁlter from Qm to T . The torque equation at the propeller and the thrust relation are Ip ωp = λQm − Kω ωp |ωp | ˙ T = Ct ωp |ωp |. ˙ (146) Making the necessary substitutions creates a nonlinear model with f as the input. Instead.

As with the one-state model of Yoerger et al. as well as an eﬀective angle of attack and the propeller pitch. similarly to the above. which is in fact observed in experiments. and therefore introduce no new dynamics. The thrust and torque of the propeller are approximated using wing theory. Kω represents losses in the motor due to spinning (friction and resistive).84 12. ρALγ is the added mass that is accelerated by the blades. (150) Here A is the disc area of the tunnel. The parameter ∆β is called the diﬀerential momentum ﬂux coeﬃcient across the propeller. The two-state model includes the velocity of a mass of water moving in the vicinity of the blades. This model has the advantage that it creates a thrust overshoot for a step input. The torque equation. Together.2 for propellers with tunnels. this mass is always nonzero.. . and γ is the eﬀective added mass ratio.3. and Kv is the gain on the input voltage (so that the current ampliﬁer is included in Kv ). these formulae are static maps.2 12 PROPELLERS AND PROPULSION Two-State Model: Healey et al. which is very common in thrusters for positioning. ˙ (149) Here. It can accommodate a tunnel around the propeller. which invokes lift and drag coeﬃcients. even if there is no tunnel. However. L denotes the length of the tunnel.0 for open propellers. The second dynamic equation is for the ﬂuid velocity at the propeller: ˙ ρALγ Up = −ρA∆β(Up − U )|Up − U | + T. or the propeller disk diameter if no tunnel exists. and up to 2. this version requires the identiﬁcation of the various coeﬃcients from experiments. it may be on the order of 0. is referenced to the motor and given as Im ωm = −Kω ωm + Kv V − Qp /λ.

we assume for the moment that that it is inextensible. 13. For example. if they are to be supported by a cable. On the other hand.. even a heavy steel cable with 2cm diameter.. The towed array is a relatively high-velocity system that nominally streams out horizontally behind the vessel. as in a towed array. however.85 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES Vehicles which are towed have some similarities to the vehicles that have been discussed so far. linearization. Some basic guidelines for vehicle design are given at the end of this section.1 Statics Force Balance For the purposes of deriving the static conﬁguration of a cable in a ﬂow. Some towed vehicles might have active lifting surfaces or thrusters for attitude control. wing theory. which can generally be handled with the same tools as other vehicles. Most of the analysis can be adapted to either case. and must have large propulsors to control the tether if there are currents. the rationale is that gravity will tend to keep the cable vertical and make the deployment robust against currents and towing speed. We will not discuss light systems speciﬁcally here. The cables are generally circular in cross section. towed vehicles are often streamlined. or a vehicle capable of maneuvering itself. and usually need good directional stability. and one main division may be made simply of the density of the cable. The heavy systems will generally transmit surface motions and tensions to the towed vehicle much more easily than light-tether systems. The extreme L/D ratio for these cables obviates any bending stiﬀness eﬀects.e. with either a minimal vehicle at the end. operates at low speed. in contrast.1. employ a heavy cable and possibly a heavy weight. we concentrate on cable mechanics more than vehicle characteristics. on the other hand. slender-body theory. Heavy systems. An ROV. such as a remotely-operated vehicle. and may carry power conductors and multiple communication channels (ﬁber optic). i. Modern cables can easily exceed 5000m in length. Tension and hydrostatic . Cable systems come in a variety of conﬁgurations. towed vehicles may be quite heavy in water. and in this section. Light-tether systems are characterized by neutrally-buoyant (or nearly so) cables. but rather look at heavy systems. The cable itself is an important factor in the behavior of the complete towed system. etc. and do not have to be self-propelled.1 13.

= amp. but the eﬀect is usually a small percentage of the total length. • Rn (s): external normal force. is to be projected onto the relevant axes. and the normal drag scales with a crossﬂow drag coeﬃcient Cn . per unit length. In both cases. • Rt (s): external tangential force. We employ the curvilinear axial coordinate s. • T (s): local tension. leading to . which we take to be zero at the bottom end of the cable. Force balance in the tangential and normal coordinates gives two coupled equations for T and φ: dT amp. = amp. the tangential drag is controlled by a frictional drag coeﬃcient Ct . ds (151) (152) The external forces are primarily ﬂuid drag. Wn cos φ + Rn . U horizontal toward the left. • φ(s): local inclination angle.86 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES y x s+ ds ds Rt φ T+dT U ds Rn ds Wn T pressure will elongate a cable. per unit length. The free-body diagram shown has the following components: • Wn : net in-water weight of the cable per unit length. Wn sin φ − Rt ds dφ T amp. upwards along the cable is the positive direction. the ﬂuid velocity vector.

the total weight of cable will generally exceed that the vehicle. Let the relative importance of weight be given as Wn . sin φ. with T (0) equal to the in-water weight of the vehicle. but turns as necessary at the vehicle end. cos φ ds dy amp. say U is a function of y.13. normal weight and drag components are equalized. With regard to Cartesian coordinates x. x. 2 (153) (154) Note that we simpliﬁed the drag laws from a usual form v|v| to v 2 . y) deﬁnes the cable conﬁguration. a very heavy but low-drag vehicle will impose φ(0) π/2. the cable conﬁguration follows dx amp. to meet the bottom boundary condition.1 Statics 87 1 Rt = − ρCt dU 2 cos2 φ 2 1 Rn = − ρCn dU 2 sin2 φ. Two boundary conditions are needed. In the straight part of the cable. and can be approximated easily. and the cable tension. For example. and current dependency may be included. dominated by drag. y.2 Critical Angle For very deep systems. ds (155) (156) The simultaneous integration of all four equations (T. This gives rise to a conﬁguration in which the cable is straight for a majority of its length. = amp. = amp. provides both T (0) and φ(0). since as drawn. and the common case is that a force balance on the vehicle. 13. ρCn dU 2 δ= . φ.1. The uniform angle is called the critical angle φc . weight. 0 ≤ φ ≤ π/2. The equations for T and φ can be integrated along the cable coordinate s to ﬁnd the cable’s static conﬁguration.

and usually need good directional stability. We will not discuss light systems speciﬁcally here. employ a heavy cable and possibly a heavy weight. φc amp. (157) In the case of a √ very heavy cable. Heavy systems. and the linear approximation of the square root 1 + ≈ 1 + /2 gives 1 −→ 2δ π 1 amp.1 13. but rather look at heavy systems. or a vehicle capable of maneuvering itself. Cable systems come in a variety of conﬁgurations. − . which can generally be handled with the same tools as other vehicles. wing theory. we concentrate on cable mechanics more than vehicle characteristics. and one main division may be made simply of the density of the cable. Most of the analysis can be adapted to either case. i. as in a towed array. The cable itself is an important factor in the behavior of the complete towed system. (158) For a very light cable. we solve a quadratic equation and keep only the positive solution: cos φc = √ δ 2 + 1 − 1. Some towed vehicles might have active lifting surfaces or thrusters for attitude control.1 Statics Force Balance For the purposes of deriving the static conﬁguration of a cable in a ﬂow. operates at low speed. The heavy systems will generally transmit surface motions and tensions to the towed vehicle much more easily than light-tether systems. in contrast. δ is small.. even a heavy steel cable with 2cm diameter. Some basic guidelines for vehicle design are given at the end of this section. and may carry power conductors and multiple communication channels (ﬁber optic).e.1. 2 δ cos φc − We are considering the case of 0 < φc < π/2. Substituting sin2 φc = 1−cos2 φc . towed vehicles may be quite heavy in water. and do not have to be self-propelled. however. linearization. δ is large. on the other hand. 13. On the other hand. amp. The towed array is a relatively high-velocity system that nominally streams out horizontally behind the vessel. 2 2δ cos φc amp..88 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES 85 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES Vehicles which are towed have some similarities to the vehicles that have been discussed so far. towed vehicles are often streamlined. slender-body theory. For example. The cables are generally circular in cross section. etc. such as a remotely-operated vehicle. The extreme L/D ratio for these cables obviates any bending stiﬀness eﬀects. Modern cables can easily exceed 5000m in length. the rationale is that gravity will tend to keep the cable vertical and make the deployment robust against currents and towing speed. and must have large propulsors to control the tether if there are currents. An ROV. Light-tether systems are characterized by neutrally-buoyant (or nearly so) cables. the same approximation gives . and in this section. we assume for the moment that that it is inextensible. if they are to be supported by a cable. Tension and hydrostatic so that the condition dφ/ds = 0 requires from the force balance 1 2 sin φc = 0. with either a minimal vehicle at the end.

0.13. and the lateral deﬂection q(s.14 amp.0 amp. exact amp.45 0. 0.07 amp. 1. 0.00 1.57 amp.91 amp. = amp. amp.44 amp.2 13.2 Linearized Dynamics 89 cos φc 1 − δ −→ φc √ 2δ.41 2. 0. and the approximations. Now augment the two static conﬁguration equations with inertial components: ¯ ∂T ˜ ∂T 1 ∂p ∂2p ¯ ˜ + − Wn sin(φ + φ) − ρCt d U cos φ + m 2 amp.33 amp. The table below gives some results of the exact solution. t). 1.61 amp. 1.32 amp. δ amp.63 0. t). . δ << 1 0.0 amp. amp. 1.1 Linearized Dynamics Derivation The most direct procedure for deriving useful linear dynamic equations for a planar cable problem is to consider the total tension and angle as made up of static parts summed with dynamic parts: ¯ ˜ T (s.47 amp. t). t) ¯ ˜ φ(s. 0. ∂t ∂s ∂s 2 ∂t ¯ ˜ ∂2q ¯ ˜ ¯ ˜ ∂ φ + ∂ φ − Wn cos(φ + φ) + (m + ma ) 2 amp. 0.2 amp. 1. 1. t) = T (s) + T (s. It follows that φ = ∂q/∂s. 1 ∂q amp. We also write the axial deﬂection with respect to the static conﬁguration as ˜ p(s. δ >> 1 amp. t) = φ(s) + φ(s.47 amp. 5. 1. ρCn d U sin φ − 2 ∂t 2 2 . - 13.1 amp. 1.0 amp.2. (T + T ) ∂t ∂s ∂s amp.5 amp. = amp.

say U = 0. and keeping only linear terms we obtain ∂2p ∂2p ¯ ∂q ¯ ∂p amp. (m + ma ) 2 + bn ∂t ∂t ∂s ∂s m ¯ ¯ where we made the substitution bt = ρCt dU cos φ and bn = ρCn dU sin φ. An additional weight term Wn sin φ∂q/∂s also appears. The lateral dynamics (q) couples with the axial through the ¯ ˜ ¯ term T ∂ φ/∂s. such that disturbances only travel a few tens or hundreds of meters before they dissipate. = amp. EA 2 − Wn cos φ − ρCt dU cos φ 2 ∂t ∂s ∂s ∂t 2 2 ¯ ∂ q ∂p ∂ φ ¯ ∂q ¯ ∂q ¯∂ q + Wn sin φ − ρCn dU sin φ . To a linear approximation. and substitute the constitutive (Hooke’s) law ˜ ∂T ∂2p = EA 2 . we have implicitly assumed that U cos φ > |∂p/∂t| and U sin φ > |∂q/∂t|. let φ φ for the calculation of drag. If it is not the case. the out-of-plane vibrations of a cable are also governed by the second equation above. EA 2 ∂t2 ∂t ∂s 2 2 ∂ q ∂q ¯ ∂q ¯∂ q amp. Note that avoiding the drag law form v|v| again.90 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES Here the material mass of the cable per unit length is m. = amp. = amp. The uncoupled dynamics are both in the form of damped wave equations ∂2p ∂p ∂2p + bt amp. T 2 + Wn sin φ . = amp. T 2 + EA ∂t ∂s ∂s ∂s ∂s ∂t m The axial dynamics (p) couples with the lateral equation through the weight ¯˜ term −Wn cos φφ. the lateral cable motions are heavily damped. then equivalent linearization can be used for the quadratic drag. ∂s ∂s The static solution cancels out of both governing equations. The nature of the lateral response. and can develop longitudinal resonant conditions (next section). In contrast. heavy cables easily transmit motions and tensions along their length. Because of light damping in the tangential direction. (m + ma ) 2 amp. and its transverse added mass is ma . in and out . ¯ Now we perform the trigonometry substitutions in the weight terms.

Consider a long cable governed by the damped wave equation m¨ + bt p = EAp p ˙ (159) We use over-dots to indicate time derivatives. ¨ (161) ∂s These top and bottom behaviors comprise the boundary conditions for the wave equation. we impose the motion p(L. so that ˜ EA . NO amp. lateral amp. SLOW amp. while low-frequency motions occur sluggishly. at the lower end. We let p(s. axial wave speed amp. The axial direction is of particular interest. t). t) = P cos ωt.13. since it is lightly damped and forced by the heaving of vessels in seas. nπ L EA m amp.2. YES cable? amp.01) disturbances amp.2 Linearized Dynamics 91 of the towing plane. amp. ¯ T (s) m+ma amp. FAST natural frequency amp. and primes to indicate spatial derivatives. t) = M p(0. O nπ L ¯ T (L/2) m+ma mode shape amp. t) = p(s) cos ωt. is an undamped mass responding to the local tension variations: ∂p(0. amp. High-frequency vessel motions in the horizontal plane are completely missed by the vehicle. Ct O(0. is a very slow. sine/cosine damping amp. and only after a signiﬁcant delay time. travel down amp. Cn O(1) amp. Mode Shape. 13. At the surface. (160) while the towed vehicle. Bessel function amp.2 Damped Axial Motion amp. damped nonlinear ﬁlter. EA m amp.

c1 + δc2 . δ cos kL − sin kL There are two dangerous situations: (165) ¯ ˜ • The maximum tension is T + |T | and must be less than the working load of the cable. It is possible to compute the dynamic tension via T = EA˜ . for which δ cos kL = sin kL. (163) EA Note that k is complex when bt = 0. = amp. where the static tension is highest. the scalar δ → ∞. In general. where T is low. This is known as snap loading. (164) δ cos kL − sin kL In the case that M → 0. This is normally problematic at the top of the cable.92 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES p + ˜ mω 2 − iωbt p = 0. ˜ ¯ • If |T | > T . and investigating the singularity of p. ˜ . where δ = EAk/ω 2 M . ˜ EA (162) This admits the solution p(s) = c1 cos ks + c2 sin ks. = amp. Natural Frequency. The natural frequency can be found by letting bt = 0. c1 cos kL + c2 sin kL 0 amp. the cable will unload completely and then reload with extremely high impulsive forces. The top and bottom boundary conditions give. it occurs ¯ primarily at the vehicle. where ˜ mω 2 − iωbt . We obtain p δ sin ks + cos ks ˜ T = −EAP k . p=P ˜ ˜ Dynamic Tension. simplifying the result to p = ˜ P cos ks/ cos kL. respectively. k= P amp. These can be combined to give the solution δ cos ks − sin ks .

and the mass that is oscillating is M +mL/2. and an S-shaped length of cable at the bottom formed with ﬂotation balls. ρc ω A few examples are given below for a steel cable with E = 200 × 109 P a. then ω= EA/L ..2 Linearized Dynamics 93 kL << 1. if ρc = m/A is the density of the cable. 6 = (kL)2 1 − If we match up to second order in kL. The natural frequencies near wave excitation at the surface vessel must be taken into account in any design or deployment. 6 Employing the deﬁnition for δ. heave compensation through an active crane. the eﬀects of mL/2 dominate.g. . Even if a cable can withstand the eﬀects of resonance. We start with better approximations for sin() and cos(): (kL)2 δ 1− 2 (kL)2 = kL 1 − .13. but we ﬁnd that a ﬁrst-order approximation yields ω = EA/LM . Some solutions in use today are: stable vessels (e. we have the approximation 1 L 2E . which is only a correct answer if M >> mL. M + mL/2 This has the familiar form of the square root of a stiﬀness divided by a mass: the stiﬀness of the cable is EA/L.e. we arrive at mL (kL)2 1− M 2 (kL)2 . i. a clump weight below which a light cable is employed. Some higher order terms need to be kept. it may be undesirable to expose the vehicle to these motions. and ρc = 7000kg/m3 . In very deep water. and recalling that ω 2 = k 2 EA/m.. the system is dominated by the vehicle mass. SWATH).

for towing stability reasons. Here are basic guidelines to be considered: 1. ωn = 15. so that larger lengths of cable are needed to reach a given depth.0rad/s amp. The towpoint should be forward of the aerodynamic center. and nearer . The static tension will increase accordingly as well. Strumming of cables is caused by the proximity of a preferred vortex formation frequency ωS to the natural frequency of the structure ωn . The combined center of mass (material and added mass) should be longitudinally between the towpoint and the aerodynamic center. 7. for basic roll and pitch stability. 1. including obvious fatigue when the amplitudes and frequencies are high. The preferred frequency of vortex formation is given by the empirical relation ωS = 2πSU/d.94 L = 500m 1000m 2000m 5000m 13 TOWING OF VEHICLES amp. The most noteworthy issue with towing is that the vibrations may cause the normal drag coeﬃcient Cn to increase dramatically – from about 1.20 for a large range of Re. The towpoint must be located above the vehicle center of in-water weight. Strumming of amplitude d/2 or greater can occur for 0.16-0. with the main exceptions that the towpoint presents a large mean force as well as some disturbances. and the towed system lags further and further behind the surface vessel. This latter frequency can be obtained as a zero of the lightly-damped Bessel function solution of the lateral dynamics equation above.5rad/s 13.6rad/s amp.6 < ωS /ωn < 2. where S is the Strouhal number.4 Vehicle Design The physical layout of a towed vehicle is amenable to the analysis tools of self-propelled vehicles.5.7rad/s amp. and that the vehicle can be quite heavy in water. about 0. 3. 3. The book by Blevins is a good general reference. 2.3 Cable Strumming Cable strumming causes a host of problems. This drag penalty decreases the critical angle of towing. 13.0.2 for a non-oscillating cable to as high as 3.

full-scale experiments are commonly used in the design process. and the performance of the device is very sensitive to small perturbations in the geometry. For this reason. Meeting all of these criteria simultaneously is no small feat.13. away from the surface. The center of buoyancy should be behind the in-water center of weight. . 5. The towpoint should be longitudinally forward of the center of in-air weight. 4. This will ensure that high-frequency disturbances do not induce excessive pitching.4 Vehicle Design 95 the towpoint. so that the vehicle enters the water ﬁns ﬁrst. so that the vehicle pitches downward at small U . and hence the net lift force is downward. and self-stabilizes with U > 0.

if this is not the case. 14. Viewed in the complex plane. Partial fractions are presented here. then we have to divide the numerator by the denominator as necessary to ﬁnd a simple form. it is clear that the magnitude of Y (s) will go to zero at the zeros. s + p1 s + p2 s + pn (167) in the special case that all of the poles are unique and real.2 Partial Fractions: Unique Poles Under the condition m < n. The constants −zi are called the zeros of the transfer function or signal. since L(δ(t)) = 1. and −pi are the poles. later we will see that dynamic systems are described in the same format: in that case we call the impulse response G(s) a transfer function. and once all these are found it is a simple matter to go back to the transform table and look up the time-domain responses. We must have m < n. . 14. in the context of control systems. (s + p1 )(s + p2 ) · · · (s + pn ) (166) Although for the moment we are discussing the signal Y (s). The coeﬃcient ai is termed the residual associated with the i’th pole. A system transfer function is identical to its impulse response. as the fundamental link between pole locations and stability. it is a fact that Y (s) is equivalent to Y (s) = a2 an a1 + + ··· . and to inﬁnity at the poles.1 Partial Fractions Solving linear time-invariant systems by the Laplace Transform method will generally create a signal containing the (factored) form Y (s) = K(s + z1 )(s + z2 ) · · · (s + zm ) .96 14 TRANSFER FUNCTIONS & STABILITY 14 TRANSFER FUNCTIONS & STABILITY The reader is referred to Laplace Transforms in the section MATH FACTS for preliminary material on the Laplace transform. Partial fraction expansions alter the form of Y (s) so that the simple transform pairs can be used to ﬁnd the time-domain output signals.

14. For cases where a second derivative must be taken. giving (s + 4)(s − 1) s+4 s−1 2 5 a1 = a2 = (s+6)(s+4) (s+4)(s−1) s=−4 (s+6)(s−1) (s+4)(s−1) s=1 = − = 7 5 Thus 2 7 L−1 (G(s)/se−2s ) = − e−4t + et −→ 5 5 8 7 g(t) = δ(t − 2) + e−4(t−2) + et−2 . We have s+6 a1 a2 = + . 14. 5 5 The impulse response is needed to account for the step change at t = 2. exempliﬁed by Ogata. The case of repeated real roots may be handled elegantly. Note that in this example. (s + 4)(s − 1) Since we have a pure delay and m = n. special care should be used when accounting for the signal slope discontinuity at t = 0.3 Example: Partial Fractions with Unique Real Poles G(s) = s(s + 6) e−2s . m ≥ n + 1. . The more traditional method. we were able to apply the derivative operator s after expanding the partial fractions. the only one left.3 Example: Partial Fractions with Unique Real Poles 97 How to ﬁnd ai ? A simple rule applies: multiply the right-hand sides of the two equations above by (s + pi ). but this condition rarely occurs in applications. evaluate them at s = −pi . i.e. and solve for ai . may prove easier to work through. we can initially work with G(s)/se−2s ..

98

14 TRANSFER FUNCTIONS & STABILITY

14.4

Partial Fractions: Complex-Conjugate Poles

A complex-conjugate pair of poles should be kept together, with the following procedure: employ the form Y (s) = b1 s + b2 a3 + + ···, (s + p1 )(s + p2 ) s + p3 (168)

where p1 = p∗ (complex conjugate). As before, multiply through by (s + 2 p1 )(s + p2 ), and then evaluate at s = −p1 .

14.5

Example: Partial Fractions with Complex Poles
G(s) = s+1 b1 s + b2 a3 = + : s(s + j)(s − j) (s + j)(s − j) s s+1 s

s=−j

= [b1 s + b2 ]s=−j −→

1 + j = −b1 j + b2 −→ b1 = −1 b2 = 1; also s+1 (s + j)(s − j) = a3 = 1.
s=0

Working out the inverse transforms from the table of pairs, we have simply (noting that ζ = 0) g(t) = − cos t + sin t + 1(t).

14.6

Stability in Linear Systems

In linear systems, exponential stability occurs when all the real exponents of e are strictly negative. The signals decay within an exponential envelope. If one exponent is 0, the response never decays or grows in amplitude; this is called marginal stability. If at least one real exponent is positive, then one element of the response grows without bound, and the system is unstable.

14.7 Stability ⇐⇒ Poles in LHP

99

14.7

Stability ⇐⇒ Poles in LHP

In the context of partial fraction expansions, the relationship between stability and pole locations is especially clear. The unit step function 1(t) has a pole at zero, the exponential e−at has a pole at −a, and so on. All of the other pairs exhibit the same property: A system is stable if and only if all of the poles occur in the left half of the complex plane. Marginally stable parts correlate with a zero real part, and unstable parts to a positive real part.

14.8

General Stability

There are two deﬁnitions, which apply to systems with input u(t) and output y(t). 1. Exponential. If u(t) = 0 and y(0) = yo , then |yi (t)| < αe−γt , for ﬁnite α and γ > 0. The output asymptotically approaches zero, within a decaying exponential envelope. 2. Bounded-Input Bounded-Output (BIBO). If y(0) = 0, and |fi (t)| < γ, γ > 0 and ﬁnite, then |yi (t)| < α, α > 0 and ﬁnite. In linear time-invariant systems, the two deﬁnitions are identical. Exponential stability is easy to check for linear systems, but for nonlinear systems, BIBO stability is usually easier to achieve.

100

15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS

15
15.1
15.1.1

CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
Introduction
Plants, Inputs, and Outputs

Controller design is about creating dynamic systems that behave in useful ways. Many target systems are physical; we employ controllers to steer ships, ﬂy jets, position electric motors and hydraulic actuators, and distill alcohol. Controllers are also applied in macro-economics and many other important, non-physical systems. It is the fundamental concept of controller design that a set of input variables acts through a given “plant” to create an output. Feedback control then uses sensed plant outputs to apply corrective inputs: Plant Jet aircraft Marine vessel Hydraulic robot U.S. economy Nuclear reactor 15.1.2 Inputs Outputs Sensors elevator, rudder, etc. altitude, hdg altimeter, GPS rudder angle heading gyrocompass valve position tip position joint angle fed interest rate, etc. prosperity inﬂation, M1 cooling, neutron ﬂux power level temp., pressure

The Need for Modeling

Eﬀective control system design usually beneﬁts from an accurate model of the plant, although it must be noted that many industrial controllers can be tuned up satisfactorily with no knowledge of the plant. Ziegler and Nichols, for example, developed a general recipe which we detail later. In any event, plant models simply do not match real-world systems exactly; we can only hope to capture the basic components in the form of diﬀerential or integro-diﬀerential equations. Beyond prediction of plant behavior based on physics, the process of system identiﬁcation generates a plant model from data. The process is often problematic, however, since the measured response could be corrupted by sensor noise or physical disturbances in the system which cause it to behave in unpredictable ways. At some frequency high enough, most systems exhibit eﬀects that are diﬃcult to model or reproduce, and this is a limit to controller performance.

15.2 Representing Linear Systems 15.1.3 Nonlinear Control

101

The bulk of this subject is taught using the tools of linear systems analysis. The main reason for this restriction is that nonlinear systems are diﬃcult to model, diﬃcult to design controllers for, and diﬃcult overall! Within the paradigm of linear systems, there are many sets of powerful tools available. The reader interested in nonlinear control is referred to the book by Slotine and Li.

15.2

Representing Linear Systems

Except for the most heuristic methods of tuning up simple systems, control system design depends on a model of the plant. The transfer function description of linear systems has already been described in the discussion of the Laplace transform. The state-space form is an entirely equivalent time-domain representation that makes a clean extension to systems with multiple inputs and multiple outputs, and opens the way to standard tools from linear algebra. 15.2.1 Standard State-Space Form

We write a linear system in a state-space form as follows x = Ax + Bu + Gw ˙ y = Cx + Du + v where • x is a state vector, with as many elements as there are orders in the governing diﬀerential equations. • A is a matrix mapping x to its derivative; A captures the natural dynamics of the system without external inputs. • B is an input gain matrix for the control input u. • G is a gain matrix for unknown disturbance w; w drives the state just like the control u. • y is the observation vector, comprised mainly of a linear combination of states Cx (where C is a matrix. (169)

u(s) (170) where I is the identity matrix with the same size as A. and clearly y(s)/v(s) = I. consider the following system: my (t) + by (t) + ky(t) = u (t) + u(t) (mass-spring-dashpot) s+1 G(s) = ms2 + bs + k .2.102 15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS • Du is a direct map from input to output (usually zero for physical systems).3 Converting a Transfer Function into a State-Space Model It may be possible to write the corresponding diﬀerential equation along one row of the state vector. which can create the same transfer function. In the case of no disturbances or noise. • v is an unknown sensor noise which corrupts the measurement. For example. 15.2 Converting a State-Space Model into a Transfer Function There are a number of canonical state-space forms available. the transfer function (or transfer matrix) can be written as G(s) = y(s) = C(sI − A)−1 B + D. w G + + + A x’ x + v + y + 1/s C u B D 15. A similar equation holds for y(s)/w(s).2. and then cascade derivatives.

but is also subject to an unknown . the derivative action scales with the derivative of the error. In words.4 Example: PID Control Consider the case of a mass (m) sliding on a frictionless table.3 PID Controllers The most common type of industrial controller is the proportional-integralderivative (PID) design. P ID. = kp 1 + τi s where the last line is written using the conventions of one overall gain kp . 15.3 PID Controllers Setting x = [y . y]T . P D. the system response to u is the same as the derivative of the system response to u. plus a time characteristic to the integral part (τi ) and and time characteristic to the derivative part (τd ). the proportional part of this control law will create a control action that scales linearly with the error – we often think of this as a spring-like action. It has a perfect thruster that generates force u(t). Entries in the C-matrix are easy to write in this case because of linearity.15. If u is the output from the controller. The integrator is accumulating the error signal over time. and so the control action from this part will continue to grow as long as an error exists. 15. The controller will retard motion toward zero error. The common variations are: P . leading to an entry of 1 in the oﬀ-diagonal of the second row in A. and e is the error signal it receives. P I. ki U (s) = kp + + k d s (171) E(s) s 1 + τd s . Finally. this control law has the form t u(t) = kp e(t) + ki C(s) = 0 e(τ )dτ + kd e (t). we obtain the system dx −b/m −k/m = 1 0 dt y = [1 1] x x+ 1/m 0 u 103 Note speciﬁcally that dx2 /dt = x1 . which helps to reduce overshoot.

the system would be overdamped and very slow to respond to any command. easily found using the Laplace transform. 15. The kd value for critical damping in this example is 2 mkp . m a marginally stable Let u(t) = −kp y(t) − kd y (t). The result. Suppose that the desired condition is simply y(t) = 0. so that the closed-loop dynamics follow my (t) = −kp y(t) + d(t). In the absence of d(t).4. we see that y(t) = yo cos response that is undesirable. and kd the part of the dashpot.104 15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS disturbance d(t). and so the rule is kd < 2 mkp . we have the plant my (t) = u(t) + d(t). is kd sin ωd t . The system now resembles a second-order mass-spring-dashpot system where kp plays the part of the spring. With an excessively large value for kd . If the linear position of the mass is y(t). In most applications. a small amount of overshoot is employed because the response time is shorter. 2mωd y(t) = yo e 2m t cos ωd t + −kd . 15.2 Proportional-Derivative Only kp t. and it follows that my (t) = −kp y(t) − kd y (t) + d(t).1 Proportional Only A proportional controller alone invokes the control law u(t) = −kp y(t). with initial conditions y(0) = yo and y (0) = 0.4. and it is perfectly measured.

very large values of kp will also drive the resonant frequency ωd up.4. so that y(t = ∞) = 0. and has no poles at the origin: G(s) .5 Heuristic Tuning For many practical systems.. To achieve good rejection of do with a P D controller. and can be safely tested with varying controllers.g. the input is 1(t)) into a reasonable PID design. Note that if the mass had a very large amount of natural damping.15. as desired. we would need to set kp very large.5 Heuristic Tuning 105 2 where ωd = 4mkp − kd /2m.3 Proportional-Integral-Derivative t 0 Now let u(t) = −kp y(t) − ki y(τ )dτ − kd y (t): we have t my (t) = −kp y(t) − ki 0 y(τ )dτ − kd y (t) + d(t). This is especially pertinent for plants which are open-loop stable. The idea is to approximate the response curve by a ﬁrst-order lag (gain k and time constant τ ) and a pure delay T : ke−T s (172) τs + 1 The following rules apply only if the plant contains no dominating. tuning of a PID controller may proceed without any system model. a time derivative leads to my (t) + kp y (t) + ki y(t) + kd y (t) = 0. provided the roots are stable. which transforms the basic characteristics of a step response (e. a negative kd could be used to cancel some of its eﬀect and speed up the system response. One useful approach is due to Ziegler and Nichols (1942). If d(t) = do . which is unacceptable. eventually settling out at y(t = ∞) = do /kp . This response is exponentially stable as desired. Now consider what happens if d(t) has a constant bias do : it balances exactly the proportional control part. However. 15. lightlydamped complex poles. The control system has now created a third-order closed-loop response. 15.

into the output. will necessarily make y(s) approximate r(s).6. or at the output. used to create a more general error signal e(s) = r(s) − y(s). causing some error in the evaluation of e(s).60τ /T 2 kd = 0.2τ /T 15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS ki = 0. having an input line and an output line.0τ /T kp = 0. the plant used above (a simple mass) has transfer function P (s) = 1/ms2 . In the former case. In the second case.6.6 15. in trying to force e(s) to zero.27τ /T 2 ki = 0. The ﬁrst is a process disturbance. and so has some physical meaning. In turn. this recipe suggests the proportional gain can become arbitrarily high! Any characteristic other than a true ﬁrst-order lag would therefore be expected to cause a measurable delay.60τ Note that if no pure time delay exists (T = 0). which usually corrupts the feedback signal y(s). its input is the error signal E(s) = −y(s).2 Block Diagrams: General Case The simple feedback system above is augmented in practice by three external inputs. and its output is force u(s). it is additive with the control action. the PD-controller has transfer function C(s) = kp + kd s. 15. which can be taken to act at the input of the physical plant.1 Block Diagrams of Systems Fundamental Feedback Loop The topology of a feedback system can be represented graphically by considering each dynamical system element to reside within a box. Note that the feedback loop. Another external input is the reference command or setpoint.106 P PI PID kp = 1. force u(s). Sensors with very poor . The feedback loop in block diagram form is shown below. The ﬁnal input is sensor noise.9τ /T kp = 1. position y(s). the disturbance has the same units as the plant output. C(s) u(s) P(s) y(s) 15. For example. which relates the input. and so on.

implying that these two functions must always trade oﬀ. We would generally like S to be small at low frequencies.15. they cannot both be small or large at the same time. Other systems we encounter again later are the (forward) loop transfer function P C.3 Primary Transfer Functions Some algebra shows that e 1 = =S r 1 + PC y PC = =T r 1 + PC u C = = U. du r + e C u + + P + + + n dy + y 15. Note that S + T = 1. y/r = T is called the complementary sensitivity function. r 1 + CP e/r = S relates the reference input and noise to the error.6. so that the tracking error there is small.6 Block Diagrams of Systems 107 noise properties can ruin the performance of a control system. and e du y du u du e dy −P 1 + PC P = 1 + PC −CP = 1 + CP −1 = = −S 1 + PC = . the loop transfer function broken between C and P : CP . and is known as the sensitivity function. no matter how perfectly understood are the other components.

then the three functions S. This will in fact be the procedure when we address loopshaping. If the disturbance is taken at the plant output.108 y dy u dy e n y n u n 15 CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS 1 1 + PC −C 1 + CP −1 1 + PC −P C 1 + PC −C 1 + CP = = = = = =S = −U = −S = −T = −U. . and U (control action) completely describe the system. T .

This section provides the basis for modal analysis of systems. 16. the response is x(t) = χeat . we use the state-space description of a system with D = 0: ˙ x = Ax + Bu y = Cx. In the scalar case.2. leading to . which can be driven by external inputs. consider the system ˙ x = Ax.109 16 16. This modal decomposition of A leads to a very useful state-space representation. 16.1 MODAL ANALYSIS Introduction The evolution of states in a linear system occurs through independent modes. x(t = 0) = χ. and observed through plant output. Namely.2. and matrix A: x(t) = eAt χ. Throughout.2 16.1 Matrix Exponential Deﬁnition In the instance of an unforced response to initial conditions. giving a decaying exponential if a < 0. The same notation holds for the case of a vector x. where (At)2 eAt = I + At + + ··· 2! eAt is usually called the matrix exponential. a transformation of state variables can be made. since A = V ΛV −1 .2 Modal Canonical Form Introductory material on the eigenvalue problem and modal decomposition can be found in the MATH FACTS section. x = V z.

16. (173) This is called the modal canonical form. that is. T The product wi χ is a scalar.110 16 MODAL ANALYSIS ˙ z = Λz + V −1 Bu y = CV z.3 Modal Decomposition of Response Now we are ready to look at the matrix exponential eAt in terms of its constituent modes. the eigenvalues of A. If χ is perpendicular to wi . but may be coupled through the input (V −1 B) and output (CV ) mappings. since the states are simply the modal amplitudes. The modal form is numerically robust for computations. These states are uncoupled in Λ. Otherwise. the projection of the initial conditions onto the i’th mode. we ﬁnd that (At)2 + ··· 2! (Λt)2 I + Λt + + ··· WT 2! eAt = I + At + = V n = V eΛt W T = i=1 T eλi t vi wi . we have n x(t) = i=1 T eλi t vi (wi χ). For stability of the system. the i’th mode does participate in the response. In terms of the response to an initial condition χ. they are in fact the poles of the equivalent transfer function description. must have negative real parts. Employing the above form for A. .2. The projection of the i’th mode onto the states x is through the right eigenvector vi . λi . then the product is zero and the i’th mode does not respond.

controllability for the entire system is checked using the following test: Construct the so-called controllability matrix: Mc = [B.. (174) This matrix has size n × (nm). x(t = 0) = χ. In the time domain. we have sx(s) − χ = Ax(s) + Bu(s) −→ x(s) = (sI − A)−1 χ + (sI − A)−1 Bu(s). taking into account the initial condition for the derivative. b2 . If a given mode i has wi bk = 0 for all input channels k.16. then the system is controllable. all modes are controllable. represents the projection of the k’th control channel onto the i’th mode. . Taking the Laplace transform of the system. Thus (sI − A)−1 can be recognized as the Laplace transform of the matrix exponential eAt . then the mode is uncontrollable. such that B = [b1 .3 Forced Response and Controllability 111 16. In normal applications. Then some rearrangement will give n m T (wi bk ) k=1 t 0 x(t) = i=1 vi eλi (t−τ ) uk (τ )dτ. · · · . = i=1 0 Suppose now that there are m inputs. the second term then has the form of a convolution of the matrix exponential and the net input Bu: t x(t) = 0 n eA(t−τ ) Bu(τ )dτ t T eλi (t−τ ) vi wi Bu(τ )dτ. bm ]. · · · . AB. where m is the number of input channels.e. T The product wi bk . We say that the i’th mode is controllable from the T k’th input if the product is nonzero. If Mc has rank n. a scalar.3 Forced Response and Controllability Now consider the system with an external input u: ˙ x = Ax + Bu. An−1 B]. i.

The i’th mode is observable in the k’th output if the product ckT vi = 0. AT C T . (175) This matrix has size n × (rn).112 16 MODAL ANALYSIS 16. (AT )n−1 C T . crT   the k’th channel of the output is n yk (t) = i=1 T (ckT vi )eλi t (wi χ). The usual test for system observability requires computation of the observability matrix: Mo = C T . and writing c1T   C =  · . We found above n x(t) = i=1 T eλi t vi wi χ. and the known control u? The response due to the external input is easy to compute deterministically.4 Plant Output and Observability We now turn to a related question: can the complete state vector of the system be observed given only the output measurements y. through the convolution integral. Consider the part due to initial conditions χ. The observation is y = Cx (r channels of output). · · · . the system is observable if Mo has rank n. We say that a system is observable if every mode can be seen in at least one output channel. .

2 Roots of Stability – Nyquist Criterion We consider the SISO feedback system with reference trajectory r(s) and plant output y(s). from from knowing the nominal product P (s)C(s). respectively. is 1 + P (s)C(s) = 0. Design based on singular values is the idea of L2 -control. 17. The closed-loop characteristic equation. The tracking error signal is deﬁned as e(s) = r(s) − y(s). single-output systems. to meet performance and robustness speciﬁcations. In particular. or LQG/LTR.1 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING Introduction This section formalizes the notion of loopshaping for linear control system design. we shape the open-loop transfer function (or matrix) P (s)C(s). Once this is done. r(s) 1 + P (s)C(s) where P (s) represents the plant transfer function. The Nyquist criterion allows us to assess the stability properties of a system based on P (s)C(s) only. The loopshaping approach is inherently two-fold. There is no explicit calculation of the closed-loop poles. and C(s) the compensator. thus forming the negative feedback loop. The sensitivity function is written as S(s) = e(s) 1 = . ∞]. to be presented in the next lectures. and the nominal plant P (s). then the compensator must be computed. where the underline and overline denote the denominator and numerator. This method for design involves plotting the complex loci of P (s)C(s) for the range ω = [−∞. and in this sense the design approach is quite diﬀerent from the root-locus method (see Ogata).113 17 17. absolute values of transfer functions are replaced with the maximum singular values of transfer matrices. . First. but the link to multivariable control is not too diﬃcult. equivalent to P (s)C(s) + P (s)C(s) = 0. whose roots are the poles of the closedloop system. as given previously. Most of the analysis here is given for single-input.

It is a reasonable constraint because otherwise the loop transfer function could pass signals with inﬁnitely high frequency. 17.2. The trick now is to make the trajectory in the s-plane enclose all unstable poles. back to the negative imaginary axis. clockwise(CW) paths in the s-plane. S(s). Since the zeros of F (s) are in fact the poles of the closed-loop transfer function. In the case of a PID controller (two zeros) and a second-order zeroless plant. instead of those of F (s): P = CCW ←→ closed-loop stability (177) . this constraint can be easily met by adding a high-frequency rolloﬀ to the compensator. which answers the following question: How do paths in the s-plane map into paths in the F -plane? We limit ourselves to closed.. the path encloses the entire right-half plane. every pole of F (s) enclosed in the s-plane generates exactly one CCW encirclement of the origin in the F (s)-plane. Conversely. e. moving up the imaginary axis. (176) In words. the equivalent of low-pass ﬁltering the error signal.2.e. stability requires that the number of unstable poles in F (s) is equal to the number of CCW encirclements of the origin. as s sweeps around the entire right-half s-plane. or P (s)C(s). the relation is often written Z − P = CW . and the remarkable result of the mapping theorem is Every zero of F (s) enclosed in the s-plane generates exactly one CW encirclement of the origin in the F (s)-plane.2 Nyquist Criterion The Nyquist criterion now follows from one translation. i.114 17.1 17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING Mapping Theorem We impose a reasonable assumption from the outset: The number of poles in P (s)C(s) exceeds the number of zeros. encirclements of the origin by F (s) are equivalent to encirclements of the point (−1 + 0j) by F (s) − 1. and then proceeding to the right at an arbitrarily large radius.g. stability requires that there are no zeros of F (s) in the right-half s-plane.. Then the stability criterion can be cast in terms of the unstable poles of P (s)C(s). Since CW and CCW encirclements of the origin may cancel. Namely. The heart of the Nyquist analysis is the mapping theorem. Let F (s) = 1 + P (s)C(s). This leads to a slightly shorter form of the above relation: P = CCW.

we should count the encirclements for the function [det(I + P (s)C(s)) − 1] instead of P (s)C(s). • Because the path taken in the s-plane includes negative frequencies (i. • When the angle of P (s)C(s) is −180◦ . There are several details to keep in mind when making Nyquist plots: • If neither the plant nor the controller have unstable modes. Rules of thumb are as follows. The use of gain and phase margin in design is similar to the SISO case. P (s)C(s) always decays such that the loci go to the origin.17. each having a very clear graphical representation. The loci need to stay away from the critical point. There are two natural measures of robustness for the Nyquist plot. the deﬁnition of kg is diﬀerent for stable and unstable P (s)C(s).3 Robustness on the Nyquist Plot The question of robustness in the presence of modelling errors is central to control system design. Referring to the multivariable deﬁnition of S(s).. .e.2.2 Roots of Stability – Nyquist Criterion 115 This is in fact the complete Nyquist criterion for stability. the magnitude |P (s)C(s)| should not be near one. then the loci of P (s)C(s) must not encircle the critical point at all.5 and γ ≥ 30◦ . • When the magnitude |P (s)C(s)| = 1. the loci of P (s)C(s) occur as complex conjugates – the plot is symmetric about the real axis. the negative imaginary axis). kg ≤ 0. As the ﬁgure shows. These notions lead to deﬁnition of the gain margin kg and phase margin γ for a design. For a stable plant. • The requirement that the number of poles in P (s)C(s) exceeds the number of zeros means that at high frequencies. 17. the procedure of looking at individual Nyquist plots for each element of a transfer matrix is unreliable and outdated. • For the multivariable (MIMO) case. its angle should not be −180◦ . kg ≥ 2 and γ ≥ 30◦ . It is a necessary and suﬃcient condition that the number of unstable poles in the loop transfer function P (s)C(s) must be matched by an equal number of CCW encirclements of the critical point (−1 + 0j). for an unstable plant. how close the loci come to it can be expressed in terms of magnitude and angle.

(178) where W1 (s) is a stable weighting function of frequency. This can be formalized by writing |W1 (s)S(s)| < 1. The requirement |W1 (s)S(s)| < 1 is equivalent to |W1 (s)| < |1 + P (s)C(s)|. but higher-frequency components in the response may . the DC gain and slow.4 Design for Robustness It is a ubiquitous observation that models of plants degrade with increasing frequency. ∀ω < λ. W1 (s) should be large in the same range. To force S(s) to be small at low ω. 17. then |S(s)| < 0. using the nominal plant model. The disk is to be quite large. can be cast in terms of the Nyquist plot. Since the sensitivity function maps reference input r(s) to tracking error e(s).01. if onepercent tracking is to be maintained for all frequencies below ω = λ.3 Design for Nominal Performance Performance requirements of a feedback controller.116 1/kg Im(s) 17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING P(s)C(s) Im(s) Re(s) Re(s) γ γ 1/kg P(s)C(s) Stable P(s)C(s) Unstable P(s)C(s) 17. at the lower frequencies. we know that |S(s)| should be small at low frequencies. For example. lightly-damped modes or zeros are easy to observe. and this latter condition can be interpreted as: The loci of P (s)C(s) must stay outside the disk of radius W1 (s). which is to be centered on the critical point (−1 + 0j). We restrict the discussion to the scalar case in the following sections. For example. possibly inﬁnitely large.

The path of the perturbed plant could be anywhere on a disk of radius |W2 (s)P (s)C(s)|. for the two extreme values of k. The perturbation is of the multiplicative type. This can be written as |1 + P C| > |W2 P C| ←→ |W2 P C| 1 > ←→ |1 + P C| 1 > |W2 T |. The last inequality is thus a condition for robust stability in the presence of multiplicative uncertainty parametrized with W2 . it will suﬃce to let |P ˜ Example: Let P = k/(s − 1). ˜ In the scalar case.4 Design for Robustness 117 be hard to capture or even excite repeatably. and W2 = 3/7. For constructing the Nyquist plot. W2 (s) should not grow any faster than necessary. dy . perturbed plant. we observe that ˜ P (s)C(s) = (1 + ∆(s)W2 (s))P (s)C(s). where k is in the range 2–5. ∆W2 . since it will turn out to be at the cost of nominal performance. with the smallest possible value of W2 .17. and P (s) is the actual. (180) where T is the complementary sensitivity function. yielding k0 = 7/2. W2 (s) should be growing with increasing frequency. The eﬀects of modeling uncertainty can be considered to enter the nominal feedback system as a disturbance at the plant output. However. (179) Here. centered on the nominal loci P (s)C(s). We need to create a nominal model P = k0 /(s − 1). where ∆(s) is an unknown but stable function of frequency for which |∆(s)| ≤ 1. One of the most useful descriptions of model uncertainty is the multiplicative uncertainty: ˜ P (s) = (1 + ∆(s)W2 (s))P (s). Two equations can be written using the above estimate. the weight can be estimated as follows: since P /P − 1 = ˜ /P − 1| < |W2 |. The robustness condition is that this disk should not intersect the critical point. The weighting function W2 (s) scales ∆(s) with frequency. ∆(s)W2 (s)P (s). since the uncertainty grows. P (s) represents the nominal plant model used in the design of the control ˜ loop. Higher-frequency behavior may have more nonlinear properties as well. which will not vary with frequency in this case. .

ω0 is a ﬁxed constant. so that d(ln|H|)/dν = −n. which in turn degrades the phase margin. This is met if |W1 S| + |W2 T | < 1. and no zeros. i. We must therefore have |P C| < 1/|W2 |. dν (182) where ν = ln(ω/ω0 ). Graphically. Then we have just angle(H) = − n π ∞ −∞ ln(coth(|ν|/2))dν = − nπ .6 Implications of Bode’s Integral The loop transfer function P C cannot roll oﬀ too rapidly in the crossover region. and ln|H| = −nln(ω/ω0 ). implying that the angle depends only on the local slope d(ln|H|)/dν. |W1 S| |W1 /P C|. At high frequency. The simple reason is that a steep slope induces a large phase loss. W2 T | |W2 P C|. since |P C| is large. the disk at the critical point. This leads directly to the performance condition |P C| > |W1 | in this range. with radius |W1 |. the angle is large. centered on the nominal locus P C. For a transfer function H(s).118 17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING 17. for robustness. To see this requires a short foray into Bode’s integral. 17. should not intersect the disk of radius |W2 P C|.e. 2 (183) . Thus.5 Robust Performance The condition for good performance with plant uncertainty is a combination of the above two conditions. (181) The robust performance requirement is related to the magnitude |P C| at different frequencies. it is a simple function with n poles at n the origin. The integral is hence taken over the log of a frequency normalized with ω0 . as follows: 1.. if the slope is large. It is not hard to see how the integral controls the angle: the function ln(coth(|ν|/2)) is nonzero only near ν = 0. since |P C| is small. 2. the crucial relation is angle(H(jω0 )) = 1 π ∞ −∞ d (ln|H(jω)) · ln(coth(|ν|/2))dν. n Example: Suppose H(s) = ω0 /sn . At low frequency. It follows that |H| = ω0 /ω n .

L = P C. • One caveat for the well-behaved plant is that lightly-damped poles or zeros should not be cancelled verbatim by the compensator. 17. In . because the closed-loop response will be sensitive to any slight change in the resonant frequency. let the designed loop transfer function be renamed. and then divide through by the plant. the division can be made directly. the critical component. We have said very little about how to get the compensator C.7 The Recipe for Loopshaping 119 This integral is trivial to look up or compute. For clarity. The usual procedure is to widen the notch or pole in the compensator.17. Each pole at the origin clearly induces 90◦ of phase loss. and then explicitly considering the eﬀects of adding the unstable parts. but in the scalar case. the phase may vary signiﬁcantly with frequency. while zeros not at the origin at 90◦ of phase lead for frequencies above the zero. The Nyquist loci are clearly susceptible to these variations is phase. and the phase margin can be easily lost if the slope of P C at crossover (where the magnitude is unity) is too steep. In the immediate neighborhood of these poles and zeros. Each zero at the origin adds 90◦ phase lead. we have extensively described what the open loop transfer function P C should look like. and may be second-order (−40dB/decade) if an adequate phase angle can be maintained near crossover. In the general case. • Non-minimum phase or unstable behavior in the plant can usually be handled by performing the loopshaping for the closest stable model. The overall idea is to ﬁrst shape L as a stable transfer function meeting the requirements of stability and robustness. each pole not at the origin induces 90◦ of phase loss for frequencies above the pole.7 The Recipe for Loopshaping In the above analysis. to meet robustness and performance speciﬁcations. (184) This extraordinarily simple step involves a plant inversion. equivalent to a single pole). We will use concepts from optimal linear control for the MIMO case. it suﬃces to just pick C = L/P. • When the plant is stable and has stable zeros (minimum-phase). through a higher damping ratio. The slope can safely be ﬁrst-order (−20dB/decade.

analysis. (185) The open-loop transfer matrix L should be shaped accordingly. the ideas from scalar loopshaping can be adapted using the singular value. including a direct extension of our scalar condition σ(W1 S) + σ(W2 T ) < 1. We list below some basic properties of the singular value decomposition. we ﬁnd that they impose an unavoidable frequency limit for the crossover. The condition for MIMO robust performance can be written in many ways. we use the properties of optimal state estimation and control to perform the plant inversion for MIMO systems. the converse is true: The feedback system must be faster than the corresponding frequency of the unstable mode. . In general. the troublesome zeros must be faster than the closed-loop frequency response. In the following sections. Useful properties and relations for the singular value are found in the section MATH FACTS. In the case of unstable poles. or modal. When a control system involves multiple inputs and outputs. which is analogous to an eigenvector.120 17 CONTROL SYSTEMS – LOOPSHAPING the case of unstable zeros.

Bellman. The column dimension of B equals the number of channels available in u. due to R. . ˙ (186) xdesired represents the vector of desired states. In this sense. The notion of optimality is closely tied to MIMO control system design. controllers that are the best possible. and that all of the n states x are ˙ available for the controller. optimal control solutions provide an automated design procedure – we have only to decide what ﬁgure of merit to use. and we ask what is the shortest path in miles.1 LINEAR QUADRATIC REGULATOR Introduction The simple form of loopshaping in scalar systems does not extend directly to multivariable (MIMO) plants.121 18 18. The linear quadratic regulator (LQR) is a well-known design technique that provides practical feedback gains. Pole-placement is the process of placing the poles of (A−BK) in stable. according to some ﬁgure of merit. The feedback gain is a matrix K. The “A-matrix” of the closed loop system is (A − BK). and must match the row dimension of K. we assume the plant to be written in state-space form x = Ax + Bu.3 Dynamic Programming There are at least two conventional derivations for the LQR. If A and C represent Los Angeles and Boston. The system dynamics are then written as: x = (A − BK)x + Kxdesired . The closed-loop system has exactly as many outputs as inputs: n..2 Full-State Feedback For the derivation of the linear quadratic regulator. The key observation is best given through a loose example: Suppose that we are driving from Point A to Point C. i. suitably-damped locations in the complex plane.e. 18. implemented as u = −K(x − xdesired ). Optimal controllers. we present here one based on dynamic programming. turn out to generate only stabilizing controllers for MIMO plants. which are characterized by transfer matrices instead of transfer functions. and serves as the external input to the closed-loop system. 18. and the “B-matrix” of the closed-loop system is K.

for example. First. Example: Nodal Travel. say Las Vegas. C1 . In terms of computations. Let X be an arbitrary point east of Las Vegas. There are nine unique paths from A to D. We now add some structure to the above experiment. This operation involves nine additions of two 3 Apologies to readers not familiar with American geography. The comparison of numbers is relatively cheap. we could summarize that this method requires nine additions of three numbers.3 By way of notation. C2 . Consider now traveling from point A (Los Angeles) to Point D (Boston). B2 . equivalent to eighteen additions of two numbers. B1 . Store the best paths as B1 D|opt . B3 D|opt . and the idea is to use this property backwards through time to evolve the optimal path. . there are many paths to choose from! Assume that one way or another we have found the best path. If we were to now solve the optimization problem for getting from only Las Vegas to Boston. and picks the shortest one. and three places to cross the Mississippi River. and nine paths total from the B-level to D. and that a Point B lies along this path.122 18 LINEAR QUADRATIC REGULATOR B1 A B2 B3 C1 C2 C3 D n=3 s=2 for example. C3 . There are three possible paths from B1 to D. A brute-force approach sums up the total distance for all the possible paths. B2 D|opt . The dynamic programming approach has two steps. as are those from the B-nodes to the C-nodes. Suppose that all of the paths (and distances) from A to the B-nodes are known. and the C-nodes to the terminal point D. this same arbitrary point X would be along the new optimal path as well. beginning in Boston. pick the best path to D. from each B-node. Suppose there are only three places to cross the Rocky Mountains. B3 . we say that the path from A to B1 is AB1 . The point is a subtle one: the optimization problem from Las Vegas to Boston is easier than that from Los Angeles to Boston.

4 Dynamic Programming and Full-State Feedback We consider here the regulation problem. First we deﬁne an instantaneous penalty function l(x(t). but not necessarily follow y-trajectories. The combined path with the shortest distance is the total solution. u(t)) = t ∞ l(x(τ ). u(t))dt. as one increases the dimensions of the solution space.. The gap widens vastly. of keeping xdesired = 0. brute force requires 6250 additions. Second.4 Dynamic Programming and Full-State Feedback 123 numbers. As suggested by dynamic programming. There are several necessary deﬁnitions. the return at time t is constructed from the return at t + δt. u(t)) is made by considering all the possible control inputs u in the time interval (t.18. while the dynamic programming procedure involves only (n2 (s − 1) + n) additions. u(t + δt))} . and . (188) . this example gives only a mild advantage to the dynamic programming approach over brute force. dynamic programming needs only 105. rivers or mountain ranges). u(t)) = min {l(x(t). the brute force approach will take (sns ) additions. u(t)). that is. In general. n river crossing points). We have directly from the dynamic programming principle V (x(t). s = 5. and total optimization is done in twelve additions of two numbers.e. this second step involves three sums of two numbers.. if there are s layers of nodes (e. The closed-loop system thus is intended to reject disturbances and recover from initial conditions. 18. Finally. the integral over time of the instantaneous penalty. however. u(τ ))dτ. (187) i. the optimal return is the cost of the optimal trajectory remaining after time t: V (x(t). compute the distance for each of the possible paths from A to D. constrained to the optimal paths from the B-nodes onward: AB1 + B1 D|opt . In the case of n = 5. or AB3 + B3 D|opt . Needless to say. u (189) The minimization of V (x(t). which is to be greater than zero for all nonzero x and u. AB2 + B2 D|opt .. along an optimal trajectory.g. is J= 0 ∞ l(x(t). The cost associated with this penalty. and each has width n (e. t + δt). u(t))δt + V (x(t + δt).g.

Substitution of this form into the above equation.o. t + δt) cannot aﬀect V (x(t). as written. ∂x V (x(t + δt).45 It follows that ∂V = xT P −→ ∂x 0 = min l(x. and setting the derivative with respect to u to zero gives Positive deﬁniteness means that xT P x > 0 for all nonzero x. ∂x (191) We next make the assumption that V (x. and positive deﬁnite. u(t)) + u ∂V (Ax(t) + Bu(t)) . 2 where P is a symmetric matrix. If V is smooth and has no explicit dependence on t. u(t + δt)) = V (x(t). u(t)) + Now control input u in the interval (t.124 18 LINEAR QUADRATIC REGULATOR the diﬀerential component due to l(x. This suggested form for the optimal return can be conﬁrmed after the optimal controller is derived. −→ (190) ∂x dt ∂V = V (x(t). The LQR employs the special quadratic form 1 1 l(x. u(t)). The matrices Q and R are to be set by the user. 2 2 (194) where Q and R are both symmetric and positive deﬁnite. and xT P x = 0 if x = 0. then ∂V dx δt + h.t. u (192) (193) We ﬁnally specify the instantaneous penalty function. u) = xT P x. u) + xT P (Ax + Bu) . u(t)) + (Ax(t) + Bu(t))δt. u) = xT Qx + uT Ru. u). and represent the main “tuning knobs” for the LQR. so inserting the above and making a cancellation gives 0 = min l(x(t). 5 4 . u) has the following form: 1 V (x.

The LQR achieves inﬁnite gain margin: kg = ∞. 18. we can make its eﬀect symmetric by letting 1 1 xT P Ax = xT P Ax + xT AT P x. . Inserting this solution back into equation 194. The LQR generates a static gain matrix K. 2 2 leading to the ﬁnal matrix-only result 0 = Q + P A + AT P − P BR−1 B T P.18.5 Properties and Use of the LQR Static Gain. (196) This equation is the matrix algebraic Riccati equation (MARE). since xT P Ax = xT AT P x. implying that the loci of (P C) (scalar case) or (det(I + P C) − 1) (MIMO case) approach the origin along the imaginary axis. The LQR also guarantees phase margin γ ≥ 60 degrees. we have 1 1 0 = xT Qx − xT P BR−1 B T P + xT P Ax. (195) The gain matrix for the feedback control is thus K = R−1 B T P . Robustness. and eliminating u in favor of x. 2 2 All the matrices here are symmetric except for P A. The MARE is easily solved by standard numerical tools in linear algebra. the order of the closed-loop system is the same as that of the plant. This is in good agreement with the practical guidelines for control system design. whose solution P is needed to compute the optimal feedback gain K. Hence. which is not a dynamical system.5 Properties and Use of the LQR 125 0 = uT R + x T P B uT = −xT P BR−1 u = −R−1 B T P x.

When R << C T Q C. poles are placed at stable plant zeros.126 18 LINEAR QUADRATIC REGULATOR Output Variables. since y = Cx. There are two groups of closed-loop poles. Behavior of Closed-Loop Poles: Cheap Control. as shown in the ﬁgure. In the case of a completely stable plant. and so the controller minimizes the control action itself. and the auxiliary matrix Q weights the plant output. The angular separation of n closed-loop poles on the arc is constant. and at the mirror images of the unstable plant zeros. the gain will indeed go to zero. When R >> C T Q C. and there is no penalty for using large u. The Butterworth pattern refers to an arc in the stable left-half plane. so there should be some account made for unstable plant poles. In this case. however. the cost function is dominated by the control eﬀort u. In many cases. The optimal control must always stabilize the closed-loop system. the cost function is dominated by the output errors y. but the output variables y. Behavior of Closed-Loop Poles: Expensive Control. so that the closed-loop poles approach the open-loop plant poles in a manner consistent with the scalar root locus. The remaining poles assume a Butterworth pattern. An angle 90◦ /n separates the most lightlydamped poles from the imaginary axis. This part is akin to the high-gain limiting case of the root locus. and equal to 180◦ /n. First. The expensive control solution puts stable closed-loop poles at the mirror images of the unstable plant poles. we set the weighting matrix Q = C T Q C. whose radius increases to inﬁnity as R becomes smaller and smaller. it is not the states x which are to be minimized. .

18.5 Properties and Use of the LQR 127 X φ /2 φ n=4 φ = 45 degrees X φ φ X φ /2 X .

Given statistical properties of real plant ˆ ˆ disturbances and sensor noise. and l outputs. we derived the linear quadratic regulator as an optimal solution for the full-state feedback control problem. This state estimation is the task of a model-based estimator having the form: ˙ x = Aˆ + Bu + H(y − C x) ˆ x ˆ (197) The vector x represents the state estimate. (198) There are n states.128 19 KALMAN FILTER 19 19. whose evolution is governed by ˆ the nominal A and B matrices of the plant. The inherent assumption was that each state was known perfectly. and C is l × n. and a correction term with the estimator gain matrix H. the measurements are subject to disturbances.2 Problem Statement We consider the state-space plant model given by: x = Ax + Bu + W1 ˙ y = Cx + W2 . y C Bu y + H + + + A x 1/s x 19. the Kalman Filter designs an optimal H. B is n × m. and may not allow reconstruction of all the states. In real applications. H operates on the estimation error mapped to the plant output y. W1 . so that A has dimension n × n. The plant subject to two random input signals.1 KALMAN FILTER Introduction In the previous section. m inputs. since C x = y .

W1 + HW2 is considered an external input. W1 represents disturbances to the plant. independent white noise. (202) The eigenvalues of the matrix A − HC thus determine the stability properties of the estimation error dynamics. the symmetric error covariance. if E(·) denotes the expected value. An important assumption of the Kalman Filter is that W1 and W2 are each vectors of unbiased. since it drives x directly. The estimation error may be deﬁned as e = x − x.3 ˙ Step 1: An Equation for Σ The evolution of Σ follows from some algebra and the convolution form of e(t). The Kalman ﬁlter design provides H that minimizes the scalar cost function J = E(eT W e). A related matrix. We begin with . There are two main steps for deriving the optimal gain H. and that all the n + l channels are uncorrelated. Hence. and V2 is an l × l diagonal matrix of intensities. positive deﬁnite weighting matrix. (199) (200) (201) Here δ(t) represents the impulse (or delta) function. V1 is an n × n diagonal matrix of intensities.˙ 19. It can then be veriﬁed that ˆ e = [Ax + Bu + W1 ] − [Aˆ + Bu + H(y − C x)] ˙ x ˆ = (A − HC)e + (W1 − HW2 ). is deﬁned as Σ = E(eeT ). (204) 19. (203) where W is an unspeciﬁed symmetric. ˙ W2 denotes sensor noise. The second term above. which corrupts the measurement y.3 Step 1: An Equation for Σ 129 and W2 . E(W1 (t1 )W1 (t2 )T ) = V1 δ(t1 − t2 ) E(W2 (t1 )W2 (t2 )T ) = V2 δ(t1 − t2 ) E(W1 (t)W2 (t)T ) = 0n×l .

. The fact that W1 and HW2 are uncorrelated leads to the third line.. The last term above can be expanded. and the ﬁnal result follows from = 1 δ(t − τ )dτ = . It is independent of the initial condition e(0). T T The ﬁnal expression for E(e(W1 − W2 H T )) is symmetric.130 19 KALMAN FILTER ˙ Σ = E(eeT + eeT ) ˙ ˙ (205) T T T T T T = E[(A − HC)ee + (W1 − HW2 )e + ee (A − C H ) + T T e(W1 − W2 H T )]. and therefore appears in Equation 205 twice.e. the written integral includes only half of the impulse. 2 0 i. and depends on the (as yet) unknown estimator gain matrix H. We have T T T T E(e(W1 − W2 H T )) = e(A−HC)t E(e(0)(W1 − W2 H T )) + t 0 t e(A−HC)(t−τ ) E((W1 (τ ) − HW2 (τ )) T T (W1 (t) − W2 (t)H T )) dτ = 0 t e(A−HC)(t−τ ) E((W1 (τ ) − HW2 (τ )) T T (W1 (t) − W2 (t)H T )) dτ = 0 e(A−HC)(t−τ ) (V1 δ(t − τ ) + HV2 H T δ(t − τ )) dτ 1 1 V1 + HV2 H T . 2 2 To get from the ﬁrst right-hand side to the second. (206) t This equation governs propagation of the error covariance. leading to ˙ Σ = (A − HC)Σ + Σ(AT − C T H T ) + V1 + HV2 H T . using the property that e(t) = e(A−HC)t e(0) + 0 t e(A−HC)(t−τ ) (W1 (τ ) − HW2 (τ )) dτ. we note that the initial T T condition e(0) is uncorrelated with W1 − W2 H T .

Note that since F is zero.e.4 Step 2: H as a Function of Σ 131 19. the constraint we invoke is the evolution of Σ. The trace of a matrix is the sum of its diagonal elements. and the previous two lemmas. which give the derivative of a trace with respect to a constituent matrix: ∂ trace(−ΛHCΣ) = −ΛT ΣC T ∂H ∂ trace(−ΛΣC T H T ) = −ΛΣC T ∂H ∂ trace(ΛHV2 H T ) = ΛT HV2 + ΛHV2 . satisﬁed if H = ΣC T V2−1 . J = J.4 Step 2: H as a Function of Σ We now make the connection between Σ = E(eeT ) (a matrix) and J = E(eT W e) (a scalar).. Lagrange multipliers provide an ingenious mechanism for drawing constraints into the optimization. Then the condition ∂J /∂H = 0 leads to 0 = 2Λ(−ΣC T + HV2 ). Next. and Λ is an n × n matrix of unknown Lagrange multipliers. We need the following lemmas. i. the last lemma uses the chain rule. so minimizing J solves the same problem. We now introduce an auxiliary cost function deﬁned as J = trace(ΣW + ΛF ). (208) (207) where F is an n × n matrix of zeros. since the values are arbitrary.19. Equation 206: ˙ J = trace ΣW + Λ(−Σ + AΣ − HCΣ + ΣAT − ΣC T H T + V1 + HV2 H T ) (209) If J is an optimal cost. it follows that ∂J /∂H = 0. the correct choice of H achieves an extremal value. ∂H Proofs of the ﬁrst two are given at the end of this section. (210) . and it can be veriﬁed that J = E(eT W e) = trace(ΣW ). we enforce Λ = ΛT .

we obtain ˙ Σ = AΣ + ΣAT + V1 − ΣC T V2−1 CΣ. Notice also that the result is independent of the weighting matrix W . The steady-state solution for Σ is valid for time-invariant systems. This is dual to the stability guarantee of the LQR loop. which might as well be the identity. the KF loop achieves 60◦ phase margin. suggesting a duality with the LQR problem. V2 > 0 K = R−1 B T P H = ΣC T V2−1 P A + AT P + Q − P BR−1 B T P = 0 ΣAT + AΣ + V1 − ΣC T V2−1 CΣ = 0 Hence the estimator gain matrix H can be written as a function of Σ. R > 0 V1 ≥ 0. leading to a more common MARE form of Equation 211: 0 = AΣ + ΣAT + V1 − ΣC T V2−1 CΣ. The evolution of Σ is always stable. Furthermore. which minimizes the squared-norm of the estimation error. V2 ]. . Inserting this back into Equation 206. and depends only on the constant matrices [A. C. as long as the plant is fully state-observable. and inﬁnite gain margin. (212) The Kalman Filter is guaranteed to create a stable nominal dynamics A−HC.132 19 KALMAN FILTER Duality of Linear Quadratic Regulator and Kalman Filter Linear Quadratic Regulator Kalman Filter x = Ax + Bu ˙ x = Ax + Bu + W1 ˙ y = Cx + W2 ˙ u = −Kx x = Aˆ + Bu + H(y − C x) ˆ x ˆ ∞ T T T 2J = 0 (x Qx + u Ru)dt J = E(e W e) Q ≥ 0. (211) Equations 210 and 211 represent the practical solution to the Kalman ﬁltering problem. like the LQR. This is in fact the case. for all the channels together or independently. like the LQR. V1 . when the plant is state-controllable.5 Properties of the Solution The solution involves a matrix Riccati equation. and the same analysis and numerical tools can be applied to both methodologies. 19.

Some closed-loop poles go to the stable plant zeros. dual to cheapcontrol problem. and dual to those of the LQR: • V2 << V1 : good sensors. or the mirror image of unstable plant zeros. weighting the model dynamics Aˆ + Bu more. The remaining poles follow a Butterworth pattern whose radius increases with increasing V1 /V2 .19. The limiting closed-loop poles of the Kalman ﬁlter are similar. • V2 >> V1 : poor sensors. Closed-loop poles go to the stable plant poles.6 Combination of LQR and KF An optimal output feedback controller is created through the use of a Kalman ﬁlter coupled with an LQR full-state feedback gain. • A small disturbance V1 . placing emphasis on the corrective action of the ﬁlter. and the mirror images of the unstable plant poles. V2 is the intensity of the sensor noise. and small sensor noise V2 creates a large H. dual to expensivecontrol problem. For the plant given as x = Ax + Bu + W1 ˙ y = Cx + W2 . Recall that V1 is the intensity matrix of the plant disturbance. x • A large disturbance V1 . H small. large disturbance. and Σ is the error covariance matrix. and large sensor noise V2 creates a small H. or LQG. • A large uncertainty Σ creates large H. H >> 1. small disturbance. This combination is usually known as the Linear Quadratic Gaussian design. so that the ﬁlter’s correction is dominant. 19.6 Combination of LQR and KF 133 The qualitative dependence of the estimator gain H = ΣC T V2−1 on the other parameters can be easily seen. we put the Kalman Filter and controller gain G together as follows: .

In this case. We use the output error as a control input in the next section. See proof below. Separation Principle: The eigenvalues of the nominal closed-loop system are made of up the eigenvalues of (A − HC) and the eigenvalues of (A − BK). as written. Output Tracking: This compensator is a stand-alone system that. ˆ (213) (214) C(s) B y + H + + C φ = (sI-A) -1 φ -K u There are two central points to this construction: 1. tries to drive its input y to zero. 19. It can be hooked up to receive tracking error e(s) = r(s) − y(s) as an input instead. separately. but rather an estimated state tracking error. . so that it is not limited to the regulation problem alone.7 19.1 Proofs of the Intermediate Results Proof that E(eT W e) = trace(ΣW ) E(eT W e) = E  n  n i=1 n ei   n j=1 Wij ej   = i=1 j=1 Σij Wji . x no longer ˆ represents an estimated state.134 19 KALMAN FILTER ˙ x = Aˆ + Bu + H(y − C x) ˆ x ˆ u = −K x. 2. on loopshaping via loop transfer recovery.7.

19. the il th element j=1 Aij Hlj   = i=1 j=1 Aij Hij .2 Proof that ∂ trace(−ΛHCΣ) ∂H trace(AHB) = trace  n n  n l Aij k=1 l j=1 = i=1 j=1 Aij k=1 Hjk Bki . the il th element  19.7. Now consider the diagonal elements of the product ΣW : Σ11 W11 + Σ12 W21 + · · · · ·  · Σ21 W12 + Σ22 W22 + · · · ·  → ΣW =   · · ··· n n   trace(ΣW ) = i=1 j=1 Σij Wji .3 Proof that ∂ trace(−ΛΣC T H T ) ∂H n Aijo Bko i i=1 (BA)ko jo (BA)To ko −→ j (BA)T AT B T . = −ΛΣC T  2 trace(AH T ) = trace  = trace  n n   n j=1 n T Aij Hjl  . 2 = −ΛT ΣC T Hjk Bkl  . Now ∂ trace(AHB) = ∂Hjo ko = = ∂ trace(AHB) = ∂H = 19. where the second form is a sum over i of the ii’th elements.7 Proofs of the Intermediate Results 135 the transpose of W being valid since it is symmetric. .7.

Using the deﬁnition of estimation error e = x − x.4 Proof of the Separation Principle Without external inputs W1 and W2 . the closed-loop system evolves according to d dt x x ˆ A −BK HC A − BK − HC x x ˆ = . we can write the above in ˆ another form: d dt x e A − BK BK 0 A − HC x e = . 2 ∂H 19. . and hence the separation of eigenvalues follows.7. then its eigenvalues are the roots of det(sI − A ) = 0. the determinant of an upper triangular block matrix is the product of the determinants of each block on the diagonal: det(sI −A ) = det(sI −(A−BK))det(sI −(A−HC)). It follows that ∂ trace(AH T ) = Aio jo −→ ∂Hio jo ∂ trace(AH T ) = A. However. If A represents this compound A-matrix.136 19 KALMAN FILTER where the last form is a sum over the ii’th elements.

This follows from the estimator evolution equation ˙ x = Aˆ + Bu + H(y − C x) ˆ x ˆ and the ﬁgure. a second problem is that this design technique has no clear equivalent in frequency space. or Cφ(s)BC(s) ≈ Cφ(s)H. The procedure is termed Loop Transfer . Even if one could steer clear of such pathological cases. and further is amenable to output tracking. ˆ In short. (215) It will turn out that the LQR can be set up so that the an LQG-type compensator achieves exactly this result. since it does not aﬀect the error dynamics of the ﬁlter. It cannot be directly mapped to the intuitive ideas of loopshaping and the Nyquist plot. the KF loop has good robustness properties. there do exist plants for which there is no robustness guarantee for an LQG compensator. that is. which are at the root of feedback control. There are two reasons to avoid this kind of direct LQG design procedure. Supposing that we have an estimator gain H which creates an attractive loop function L(s). however.137 20 20. First. we would like to ﬁnd the compensator C(s) that establishes P (s)C(s) ≈ Cφ(s)H. then an LQG design approach. respectively. We now reconsider just the feedback loop of the Kalman ﬁlter. combining the LQR and KF into an output feedback compensator. although the LQR and KF each possess good robustness properties. where φ(s) = (sI − A)−1 . speciﬁcally to perturbations at the output y . The LQR tuning matrices Q and R would be picked heuristically to give a reasonable closed-loop response. The KF has open-loop transfer function L(s) = Cφ(s)H. may yield good results. As noted previously. the KF loop is an ideal candidate for a loopshaping design.1 LOOP TRANSFER RECOVERY Introduction The Linear Quadratic Regulator(LQR) and Kalman Filter (KF) provide practical solutions to the full-state feedback and state estimation problems. If the sensor noise and disturbance properties of the plant are indeed well-known. Note that we have not included the factor Bu as part of the ﬁgure.

where I is the identity matrix. In this regard. and has two main parts. the KF loop has sensitivity function S(s) = (I + Cφ(s)H)−1 and complementary sensitivity T (s) = (I + Cφ(s)H)−1 Cφ(s)H. one carries out a KF design for H. and so in this limit .2 A Special Property of the LQR Solution Letting Q = C T C and R = ρI. so that the Kalman ﬁlter loop itself has good performance and robustness properties. we pick suitable parameters of the LQR design. for which W T W = I.138 y 20 LOOP TRANSFER RECOVERY φ (s) ^ x H C Recovery (LTR). but has a much larger role in multivariable control. First recall the gain and Riccati equations for the LQR: K = R−1 B T P 0 = Q + P A + AT P − P BR−1 B T P. and W is an orthonormal matrix. it must be the case that P → 0 also. Now Q = C T C = C T W T W C = (W C)T W C. ρ→0 where K is the LQR gain matrix. LTR is useful as a SISO control technique. First. 20. The condition σ(W1 (s)S(s)) + σ(W2 (s)T (s)) < 1 is suﬃcient for robust performance with multiplicative plant uncertainty at the output. The Riccati equation becomes 0 = ρ(W C)T W C + ρP A + ρAT P − P BB T P = 0. we will show (roughly) that √ lim ( ρK) = W C. In the limit as ρ → 0. Secondly. so that the LQG compensator satisﬁes the approximation of Equation 215.

. First. The result of the last line establishes that the plant must be square: the number of inputs (i. the recovered function will exhibit reasonable limitations inherent to unstable zeros. but the recovery is not to the Kalman ﬁlter loop transfer function. 2 Note that another orthonormal matrix W could be used in separating K T from K in the last line. i. we develop C(s). we note that the above property is true only for LQR designs with minimum-phase plants.. .3 The Loop Transfer Recovery Result √ The theorem is stated as: If limρ→0 ( ρK) = W C (the above result). with W an orthonormal matrix. those with only stable zeros (Kwakernaak and Sivan). 20. The LTR method can be in fact be applied in the presence of unstable plant zeros. The proof of the LTR result depends on some easy lemmas. This matrix may be absorbed into W through a matrix inverse.3 The Loop Transfer Recovery Result 139 ρ(W C)T W C ≈ = = = WC ≈ P BB T P (B T P )T B T P (R−1 B T P )T RR(R−1 B T P ) ρ2 K T K −→ √ ρK. • The design plant has no unstable zeros.e.e. and so does not need to be written. with the deﬁnitions φ(s) = (sI − A)−1 and X(s) = (φ−1 (s) + HC)−1 = (sI − A + HC)−1 . Finally. The LTR method is limited by two conditions: • The plant has an equal number of inputs and outputs.e. See Athans for more details and references on this topic. given at the end of this section. rows of K) is equal to the number of outputs (i.20. Instead. then the limiting LQG controller C(s) satisﬁes ρ→0 lim P (s)C(s) = Cφ(s)H. however.. rows of C).

then use Lemma 2 → C(φ(s) − φ(s)H(I + Cφ(s)H)−1 Cφ(s)) (I − Cφ(s)H(I + Cφ(s)H)−1 )Cφ(s). as desired. to eliminate √ ρK: lim C(s) = (W CX(s)B)−1 W CX(s)H = (CX(s)B)−1 CX(s)H. we used the assumption that W is square and invertible. both properties of orthonormal matrices. reintroduced into the limiting compensator. with ρ → 0. then use Lemma 3 → (I + KX(s)B)−1 KX(s)H √ √ √ ( ρI + ρKX(s)B)−1 ρKX(s)H. then use Lemma 3 → (I + Cφ(s)H)−1 Cφ(s). ρ→0 CX(s) = = = = = This result. Finally it follows that limρ→0 P (s)C(s) = Cφ(s)H. In the last expression. ρ→0 . gives lim C(s) = ((I + Cφ(s)H)−1 Cφ(s)B)−1 (I + Cφ(s)H)−1 Cφ(s)H = (Cφ(s)B)−1 Cφ(s)H = P −1 (s)Cφ(s)H. Now we look at the product CX(s): C(SI − A + HC)−1 C(φ−1 (s) + HC)−1 . then use Lemma 2 → K(X(s) − X(s)B(I + KX(s)B)−1 KX(s))H KX(s)H − KX(s)B(I + KX(s)B)−1 KX(s)H (I − KX(s)B(I + KX(s)B)−1 )KX(s)H.140 20 LOOP TRANSFER RECOVERY C(s) = = = = = = = K(sI − A + BK + HC)−1 H K(X −1 (s) + BK)−1 H. Next we invoke the result from the LQR design.

20. The tracking errors will accrue as desired. if no steadystate error is to be allowed. For example. Proof: . Quantitative uncertainty models are usually at the cost of a lengthy identiﬁcation eﬀort. so that one unit of error in one channel is as undesirable as one unit of error in another channel. in depth and pitch control of a large submarine. the high-frequency multiplicative weighting W2 . once the KF design is completed. the integrators are moved from the plant over to the input side of the compensator. the plant input channels must be augmented with the necessary additional poles (at the origin). Then. • Scale the plant inputs in the same way.5 Three Lemmas Lemma 1: Matrix Inversion (A + BCD)−1 = A−1 − A−1 B(C −1 + DA−1 B)−1 DA−1 . The LQR design step is thus trivial. one meter of depth error cannot be compared directly with one radian of pitch error. the bandwidth of is a more intuitive design parameter than is. One Newton of propeller thrust cannot be compared with one radian of rudder angle. • Integrators should be part of the KF loop transfer function. with Q = C T C and R = ρI. Some speciﬁc techniques are useful. Often. • Design for crossover frequency. for example.4 Usage of the Loop Transfer Recovery The idea of LTR is to “recover” a Kalman ﬁlter loop transfer function L(s) = Cφ(s)H. Since the Kalman ﬁlter loop has only as many poles as the plant. • Scale the plant outputs (and references). The bandwidth of the controller is roughly equal to the frequency at which the (recovered) loop transfer function crosses over 0dB. and the compensator C(s) is constructed.4 Usage of the Loop Transfer Recovery 141 20. 20. by using the limiting cheap-control LQR design.

2 2 . Lemma 2: Short Form of Lemma 1 (X −1 + BD)−1 = X − XB(I + DXB)−1 DX Proof: substitute A = X −1 and C = I into Lemma 1. Lemma 3 I − A(I + A)−1 = (I + A)−1 Proof: I − A(I + A)−1 = (I + A)(I + A)−1 − A(I + A)−1 = (I + A − A)(I + A)−1 = (I + A)−1 .142 20 LOOP TRANSFER RECOVERY (A + BCD)(A + BCD)−1 = I A(A + BCD)−1 = I − BCD(A + BCD)−1 (A + BCD)−1 = A−1 − A−1 BCD(A + BCD)−1 = A−1 − A−1 BCD(I + A−1 BCD)−1 A−1 = A−1 − A−1 B(D−1 C −1 + A−1 B)−1 A−1 = A−1 − A−1 B(C −1 + DA−1 B)−1 DA−1 .

21. or developing a controller which takes speciﬁc account of the it. The process of generating workable models from observed data is the goal of system identiﬁcation. We discuss in this section four fundamental but useful techniques for approximate system identiﬁcation of single-input. and that the methods are only a small subset of what is available. a ﬁrst-order lag with gain k. Give estimates of the two plant transfer . especially with the help of step functions parametrized on damping ratio ζ. the smoothed data can still be ﬁtted to the curve y(t) = 0. The basic idea is to express what is observed as a time signal whose Laplace-domain equivalent can be recognized. The time constant τ is equal to the time required for y(t) to reach the value k(1 − e−1 ) = 0. and time constant τ . and therefore y(t) = k(1 − e−t/τ ). time-domain simulation. In any event. consider the plant transfer function P (s) = k/(τ s + 1). Systems with order three or higher will usually be more diﬃcult to assess with this visual technique. The gain k is evident as the maximum value taken by the measured output.2 Visual Output from a Simple Input For low-order plants which can tolerate impulse or step input. such as the LQR and LTR. Except for the last approach. As an example. require a plant model. We have y(s) = k/s(τ s + 1) for the step input u(s) = 1/s.58(et − 1). which motivates identiﬁcation with simple methods.632k. however. If diﬀerent inputs give diﬀerent linear model coeﬃcients. then it is likely that nonlinear terms are playing a role. Good controllers usually have some reasonable robustness guarantees. Example: Two raw step responses in heading were recorded for two different vessels. It should be noted that the area of system identiﬁcation is a very rich one. the methods are limited to linear models. simulations with the nonlinear plant should always be performed to assess the robustness of the control strategy. single-output plants. Similar estimates can be made for second-order systems. for example if the operating point is controlled very closely. The ﬁrst vessel was strongly unstable and had to be powered down abruptly after one second.143 21 21.1 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION Introduction Model-based controller design techniques. a great amount can be learned through step and impulse responses. The user then has the choice of ignoring the nonlinearity.

4 0 0. so let k = 0. Thus for the experimental data.144 1.5 0. undamped frequency ωn .5 0 0.5.8 1 0 1 2 3 seconds 4 5 functions P (s).1) 1. and ζ are to be determined. and the second overshoot (same side) is about 0. 0.58 .2 0.7 3. Next. The second trace looks like a second-order response of the form 2 y(s) kωn .3/0.175. The undamped natural frequency ωn is related to ωd as follows: . leading to the damped natural frequency ωd = 2π/1.8 0. the ﬁrst overshoot is about 0.4 0.3.58/(s − 1).7s. we note that the steady value of y(t) is about 0.5. with respect to the steady value. The ratio is often written as the logarithmic decrement δ = ln(0. = 2 2 u(s) s + 2ζωn s + ωn where gain k. we have P (s) = 0.70rad/s. Finally.1.6 0. so that the damping ratio is simply ζ = δ/2π 0.2 0 1 −0. assuming that the step input was of magnitude one. First. where u(s) = 1/s. s(s − 1) y(s) = ˆ ˆ Since y(s) = P (s)u(s).5 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 1 0. the damped natural period is about 1.6 seconds 0. The time trace of the ﬁrst system looks like the Laplace transform pair: 1 1 (e−at − e−bt ) ↔ y(s) = b−a (s + a)(s + b) y(t) = for the values b = 0 and a = −1.10.

u(s) (216) In applications. along with the magnitude and phase of the transfer function . A similar argument holds for sensor noise. A sensor which has noise in the frequency range of the system dynamics is problematic for obvious reasons.1 s2 21.75rad/s. In some cases. zeros. For each such test at a speciﬁc frequency. we have ˆ P (s) = 7. periodic. the input signal u(s) is known quite accurately because it is generated by a computer.28s + 14.3 Transfer Function Estimation – Sinusoidal Input 145 ωn = √ ωd 1 − ζ2 3. water waves). in the frequency domain: y(s) ˆ P (s) = .e.0 .3 Transfer Function Estimation – Sinusoidal Input The main idea of transfer function estimation is that P (s) can be estimated by simply dividing the measured output by the measured input. however: real disturbances and sensor noise. compute the magnitude and phase relating the input to the output. The idea then is to drive the plant with a narrow-band. Two sources of error can corrupt the output signal y(s).21. + 1. input signal u(s). the estimated transfer function approach will succeed. Conduct as many ˆ tests as are necessary to build a Bode plot of the plant estimate P (s). which can be either parameterized in terms of poles. while the next section generalizes to broadband input. disturbances may be band-limited (e. Certain plants which cannot admit a step or impulsive input will tolerate a sinusoidal input. which in many devices is negligible for low frequencies. Inserting these into the template above. Example: Sinusoidal rudder angles trajectories. and if these occur in a frequency range far away from the dominant dynamics. This section discusses the use of periodic inputs to create a Bode plot.. or used directly in a loopshaping or Nyquist plot approach. of 10deg amplitude (|u(t)| = 10deg). Bode plots are ﬁgures of transfer function magnitude and phase as functions of frequency. i.g. The data are plotted. were implemented on a vessel operating near its cruising speed. and a gain..

In this case. either as the result of a closed-loop run. and an indicator that the plant model cannot be trusted above a certain frequency range.21 which holds reasonably well at low frequencies. or of signiﬁcant disturbances. Note that the experimental magnitude and phase in this example deteriorate at the higher frequencies.4 Transfer Function Estimation – Broadband Input Many times one needs to deal with experimental data that is broadband. + 0. 0 −10 −20 −30 −40 0 angle(y(s)). This is a property of almost all physical systems. . The phase angle of y(s) is taken with respect to the input signal u(s). dB 10 −2 10 −1 10 rad/s 0 10 1 10 2 21. frequency-domain analysis can still be used. but elements of spectral analysis are necessary.146 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION ˆ P (s) = s2 0.83s + 0. deg −50 −100 −150 −200 −3 10 |y(s)/u(s)|.093 .

and a complex-conjugacy holds: X(2) = X ∗ (m). With this scaling. To improve the frequency resolution of the DFT. • The DFT generates a vector of N complex points as outputs. • The Nyquist rate depends only on the sampling time step dt. • The sampling theorem limits our usable frequency range to only one-half of the sampling rate.21. the ﬁrst frequency is 0. N ]. a common approach is to zero-pad the end of the real data. What happens near the Nyquist rate depends on whether N is odd or even.4 Transfer Function Estimation – Broadband Input 21.. . but the frequency vector accompanying the DFT can be made arbitrarily long by increasing the number of data points.4. and so on. Dividing the DFT result by N returns the signal to its real magnitude. The points higher than π/dt correspond to negative frequencies. and the last frequency is slightly less than the sampling rate. called the Nyquist rate. optimized tool. We review several points for dealing with the DFT calculation: • The m’th DFT point is a summation of complex unit-magnitude vectors (e−j2πnm/N ) times the original data (x(n)). An additional multiplication of the DFT result by 2 will give peaks which are of about the right magnitude to be compared with the time-domain signal. It operates on a data vector x(n) of length N : N −1 X(m) = n=0 x(n)e−j2πnm/N .1 Fourier Transform of Sampled Data 147 For the purpose of analyzing transfer functions. These correspond to the frequency range ωm = 2π m − 1 . dt N (218) i. X(3) = X ∗ (m − 1). the discrete Fourier transform (DFT) is a standard. the value X(1) is twice the true DC value. (217) for m = [1.e.

These can be reduced by taking separate DFT’s of sub-sections of data (perhaps zero-padded to maintain frequency resolution). Smoothing windows are generally chosen to achieve a tradeoﬀ of two conﬂicting properties relating to the average: the width of the primary lobe (wide primary lobes bring in frequencies that belong to the adjacent bins ω(m− 1) and ω(m + 1)).148 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION • The data x(k) should be multiplied by a smoothing window w(k). This averaging idea is especially important in transfer function veriﬁcation. There are many smoothing windows to choose from. One of the simplest is the Hann. Because the DFT provides frequency data at only N/2 unique frequencies. the DFT should be run on a number of samples N which is a multiple of a large power of two. if the window goes to a small value near its tails. The above steps.2 Estimating the Transfer Function In continuous time. or cosine. will ensure a fair spectral analysis of a time series. the estimated transfer function follows from .4. 21. there is the possibility that a component in the real data lies in between one of these DFT frequencies. and the magnitude of the side lobes (tall side lobes bring in frequencies that are far away from ω(m)). see below. The second rationale for windowing is based on the discrete nature of the transform. First. window: 1 2πk 1 − cos 2 N w(k) = • The DFT of a given signal is subject to bias and variance. If N is prime. when the plant input y(t) and output u(t) are transformed into frequency space. • If possible. for two reasons. but it is not a necessity. The DFT magnitude at a speciﬁc ω(m) is in fact an average of continuous frequencies from the neighborhood of the point. Gibb’s eﬀect (the spectral signature of a discontinuity between x(1) and x(N )) can be minimized. all of which are available through the Matlab function spectrum() for example. and then averaging them. It is common to use segments which do not overlap. the DFT will take a long time to execute. no windowing at all is usually referred to as applying a rectangular window.

compute the transfer function estimate ∗ ˆp (m) = Yp (m)Yp (m) . we now want to include the same approach in our estimation of P (s). P ∗ Up (m)Up (m) • For the p’th segment of data. compute two covariances and a crosscovariance: ∗ Γp (m) = Up (m)Up (m) uu Γp (m) = Yp (m)Yp∗ (m) yy ∗ Γp (m) = Yp (m)Up (m). Γyy (m)Γuu (m) Coh(m) = . spectral analysis of a signal beneﬁts by using multiple segments and averaging.21. The procedure is: • For the p’th segment of data. which assesses the quality of the ﬁnal ˆ estimate P (m): Γyu (m)Γ∗ (m) yu . yu • Construct average values of the transfer function estimate and the other quantities: ˆ P (m) Γuu (m) Γyy (m) Γyu (m) = = = = ˆ avgp (Pp (m)) avgp (Γp (m)) uu avgp (Γp (m)) yy avgp (Γp (m)) yu • Compute the coherence function. u(s) (219) As noted above.4 Transfer Function Estimation – Broadband Input 149 y(s) ˆ P (s) = .

running the simulation generates a new y . This result could be caused by either disturbances or sensor noise. Since the program simulate always uses the global variable theta as the parameters. and uncoupled to the input signal. The Nelder-Meade simplex method is easy to use. At the outset. The method has its main strength in the fact that it applies to any model that can be simulated. For a given parameter vector θ. driven by the input force u(t). or even of convergence.5 Time-Domain Simulation The time-domain simulation approach tweaks the parameters of a simulation so that its output matches the observed output. the method is computationally expensive and gives no guarantee of a useful solution. for example. and can be invoked with the Matlab function fmins. Consider. we must be careful about setting theta in the calling programs. The simulation operation can be written this way: y (t) = G(θ.150 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION If the coherence is near zero. both of which are reasonably assumed to be random processes. if the coherence is near one. Alternatively. As an example. . k]. where || · || y here indicates the Euclidean norm. and we plan to look through the three-dimensional parameter space θ = [m. nonlinear system. Some notes on use: • In this example. we need to come up with some structure of the plant model. the coherence will deteriorate at high frequencies and also at any frequency where disturbances or noise occur. b. then the cross-covariances are in agreement and a real input-output relationship exists. Since the normed error is a complicated function of both u(t) and θ. the same simulation generates the “observed” data and the simulated response. the minimization must proceed iteratively. 21. including those of high order and with signiﬁcant nonlinearities. On the other hand. the case of a mass mounted on a spring and a dashpot. A fair guess for the actual dynamics has the form my + by + ky = u(t). This can be based on physics in many cases. the three programs listed comprise a working Matlab set for identiﬁcation of a ﬁrst-order. and the ˆ system identiﬁcation problem is to minimize ||ˆ(t) − yobs (t)||. there is no clear relation between the input and the output. and computing the norm gives a scalar measure ˆ of goodness. say. With real data. then the segmental cross-covariances Γp (m) yu are sporadic and have cancelled out. u(t)).

. % observed input y_raw] = ode45(’simulate’. e.1)) . y_raw] = ode45(’simulate’. y_obs = . The error calculation. disp(sprintf(’final theta(1): %g. y_raw. u_obs) .21.. clear global . y_obs. negative mass. Starting from diﬀerent initial guesses for θ may help ﬁnd better results. dt = . 0) . % time step [1 2] . % observed time vector ones(length(t_obs). spline(t_raw. e. randn(2. t_obs) . however.3 theta = t_obs = u_obs = [t_raw. the Simplex method will take over from this point. .’. y_sim. %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% clear all .g. the data is interpolated to the same time scale as the observed data. plot(t_obs. and a very complicated function. t_obs.1) . • The Simplex method may head into invalid parameter space. figure(1) . • The initial guess for theta is a random vector. clf . theta = theta_final . theta is roughly known.g. [0 max(t_obs)]. err = err + 1000*(1-sign(mass)). t_obs. In many instances. disp(sprintf(’final theta(2): %g. y_sim = spline(t_raw. global u_obs t_obs y_obs dt theta . [0 max(t_obs)]. theta_final(1))) . y_raw. 0) . but we are still at the mercy of the minimization algorithm. can be easily augmented by a term which penalizes invalid parameters.’. t_obs) . • There is no guarantee that a global minimum will be found or even exists. % true parameter vector 0:dt:20*dt . [t_raw. % observed output [theta_final] = fmins(’get_err’.5 Time-Domain Simulation 151 • After a simulation run is complete. hold off . however. and a better starting value can be given. in order to compute the error. theta_final(2))) .

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% function [ydot] = simulate(t. theta = theta_arg . [0 max(t_obs)]. [t_raw.152 21 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% function [err] = get_err(theta_arg) . t_obs) . err = norm(y_sim . y_raw] = ode45(’simulate’.y_obs) . k = theta(1) . err)) .y) . disp(sprintf(’error: %f. % we have to choose which u_obs to use: % a zero-order hold as implemented.’. tau = theta(2) . %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% . ydot = ( k*u_obs(ind) . ind = floor(t/dt) + 1 . global y_obs t_obs theta . 0) . y_sim = spline(t_raw.y^3 ) / tau . y_raw. global u_obs dt theta .

which can transmit an acoustic signal. z) and one equation: (xA − xB )2 + (yA − yB )2 + (zA − zB )2 = R2 . The marine engineer is in fact faced with choices between many diﬀerent basic sensor packages. There is also a class of distributed sensor systems. and also measure. place a responder B at a distance R away from A. notably compasses. We present the fundamental concepts behind two methodologies in this second class: the global positioning system (GPS) and acoustic navigation. 22. inertial navigation units. These listed sensors are self-contained and rely primarily on the physical properties of the natural environment. both of which can provide high-accuracy absolute Cartesian navigation. with a (short) predictable response time Tt . about 1450m/s. the job of B is just to transmit a signal whenever it receives one. The range R follows by inversion: (T − Tt )c2 . the elapsed time T between a tranmission and consequent reception at A is T = Tt + 2R/cw . where cw is the speed of sound in water. Next. the time to receive a reply. Thus. and depth guages. these generally involve an array of communicating elements. . 2 R= Suppose that the location of B is known.1 Acoustic Navigation Consider a transponder A. rate gyros. y. paddle wheels. located remotely from the vehicle.153 22 CARTESIAN NAVIGATION The bulk of our discussion on maneuvering and control has assumed that the necessary system states can be measured. It is a case of three unknowns (x. with microsecond accuracy. for example. then a given measurement of R places A on a sphere around B.

The baseline is the line connecting responders B and C. then we have a functional set of measurements for acoustic navigation with just two responders. but still three unknowns. Finally. with a working range of 100-500m to the target. A fourth responder or a depth transducer would be needed to completely constrain the solution. There are many other pieces to the approach. with baseline lengths on the order of 10-100m. if we know which side A is on. and also in multipath. The wavelength of a 100kHz signal is about 1cm and 5cm is a reasonable estimate of the accuracy for these systems. named for the length of the baselines relative to the target (transponder A) range. when A is near this baseline. then the intersection circle lies in a vertical plane. including an account of the variation of sound speed cw with water depth. B. In the latter . a circle. There are two common conﬁgurations used for acoustic navigation. When A. obtaining the Cartesian locations of the responder network.154 22 CARTESIAN NAVIGATION The introduction of a another responder C (typically listening and responding at a diﬀerent frequency than B) places A on the intersection of two spheres. and the target ranges are similar to the baseline lengths. Very large systems utilize frequencies of 10-15kHz (for a placement accuracy around 25m). but the nonlinearity of the equations leads to the non-uniqueness in the solution. and handling various geometric conﬁgurations that give rise to poor or degenerate solutions. i. The above discussion is a minimum conceptual explanation of acoustic navigation. (Ultra) Short-Baseline The geometry of SBL or USBL puts very short baselines between the responders compared to the target distance. With three responders. Long-Baseline Long-baseline systems typically involve a larger responder net. and C lie in a nearly horizontal plane. For instance. the intersection of a sphere (responder D) and a circle (responders B and C) is two points. the ﬁxed net is often attached to a vessel or other structure. There are two equations.e. and do not allow for abrupt crossovers. the addition of a depth sensor to our suite would allow us to pin A’s location at one of two points on the circle. Typical frequencies in use are around 100kHz. positional accuracy will be very poor since the two solution spheres are tangent.. Frequent sources of error in longbaseline systems are variations of cw . for example. and consequently of the baselines and spheres. Here there are three equations and three unknowns. Better and better performance can be obtained by increasing the number of responders. and may have ten-kilometer baselines.

2 Global Positioning System (GPS) 155 B A3 A2 B A1 A* 2 A* 3 A C C Figure 6: Left: General conﬁguration of a long-baseline acoustic system. . A3 is well-posed. Right: General conﬁguration of a short-baseline system. in contrast. The accuracies achieved with GPS are therefore strongly dependent on the accuracy of time-keeping. Sometimes. condition. these signals are typically eliminated by rejecting those receptions which are outside a very tight and slowly moving window on travel time T .2 Global Positioning System (GPS) The GPS system is the most powerful system publicly available for absolute position reference above water. bottom topography can shield a direct acoustic path. with target transponder A and ﬁxed responders B and C. The position A1 is on the baseline and has poor accuracy in the direction normal to the baseline. A∗ is an additional solution to the two-responder 3 problem. false signals can be caused by reﬂections oﬀ the seaﬂoor and the surface. but with one fundamental diﬀerence: only the one-way travel time from each satellite is measured at the target.22. and the only receptions available are via multipath! 22. It is similar in concept to the acoustic navigation systems described above.

that triangulation and navigation are performed at the target. the arguments for three dimensions are the same. at an altitude of about 20. Each satellite transmits a regular signal which contains. among other items. geosynchronous orbit is much higher. each of the satellites carries four atomic clocks on board. ˜ The estimated range circles are too large. The time base is continually monitored and updated from a ground station. With reference to a rotating Earth. the spatial frequency is doubled. the range measurements from two sources locate the target on one of two points (the intersection of two circles). Introduce a third satellite now so that the intersections of the circle pairs now occur at six points.000km. For the ideal case that the time bases of the target and the satellites are exactly aligned. and illustrated for the case of two-dimensions. The accuracy of satellite position is better than 10m.3m range error. We now come to the last thorny issue: how to make target receivers that don’t require atomic clocks! The solution is very clever. the time of its transmission. and represents the best position solution. so that the longitudinal distance between tracks is 30 degrees. For this reason. The ephemeris of each satellite is also monitored and updated from the ground station. The target time base can be kept up to date by .000km. Three of these are very close. triangulation of the type described for acoustic navigation is possible. and the estimated location of the target too far from the baseline. or 1800 nautical miles. Suppose that the target clock ˜ is too slow by an amount t. and the six lines are spaced 60◦ apart in longitude. so that the range estimate is ˜ r + r = c(t + t). and accurate to within 1ns. In practical terms. from many satellites. This single point is near the centroid of the three approximate points. and indicate the approximate true solution. It is from these two pieces of information. good to 1ns per day. The altitude is chosen carefully to correspond with a 12-hour orbit. and a Kalman ﬁlter to predict the future ephemeris. In two dimensions. using a combination of least-squares analysis of past data (1 week).156 22 CARTESIAN NAVIGATION The core of the system is a network of 24 satellites arranged in six planes (4 per plane) inclined at 55 degrees from the equatorial plane. at around 40. the speed of light c = 3 × 108 m/s implies that a 1ns timing error will cause a 0. The orbit lines over a non-rotating earth are thus near-sinusoids that reach lattitudes of 55◦ N and 55◦ S. The trick is to ﬁnd the ˜ correction for t that puts the three close solutions onto a single point. and the three-dimensional location of the satellite (the ephemeris).

Hence. Major sources of error include: clock base and satellite navigation (≈ 2. ionosphere and troposphere electromagnetic variations (≈ 2. The position speciﬁcation for GPS is 25m. an independent altitude measurement will enhance the accuracy of GPS.5m). and degrades the position speciﬁcation to 100m (typical). by providing highaccuracy navigation in local areas.5m). the three-dimensional timing problem is solved with four satellites. Finally. GPS is also subject to selective availability or S/A.22. Many current GPS receivers are capable of decoding these local corrections. Diﬀerential GPS typically provides 1-2m accuracy. at the 95’th percentile. The advent of diﬀerential GPS solved most of the S/A concerns of American allies. given that it is an absolute measure over the entire surface and atmosphere of our 6000km-radius Earth.2 Global Positioning System (GPS) 157 performing this check for every set of signals. Selective availability is controlled by the United States Department of Defense. the two-dimensional timing problem is solved with three satellites. The idea here is that a stationary target can detect the eﬀects of S/A (since it is not moving) and then transmit the corrections over a small geographical area. as with the acoustic navigation systems described. which are then applied to their own satellite navigation processing. essentially reducing a three-dimensional to a two-dimensional problem. the addition of a slow-varying random component in the satellite ephemeris data. This is a remarkable feat. . and inaccuracies in the receiver and multipath (≈ 2m).

S. 2nd Revision. Marine Propellers and Propulsion. Wiley: New York. Guidance and Control of Ocean Vehicles. 1975. 1984. NASA Technical Note D-7228. Fossen. Pridmore-Brown. 1997. Hoerner Fluid Dynamics: Bakersﬁeld. Karnopp. Krieger: Malabar.. Fluid Dynamic Lift. Hoerner and H. Borst.V. NJ. Optimal Spacecraft Rotational Maneuvers. Principles of Naval Architecture.159 23 REFERENCES Short notes indicate how the reference is related to the text.I. Fluid Dynamic Drag.C.F. April 1973.D.. J. Classical treatment of stability. CA.D. FL. General reference. and D. E. E. Jorgensen. Euler angles and quaternions. Butterworth-Heinemann: Boston.S. 1985. Hoerner Fluid Dynamics: Bakersﬁeld. Marine Hydrodynamics. propulsion. Formulas for Natural Frequency and Mode Shape. L. 1994. Elsevier: New York.V. Extensive data on lift of bodies and wings. Kurtz. A method for estimating static aerodynamic characteristics for slender bodies of circular and noncircular cross section alone and with lifting surfaces at angles of attack from 0◦ to 90◦ . S. Dynamics of Mechanical and Electromechanical Systems.C. 1994.H. Hoerner and H.V. 1975. 1988. J. J. FL. R. Blevins. Newman.N.L. S.F. MIT Press: Cambridge. Data on drag of bodies and wings. and lifting surfaces. Jr. CA. Borst. Krieger: Malabar. Turner. Junkins and J. 1986. Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers: Jersey City. T. Carleton. ed. Comprehensive modern treatment of marine dynamics and control. Extensive added mass formulas. Includes a chapter on transverse and azimuthing thrusters. D. Lewis. Crandall. Coordinate systems and rigid-body dynamics.F. The inﬂuence of thruster dynamics on underwater vehicle behavior and their .

1990.-E.C. Second-order nonlinear thruster model. IEEE Symposium on Autonomous Underwater Vehicle Technology. Cody. General reference on transforms. Tannenbaum. D. Rubis. 10. MIT Press: Cambridge. S. MA. Modern Control Engineering. Harper. Accurate four-quadrant nonlinear dynamical model for marine thrusters: Theory and experimental validation. Siebert. 94:283-308. IEEE J.P. and J. and Systems. C. Cooke.J. Li. J. J.L. Grosenbaugh. Luenberger. 1986. 25:146-159. P.R. 1979. and A. 1992. K. Loopshaping concepts.R. S.A. C.J.A. Blevins. pp 340352. E.D. Van Nostrand Reinhold. No. NJ.160 23 REFERENCES incorporation into control system design.J. NJ. L. R. 1995. 1972. and J. Proc.J. General control reference. Miles. Prentice-Hall: Englewood Cliﬀs. 1994. Control Engineering: A Modern Approach. New York. Prentice-Hall: Englewood Cliﬀs. B´langer. J. Slotine and W. Macmillan: New York.G. 2000. Oceanic Engineering. Signals.M. Oceanic Engineering. First-order nonlinear thruster model.G. A. Proc. Introduction to Dynamic Systems. Brown. Governing ship propulsion gas turbine engines.J. Feedback Control Theory. Francis. 1990. SNAME Annual Meeting. R.. IEEE J. Acceleration and steady-state propulsion dynamics of a gas turbine ship with controllable-pitch propeller. Circuits. Rubis and T. SNAME Trans. Bachmayer. 2nd Edition. and M. 1986.R.M. R. . State-of-theart in thruster modeling. Doyle. 15:167-178. Sauders College e Publishing. W. Applied Nonlinear Control. SISO linear control. Rock. Cable strumming. Flow-Induced Vibrations. B. Philadelphia. D. Healey. Toward an improved understanding of thruster dynamics for underwater vehicles. D. 1991. Slotine. Ogata. Yoerger. Whitcomb. 1970. Wiley: New York.

W. Vetterling. General reference on LTR.C. Martin. 1996.. 1. and M. Doyle and G. Halsted: New York. Sivan. Teukolsky.E. IEEE. American Control Conference. Gelb. 71:1177-1186. G.161 Dynamic programming and LQR derivation. L. 1986. Gilbert. W. Function minimization. Hearn and A. Athans. Proc. 1983. Flannery. Press. Wiley: New York. pp 1313-1324. pp 1289-1296.W. H. and B. S. 1972. J. More tutorial LTR.V. 1999. 87. Seminal paper on LTR. . Proc.H. A tutorial on the LQG/LTR method. Wiley: New York. Applied Optimal Estimation. Cambridge University Press: Cambridge.T. Stein. Metcalfe. Proc. R. 1995. NAVSTAR: Global positioning system – Ten years later. 2nd Edition. Transfer functions from spectral analysis. American Control Conference.W. 1981. 1986. Multivariable feedback design: concepts for a classical/modern synthesis. Valavani.P. IEEE Trans. Automatic Control. M. S. F. Lewis and V. Athans. 1992. There is another such issue: IEEE Proc. Parkinson. Multivariable control of a submersible using the LQG/LTR design methodology. Syrmos. Kwakernaak and R. Linear Optimal Control Systems. Kalman ﬁlter derivation and properties. Kalman ﬁlter practical aspects. B. Optimal Control. ed. Spectral Analysis in Engineering. 1988. No. MIT Press: Cambridge.L.L.A. Numerical Recipes in C. Vol. The whole issue is in fact dedicated to global positioning systems. 26:4-16. UK. A.

162 23 REFERENCES .

. say. and has a mass of approximately 200kg. Although dead-reckoning is not recommended as a method for long-term navigation. 000rpm (revolutions per minute). 1. and that there is no signiﬁcant sideslip. Inertial dynamics. For example. Kinematics. The following question pertains to the inertial forces experienced by this spinning rigid body. with Ixy = Ixz = Iyz = xg = zg = 0. 2. Hint: Break the trajectory up into three parts. which can be evaluated separately. the turbine is exceedingly sensitive to lateral balancing. Because of high rotational speed. yg = 1mm with respect to the spin axis.163 24 PROBLEMS Many of the following problems use data presented by Fossen and in Principles of Naval Architecture. consider a surface vessel heading proﬁle as follows: t=0 0 < t <= 60s 60s < t < 240s 240s < t < 300s t = 300s φ π/4 φ(t) = 0 rad φ(t) = t/60 × π/4 rad φ(t) = π/4 rad φ(t) = (300 − t)/60 × π/4 rad φ(t) = 0 rad y φ x t = 0s t = 60s t = 240s t = 300s What is the total distance traveled in the Cartesian x direction during these ﬁve minutes? You may assume that the forward speed of the vessel is u = 1m/s. The gas generator turbine of a LM-2500 marine engine rotates at p = 10. Estimate the net force that the radial bearings would have to support for a 1mm mass imbalance. it can be quite useful for pre-planning trajectories.

B. y ˙ the condition for stability is that A. Nr .. ±3}. and C must have the same sign. using several examples. θ(0) = 0). Give physical interpretations for what would make such a device stable or unstable. etc. y O θ x Uο . response sensitivity to B and C. look at the range {A. (a) Write the single-degree of freedom (N ) linearized equations of motion about the ﬁxed axis 0. Discuss. using the MATLAB ODE solver ode45. For example.g. (b) Write Nθ . If θ is the angle of the vane with respect to the wind direction. ¨ ˙ (c) If we consider the diﬀerential equation A¨(t) + B y(t) + Cy(t) = 0. Coeﬃcients and system modeling. (d) Create a numerical model of this system. Express this requirement in terms of the derivatives in the previous question. Simulate the system response to nonzero initial conditions (e. Nr .164 24 PROBLEMS 3. The system equation can be written as two ﬁrst-order equations: d dt ˙ θ θ −B/A −C/A 1 0 ˙ θ θ = . C} = {1. ˙ θ(0) = 1. and Nθ in terms of Nv . which are related to the aerodynamic coefﬁcients. ±3.. B. Nθ˙ . Consider a weather vane in a wind of velocity Uo .

b.165 4. ﬁnite positive. and s2 . The ﬁgure below shows some characteristic ﬂuid force curves versus a motion parameter. s1 . x ˙ wherein all the coeﬃcients are positive and real (i. Hydrodynamics.. using the quadratic formula. and k. Second-order system. Consider the vibration of a mass-spring-dashpot system: m¨ + bx + kx = 0. ﬁnite negative? F O F O F O A u A u A u 5. physical). The solution pairs depend on whether b exceeds a critical value: what is the critical value and how do the solutions change? (b) From the initial condition x(0) = xo . ﬁnd the coeﬃ˙ cients for the general solution x(t) = c1 es1 t + c2 es2 . complex s) in terms of the standard parameters . Give the linear hydrodynamic coeﬃcient at two diﬀerent operating conditions.e. small. origin O and A: is it zero. in terms of xo . and ﬁnd two solutions for s in terms of m. and x(0) = 0. What do you think will happen when s1 = s2 ? (c) Write this x(t) for sub-critical b (that is. (a) Set x(t) = est .

when they are close together? (e) Consider now the case where an input acts to drive the mass from zero initial conditions: m¨ + bx + kx = u. where ψ is the roll angle. Be sure to cover both the sub-critical and super-critical damping cases. and output x. for the same initial conditions. Submarine roll dynamics and control. Give your answer in terms of a real exponential multiplied by a single sine or cosine. (a) Write the equation of motion for roll (K).. The control hydrodynamic derivative is Kδ = −2. write the transfer function for this system. at a forward speed of 5m/s. both s are real. and make a sketch. 6. This submarine has antirolling ﬁns to ensure stability. and in the time-domain. i. the impulse response..e. in both the subcritical and super-critical damping cases? Include sketches.e. Make a sketch of the time-domain result.166 24 PROBLEMS ωn = k (undamped natural frequency) m b ζ = √ (damping ratio) 2 km ωd = ωn 1 − ζ 2 (damped natural frequency). Using the Laplace transform. (d) Sketch the response x(t) for supercritical b. what range of k1 ensures stability? . The rolling motion can be assumed to be decoupled from the other motions. (b) If the automatic control law δ = k1 ψ is used.8tm per degree of ﬁn rotation δ. both in frequency (Laplace) space. i. What happens when the roots si are far apart vs.5m above the center of buoyancy (What can you conclude?). x ˙ This equation deﬁnes a system. A submarine has weight 1200t (tons) and the center of gravity is 0. (f) What is the step response of this system. with input u.

yaw rate r for a dynamically stable surface vessel. the submarine is neutrally buoyant and stable with the x and y axes horizontal. What does this tell us about the magnitude of the buoyant force and where it acts with respect to the center of weight? (a) Derive the equations of motion for the submarine moving at speed U. but assume it is nearly symmetric. Does surge decouple from pitch and heave? Write out the coupled equations in matrix form. Indicate areas where the vessel turns against the rudder action. • At rest. restoring pitch moment for small pitch θ. Draw curves of rudder angle δ vs. except at the very ends. and restricted to small motions in the vertical (x−z) plane. (f) Can the submarine be stable in pitch without feedback control? Can the submarine be stable in depth without feedback control? 9. The submarine is not symmetric in the x − z plane due to the sail. (c) Linearize the inertial terms in the equations of motion. and be sure to include the hydrostatic moment. Submarine pitch/heave dynamics.5m/s.167 (c) If the speed suddenly drops to 2. Steering. Assume that: • The submarine is symmetric in the x − y plane and yG = 0. etc. (e) Write out the complete linearized equations of motion.. Explain your choices. (b) Derive the hydrostatic. Omit nonlinear and memory eﬀects. If . Consider a submarine moving forward at speed U . and then for an unstable vessel. so that you can omit certain hydrodynamic terms. 8. where it rapidly tapers down to a point. how does the range of stabilizing k1 change? 7. (a) An underwater vehicle hull has the shape of a circular cylinder. Submarine stability via slender body theory. (d) Expand the ﬂuid forces and moments in terms of the motions.

estimate the coefﬁcient Kv of a submarine sail as shown below. approximate the cross-body added mass. as desired? 10. and compare again to the exact result. (c) A ﬁn with pre-determined lift slope of 3. Slender body theory. (b) Perform the slender body calculation also for a sphere. length is 17m.168 24 PROBLEMS the radius is 0. Lifting surfaces. Mq˙ . Determine the corrected value for Mw . and Mw . Consider a long ellipsoidal body of length l and diameter d. (a) With l/d = 7. and speed is 2m/s. and compare it with the exact results from the table below (Blevins). Where is the aerodynamic center with respect to the center of the hull. use slenderbody theory to express the following coeﬃcients: Zw . Using the lifting surface formulas.6/rad is to be applied at the tail to make the device just stable in pitch. (c) What is the added mass in the in-line direction? . How big is the required ﬁn area that brings the net Mw to zero. 7m 10m 15m 11.4m has to be included in the slender-body estimate. and in addition compute Zw . using slender-body theory.5m. and is this hull stable in pitch? Recall that the aerodynamic center is the equivalent location of the observed lift force that creates the observed moment. for U = 10m/s. (b) It turns out that in order to match the lift and moment of the hull in experiments. a ﬂat tail of radius 0. ˙ all referenced to the body midpoint.0.

0: 0.6: 0. for a small submarine.355 1. We ﬁx the body origin to the midpoint as shown below.0: 0. L = 35m.0: 0.908 1.0: 0.894 7.2: 3.008 0. Mw .075 0.500 2.000 2b 2a 12.0: 0.6: 0.0: 0. The body .0: 0.148 0.0: 0.500 2.2: 0. We will calculate the pitch derivative due to an angle of attack.210 5.933 10. using several diﬀerent methods.000 Ellipsoid longitudinal added mass: 4αρπab2 /3 where a/b = 0.704 5.036 10.0: 0.143 0.960 ∞: 1. The submarine is a rotationally symmetric ellipsoid with L/D = 7.059 7.0: 0.169 Sphere added mass: 2ρπa3 /3 Ellipsoid cross-body added mass: 4αρπab2 /3 where a/b = 0.021 ∞: 0.1: α = 0.1: α = 6. Submarine pitch stability with various methods.

(f) Use the Hoerner result and your result from wing theory to write a net Mw for the body plus ﬁns. (c) Linearize the Munk moment. 13.5ρU 2 D2 LCnb tan(w/u).2: Symmetric body of revolution with L/D = 6.7. Cm = 0. (b) Apply slender body theory to estimate Mw for the body alone. what increase in ﬁn area would bring it back to the midpoint? (h) What is the diameter of a ﬂat stern that will allow the slender body theory to give the same moment as the Hoerner (experimental) data. Cy = 1.20. (e) Use the experimental data from Hoerner (p. 13.5ρU 2 D2 Cydb tan(w/u). M = 0.53. for the body alone? Hoerner p. DESTABILIZING . (d) Apply Jorgensen’s approximate formulas to estimate Mw for the body. and has its longitudinal center of action 1m forward of the body stern.170 24 PROBLEMS is appended with two ﬁns as shown in the ﬁgure: each has an area of 1m2 .2) below to estimate Mw for the body. make linearizations where necessary. (a) Apply wing theory to characterize Mw due to the ﬁns alone. (g) What is the location of the net aerodynamic center? If it has an unstable location forward of the midpoint. Force and moment referenced to body midpoint: Z = −0. geometric aspect ratio of 3. and give a corrected slender-body value for Mw of the body. for the body alone? (i) What is the diameter of a ﬂat stern that allows the approximate formulas of Jorgensen to give the same moment as the Hoerner data.

does the cable unload at the surface. and a density of 5000kg/m. (c) Taking into account the static tension induced by in-water weight. the ﬁrst undamped natural frequency in heave. Cable mechanics (hard!). Cable dynamics. (a) Calculate ω1 . what is the dynamic tension amplitude at the top (s = L) of the cable? The formula for this dynamic tension (with mL >> M ) ˜ is T = EAP k sin(ks)/cos(kL). with mL >> M . The vehicle is streamlined. and has negligible mass (M ). A towing cable is steel-jacketed. for the heaving conditions above? 14. . where A is the cross-sectional area of the cable. an eﬀective extensibility of E = 100 × 109 P a. with diameter 3cm. (b) If the vessel heaves with a P = 2m amplitude and a 4. what is the maximum speed for the system? Assume the normal drag coeﬃcient of the cable is Cn = 1. You are asked to assess the operational envelope of a cable/vehicle system which has been installed on a vessel.2. an eﬀective extensibility of 100 × 109 P a. with diameter 3cm. (a) The towing angle at the vessel cannot exceed 25deg from vertical. k = ω m/EA. and m is the cable mass per unit length. The vehicle it tows is streamlined. for reasons of deck and crane geometry. and has a mass (material plus added) of 100kg. If we are towing at low speed and L = 4000m depth. If this angle is considered equal to the critical angle φc . and a density of ρc = 5000kg/m3 .171 Each fin: 1m 2 area AR = 3 1m L/D = 7 x y L = 35m 13. The cable is steel-jacketed.5-second period.

=T ∂t2 ∂s ∂s (m + ma ) where ma is the added mass of the cable per unit length. t) = q (s) cos ωt gives ˜ 2 ˜ ˜ ¯∂q ¯∂ q T 2 + wn sin φ + wn γ q = 0. express the natural frequency as a function of the vehicle depth. ﬁnd c in terms of Q and z(s = L). ∂z ∂z∂s ∂s (d) The equation above has a solution of the form q = cJ0 (z). we impose a ˜ harmonic input at the top. Simplify this expression by writing ¯ ¯ T = wn s (the vehicle weight eﬀect is small). If the fastest waves that the surface vessel responds to have period 4s. indicating a resonance frequency ωn ? ˜ . ˜ 2 ∂z ∂z z2 The derivatives can be transformed from s to z coordinates via the chain rule: ∂q ˜ ∂ q ∂z ˜ = · ds ∂z ∂s ∂2q ˜ ∂ 2 q ∂z ˜ = 2 ds ∂z 2 ∂s 2 + ∂ q ∂ 2 z ∂z ˜ · · .172 24 PROBLEMS (b) Considering the undamped. sin φ 1 (the cable is √ nearly vertical). uncoupled axial dynamics. If q (s = L) = Q. and J0 (z) is the zero’th order Bessel function of the ﬁrst kind. and wn is the in-water weight of the cable. that is. what is the “threshold” operating depth? (c) The undamped. uncoupled lateral dynamics follow the equation 2 ∂2q ¯ ¯ ∂ q + wn sin φ ∂q . What condition makes q blow up. where ˜ c is a constant to be found. and then use the substitution z = 2 γs to arrive at the Bessel equation ∂2q ˜ ∂q ˜ +z + z 2 q = 0. and sketch the curve. ˜ ∂s ∂s where γ = (m + ma )ω 2 /wn . Separation of variables q(s.

90 −0. Sketch all the poles and zeros of the plant transfer function P (s) = φ(s)/δ(s) on a root locus plot. Use matrix inversion for the 2 × 2 matrix (sI − A). so you do not need to perform any transformations in this question. and then use the quadratic formula if necessary to express your answer as s + z1 r (s) =K . 1. Vessel heading control. B= −0. the transfer function φ(s)/δ(s) is crucial.42 −4. write the transfer function r (s)/δ(s) = C(sI − A)−1 B.2U/d. (a) The nondimensional system with states x = [v .13 1. all you have to do is divide r (s)/δ(s) by another factor of s to account for the fact that dφ/dt = r . J0 (x) = 0 for for x π(n − 0. and discuss the trends for the higher modes.4 . and [−p1 . −z1 is the zero (there is one real zero). −p2 ] are the two poles of the second-order system. 2. construct a graph of towing velocities vs. · · ·. Fortunately. i. deployment depths for which the strumming would be centered. . where A= −0. n = 0. especially when x is large.e. If the output is yaw rate r . We consider the yaw/sway dynamics of a high-speed container ship. C = [0 1]. r ] evolves according to dx /dt = Ax + Bδ.8 −2. perform the matrix multiplications.173 (e) Recalling that strumming occurs when ωn 0. All the calculations below are to be made in nondimensional coordinates. δ(s) (s + p1 )(s + p2 ) where K is a constant gain. Include at least the three lowest modes in your sketch. You should ﬁnd that strumming is hard to avoid in deep towing applications! 15.3 .. Are both poles stable? (b) For the purposes of autopilot design.25).

Draw the path that you expect each closed-loop pole to follow. Z here is the elevation of the vehicle in inertial ˙ coordinates.0175 Zq˙ = −0.000118 Izz = 0. You do not need to calculate the PID gains that go with your proposed zero locations. or by computing the stability parameter C . 16.0113 Mq˙ = −0.00157 Mw = 0.174 24 PROBLEMS (c) A PID controller C(s) will work to stabilize the heading angle.156/U 2 Zq = −0. your approximation for Z should include both w and θ. U .0128 Mθ = −0.0439 Zw = −0.0m/s L = 15. Under this control.000146 ˙ Mδ = −0. as the control gain increases from zero to very large values.0112 Mw = −0. Make a graph of the open-loop step response. (b) Is the DSRV vehicle open-loop stable. and L. They are nondimensionalized as in the lecture notes.0277 (a) Write the linearized (nondimensional) dynamics in the matrix form x = Ax + Bu.000130 Zw = −0. using the factors ρ/2. without control action δ? You can assess this either by ﬁnding the eigenvalues of your Amatrix above. θ. where the input u = δ. (d) Assuming that all the states can be measured accurately. the system dynamics are governed by . that is. Full-state feedback of a submarine. q .0315 ˙ Zδ = −0. create a simulation using Matlab. a fullstate controller δ = −Kx can be used. Demonstrate a rough PID design by devising two controller zero locations that will attract the closed-loop poles into the left-half plane.0364 U = 2. and two arbitrary zeros. and brings to P (s)C(s) one additional pole at the origin.0m Mq = −0. (c) In preparation for controller design. Ixx = 0. The coeﬃcients governing the pitch/heave dynamics of a Deep Submergence Rescue Vehicle (DSRV) are given below.00193 xG = 0 m = 0. and the state vector is ˙ x = [w . showing all the dimensional state variables versus dimensional time. Z ]. where K is a 1 × 4 gain matrix.

y = φ.e. a high-performance positioning system sets the horizontal position of the cart uo . g = 1. What are the eﬀects of increasing or decreasing g? Note that the pole locations suggested above are with respect to the dimensional system. Demonstrate that your closed-loop design is stable against nonzero initial conditions. φ m g l uo A Lagrangian derivation of the dynamics gives: 1 ¨ g φ = sin(φ) − cos(φ)¨o . ¨ (a) If the observation is taken to be the angle of the bar φ. Use the Matlab function place to put the four closed-loop poles at g(−0.g..e. i.. and can also illustrate the dynamic behavior of an unstable ocean vessel which is propelled from the stern. Nyquist stability. The inverted pendulum shown below is often used as a simple model for rocket ﬂight.59 ± 0. using dimensional time.95 ± 0. u l l Note that the acceleration of the cart is now considered to be the input to the plant. e. e.81i).g. a barge being pushed by a tugboat. so that if A − BK has all negative eigenvalues. 17. For this problem. we assume that all of the mass (m) is concentrated at the distal end of an arm of length l. . ˙ the system is stable. i.. u = uo .31i) and g(−0.175 x = (A − BK)x.. write the state-space representation of the dynamics linearized about the point φ = 0.

0000 Yv −0. and g = 1 (it can be achieved through a proper nondimensionalization) What is the transfer function of the plant. c + jd (c + jd) (c − jd) c2 + d2 Be sure to include the complex-conjugate points for −ω on your plot.00385 Nr 0. 2. ∞]rad/s. s+2 C(s) = Create a rough Nyquist plot of the loci of P (s)C(s). These three frequencies are all that you need to sketch the overall shape. In the case of ω = 2. (f) Invoke the Nyquist stability criterion to conﬁrm that the closedloop system is stable.05 −0.00258 Nv ˙ −0.2.00792 Izz 175. (c) Now make the assumption that l = 1.00126 .00222 Nδ −0.000419 0.0m U 0. you may ﬁnd the following identity useful: a + jb (a + jb) (c − jd) (ac + bd) + j(bc − ad) = = . (g) About how many degrees of phase margin does this design provide? What reduction in low-frequency gain can be tolerated? Is it a reasonable design? 18. if any? (e) A stabilizing controller is not hard to ﬁnd. there are no hidden loops or other features. The parameters governing the surface maneuvering of a high-speed container ship are given below for reference: m L Yr ˙ Yδ Nv 0. for the frequencies ω = [0. and a suggested one is: −4(2s + 1) . for which you will need to make explicit calculations.0000 Nr ˙ −0. P (s)? Use this plant model for the rest of this question.2.00242 −0.0116 Yr 0.000456 xG 8m/s Yv ˙ −0. (d) Where are the plant poles and zeros.176 24 PROBLEMS (b) Show that this plant is fully state observable and controllable.00705 0. Root locus and loopshaping.

and . and τi are to be found in the next step. so that Yr = ˙ Nv = 0.5. however. that puts the three slow poles in the following sector: 1) minimum undamped frequency (nondimensional) of 0.42 −4. and 3) minimum damping ratio 0. using the root-locus and loopshaping techniques. to create a system model of the open-loop transfer function P (s)C(s). r ] evolves ˙ according to dx /dt = Ax + Bδ. (b) Using τd = 2 and τi = 6 as suggested values. use the Matlab command rlocus() and then rlocfind() to select a controller gain kp .. where −0.4 A= . be sure that you equalize axis scaling for your plots in the complex-plane. The nondimensional system with states x = [v . The relevant output is yaw rate: C = [0 1] and D = 0.. or ss().177 Note that the center of vessel mass is located aft of the origin. 2) maximum frequency of 0. Give a root locus plot.. using the plant above and a PID-type controller: 1 .g.numC). B= . The following steps create two heading autopilots. τi s C(s) = kp 1 + τd s + The actual numerical values for kp . Also. numPC = conv(numP. You don’t need to show the fourth. For the purposes of autopilot design.8 −2. the origin coincides with the center of added mass.3 −0.90 −0. for this model. you will ﬁnd very useful the convolution function conv() which can be used to combine systems. and then use the Matlab functions feedback() to create the resulting feedback system.13 1. the transfer function φ(s)/δ(s) is needed.7. by using axis(’equal’). e. τd . for numerators.3. In addition to the Matlab commands listed below. (c) Apply the kp you selected to P (s)C(s). (a) Use the Matlab command tf(). fast pole. which will be quite far to the left. with your pole locations clearly marked on top of the trajectories taken as kp varies.

. Note that the plant output is position for this problem. where ωc = 2. (a) What is the control gain K in terms of ρ? Hints: There are two solutions for p12 . invert the plant to come up with a compensator: C(s) = L(s)/P (s). Make a visual estimate of the gain and phase margins. create the feedback system. 19. This design has inﬁnite gain margin and 90 degrees phase margin. you won’t need to use it. (e) An alternate approach for controller design of this stable plant is loopshaping: For the open-loop function L(s) = ωc /s. for the root-locus design. how does it diﬀer.0.I. The plant is an undamped oscillator with undamped poles at ±j. give the P. Consider the state-space system and LQR design: A = B C D Q R = = = = = 0 −1 1 0 [1 0]T [0 1] 0 CT C ρ. luckily. choose the positive one. and D gains for use on a real time scale. (g) The loopshaping control is not quite a PID-controller. the expression for p22 is messy. (d) Use the Matlab command nyquist() to make a Nyquist plot of P (s)C(s) for your design. (f) As above. and plot the closed-loop step response. . LQR. and what would L(s) have to contain to make it a PID? (h) The controllers you just designed are in nondimensional time coordinates. Also.178 24 PROBLEMS step() to plot the closed-loop system response to a step input in desired heading.

(b) Consider the cheap-control problem. the KF Riccati equation yields H = [100 14]T . unstable system governed by x = x + u. (a) Solve the LQR Riccati equation for P . 21. Your answer should give a positive P as a function of ρ alone. giving the frequency and damping ratio of the Butterworth pattern in terms of ρ. (c) Derive the limiting closed-loop pole locations for ρ −→ 0. and then make it ﬁt the form s2 + 2ζωn + ωn = 0.179 (b) Determine the limiting approximations for K with ρ very small and very large – these are the cheap control and expensive control problems. write the approximations for P and K. For the inverted pendulum plant (see previous question) with state-space matrices A= 0 1 1 0 . C = [0 1] . and compute the eigenvalue (there is only one) of the closed-loop system. and ﬁnd the closed-loop system eigenvalue. ˙ for which the output is y = x. (c) Now look at the expensive-control problem. LQG/LTR. for the case Q = C T C and R = ρ. The state-space matrices are A = B = C = 1. with ρ → 0. with ρ → ∞. Note that eig(M ) = M . Consider the ﬁrst-order. LQR. (a) Compute the open-loop transfer function for the Kalman ﬁlter loop: L(s) = C(sI − A)−1 H. if M is a scalar instead of a matrix. Again. Write the leadingterm approximations for P and then K.01. and V2 = 0. 0 0]. for the choices V1 = [100 0 . You can get the characteristic equation for the poles as det(sI − 2 (A − BK)) = 0. 20. .

and about what damping ratio has the Kalman ﬁlter provided? 22. xg = 0.0074 .180 24 PROBLEMS (b) Even though this L(s) is unstable. (a) Plant Modeling and Characteristics . Nrdot = -0. The parameters for the linearized sway/yaw motions of a swimmer delivery vehicle are given below.0034 . LQG/LTR design. This entire design is made in nondimensional coordinates. Yv = -0.055 .L] U = 4. You are asked to develop an LQG/LTR controller for this plant. its magnitude plot conﬁrms that it is a reasonable loopshaping design.03 . . Ndelta = -0. What is the characteristic equation for the closed-loop system. Nvdot = 0. and it is suggested that you compose a single Matlab script to perform the steps in sequence.013 . What is the low-frequency gain for this L(s). % m Izz = 0.1 .3 . and include a listing of your code. % m/s L = 5. Yrdot = 0. Nr = -0. which you can write as S(s) = L(s)/(1 + L(s)) (the sensitivity). . Please make sure you answer all the questions. % Parameters. all nondimensional except [U. Yvdot = -0. Ydelta = 0.027 . and what kind of tracking performance should we expect from the associated LTR design? (c) Now consider the closed-loop transfer function.1415 . m = 0.016 .0 .006326 . Nv = -0. . Yr = 0.

Be sure to give the numerical values of H. list K and plot the closed-loop step responses for the choices ρ = [0. rdesired = 0. given design matrices A.00001]. to take rudder angle δ as an input and give heading angle φ as an output. for an input of xdesired = [vdesired = 0. i. Show a plot of your plant’s step response. C. the input to the closed-loop system is xdesired and the output is x. 0. V1 . Where are the poles of your plant model? Is this model stable? iv.1. you can compute the LQR feedback gain K. is the plant state-controllable and state-observable? iii. B. ii. The Matlab command lqe() can be used to generate the Kalman ﬁlter gain H. This compression can be achieved in one step by premultiplying the system by C T .. Please provide the numerical values for the A. (b) LQR and KF Designs i. and V2 . Your plot should show speciﬁcally the output φ. ii. Compute and list the controllability and observability matrices. With the choices Q = C T C. Using the Matlab command lqr(). For the choices V1 = I3×3 and V2 = 0.181 i. and make a plot of the closed-loop step response. How do the gains and step responses change as you make ρ smaller and smaller? Note that the fundamental closed-loop LQR system is ˙ x = (A − BK)x + BKxdesired y = x. and R = ρ. φdesired = 1].e. Construct a state-space plant model.01. and post-multiplying it by C: ˙ x = (A − BK)x + BKC T ydesired y = Cx. and R matrices.001. compute H. . B. with one input channel and one output channel. C matrices. 0. Q. There should be three states in your model. for given A.

182 24 PROBLEMS Note that the lqe() command asks for a disturbance gain matrix G. so that the input to the compensator is the tracking error e = r − y. you may simply multiply the systems. and overlaying the respective |P (s)C(s)| over the plot of part 3a). iii. e.g. sysPC = sysP * sysC . in Matlab. Demonstrate this by computing P (s)C(s) for the three diﬀerent values of ρ above.. ii. and small at high frequencies. The closed-loop KF system is as follows: ˙ x = (A − HC)ˆ + Hy ˆ x y = C x. the product P (s)C(s) → L(s). ˆ ˆ i. the compensator C(s) has the following state space representation: ˙ z = (A − BK − HC)z + He u = Kz.e.. versus log(frequency). As ρ → 0. consistent with the rules of loopshaping. The total open-loop transfer function is the P (s)C(s). |L(s)| should be large at low frequencies. Make a log(magnitude) plot of the KF open-loop transfer function L(s) = C(sI − A)−1 H. and its output u is the control action to be applied as input to the plant. You may ﬁnd the Matlab command freqresp() helpful. . ˆ (c) Loop Transfer Recovery The LQG compensator is a combination of the KF and LQR designs above.. How does it compare with the KF step response of part 2b)? In real LTR applications. y . Make a closed-loop step response plot for the smallest value of ρ. the particular values of V1 and V2 can be picked to control the low-frequency gain. you should set this to I3×3 . With normal negative feedback. the input is the measurement y and the output is an estimated version of it. i. and crossover frequency of the openloop KF system L(s) = C(sI − A)−1 H.

96.81m/s. (a) Ignoring the coupling of Euler small angles. what estimates can you give for the roll and pitch angles? I suggest that you draw the measurement vector in the coordinates of the vehicle frame. this sensor will always report that the vehicle is accelerating upwards. up) axes of an underwater vehicle. A triaxial accelerometer package is aligned with the [x.y. Inertial navigation. the three raw accelerations from the strain guages are [¨ = −0.z] (fwd. At a particular instant in time.80. y = 0.183 23. and then consider the orientation of the body which would lead to it. z = 9. how do we know that these are reasonable (but not foolproof!) angle calculations to make? . port.73] meters/second. Note that under the x ¨ ¨ inﬂuence of gravity alone. (b) Given that the acceleration due to gravity is 9.

lies properly on the seaﬂoor.025 0.03 × 105 kgm2 0. LQG/LTR design: term project.1 1.0939 1. Unexpected deviations in speed from the calculated trajectory are likely to create loops or kinks in the cable.21m 1. This vessel needs to have very good speed control so that the cable.522 0. so the vessel will need to slow down and speed up frequently. or induce large tensions.208 2.07ρ 0.22 7. which is being paid out constantly and sinks slowly under its own weight. length L draft h beam b displacement surge added mass ma thrust reduction factor t wetted surface area Aw towed resistance coeﬃcient Cr wake fraction at propeller w propeller diameter D pitch/diameter ratio P/D rotative eﬃciency ηr zero-speed thrust coeﬃcient kt (J = 0) slope of kt with J zero-speed torque coeﬃcient kq (J = 0) slope of kq with J rotational moment of inertia Ip engine parameter a b c d maximum fuel rate fm maximum torque Qm maximum speed nm gearbox reduction ratio λ eﬃciency ηg vessel 145m 9m 22m 17750m3 0. The bathymetry for the path is well-known but variable.97 .876 0.173 -.0025 0.19 5585m3 0.6 -0.0833 2.5kg/s 70000N m 60Hz 32 0.184 24 PROBLEMS 24. You are asked to carry out modeling and control system design for the surge dynamics of an oceanic cable-laying vessel.1 -0.

propeller rotational speed. and ne the rotation rate of the engine in Hz. If the plant input is δf . engine rotational speed. list the A. within a neighborhood of the nominal speed. and engine system are as given in the table. Qm fm nm fm where Qe represents the engine torque in N m.8. B. and assess whether the vessel. (b) Make a table of some steady operating conditions for fo /fm in the range of 0. Similarly. The vessel is powered by a single gas turbine engine. and propeller are well matched to operate over a range of fo . and vessel linear speed. The gas turbine torque-speed characteristic ﬁts the relation: f ne f Qe =− a +b + c +d . The parameters for the vessel. e. Be sure to include clipping on your contours.. driving one propeller. and then demonstrate that it will work with a simulation of the real nonlinear system. the engine cannot develop negative torque. (a) Make a map of the gas turbine characteristics. engine. make a contour plot which gives Qe /Qm (the fraction of maximum torque developed) as a function of f /fm (the fraction of the maximum fuel rate) and ne /nm (the fraction of the maximum rotation rate of the engine).g. .185 It is desired to create a linear controller for the nominal surge motion.05–0. Plot the pairs [fo /fm . δ here indicates the perturbed value from the steady state. C matrices for your plant.95. engine torque. f the fuel rate in kg/s. propeller. f = fo + δf . in which you show: advance ratio seen by the propeller. where the calculated torque exceeds Qm . (c) Construct a linear approximation for the plant dynamics around the operating condition fo /fm = 0. neo /nm ] on the characteristic plot from Part 1. For instance. and the eigenvalues. and the output is δu.

with input f . This choice corresponds with the closed-loop system being able to overcome waves with period 10seconds or longer. given that the vessel is laying out a cable. B. Present a ﬁgure of |L(s)| and the other quantities as you gave them in Part 4. but you cannot easily change its shape. with the augmented plant model. The addition of an integrator channel to the plant or compensator can be accomplished with the command sysPaug = sysP * tf([0 1]. First. choose the ﬁlter gains V1 and V2 to make the crossover frequency (where the magnitude of L(s) = C(sI −A)−1 H passes through unity) about 0. An integral action can be added quite easily in the LTR design technique.. C matrices of your LQG compensator. recover this loop shape with an LQG-type controller. using a small control penalty. or move it side-to-side. This is not acceptable in the long term. When this is done. Note that for this scalar design. (f) For the purpose of demonstrating your controllers.6rad/s. (e) In the event of a current or wind disturbance. This is to be kept as a separate controller design. for example. First. a listing of your V1 and V2 choices. You don’t . you will be able to move the curve |L(s)| up or down on the Bode plot. construct a nonlinear simulation of the plant system. move the integrator from the augmented plant into the compensator. You should prepare for this part: a plot of log(|L(s)|) versus log(ω). This augmented plant has one more state than the original plant: A B 0 0 Aaug = Baug = [0 1]T Caug = [C 0] The idea is to then carry out the KF design and LTR as before. Secondly.186 24 PROBLEMS (d) Create an LTR-type controller for the plant. and the A. so that an “augmented plant” is created. add an integrator to the input of the plant. the actual vessel speed will vary from the nominal value.[1 0]) .